Guide Page
Uploaded by
krsrinivasarajuGuide Page
Uploaded by
krsrinivasarajuGUIDE PAGE
To Table of Contents of Service Manual
How to Use PDF Manual
FCR PROFECT CS Plus
Checkpoints When Trouble Occurs Checkpoints during Installation
Search the error code. Installation Specifications
The LCD panel does not transition to its default screen. Preparation for Installation
Connection is not established between RU and CL. Installation Procedures (Mechanical)
Abnormal image occurs. Installation Procedures (Software Setup)
Gather log data. Installing Optional Items
When Installed in Patient Environment
Documents and References to be Used When Trouble Occurs Registering the Master CL
RU/CL Software Setup Checkpoints
Software Control (relationship with CR Console)
Circuit Diagrams (Disconnection check)
Checkpoints during Preventive Maintenance
I/O Locations and Their Functional Overview
Unit Locations Preventive Maintenance Programs
Roller Locations/Conveyance Paths List of Preventive Maintenance Replacement Parts: 2-Year Intervals
3-Year Intervals
Image Related Checkpoints Procedures
Sensitivity/Shading Correction
Software Related Checkpoints
Parts Related Checkpoints
Install/version update software and applications.
Parts List (INDEX) Gather log data.
Back up/restore machine shipment control data.
Back up/restore configuration data.
Machine Maintenance
RU PC-TOOL
MUTL
-1-
How to Use PDF Manual
Hyperlinks
A hyperlinks is inserted at the blue-colored mark in this manual.
Clicking it allows you to jump to the reference chapter or section.
-Example of Hyperlink-
{MC:3.1_Covers}
Clicking it allows you to jump to the reference section.
-2-
BLANK PAGE
-3-
BLANK PAGE
-4-
FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY ● Target devices of this Service Manual
The target device of this Service Manual (011-211-xxE) is CR-IR 363 with serial
numbers #xxx72001 or later.
PROFECT CS Plus For CR-IR 363 with serial number #xxx71999 or earlier, please use Service Manual
(011-202-xxE).
CR-IR 363 ● Software to be used in this device
Service Manual Software V10.1 or later is used in this device.
The software version must be confirmed before performing the software installation
and upgrade.
The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which is the
unit of radiation, and μC/kg (micro-coulomb/kilogram),
which is the SI derived unit of radiation, is as follows.
1 mR = 0.258μC/kg
FCR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.
<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>
Copyright © 2020 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.
Document No. 011-211-02E
2nd Edition - Feb. 28, 2020
Printed in Japan
BLANK PAGE
0.1
1. Handling of This Manual 1.3 About Notation in the Manual
Notation of cautions, warnings, etc.
1.1 About This Manual The notation formats of "warning", "caution", "Instruction", "note", and "reference" are
shown below.
Scope
WARNING
This Service Manual is applicable to Fuji Computed Radiography CR-IR 363. The
machine is categorized as Class 1 according to IEC classification. Used when death or serious injury may occur if the instruction is not observed.
Notation of Unit Symbols
For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units CAUTION
(SI) are used, as a rule. However, metric units that are allowed in the Measurement Used when minor or medium levels of physical injury may be incurred if the
Law, not in the SI, are used in some cases. instruction is not observed.
Also used when the machine may suffer serious trouble (such as unrecoverable
or difficult-to-recover trouble).
1.2 Precautions for Handling of This Manual
1. FUJIFILM Corporation reserves all rights related to this manual. INSTRUCTION
2. This manual should be accessible only to technical service personnel authorized by Used when the machine may suffer damage, or any failure or malfunction may occur,
FUJIFILM Corporation. if the instruction is not observed.
3. Since this manual contains confidential information of FUJIFILM Corporation, such
as the internal structure of the product, appropriate measures should be taken to NOTE
prevent illegal or inappropriate disclosure and/or use of this manual.
4. The following conducts are prohibited without prior written approval of FUJIFILM Used to indicate the matters that need attention during steps of the procedure.
Corporation:
- Copy or transcribe a whole or part of the contents of this manual. REFERENCE
- Disclose, furnish, lend, and/or transfer a whole or part of the contents of this Used to indicate terminology or supplemental explanations.
manual to persons other than the afore-described technical service personnel.
- Use a whole or part of the contents of this manual for purposes other than
technical servicing of the product. Indication of Refer To
5. Portions of the descriptions in this manual may be revised due to improvements on
the product. The " " mark is used to indicate the chapter or section you should refer to.
Its format is as indicated below.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
Notation in the Manual
In this Service Manual, the CR-IR 363 is sometimes denoted simply as the RU (Reader
Unit), and the DR-ID 300CL/CR-IR 363 AWS as the CL.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.1
0.2
Notation of Symbols
- Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the
installation location when the part or component
removed is to be reinstalled.
This indicator is placed in the illustration that depicts
the procedures for removing the parts and components.
When you see this indicator, refer to its relevant
" Check/Adjustment Procedures."
- Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches
when installing the parts or components.
However, it is not indicated for the half-punches for
improving ease of assembly or preventing erroneous
assembly procedures.
1.4 Servicing Instruments and Tools That
Require Inspection/Calibration
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and
tools that have been regularly inspected and calibrated as appropriate.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be
guaranteed.
Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below.
The inspection/calibration should be planned and performed in accordance with the
specifications and instruction manuals of the applicable servicing instruments and
tools.
n Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration
Name Inspection Calibration
Dosimeter -
Steel rule (150 mm) -
Steel rule (300 mm) -
Digital multimeter
Calipers (* ) -
*: A block gauge for use in inspection requires calibration.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.2
Contents Safety Precautions 0.3
CR-IR 363 Service Manual - Contents
Safety Precaution
1. Safety Precautions................................................................... 1
1.1 General Precautions.........................................................................1
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation...............................................2
1.3 Precautions on Patient Environment................................................2
2. Labels........................................................................................ 3
2.1 Laser Precaution Labels...................................................................3
2.1.1 Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations.............................................3
2.1.2 List of Laser Precaution Labels....................................................................4
2.2 Other Labels.....................................................................................5
2.2.1 Attachment Locations for Ratings Indication Label and Other Labels.........5
2.2.2 Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment Locations...............................6
3. Protective Housings Against Laser Exposure.................... 10
4. CLASSIFICATION................................................................... 10
5. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves................................... 11
5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC).............................................11
5.2 Further information for EN 60601-1-2:2015...................................12
6. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS........................................... 15
7. Cautions on Network............................................................. 15
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.3
Contents Product Specifications 0.4
Product Specifications
1. Specifications of Machine....................................................... 1
1.1 Product Code...................................................................................1
1.2 Available IP Sizes and Types...........................................................1
1.3 List of Optional Items........................................................................2
1.4 Product Specifications......................................................................2
1.5 Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity.....................................2
1.6 Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine.......................................3
1.7 Environmental Conditions................................................................3
1.8 Electrical Specifications....................................................................4
1.9 Installation Space and Servicing Space...........................................4
1.10 Disposal............................................................................................5
1.10.1 Disposal of Machine.....................................................................................5
1.10.2 Disposal of IP...............................................................................................5
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.4
Contents Machine Description (MD) 0.5
Machine Description (MD)
1. Machine Overview............................................................. MD-1 3. Descriptions of Mechanical Components and
1.1 Features....................................................................................MD-1
Their Operations............................................................. MD-18
1.2 System Configuration................................................................MD-1 3.1 Features of Components Used for Each Unit..........................MD-18
1.3 Overall Machine Configuration and Component Names...........MD-2 3.2 IP Conveyance Flow...............................................................MD-21
1.4 Machine Components...............................................................MD-4 3.3 Cassette Set Unit....................................................................MD-22
1.4.1 Unit Locations....................................................................................... MD-4 3.3.1 Operation during IP Feed and Load.................................................... MD-23
1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths.............................................. MD-4 3.3.2 How to Detect the IP Size................................................................... MD-25
1.4.3 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions........................................... MD-5 3.4 Feed/Load Conveyor Unit.......................................................MD-26
1.4.4 Board Locations.................................................................................. MD-11 3.4.1 Path Changeover Guide/Convergence Path Changeover Guide....... MD-27
1.5 System Block Diagram............................................................MD-12 3.4.2 Brush Rollers....................................................................................... MD-29
3.5 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit...............................................MD-30
2. Descriptions of Software Control.................................. MD-13 3.5.1 Side-Positioning Mechanism............................................................... MD-30
2.1 Network Settings.....................................................................MD-13 3.5.2 Cleaning Guides................................................................................. MD-30
2.2 Master CL Switching Function.................................................MD-14 3.6 Subscanning Unit....................................................................MD-31
3.6.1 IP Stopper Mechanism........................................................................ MD-31
2.3 Error Handling.........................................................................MD-15
3.6.2 Dust Removal Mechanism.................................................................. MD-31
2.3.1 Error Handling..................................................................................... MD-15
3.6.3 Reading Mode..................................................................................... MD-32
2.3.2 Cases where Retry is Impossible (FATAL Error)................................. MD-15
3.6.4 Center Guide and Grip Rollers............................................................ MD-32
2.4 SLEEP Mode...........................................................................MD-15
2.4.1 Operation in SLEEP Mode.................................................................. MD-15 3.7 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit...................................................MD-33
3.7.1 Movable Guide.................................................................................... MD-33
2.4.2 Transition to the SLEEP Mode............................................................ MD-16
2.4.3 Recovery from SLEEP Mode.............................................................. MD-16 3.8 Erasure Conveyor Unit............................................................MD-33
3.8.1 Switchback Mechanism....................................................................... MD-33
2.5 Bootup Processing..................................................................MD-17
3.8.2 Side-Positioning Mechanism............................................................... MD-34
2.6 RU Shutdown Processing.......................................................MD-17 3.8.3 Filter of Erasure Lamp......................................................................... MD-34
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.5
Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.6
Troubleshooting (MT)
1. Overview of Troubleshooting............................................MT-1 5. Procedures for Checking the Sensors...........................MT-46
1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting............................................................ MT-1 5.1 Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function........................... MT-46
1.2 Troubleshooting from Error Log................................................. MT-2 5.1.1 Starting the Monitoring Function..........................................................MT-46
1.2.1 Checking the Error Log..........................................................................MT-2 5.1.2 Exiting the Monitoring Function............................................................MT-46
1.2.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Trouble.......................MT-3 5.1.3 Examples of the Monitoring Logs.........................................................MT-47
1.2.3 Performing Analyses based on the Error Code Table............................MT-4
6. Line Error between CL and RU.......................................MT-49
1.3 Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch....................................... MT-5
6.1 Analysis Flow for Line Error between CL and RU................... MT-49
2. Error Code Table................................................................MT-6 6.2 Checking Connection from the CL........................................... MT-50
6.3 Checking Configuration Information of the CL......................... MT-51
3. Detail Code.......................................................................MT-39
6.4 Checking the IP Address of the CL.......................................... MT-52
3.1 Error Log................................................................................. MT-39 6.5 Checking the IP Address of the Master CL.............................. MT-53
3.1.1 How to Understand Detail Code..........................................................MT-39
6.6 Checking the IP Address of the RU......................................... MT-54
3.1.2 Detail Codes for Scanner Errors..........................................................MT-40
3.2 Operation Log.......................................................................... MT-41 7. Abnormal Images.............................................................MT-55
3.2.1 OPE.LOG and Storage Folder.............................................................MT-41
7.1 Troubleshooting for Each Abnormal Type............................... MT-55
3.2.2 Contents of OPE.LOG.........................................................................MT-41
8. Removing the IP...............................................................MT-58
4. Troubleshooting the Errors that Cause the Inability to
Update the Software Version or Back Up the Machine 8.1 Removing the IP from the Feed/Load Conveyor Unit.............. MT-58
Shipment Control Data....................................................MT-42 8.1.1 When the IP is Jammed in the Cassette Set Unit................................MT-58
8.1.2 When the IP is Jammed in the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit..........MT-59
4.1 Checking the IIS...................................................................... MT-42
8.2 Removing the IP from the Erasure Conveyor Unit.................. MT-61
4.2 Checking the Operating Status of the FTP Server.................. MT-43
8.2.1 When the IP is Jammed in the Subscanning Unit or Post-Reading
4.3 Checking the IP Address of the CL.......................................... MT-43 Conveyor Unit......................................................................................MT-61
4.4 Checking "LIST OF EXISTING RU"........................................ MT-44 8.2.2 When the IP is Jammed in the Erasure Conveyor Unit........................MT-63
4.5 Checking the FTP Server Address of the RU.......................... MT-45
9. Troubleshooting Failures where Error Code Is
Undetectable and Machine does not Boot Up...............MT-65
9.1 Analysis Flow for Bootup Failure............................................. MT-65
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.6
Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.7
10. Checking the Status of Each Unit...................................MT-66 Appendix 1. Procedures for
10.1 Checking the Cassette Set Unit.............................................. MT-66
Restoring (Initializing) the Application....Appx MT-1
10.2 Checking the Erasure Conveyer Unit...................................... MT-68 1. Procedures for Restoring the RU Application................... Appx MT-1
Appendix 2. Dimensions in the Conveyance Path....Appx MT-10
1. Rollers and Sensors Installed in the Conveyance Path.... Appx MT-10
2. General Dimensions of the Conveyance Path............... Appx MT-10
3. Dimensions of Members in the Conveyance Path......... Appx MT-11
Appendix 3. DIP Switch Setup....................................Appx MT-17
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.7
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.8
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment
of Parts (MC)
1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for Each Unit................ MC-1 5. Cassette Set Unit............................................................. MC-23
Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment........................................ MC-1 5.1 Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit............................................MC-23
Checking the Protective Grounding...................................................................... MC-1
5.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit.............................................MC-26
2. Table of Contents.............................................................. MC-2 5.3 Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)......................................MC-28
5.4 Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves).........MC-29
3. Covers................................................................................ MC-7
5.5 Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)..................................MC-30
3.1 Covers.......................................................................................MC-7
5.6 Arms (White)...........................................................................MC-30
3.2 Filters.........................................................................................MC-8
5.7 Shutters...................................................................................MC-31
3.3 Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf).............................................MC-9
5.8 LEDs (for the First, Second, and Third Shelves).....................MC-32
4. Housing Unit.................................................................... MC-10 5.9 LED (for the Fourth Shelf).......................................................MC-33
4.1 Circuit Breaker.........................................................................MC-10 5.10 Antistatic Members..................................................................MC-33
4.2 Socket.....................................................................................MC-12 5.11 Suction Cup Driving Motors (MA1, 2, 3, 4)..............................MC-34
4.3 Antistatic Member (Front)........................................................MC-13 5.12 Barcode Reader Assembly......................................................MC-35
4.4 Antistatic Members (Rear).......................................................MC-13 5.13 Exposure Markers Receiving Boxes.......................................MC-36
4.5 Side-Positioning Entrance IP Sensor (SG1)............................MC-14 5.14 Hold Release Arm...................................................................MC-36
4.6 "11x14IP" Determination Sensor (SG2)...................................MC-14 5.15 Hoses......................................................................................MC-37
4.7 Cassette Hold Release Pin.....................................................MC-15 5.16 Cassette Ejection Clutches (CLA1, 2, 3, 4).............................MC-38
4.8 Power Supply Unit...................................................................MC-16 5.17 Cassette Ejection Sensors (SA1, 7, 13, 19)............................MC-39
4.9 PSU39A Board........................................................................MC-17 5.18 Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21).................................MC-39
4.10 Fan (Power Supply Unit).........................................................MC-19 5.19 Suction Cup HP Sensors (SA4, 10, 16, 22)............................MC-40
4.11 Touch Panel Assembly............................................................MC-21 5.20 Suction Sensors (SA5, 11, 17, 23)..........................................MC-41
5.21 Suction Cup Assemblies..........................................................MC-42
5.22 Suction Cups...........................................................................MC-43
5.23 Roller Assemblies....................................................................MC-44
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.8
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.9
5.24 Cassette Ejection Rollers........................................................MC-45 6. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit............................................... MC-72
5.25 Cassette Set Base Assemblies...............................................MC-47 6.1 Feed/Load Conveyor Unit.......................................................MC-72
5.26 Stoppers..................................................................................MC-49 6.2 IP Feed/Load Sensors (SB1, 2, 3, 4)......................................MC-74
5.27 Inch/Metric Sensors (SA6, 12, 18, 24)....................................MC-49 6.3 Path Changeover Shelf Sensors (SB7, 8, 9)...........................MC-74
5.28 Guide Plates............................................................................MC-50 6.4 Convergence Path Changeover Sensor (SB10).....................MC-75
5.29 Cassette IN Sensors (SA2, 8, 14, 20).....................................MC-51 6.5 Path Changeover HP Sensor (SB11)......................................MC-75
5.30 Stoppers..................................................................................MC-52 6.6 IP Jam Handling Assembly......................................................MC-76
5.31 Suction Pump Bracket Assemblies..........................................MC-53 6.7 Brush Roller Assembly............................................................MC-76
5.32 IP Removal Arms.....................................................................MC-55 6.8 Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)....................MC-78
5.33 Bearings (IP Removal Link Shafts).........................................MC-57 6.8.1 Removal Procedures.......................................................................... MC-78
6.8.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................... MC-79
5.34 Solenoid Assemblies (SOLA1, 2, 3, 4)....................................MC-59
6.9 Path Changeover Mechanism.................................................MC-80
5.35 IP Leak Valves (SVA1, 2, 3, 4)................................................MC-60
6.9.1 Removal Procedures.......................................................................... MC-80
5.36 IP Suction Pumps (PA1, 2, 3, 4)..............................................MC-61 6.9.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................... MC-81
5.37 Cassette Hold Pins..................................................................MC-62 6.10 Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side)....................MC-84
5.38 Movable Guide Assemblies.....................................................MC-62 6.10.1 Removal Procedures.......................................................................... MC-84
5.39 Movable Guides......................................................................MC-63 6.10.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................... MC-86
5.40 Tapes.......................................................................................MC-64 6.11 Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side)......MC-88
5.41 Guides.....................................................................................MC-65 6.12 Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-Reference Side)......MC-88
5.42 IP Stoppers..............................................................................MC-65 6.13 Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)....MC-89
5.43 Reinforcement Bracket............................................................MC-66 6.14 Pre-BCR IP Sensor (SB5).......................................................MC-90
5.44 Torsion Coil Springs................................................................MC-67 6.15 Pre-Convergence IP Sensor (SB6).........................................MC-90
5.44.1 Removal Procedures (Actuator: 366N200005A)................................. MC-67 6.16 IP Transport Motor (MB1)........................................................MC-91
5.44.2 Reinstallation Procedures (Actuator: 366N200005A)......................... MC-69 6.17 Convergence Unit IP Transport Motor (MB2)..........................MC-92
6.18 Convergence Path Changeover Guide Driving Motor (MB3)....MC-93
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.9
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.10
6.19 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies 6.35 Guide (Convergence Unit Upper Side)..................................MC-121
(for the First, Second, and Third Shelves)...............................MC-94
6.36 Half-Clutch Spur Gear (Upper Reference Side)....................MC-123
6.20 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)........MC-94 6.36.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-123
6.21 Antistatic Members..................................................................MC-95 6.36.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-124
6.22 Shock-Absorbing Rollers (Convergence Unit).........................MC-95
6.23 Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H)............................MC-96
6.23.1 Removal Procedures.......................................................................... MC-96
6.23.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................... MC-98
6.24 Arm and Bearing (for the First Shelf).....................................MC-102
6.24.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-102
6.24.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-103
6.25 Arms and Bearings
(for the Second, Third, and Fourth Shelves).........................MC-104
6.25.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-104
6.25.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-105
6.26 Path Changeover Guides
(for the First, Second, Third, and Fourth Shelves)................MC-107
6.27 Guides (for the First, Second, Third, and Fourth Shelves)....MC-108
6.27.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-108
6.27.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-109
6.28 Guide (Convergence Unit Lower Side).................................. MC-111
6.29 Rubber Rollers (I, J, K, and L)............................................... MC-112
6.30 Rubber Rollers (M and N)..................................................... MC-113
6.31 Rubber Rollers (O and P)...................................................... MC-115
6.32 Rubber Rollers (Q and R)...................................................... MC-116
6.33 Convergence Path Changeover Guide................................. MC-118
6.34 Rubber Rollers (S and T)......................................................MC-120
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.10
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.11
7. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit.................................. MC-126 7.22 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly........................................MC-149
7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit.............................................MC-126 7.23 Rubber Roller (A)..................................................................MC-150
7.1.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-126 7.24 Rubber Roller (B)..................................................................MC-151
7.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-129
7.25 Rubber Rollers (C and D)......................................................MC-152
7.2 Side-Positioning Mechanism HP Sensor (SC1)....................MC-133
7.26 Rubber Roller (E)..................................................................MC-154
7.3 Spur Gears (Reference Side)................................................MC-133
7.27 Rubber Roller (F)...................................................................MC-156
7.4 Grip Release HP Sensor (SC2).............................................MC-134
7.28 Guide.....................................................................................MC-158
7.5 Side-Positioning IP Sensor (SC3).........................................MC-135
7.29 Cleaning Guide Assembly.....................................................MC-159
7.6 Cleaning Guide HP Sensor (SC4).........................................MC-135
7.30 Cleaning Guide......................................................................MC-161
7.7 Timing Belt.............................................................................MC-136
7.31 Tape.......................................................................................MC-163
7.8 Side-Positioning Motor (MC1)...............................................MC-137 7.31.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-163
7.9 Grip Release Motor (MC2)....................................................MC-138 7.31.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-166
7.10 IP Transport Motor (MC3)......................................................MC-139
7.11 Cleaning Guide Driving Motor (MC4)....................................MC-140
7.12 Latch Drive Unit (Overall)......................................................MC-141
7.13 Latch Assembly (Latch Driver)..............................................MC-143
7.14 Latch Assembly (Reference Side).........................................MC-144
7.15 Tensioner...............................................................................MC-145
7.16 Planetary Gear Assembly......................................................MC-145
7.17 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)..................................MC-146
7.18 Antistatic Members................................................................MC-146
7.19 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)........................................MC-147
7.20 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side).........................MC-148
7.21 Grip Shaft..............................................................................MC-149
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.11
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.12
8. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit....................................... MC-171 9. Erasure Conveyor Unit................................................. MC-194
8.1 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit.................................................MC-171 9.1 Erasure Conveyor Unit..........................................................MC-194
8.1.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-171 9.2 Lamp Case............................................................................MC-197
8.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-173
9.3 Filter......................................................................................MC-199
8.2 Tensioner Assembly..............................................................MC-176
9.4 IP Switchback Assembly.......................................................MC-200
8.3 Timing Belt.............................................................................MC-176
9.5 Post-Reading Conveyance Standby IP Sensor (SE1)..........MC-201
8.4 Spur Gears (Opposite Reference Side)................................MC-177
9.6 Switchback Standby IP Sensor (SE2)...................................MC-201
8.5 Grip Release HP Sensor (SD1).............................................MC-178
9.7 Erasure Side-Positioning Standby HP Sensor (SE4)............MC-202
8.6 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)........................................MC-178
9.8 Brackets................................................................................MC-203
8.7 Planetary Gear Assembly......................................................MC-179
9.9 Grip Release HP Sensor (SE5).............................................MC-204
8.8 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side).........................MC-180
9.10 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly........................................MC-204
8.9 Grip Release Motor (MD1)....................................................MC-180
9.11 Branch Path Guide Driving Solenoid (SOLE1)......................MC-205
8.10 Post-Reading Conveyance IP Sensor (SD2)........................MC-181
9.12 Reflection Plate....................................................................MC-206
8.11 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly........................................MC-181
9.13 Timing Belt (A).......................................................................MC-207
8.12 Spur Gears (Reference Side)................................................MC-182 9.13.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-207
8.13 IP Transport Motor (MD2)......................................................MC-182 9.13.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-208
8.14 Variable Guide Assembly......................................................MC-183 9.14 Timing Belt (B).......................................................................MC-210
8.15 Rubber Rollers (A and B)......................................................MC-185 9.14.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-210
9.14.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-211
8.16 Rubber Rollers (C and D)......................................................MC-187
9.15 Timing Belt (C).......................................................................MC-212
8.17 Rubber Rollers (E and F)......................................................MC-189
9.15.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-212
8.18 Rubber Rollers (G and H)......................................................MC-190 9.15.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-213
8.19 Guide (A)...............................................................................MC-191 9.16 Conveyance Mechanism
8.20 Guide (B)...............................................................................MC-192 (Opposite Reference Side Gears).........................................MC-214
8.21 Grip Shaft..............................................................................MC-193 9.17 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)........................................MC-215
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.12
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.13
9.18 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side).........................MC-216 9.35 Branch Path Changeover Guide...........................................MC-244
9.18.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-216 9.36 Guide Pressure Bracket........................................................MC-247
9.18.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-217
9.37 Branch Path Changeover Guide Driving Arm (Right)............MC-248
9.19 Tensioner Assembly..............................................................MC-218 9.37.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-248
9.20 Guide (A)...............................................................................MC-218 9.37.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-249
9.21 Guide (B)...............................................................................MC-219 9.38 Branch Path Changeover Guide Driving Arm (Left)..............MC-250
9.22 Guide (C)...............................................................................MC-220 9.38.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-250
9.38.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-251
9.23 Latch Drive Unit.....................................................................MC-221
9.23.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-221 9.39 Tension Coil Spring...............................................................MC-252
9.23.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-223 9.39.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-252
9.39.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-253
9.24 Latch Assembly (Reference Side).........................................MC-226
9.25 IP Transport Motor (ME1)......................................................MC-226 10. Scanning Optics Unit.................................................... MC-255
9.26 Side-Positioning Motor (ME2)...............................................MC-227 10.1 Removal Procedures.............................................................MC-255
9.27 Grip Release Motor (ME3)....................................................MC-227 10.2 Reinstallation Procedures.....................................................MC-256
9.28 Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, and F)...................................MC-228 10.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures..............................................MC-258
9.29 Rubber Rollers (G and H)......................................................MC-230
11. Light-Collecting Unit..................................................... MC-259
9.30 Rubber Rollers (I and J)........................................................MC-231
11.1 Upper Light-Collecting Guide................................................MC-259
9.31 Guide (D)...............................................................................MC-233
9.31.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-233 11.2 Lower Light-Collecting Guide................................................MC-264
9.31.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-235 11.3 PMT27B Board......................................................................MC-269
9.32 Guide (E)...............................................................................MC-238 11.4 PMR27B Board.....................................................................MC-271
9.32.1 Removal Procedures........................................................................ MC-238
9.32.2 Reinstallation Procedures................................................................. MC-240
9.33 Grip Shaft..............................................................................MC-242
9.34 Guide (F)...............................................................................MC-243
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.13
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.14
12. Subscanning Unit.......................................................... MC-273 12.23 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1).............................................MC-301
12.1 Subscanning Unit..................................................................MC-273 12.24 Light-Collecting Mirror...........................................................MC-302
12.2 Transparent Cover.................................................................MC-277 12.25 Light-Collecting Shaft............................................................MC-303
12.3 Antistatic Member..................................................................MC-277 12.26 Glass Guide...........................................................................MC-304
12.4 SUS Belt................................................................................MC-278 12.27 Center Guide.........................................................................MC-306
12.5 Kapton® Belt.........................................................................MC-279 12.28 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) and
Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower)...........................................MC-307
12.6 Tensioner (Right-Hand Side).................................................MC-280
12.29 Grounding Wires...................................................................MC-308
12.7 Tensioner (Left-Hand Side)...................................................MC-280
12.30 Shock-Absorbing Rubbers....................................................MC-309
12.8 Flywheel................................................................................MC-281
12.31 Subscanning Unit (Top).........................................................MC-310
12.9 Sub Scanning Motor (MZ1)...................................................MC-282
12.32 Bracket Assembly.................................................................. MC-311
12.10 Cleaning Brush Assembly.....................................................MC-284
12.33 Lower Light-Collecting Guide Brace Assembly.....................MC-312
12.11 Driving-Side Grip Release HP Sensor (SZ2) and
Driven-Side Grip Release HP Sensor (SZ3).........................MC-285
13. PC Boards...................................................................... MC-313
12.12 IP Stopper HP Sensor (SZ5).................................................MC-286
13.1 CPU Board............................................................................MC-313
12.13 Grip Drive Motor (MZ2).........................................................MC-287 13.1.1 Replacement Procedures................................................................. MC-313
12.14 Dust Removal Motor (MZ3)...................................................MC-289 13.1.2 Machine Data Backup....................................................................... MC-313
12.15 IP Stopper Drive Motor (MZ4)...............................................MC-291 13.1.3 Replacing the CPU Board................................................................. MC-315
13.1.4 Setting the IP Addresses of the RU and Console............................. MC-318
12.16 Driving Shaft Grip Release Arm............................................MC-292 13.1.5 Updating the RU Software Version................................................... MC-319
12.17 Driven Shaft Grip Release Arm and IP Stopper....................MC-294 13.1.6 Restoring the Machine Data............................................................. MC-322
12.18 Spur Gears............................................................................MC-296 13.1.7 Confirming the S Value..................................................................... MC-323
13.1.8 S Value Correction/LED Initialization................................................ MC-323
12.19 Dust Removal HP Sensor (SZ4)...........................................MC-297
13.2 SND39A(1) Board.................................................................MC-324
12.20 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)...........................................MC-298
13.3 SND39A(2) Board.................................................................MC-326
12.21 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)..........................................MC-299
12.22 Antistatic Member..................................................................MC-300 14. Updating Software Versions........................................ MC-328
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.14
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.15
15. Format Adjustment....................................................... MC-334 20. List of Jigs and Tools................................................... MC-361
15.1 Main Scan Format Adjustment..............................................MC-334 20.1 Jigs and Tools........................................................................MC-361
15.1.1 Main Scan Position (Pixel) Adjustment............................................. MC-334
15.1.2 Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment............................................... MC-335 21. Installing the RU Software............................................ MC-362
15.1.3 Optic Setting...................................................................................... MC-337 21.1 Installing the RU Software.....................................................MC-362
15.2 IP Leading-Edge Adjustment (Sub-scanning).......................MC-338
22. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure.................................... MC-363
16. Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST........... MC-340 22.1 Backup Procedure.................................................................MC-363
16.1 Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST (SR)..............MC-341 22.2 Restore Procedure................................................................MC-365
16.2 Shading Correction for the IP Type of ST (FR)......................MC-343
16.3 Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST.....................................MC-345
17. Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR-BD.... MC-347
17.1 Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR-BD (Both Side)...........MC-348
17.2 Shading Correction for IP Type HR-BD.................................MC-350
17.3 Special Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR-BD.................MC-352
17.3.1 Special Sensitivity Correction for
IP Type HR-BD Using Tungsten X-ray Tube..................................... MC-353
18. Data Backup/Image Checks......................................... MC-355
18.1 Backing Up the Scanner Data...............................................MC-355
18.2 Checking the Image..............................................................MC-356
19. Image/Conveyance Checks.......................................... MC-358
19.1 Check Before Procedures.....................................................MC-358
19.2 Image/Conveyance Checks..................................................MC-359
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.15
Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.16
Maintenance Utility (MU)
1. Overview of RU Service Utility......................................... MU-1 4. RU PC-TOOL.................................................................... MU-15
1.1 Tree of RU Service Utility..........................................................MU-1 4.1 Functions of RU PC-TOOL......................................................MU-15
4.1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Screen and Tree.................................................. MU-15
2. User Utility......................................................................... MU-2 4.1.2 “Maintenance is in progress” Message Display by the LCD Panel..... MU-16
2.1 Overview of User Utility.............................................................MU-2 4.1.3 RU PC-TOOL Error Screen Display.................................................... MU-17
2.2 Starting and Exiting the User Utility...........................................MU-3 4.2 Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL..........................................MU-18
2.2.1 Starting the User Utility......................................................................... MU-3 4.2.1 Starting RU PC-TOOL......................................................................... MU-18
2.2.2 Exiting the User Utility........................................................................... MU-3 4.2.2 Exiting RU PC-TOOL.......................................................................... MU-18
2.3 Selecting Master CL..................................................................MU-3 4.3 Details of RU PC-TOOL..........................................................MU-19
4.3.1 RU NAME/RU IP ADDR...................................................................... MU-19
3. Machine Maintenance....................................................... MU-4 4.3.2 LIST OF EXISTING RU....................................................................... MU-19
4.3.3 NEW.................................................................................................... MU-20
3.1 Tree of Machine Maintenance...................................................MU-4
4.3.4 DELETE.............................................................................................. MU-20
3.2 Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance.........................MU-5 4.3.5 MUTL.................................................................................................. MU-20
3.2.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance during Initialization......................... MU-5 4.3.6 PING................................................................................................... MU-21
3.2.2 Starting the Machine Maintenance in READY State............................. MU-6 4.3.7 MON.................................................................................................... MU-22
3.2.3 Exiting the Machine Maintenance......................................................... MU-6 4.3.8 FTP..................................................................................................... MU-24
3.3 Details of Machine Maintenance...............................................MU-7 4.3.9 INSTALL.............................................................................................. MU-25
3.3.1 RU IP Address....................................................................................... MU-7 4.3.10 VERSION UP...................................................................................... MU-26
3.3.2 FTP Server............................................................................................ MU-8 4.3.11 EDIT HISTORY................................................................................... MU-27
3.3.3 Default Gateway................................................................................... MU-9 4.3.12 EDIT CONFIGURATION..................................................................... MU-30
3.3.4 Subnet Mask....................................................................................... MU-10 4.3.13 EDIT CL NAME................................................................................... MU-32
3.3.5 Secure Host........................................................................................ MU-11 4.3.14 BACKUP............................................................................................. MU-34
3.3.6 Secure Net.......................................................................................... MU-12 4.3.15 RESTORE........................................................................................... MU-35
3.3.7 Network Check.................................................................................... MU-13 4.3.16 I/O TRACE EXPERT........................................................................... MU-37
3.3.8 HV ON/OFF......................................................................................... MU-14 4.3.17 ERROR DB......................................................................................... MU-38
4.4 Configuration...........................................................................MU-40
4.4.1 CDPath................................................................................................ MU-40
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.16
Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.17
4.5 Operation.................................................................................MU-42 [5] Scanner Check................................................................................... MU-59
4.5.1 Initialize APL........................................................................................ MU-42 [5-1] Polygon Motor..................................................................................... MU-59
[5-2] Laser................................................................................................... MU-60
4.6 License....................................................................................MU-43
[5-3] HV Diagnostic..................................................................................... MU-61
4.6.1 Key Regist........................................................................................... MU-43
[5-4] Format Adjustment.............................................................................. MU-61
[5-4-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ)................................................................ MU-62
5. MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions.......................... MU-44
[5-4-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel).................................................................. MU-62
5.1 Tree of MUTL..........................................................................MU-44 [5-4-3] Default Setting (FREQ)....................................................................... MU-62
5.2 Starting and Exiting the MUTL.................................................MU-48 [5-4-4] Default Setting (Pixel)......................................................................... MU-62
5.2.1 Starting the MUTL............................................................................... MU-48 [5-4-5] Optic Setting (FREQ).......................................................................... MU-63
5.2.2 Exiting the MUTL................................................................................. MU-48 [5-4-6] Optic Setting (Pixel)............................................................................ MU-63
5.3 Details of MUTL.......................................................................MU-49 [5-4-7] Manual Adjustment (Sub Scan Length).............................................. MU-63
[5-4-8] IP Leading-Edge Adjustment (Sub-scanning)..................................... MU-64
[1] Conveyance Check............................................................................. MU-49
[5-5] Correction............................................................................................ MU-65
[1-1] Conveyance Setting............................................................................ MU-49
[5-5-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction............................................................ MU-66
[1-2] Processing Mode Setting.................................................................... MU-49
[5-5-2] Shading Correction............................................................................. MU-66
[1-3] Number of Conveyance Setting.......................................................... MU-50
[5-5-3] Sensitivity Correction.......................................................................... MU-67
[2] Board Check....................................................................................... MU-52
[5-5-4] Special Sensitivity Adjustment............................................................ MU-67
[2-1] All Board.............................................................................................. MU-52
[5-5-5] Sensitivity S-Value Correction............................................................. MU-68
[2-2] CPU Board.......................................................................................... MU-52
[5-5-6] Trouble shooting................................................................................. MU-69
[2-3] SND Board.......................................................................................... MU-52
[5-6-7] HV ON/OFF......................................................................................... MU-69
[2-4] CPU Board Setting Display................................................................. MU-52
[5-6] S-Value................................................................................................ MU-69
[3] Software Check................................................................................... MU-53
[5-6-1] S-Value variation display (front).......................................................... MU-69
[3-1] Ver. Display......................................................................................... MU-53
[5-6-2] S-Value variation display (rear)........................................................... MU-70
[3-2] MAC Address Display......................................................................... MU-53
[5-6-3] S-Value calculator............................................................................... MU-70
[3-3] ERROR LOG CLEAR.......................................................................... MU-53
[5-6-4] Light collecting parts replacement...................................................... MU-71
[4] Virtual Image Check............................................................................ MU-54
[5-6-4-1] LED data initialization (front)............................................................... MU-71
[4-1] CORRECTION ST/HR........................................................................ MU-54
[5-6-4-2] LED data initialization (rear)................................................................ MU-71
[4-2] Virtual Image Test............................................................................... MU-55
[4-2-1] LED Virtual Read................................................................................ MU-55
[4-2-2] PMT Virtual Read................................................................................ MU-57
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.17
Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.18
[6] Mechanical 1 Check............................................................................ MU-72 [6-6] Sub Scanning 2................................................................................... MU-87
[6-1] IP Removal Unit.................................................................................. MU-72 [6-6-1] Dust Removal HP................................................................................ MU-87
[6-1-1] Suction Cup Arm HP........................................................................... MU-72 [6-6-2] Dust Removal Operation..................................................................... MU-88
[6-1-2] IP Removal (F/L)................................................................................. MU-73 [6-6-3] Conveyance Motor Direction Selection............................................... MU-88
[6-1-3] Clutch.................................................................................................. MU-74 [6-6-4] Conveyance Motor Speed Selection................................................... MU-88
[6-1-4] Pump................................................................................................... MU-74 [6-6-5] Conveyance Motor Stop/Drive............................................................ MU-89
[6-1-5] Valve................................................................................................... MU-75 [6-7] Conveyance Path Sensor Check........................................................ MU-90
[6-1-6] Solenoid.............................................................................................. MU-76 [7] Mechanical 2 Check............................................................................ MU-91
[6-2] Feed/Load Unit................................................................................... MU-77 [7-1] Post-Reading Conveyor...................................................................... MU-91
[6-2-1] Feed Path Change Guide................................................................... MU-77 [7-1-1] Grip Release HP (MD1)...................................................................... MU-91
[6-2-2] Join Path Change Guide..................................................................... MU-78 [7-1-2] Grip Position Movement (MD2)........................................................... MU-91
[6-2-3] Feed Conveyance (MB1/MB2/MC3)................................................... MU-79 [7-1-3] Post-Conveyance Grip Diagnostic...................................................... MU-92
[6-2-4] Post-Erasure Conveyance (ME1/MB1/MB2)...................................... MU-79 [7-1-4] Post-Conveyance (MD2/ME1)............................................................ MU-92
[6-3] Side-Positioning Conveyor 1............................................................... MU-80 [7-2] Erasure Conveyor 1............................................................................ MU-93
[6-3-1] Side-Positioning Grip HP (MC2)......................................................... MU-80 [7-2-1] Erasure Grip HP (ME3)....................................................................... MU-93
[6-3-2] Side-Positioning Grip Movement (MC2)............................................. MU-80 [7-2-2] Erasure Grip Movement (ME3)........................................................... MU-93
[6-3-3] Side-Positioning Grip Diagnostic (MC2)............................................. MU-81 [7-2-3] Erasure Grip Diagnostic (ME3).......................................................... MU-94
[6-3-4] Side-Positioning HP (MC1)................................................................. MU-81 [7-2-4] Erasure Side-positioning HP (ME2).................................................... MU-94
[6-3-5] Side-Positioning Size Selection.......................................................... MU-82 [7-2-5] Erasure Side-positioning Size Selection............................................. MU-95
[6-3-6] Side-Positioning (MC1/MC2)............................................................... MU-82 [7-2-6] Erasure Side-positioning (ME2/ME3).................................................. MU-95
[6-4] Side-Positioning Conveyor 2............................................................... MU-83 [7-3] Erasure Conveyor 2............................................................................ MU-96
[6-4-1] Cleaning Guide HP (MC4).................................................................. MU-83 [7-3-1] Path Change Guide (SOLF1).............................................................. MU-96
[6-4-2] Cleaning Guide Position Movement (MC4)......................................... MU-83 [7-3-2] Erasure Conveyor (ME1).................................................................... MU-96
[6-4-3] Cleaning Guide Diagnostic................................................................. MU-84 [7-4] Control Unit......................................................................................... MU-97
[6-5] Sub Scanning 1................................................................................... MU-84 [7-4-1] FAN..................................................................................................... MU-97
[6-5-1] Sub-Scanning Grip HP (MZ2)............................................................. MU-84
[6-5-2] Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic Speed Selection................................. MU-85
[6-5-3] Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic (MZ2)................................................. MU-85
[6-5-4] Stopper HP.......................................................................................... MU-86
[6-5-5] Stopper Movement.............................................................................. MU-86
[6-5-6] Stopper Diagnostic.............................................................................. MU-87
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.18
Contents Service Parts List（SP） 0.19
Service Parts List (SP)
How to Use Service Parts List ...............................................................SP-1 05E SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5 .......................................SP-25
INDEX ..................................................................................................SP-2 06A AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 1 ........................................SP-26
01A COVER 1 ...................................................................................SP-3 06B AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 2 ........................................SP-27
01B COVER 2 ...................................................................................SP-4 06C AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 3 ........................................SP-28
02A FRAME 1 ...................................................................................SP-5 06D AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 4 ........................................SP-29
02B FRAME 2 ...................................................................................SP-6 06E AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 5 ........................................SP-30
02C FRAME 3 ...................................................................................SP-7 07A ERASURE CONVEYOR 1 ......................................................SP-31
03A CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 ...........................................................SP-8 07B ERASURE CONVEYOR 2 ......................................................SP-32
03B CASSETTE SET UNIT 2 ...........................................................SP-9 07C ERASURE CONVEYOR 3 ......................................................SP-33
03C CASSETTE SET UNIT 3 .........................................................SP-10 07D ERASURE CONVEYOR 4 ......................................................SP-34
03D CASSETTE SET UNIT 4 .........................................................SP-11 07E ERASURE CONVEYOR 5 ......................................................SP-35
03E CASSETTE SET UNIT 5 .........................................................SP-12 07F ERASURE CONVEYOR 6 ......................................................SP-36
04A FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 1 ...................................................SP-13 07G ERASURE CONVEYOR 7 ......................................................SP-37
04B FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 2 ...................................................SP-14 07H ERASURE CONVEYOR 8 ......................................................SP-38
04C FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 3 ...................................................SP-15 08 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT ......................................................SP-39
04D FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 4 ...................................................SP-16 09A LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT 1..................................................SP-40
04E FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 5 ...................................................SP-17 09B LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT 2..................................................SP-41
04F FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 6 ...................................................SP-18 10A SUB SCANNING UNIT 1 .........................................................SP-42
04G FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 7 ...................................................SP-19 10B SUB SCANNING UNIT 2 .........................................................SP-43
04H FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 8 ...................................................SP-20 10C SUB SCANNING UNIT 3 .........................................................SP-44
05A SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1.......................................SP-21 10D SUB SCANNING UNIT 4 .........................................................SP-45
05B SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2.......................................SP-22 10E SUB SCANNING UNIT 5 .........................................................SP-46
05C SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3.......................................SP-23 10F SUB SCANNING UNIT 6 .........................................................SP-47
05D SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4.......................................SP-24 10G SUB SCANNING UNIT 7 .........................................................SP-48
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.19
Contents Service Parts List（SP） 0.20
10H SUB SCANNING UNIT 8 .........................................................SP-49
11 CONTROLLER .......................................................................SP-50
12 CABLE .....................................................................................SP-51
13A CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1 .............................................................SP-52
13B CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 2 .............................................................SP-53
13C CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 3 .............................................................SP-54
13D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 4 .............................................................SP-55
13E CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 5 .............................................................SP-56
13F CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 6 .............................................................SP-57
13G CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 7 .............................................................SP-58
13H CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8 .............................................................SP-59
13I CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 9 .............................................................SP-60
13J CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 10 ...........................................................SP-61
13K CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 11 ...........................................................SP-62
13L CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 12 ...........................................................SP-63
13M CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 ...........................................................SP-64
13N CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 ...........................................................SP-65
14 TABLE OF SCREWS / WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS ...SP-66
15 LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS........................................SP-66
16 OPTION ...................................................................................SP-67
17 JIG ...........................................................................................SP-68
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.20
Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.21
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
1. Preventive Maintenance Program................................... PM-1 7. Cassette Set Unit............................................................. PM-16
1.1 How To Use the Preventive Maintenance Volume.................... PM-1 7.1 Removing the Feed/Load Conveyor Unit................................ PM-16
1.2 Notations of Intervals................................................................. PM-1 7.2 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers and Suction Cups...................... PM-17
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List...................................... PM-2 7.3 Replacing the IP Suction Pumps............................................. PM-19
1.4 Preventive Maintenance Flow................................................... PM-5
8. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit............................................... PM-20
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures................................ PM-6 8.1 Cleaning the Shock Absorbing Rollers, Guides,
and Rubber Rollers................................................................. PM-20
2.1 Checking the Error Log............................................................. PM-6
8.2 Cleaning the Guides and Rubber Rollers................................ PM-23
2.2 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time............................... PM-7
8.3 Cleaning the Guides and Rubber Rollers................................ PM-24
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance.................................... PM-8 8.4 Brush Roller............................................................................. PM-29
3.1 Check Before Procedures......................................................... PM-8 8.4.1 Cleaning the Brush Roller................................................................... PM-29
8.4.2 Cleaning/Replacing the Brush Roller.................................................. PM-30
3.2 Image/Conveyance Checks...................................................... PM-9
8.5 Cleaning the Antistatic Members............................................. PM-31
3.3 Checking the Output Characters............................................. PM-10
8.6 Reinstalling the Feed/Load Conveyor Unit.............................. PM-31
4. Pulling Out the Machine..................................................PM-11
9. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit.................................... PM-33
4.1 Unlocking the Retainers.......................................................... PM-11
9.1 Removing the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit....................... PM-33
4.2 Disconnecting the Cables........................................................ PM-11
9.2 Cleaning the Guide.................................................................. PM-35
5. Removing the Covers..................................................... PM-12 9.3 Cleaning Guide Assembly....................................................... PM-36
5.1 Nothing.................................................................................... PM-12 9.3.1 Cleaning the Cleaning Guide Assembly.............................................. PM-36
9.3.2 Cleaning the Cleaning Guide Assembly.............................................. PM-36
5.2 Removing the Covers (1 Year Intervals).................................. PM-12
9.3.3 Replacing the Cleaning Guide............................................................ PM-38
5.3 Removing the Covers (2 Year Intervals).................................. PM-13
9.4 Cleaning the Shock-Absorbing Roller, Guide,
5.4 Removing the Covers (3 Year Intervals).................................. PM-14 and Rubber Roller................................................................... PM-40
9.5 Reinstalling the Cleaning Guide Assembly and Guide............ PM-41
6. Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch........................... PM-15
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.21
Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.22
10. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit......................................... PM-42 13. Erasure Conveyor Unit................................................... PM-78
10.1 Removing the Retaining Member............................................ PM-42 13.1 Removing the Lamp Case....................................................... PM-78
10.2 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Unit............................ PM-43 13.2 Removing the Erasure Conveyor Unit..................................... PM-79
10.3 Cleaning the Guides, Shock Absorbing Rollers, 13.3 Cleaning the IP Switchback Assembly.................................... PM-80
and Rubber Rollers................................................................. PM-47
13.4 Cleaning the Reflection Plate Guide and Rubber Rollers....... PM-81
10.4 Cleaning the Movable Guide Assembly................................... PM-48
13.5 Cleaning the Shock-Absorbing Roller and Guide.................... PM-82
11. Subscanning Unit............................................................ PM-50 13.6 Removing the Latch Drive Unit................................................ PM-84
11.1 Removing the Upper Light-Collecting Guide........................... PM-50 13.7 Cleaning the Rubber Roller and Guide................................... PM-90
11.2 Cleaning the Antistatic Brush Assembly.................................. PM-52 13.8 Reinstalling the Guides........................................................... PM-95
11.3 Removing the Driving-Shaft Grip Roller.................................. PM-54 13.9 Reinstalling the Latch Drive Unit............................................. PM-99
11.4 Removing the Kapton® Belt.................................................... PM-54 13.10 Cleaning the Antistatic Members........................................... PM-108
11.5 Cleaning the Glass Guide....................................................... PM-55 13.11 Reinstalling the Erasure Conveyor Unit................................ PM-108
11.6 Cleaning the Driving Shaft Grip Rollers................................... PM-63 13.12 Cleaning the Filter................................................................. PM-110
11.7 Cleaning the Driven Shaft Grip Rollers................................... PM-64 13.13 Reinstalling the Lamp Case...................................................PM-111
11.8 Cleaning the Flywheel and Kapton® Belt................................ PM-65 14. Cleaning Inside the Machine.........................................PM-112
11.9 Cleaning the SUS Belt............................................................. PM-66
11.10 Reinstalling the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit..................... PM-68 15. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch............................PM-112
12. Light-Collecting Guide.................................................... PM-72 16. Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers and Louvers...........PM-113
12.1 Cleaning the Upper Light-Collecting Guide............................. PM-72
12.2 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyor Unit......................... PM-74
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.22
Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.23
17. Securing the Machine....................................................PM-114
17.1 Connecting the Cables.......................................................... PM-114
17.2 Securing the Machine............................................................ PM-116
17.3 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding........................ PM-116
18. Checking the Image/Conveyance.................................PM-117
19. Checking the Laser Performance/Sensitivity..............PM-117
19.1 Laser Performance................................................................ PM-117
19.2 Sensitivity Confirmation (Mammography)............................. PM-118
20. Checking the Error Log................................................ PM-121
21. Resetting the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time................ PM-122
22. Reset the number that pumps are used...................... PM-122
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.23
Contents Installation (IN) 0.24
Installation (IN)
1. Specifications of Machine.................................................. IN-1 6. Final Placement................................................................. IN-22
6.1 Securing the Cable....................................................................IN-22
2. Installation Work Flowchart............................................... IN-2
6.2 Securing the Machine................................................................IN-22
3. Preparation for Installation................................................ IN-3
7. CL Installation Procedures............................................... IN-23
3.1 Precautions Regarding Installation..............................................IN-3
3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements................................................................ IN-3 8. Installing the RU Software................................................ IN-24
3.1.2 Precautions on Patient Environment....................................................... IN-3
8.1 Setting the IP Address of the RU...............................................IN-24
3.1.3 Handling Precautions for Printed Circuit Boards and Optical Unit.......... IN-3
3.1.4 Precautions for System Connection........................................................ IN-3 8.2 Setting the CL and Checking Connection..................................IN-26
3.2 Unloading....................................................................................IN-4 8.3 Installing Setup PC-TOOL.........................................................IN-27
3.2.1 Unloading: For countries specifying the crate......................................... IN-4 8.4 RU/CL Software Setup Checkpoints.........................................IN-28
3.2.2 Unloading: Other than countries specifying the crate............................. IN-9 8.4.1 Checking the CL Software Version....................................................... IN-28
3.3 Transfer.....................................................................................IN-13 8.4.2 Checking Configuration of the CL - 1.................................................... IN-29
8.4.3 Checking Configuration of the CL - 2.................................................... IN-29
3.4 Temporary Placement...............................................................IN-14
8.4.4 Checking Configuration of the CL - 3.................................................... IN-29
3.5 Checking the Items Supplied.....................................................IN-14 8.4.5 Checking Configuration of the CL - 4.................................................... IN-29
8.4.6 Checking FTP of the CL - 1................................................................... IN-30
4. Installation Procedures.................................................... IN-15 8.4.7 Checking FTP of the CL - 2................................................................... IN-30
4.1 Removing Tapes from the Machine...........................................IN-15 8.4.8 Checking Setup of the RU.................................................................... IN-30
4.2 Removing the Light Protect Plates............................................IN-15 8.5 Installing the RU Software.........................................................IN-31
4.3 Repositioning the Retaining Members......................................IN-16
9. Image/Conveyance Checks.............................................. IN-36
4.4 Installing the Cover....................................................................IN-18
9.1 Check Before Procedures.........................................................IN-36
5. Connecting the Cables..................................................... IN-19 9.2 Image/Conveyance Checks......................................................IN-37
5.1 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking Resistance Value....IN-19
5.2 Connecting the Interface Cable.................................................IN-21
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.24
Contents Installation (IN) 0.25
10. Confirming the S Value..................................................... IN-39 Appendix 1. Additional Protective Grounding............... Appx IN-1
10.1 Confirming the S Value of IP Type ST.......................................IN-39
Appendix 2. Setting the Master CL................................. Appx IN-2
10.2 Confirming the S Value of IP Type HR-BD................................IN-41
1. Additionally Registering the Master CL
11. Powering OFF the CL/RU................................................. IN-43 (Procedures on the CL1)....................................................Appx IN-2
2. Registering the RU (Procedures on the CL2).....................Appx IN-4
12. Cleaning the CL/RU........................................................... IN-43 3. Registering the Machine Information
(CONNECTING EQUIPMENT)..........................................Appx IN-5
4. Saving Configuration and Exiting Service Utility................Appx IN-5
5. Verifying Switching of Master CL........................................Appx IN-6
Appendix 3. Securing the Machine with
the Anti-Topple Retainers........................... Appx IN-7
1. Components of Anti-Topple Retainer Kit............................Appx IN-7
2. Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainers........Appx IN-8
Appendix 4. Operation Check for
the 15x30 IP Adapter................................. Appx IN-12
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.25
Contents Performance Check (PC) 0.26
Performance Check (PC)
CR-IR 363 Performance Check List.........................................PC-1
Installation Information........................................................................... PC-1
Checklist................................................................................................ PC-1
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.26
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
12.06.2019 01 New release All pages
02.28.2020 02 Revision All pages
CR-IR 363 Service Manual
Safety Precaution
011-211-02E CR-IR 363 Service Manual
02.28.2020
Safety Precaution-1
1. Safety Precautions Optical Parts
When servicing the optical parts with the protective housings removed, be sure to
Warnings and cautions regarding the procedures should be observed to avoid turn OFF the power switch.
possible physical hazards and serious accidents that may occur during installation and Never remove the scanning optics unit covers.
servicing. For dust removal procedures, observe the instructions described in the service
Labels that describe relevant precautions are attached on the machine. manual.
The instructions on such labels should also be observed during procedures. Some high-voltage parts, such as the photomultiplier, may not be sufficiently
discharged even after power is turned OFF. When servicing such parts, exercise
1.1 General Precautions due care to avoid electric shock hazards (not to touch the connector and terminal
carelessly).
WARNING Before removing the protective housings, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage
switch (HV switch). If the machine is powered ON with any of the protective
No modification of this equipment is allowed. housings removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged.
Other Working Precautions
Power Supply When performing servicing procedures with the protective housings removed
Unless otherwise instructed in the Service Manual, be sure to turn OFF the power under the powered condition, turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV switch).
of the machine and unplug the power plug before servicing. With the power plug Carefully proceed with the procedures while checking the instructions described
still plugged, you may experience electric shock, burn, or secondary damage due to in the service manual, and, when the procedures are completed, put the removed
short circuit even when the machine is powered OFF. It should be noted, however, protective housings back exactly where they were.
that some servicing procedures, such as voltage measurement, cannot be performed Do not remove or install any part or component while the machine is powered,
under power-OFF condition. In such cases, use due care to avoid electric shock, burn, because of possible electric shock hazards.
or secondary damage due to short circuit, as instructed in this manual. When performing checks or adjustments under the powered condition, exercise due
- Do not connect any unspecified device. care against electric shock or other hazards.
- Ensure sufficient space around the power plug or the inlet. Do not touch the parts (such as erasure lamps) that remain at high temperature
because you may suffer burns.
Drive Mechanism When servicing the scanning optics unit and printed circuit boards, be sure to wear
Be sure to turn OFF the power before servicing the gears, cams, belts, and other drive an antistatic wristband to remove static electricity built on the human body. Static
mechanism parts. Otherwise, your body or clothing may be entangled. electricity may cause damage to the printed circuit boards.
However, there may be cases where the procedures cannot be performed under Secure the machine onto the floor in place by use of its adjustable feet or retainers.
power-OFF condition. In such cases, use due care to avoid entanglement of your Keep clean the product labels, safety standards labels, product serial number
hand, foot, hairs, and clothing with any rotating mechanism, as instructed in this indications, and so forth attached on the machine, and do not peel them or put
manual. another label over them.
Before powering ON the machine after completion of the servicing procedures,
Heavy Objects make sure that all the parts, screws, connectors, and so forth that were removed
Exercise due care regarding your working posture to avoid back pain during removal have been reinstalled as appropriate, and that no tool is left in the machine.
and installation of heavy objects. Grounding
Safety Devices Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and
additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining
Safety devices (such as fuses, circuit breakers, interlock switches, panels, and covers) screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for
should always be enabled. Never attempt to make any alteration or modification that servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and
may impair their safety features. retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set
forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to
properly secure the parts.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-1
Safety Precaution-2
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation 1.3 Precautions on Patient Environment
As indicated in the Certification and Indication Label attached on the lower left-hand Before the machine is installed, the supervisor at the machine installation site (the
side cover of the machine, the machine complies with “Laser Products - Conformance hospital’s director) should check to see whether the machine is installed in the patient
with IEC60825-1:2014 and IEC 60601-2-22; Final Guidance for Industry and FDA environment or not.
(Laser Notice No. 56) and EN60825-1:2014.” The image reader incorporates a laser
with a maximum output of 50 mW (Class 3B, semiconductor laser wavelength of 660 Additional Protective Grounding
nm, red visible light), but you will not be exposed to any hazard if you perform tasks
If the CR-IR363 is installed in the patient environment with the connected equipment
as instructed in the service manual.
in the non-medically used room, the additional protective grounding will be required.
Precautions Against Laser Exposure Definitions of "patient environment", "medically-used room", and "non-medically used
room" are given below.
Observe the following precautions to avoid laser exposure.
Patient Environment
Procedures that require precautions against laser exposure
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
When performing the following procedures, observe the instructions exactly as tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
described in this manual to avoid laser exposure. After the procedures are completed, 2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
put the removed protective housings and screws back exactly in their original position It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
to prevent leakage of a laser beam out of the machine.
- Removal and reinstallation of the scanning optics unit. Medically-Used Room
- Replacement and cleaning of subscanning unit parts. Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
Preventive maintenance for keeping the machine in compliance
grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
In order to keep the machine in compliance, perform preventive maintenance grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
programs described in "Preventive Maintenance Volume" at intervals specified. used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
Things that should not be done to avoid laser exposure
Observe the following precautions to avoid laser exposure. Non-Medically Used Room
- Never attempt to perform procedures other than instructed in this manual because Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
you may be exposed to laser beam radiation.
- Do not reflect a laser beam by placing a mirror or the like in the laser beam path.
- Do not alter the light path of a laser beam.
- Do not replace optical parts while the laser is energized.
- Do not attempt to make optical axis adjustment in the field. Although the
semiconductor laser beam is red visible light, field adjustment of the optical axis
cannot be done.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-2
Safety Precaution-3
2. Labels
2.1 Laser Precaution Labels
2.1.1 Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations
Below are illustrated the protective housings and attachment locations of laser
precaution labels, as specified in "Laser Products - Conformance with IEC60825-
1:2014 and IEC 60601-2-22; Final Guidance for Industry and FDA (Laser Notice No.
56) and IEC60825-1:2014.” issued by the FDA of the U.S.
Machine main body
Scanning Optics Unit
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-3
Safety Precaution-4
2.1.2 List of Laser Precaution Labels IEC60825-1 Class 3B Panel Label
HHS Certification and Identification Label
Manufacturer Label
Scanning optics unit manufacturer label
FR9H0018.EPS
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-4
Safety Precaution-5
2.2 Other Labels Ratings Indication Labels
For use in Japan
2.2.1 Attachment Locations for Ratings Indication Label
and Other Labels
REFERENCES
- The type of label is different depending on destinations and machine serial numbers.
- There are some equipment on which manufacturer labels are not attached,
depending on the serial numbers.
Attachment Position of Rating Indication Label
For use outside Japan
Ratings
Indication
Label
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-5
Safety Precaution-6
2.2.2 Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment Feed/Load Conveyor Unit
Locations
Cassette Set Unit
Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-6
Safety Precaution-7
Post-reading conveyor unit Erasure Conveyor Unit
Light-Collecting Guide (Front)
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-7
Safety Precaution-8
Light-Collecting Guide (Back)
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-8
Safety Precaution-9
Covers Cassette Insertion Operation Labels
NOTE
Always use a cable conforming to the specification at a position with a caution label
applied.
Caution Label
Caution Label
Additional protective ground mark
Switch cover
(rear) Switch cover
Switch cover (front) FR9H0039.EPS
Rear
LOAD L LOAD N
Front
LINE L LINE N : ON
: OFF
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-9
Safety Precaution-10
3. Protective Housings Against Laser 4. CLASSIFICATION
Exposure
Even when the protective housings are removed for servicing, laser beams will never 1. According to the type of protection against electrical shock
leak out from the machine unless the optical path is intentionally changed. However, if CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
the optical path is changed inadvertently during optics-related procedures, the service
engineer or other people around the machine may be possibly exposed to laser 2. According to the degree of protection against electrical shock
radiation.
During optics-related procedures, carefully perform the procedures while checking the NO APPLIED PART
instructions described in this manual, and after the procedures are completed, restore
the protective housings removed back exactly where they were. 3. Protection against harmful ingress of water or particulate matter
Protective Housing of the Machine IP00
The removable protective housings of the machine are illustrated below. The four
covers marked by in the illustration below are protective housings against laser
4. According to the degree of safety of application in the presence
exposure. of a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or
nitrous oxide.
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics mixture
with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
Lower left-hand side cover
Lower rear cover 5. According to the mode of operation
CONTINUOUS OPERATION
Lower front light protect plate
Lower front cover Lower
right-hand side cover
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-10
Safety Precaution-11
5. Cautions on Electromagnetic WARNING
Waves • Do not place any objects that generate strong electromagnetic waves near
this equipment.
5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) • Do not use mobile RF communications equipment within 30cm (11.8 in.) of
The FCR PROFECT CS Plus system complies with the standards for EMC that are this equipment.
applied in various countries as follows. • Do not use this equipment near devices that generate strong electromagnetic
waves, such as thermotherapy devices or HF surgical equipment.
• IEC 60601-1-2:2014 (USA) • If this equipment is used near commercially available electronic devices,
• EN 60601-1-2:2015 (Europe) such as mobile phones, laptop computers or home appliances, which
* Further information for Europe is described in section 5.2. generate electromagnetic waves, this equipment may malfunction due to
electromagnetic interference.
WARNING
Electromagnetic wave-sensitive parts, such as the FDD, HDD, photomultiplier,
etc., are used in this equipment.
Do not place any objects that emit strong electromagnetic waves near the
equipment.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to other devices in the vicinity.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be
determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving device.
• Increase the separation between the equipment.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
other device(s) are connected.
Consult the manufacturer or field service technician for help.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-11
Safety Precaution-12
5.2 Further information for EN 60601-1-2:2015 Test items (Tables 1 to 5)
• Table 1
Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emissions
EMC and needs to be installed and put into service according to the The CR-IR 363 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
EMC information provided in the accompanying documents. The customer or the user of the CR-IR 363 should assure that it is used in such an
environment.
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
medical electrical equipment. The CR-IR 363 uses RF energy only for its internal
function.
RF emissions
Group 1 Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not
Information regarding the cables affecting EMC is as follows.
CISPR 11
likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic
equipment.
List of Cables RF emissions
Class B
Name FUJIFILM Parts Code General Specification CISPR 11
The CR-IR 363 is suitable for use in all
Power Cable 136N0376 (UK) - Harmonic emissions
Complies establishments, including domestic establishments
136N0377 (Europe) IEC 61000-3-2
and those directly connected to the public low-voltage
Voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for
I/F Cable - Cat5E or more. domestic purposes.
Straight cable of UTP type. fluctuations/flicker
Complies
emissions
IEC 61000-3-3
The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those
Note: Harmonic emission IEC 61000-3-2 and voltage fluctuation/flicker emission IEC 61000-
specified, with the exception of transducers and cables sold by 3-3 are applicable only to the devices with a rated voltage of AC220V or higher.
FUJIFILM Corporation as replacement parts for internal components,
may result in increased emissions or decreased immunity of the
equipment.
The equipment should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other
equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the equipment
should be observed to verify normal operation in the configuration in
which it will be used.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-12
Safety Precaution-13
• Table 2 • Table 3
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The CR-IR 363 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The CR-IR 363 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the CR-IR 363 should assure that it is used in such an The customer or the user of the CR-IR 363 should assure that it is used in such an
environment. environment.
Electromagnetic IEC 60601-1-2 test Compliance Electromagnetic environment -
IEC 60601-1-2 test Immunity test
Immunity test Compliance level environment level level guidance
level
- guidance
Conducted RF 3 V 3V Portable and mobile RF
Electrostatic ±8kV contact ±8kV contact Floors should be wood, IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz communications equipment should
discharge ±15kV air ±15kV air concrete or ceramic tile. be used no closer to any part of the
(ESD) If floors are covered with ISM Freqency band * See Table 5. CR-IR 363, including cables, than the
IEC 61000-4-2 synthetic material, the Amateur radio band recommended separation distance
relative humidity should calculated from the equation applicable
be at least 30%. to the frequency of the transmitter.
Electrical fast ±2kV for power supply ±2kV for power supply Mains power quality Recommended separation distance
transient/burst lines lines should be that of a typical d = 1.2 P 150 kHz to 80 MHz
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1kV for input/output ±1kV for input/output commercial or hospital Radiated RF 10 V/m 10 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.7 GHz d = 1.2 P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
lines lines environment. d = 2.3 P 800 MHz to 2.7 GHz
Surge ±1kV line(s) to line(s) ±1kV line(s) to line(s) Mains power quality Proximity fields * See Table 5. where P is the maximum output power
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2kV line(s) to earth ±2kV line(s) to earth should be that of a typical from RF rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
commercial or hospital according to the transmitter manufacturer
environment. and d is the recommended separation
Voltage 0% U T 0% U T Mains power quality distance in metres (m).
dips, short for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle should be that of a typical Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
interruptions and 1 cycle and 1 cycle commercial or hospital as determined by an electromagnetic
and voltage environment. site survey,a should be less than the
variations on 70% U T 70% U T If the user of the CR-IR compliance level in each frequency
power supply (30% dip in U T ) (30% dip in U T ) 363 requires continued range.b
input lines for 25 cycles for 25 cycles operation during power Interference may occur in the vicinity
IEC 61000-4-11 mains interruptions, it is of equipment marked with the following
0% U T 0% U T recommended that the symbol:
for 5 s for 5 s CR-IR 363 be powered
from an uninterruptible
power supply or a battery.
Power 30 A/m 30 A/m Power frequency NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range
frequency magnetic fields should applies.
(50/60Hz) be at levels characteristic NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
magnetic field of a typical location in affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
IEC 61000-4-8 a typical commercial or
a Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless)
hospital environment.
telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV
NOTE: U T is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level. broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy.
To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered.
If the measured field strength in the location in which the CR-IR 363 is used exceeds the
applicable RF compliance, the CR-IR 363 should be observed to verify normal operation.
If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as
reorienting or relocating the CR-IR 363.
b Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-13
Safety Precaution-14
• Table 4 • Table 5
Recommended separation distances between Test compliance levels between portable and mobile RF communications equipment
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the CR-IR 363 and the CR-IR 363
The CR-IR 363 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which radiated ISM (Industrial, Scientific and Medical) frequency band compliance level
RF disturbances are controlled.
The customer or the user of the CR-IR 363 can help prevent electromagnetic interference Frequency Test level Frequency Test level
by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications MHz V MHz V
equipment (transmitters) and the CR-IR 363 as recommended below, according to the
maximum output power of the communications equipment. 6.765 6 13.553 6
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter 26.957 6 40.66 6
Rated maximum
output power of m
Amateur radio band compliance level
transmitter 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MH to 2.7 GHz
W Frequency Test Level Frequency Test Level
d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 2.3 P MHz V MHz V
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23 1.8 6 3.5 6
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73 5.3 6 7 6
1 1.2 1.2 2.3 10.1 6 14 6
10 3.8 3.8 7.3 18.07 6 21 6
100 12 12 23 24.89 6 28 6
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended 50 6
separation distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to
the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the Proximity fields from RF compliance level
transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
Frequency Test level Frequency Test level
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range MHz V/m MHz V/m
applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. 385 27 450 28
Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from
structures, objects and people. 710 9 745 9
780 9 810 28
870 28 930 28
1462 10 1720 28
1845 28 1970 28
2450 28 3540 10
5240 9 5500 9
5785 9
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-14
Safety Precaution-15
6. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS 7. Cautions on Network
Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified - Before connecting this system to the network with other systems, confirm that the
according to the respective IEC standards (i.e. IEC60950-1 for data processing other systems are not affected. If they are affected, take countermeasures such as
equipment and IEC60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations network separation.
shall comply with the system standard IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-1:2005 - After modifying the network, confirm that this system is not affected. If it is affected,
Chapter 16. Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input part take appropriate countermeasures including:
or signal output part configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible that - Replacing connected devices
the system complies with the requirements of IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601- - Connecting additional devices
1:2005 Chapter 16. If in doubt, consult the technical services department or your local - Removing devices
representative. - Updating devices
- Upgrading devices
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-15
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
12.06.2019 01 New release All pages
02.28.2020 02 Revision All pages
CR-IR 363 Service Manual
Product Specifications
011-211-02E CR-IR 363 Service Manual
02.28.2020
Product Specifications-1
1. Specifications of Machine 1.2 Available IP Sizes and Types
This equipment can automatically recognize inch/metric. The IP sizes of available
inch/metric are listed below.
1.1 Product Code Inch settings ST-VI (standard type): 14”x17”, 14”x14”, 10”x12”, 8”x10”
HR-BD (high resolution type): 24x30cmHR (dual side),
Product code Item Qty. Remarks
18x24cmHR (dual side)
FCR PROFECT CS PLUS
(For outside Japan) Metric settings ST-VI (standard type): 35x43cm, 35x35cm,
CR IR 363 RU P2 E 1 #72001 or Later
Image reader machine main body 24x30cm, 15x30cm*1, 18x24cm
CR-IR 363 HR-BD (high resolution type): 24x30cmHR (dual side),
18x24cmHR (dual side)
*1：If you want to use the IP with 15 x 30 size, use the optional IP adapter and the
cassette with 14" x 17" (35 x 43 cm) size.
Use the following serial numbers’ cassettes with 14" x 17" (35 x 43 cm) size for IP
adapter.
CCWSL17-400001 or later, or CCWSL17-500001 or later
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Product Specifications-1
Product Specifications-2
1.3 List of Optional Items 1.5 Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity
Product code Item Qty. Remarks Dimensions
For retaining the W655×D740×H1480 (mm)
IR 363 FLOOR FIX KIT * #(E) Anti-topple retainer kit 1
machine
Patient environment
IR 363 AC CORD P 100-120V # 1
installation kit
FOR USA
IR 363 AC CORD 100-120V UL E AC power cable for 1
machine main body
IR ADAPTER FOR IP IP ADAPTER for 15x30 IP
1
15×30CM E (14”x17”/35x43cm size)
1.4 Product Specifications
Maximum Heat Generation
Standby: 340 W approx.
Operating: 500 W approx.
Noise
Standby: 50 dB or less
Operating: 60 dB or less
Warm-up Time
Power non-interlinked setting (when RU is started up alone)
2 min 20 sec approx.
Weight
Power interlinked setting (when RU is started up by CL) 270 kg approx.
2 min 30 sec approx.
Center of Gravity
I/F cable
Height: 485 mm
UTP cable of straight type and Category 5E or more.
From right-hand side: 345 mm
From front: 355 mm
NOTE
The center of gravity is as measured from the adjustable foot.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Product Specifications-2
Product Specifications-3
1.6 Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine 1.7 Environmental Conditions
Moving Means Climate Conditions
Double-wheel caster (variable-direction/no-brake) x4
Operating
Fixing Means Temperature: 15 to 30°C
- Adjustable foot x4, or retaining member x2 Relative humidity: 15 to 80% RH
Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1060 hPa
Heat generation: 350 W approx.
Non-operating
Temperature: 0 to 45°C
Relative humidity: 10 to 90% RH (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1060 hPa
Transit/storage
Temperature: -10 to 50°C
Relative humidity: 10 to 90% RH (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1060 hPa
Floor (Machine Surface) Vibration
10 to 55 Hz in frequency and 0.0075 mm or less in amplitude
Floor Levelness
10 mm/m (inclination: 1/100 or less), for front, rear, right, and left
Floor Flatness
10 mm/m or less
Variable Magnetic Field
DC 0.3 Gauss or less
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Product Specifications-3
Product Specifications-4
1.8 Electrical Specifications 1.9 Installation Space and Servicing Space
Frequency Installation Space
Single-phase, 50-60Hz, ±3%
Input Voltage
Single-phase, 120-240V~(AC)±10%
Capacity
0.77 kVA
Rated Amperage
Single-phase, 120-240V~(AC), 50-60Hz : 7A
Power Consumption
Maximum: 770 W
Servicing Space
Watt-Hour When servicing the machine, the space indicated below should be secured.
Operating: 420 Wh
Standby: 300 Wh
Power-down mode: 300 Wh
Sleep mode: 200 Wh
Remote standby: 15 Wh or less
Grounding
Class D grounding (former Class 3 grounding) (100 Ω or less)
Overload Protection
10 A
Power Cord
3 m, with 3P plug and connector
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Product Specifications-4
Product Specifications-5
1.10 Disposal
1.10.1 Disposal of Machine
When the machine is to be disposed of, the CPU39A board, which contains a battery,
should be removed from the machine before its disposal.
Be sure to return the removed CPU39A board to the Parts Center.
1.10.2 Disposal of IP
Regarding the IP disposal, follow the instructions to dispose as laws are provided in
each country and region. We will provide the product safety information as needed.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Product Specifications-5
Product Specifications-6
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Product Specifications-6
Product Specifications-7
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Product Specifications-7
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
12.06.2019 01 New release All pages
02.28.2020 02 Revision All pages
CR-IR 363 Service Manual
Machine Description (MD)
011-211-02E CR-IR 363 Service Manual
02.28.2020
MD-1
1. Machine Overview 1.2 System Configuration
This device uses a compliant network with IEEE802.3 and adopts FRUP as a data
communication protocol.
1.1 Features Basic system configuration examples are described here.
u NOTE u
Features of the Machine If the network is shut down due to a network device failure or any other cause, this
device is no longer able to transfer image data.
The machine is network connectable via TCP/IP (100BASE-TX).
A commonly available power source may be used to supply power to System Configuration Example (1)
the machine.
The machine is connected to the CL via a network.
Improved throughput A connection with the CL is established over Ethernet (100Base-TX).
To support institutions that conduct large amounts of processing, four shelves of
cassette inserting entrances are provided to ensure improved throughout.
Removal of IP static electricity
IP static electricity is removed by the electrically-conductive ball bearing and bearing
for each conveyance roller, as well as by the antistatic brush.
System Configuration Example (2)
The machine may be connected to a plurality of CLs, including a single master CL.
The master CL contains the RU's configuration data and other information.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-1
MD-2
1.3 Overall Machine Configuration and Top cover
Component Names
Upper rear cover
External View of Machine
Upper right-hand side cover
Operation panel
Upper front cover Upper left-hand
POWER lamp side cover
Middle left-hand
Cassette set unit External device side cover
(four shelves) interface
(I/F cable)
System power switch
(Stand-by switch)
Shelf number
Circuit
breaker
Lower front cover
Cassette removal
lamp Lower rear cover Lower left-hand
side cover
Cassette loading lamp
Power plug
Lower right-hand
side cover
Middle right-hand side cover
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-2
MD-3
Nomenclature and Functions Operation Panel
Name Function
Operation panel Operation panel for the RU main body.
POWER lamp It is lit (in green) when the circuit breaker is pushed in the "I" Image reading
position and power is turned ON. Since the circuit breaker
remains in the ON state, the POWER lamp is always lit.
System power switch Power switch for the RU. When this switch is pressed with the
system power switch in the RU setting and the circuit breaker in
the ON state, the RU is powered ON.
Cassette set unit This unit accommodates cassettes that contain exposed IPs. A
(four shelves) cassette may be loaded into an unloaded shelf of the cassette
feeder.
Cassette loading lamp It is lit (in green) when the RU starts up normally, indicating that
cassette loading is ready. While it is not lit, a cassette cannot be
loaded.
Cassette removal It is lit (in blue) when removal of a processed cassette is ready.
lamp
Dust filter It is attached in the entrance of the air-intake fan.
Circuit breaker It should normally be in the ON position.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-3
MD-4
1.4 Machine Components 1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths
1.4.1 Unit Locations
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-4
MD-5
1.4.3 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions A list of sensor and barcode reader names and functions is presented below.
Cassette set unit
I/O Locations: Cassette Set Unit and Feed/Load Conveyor Unit
Symbol Name Type Function
Locations of the sensors and barcode reader are illustrated below.
SA1, 7, 13, 19 Cassette ejection PI (5mm) Detects that the cassette has
sensor been ejected.
SA2, 8, 14, 20 Cassette IN sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the cassette has
been inserted.
SA3, 9, 15, 21 Cassette hold sensor PI (5mm) Detects that cassette hold has
been completed.
SA4, 10, 16, Suction cup HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the suction cup
22 arm is in its home position.
SA5, 11, 17, Suction sensor Suction Detects that the suction cup
23 sensor has sucked the IP.
SA6, 12, 18, Inch/metric sensor PI (5mm) Determines the IP width.
24
BCRA1, 2, 3, 4 Barcode reader Scans the barcode of a dual-
surface IP cassette.
Feed/load conveyor unit
Symbol Name Type Function
SB1, 2, 3, 4 IP feed/load sensor PI (19mm) Detects that an IP being
(cassette side) conveyed is present.
SB5 Pre-BCR IP sensor PI (19mm) Detects that an IP being
conveyed is present.
SB6 Pre-convergence IP PI (19mm) Detects that an IP being
sensor conveyed is present.
SB7, 8, 9 Path changeover shelf PI (5mm) Detects the position of the path
sensor changeover guide.
SB10 Convergence path PI (5mm) Detects the position of the
changeover sensor convergence path changeover
guide.
SB11 Path changeover HP PI (5mm) Detects the machine's initial
sensor position and the position of the
path changeover guide.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-5
MD-6
I/O Locations: Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit, Subscanning A list of sensor and barcode reader names and functions is presented below.
Unit, and Post-Reading Conveyor Unit Side-positioning conveyor unit
Locations of the sensors and barcode reader are illustrated below.
Symbol Name Type Function
SC1 Side-positioning PI (5mm) Detects that the side-positioning
mechanism HP sensor mechanism is in its home position.
SC2 Grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the grip roller is in its
home position.
SC3 Side-positioning IP PI (19mm) Detects that an IP being conveyed
sensor is present.
SC4 Cleaning guide HP PI (5mm) Detects that the cleaning guide is
sensor in its home position.
BCRC1 Barcode reader Scans the barcode of an IP of
single-surface type.
Subscanning unit
Symbol Name Type Function
SZ1 IP leading-edge sensor Laser light- Detects the leading edge of the
receiving element IP when it is read.
SZ2 Driving-side grip PI (5mm) Detects the driving-side grip
release HP sensor state.
SZ3 Driven-side grip release PI (5mm) Detects the driven-side grip
HP sensor state.
SZ4 Dust-removal HP PI (5mm) Detects that the antistatic
sensor member is in its home position.
SZ5 IP stopper HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the IP stopper is in
its home position.
Post-reading conveyor unit
Symbol Name Type Function
SD1 Grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the grip roller is in its
home position.
SD2 Post-reading conveyance PI (19mm) Detects that an IP being conveyed
IP sensor is present.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-6
MD-7
I/O Locations: Erasure Conveyor Unit and Housing A list of sensor names and functions is presented below.
Locations of the sensors are illustrated below. Erasure conveyor unit
Symbol Name Type Function
SE1 Post-reading conveyance PI (19mm) Detects that an IP being
standby IP sensor conveyed is present.
FRONT SE2 Switchback standby IP PI (19mm) Detects that an IP being
sensor conveyed is present.
SE4 Erasure side-positioning PI (5mm) Detects that the side-
mechanism HP sensor positioning mechanism is in its
home position.
SE5 Grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the grip roller is in
SG2 its home position.
Housing
SG1 Symbol Name Type Function
SG1 Side-positioning entrance PI (19mm) IP conveyance sensor
IP sensor
SG2 “11x14 IP” determination PI (19mm) IP conveyance sensor
sensor
SE4
SE5
Erasure conveyor unit
SE2 SE1
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-7
MD-8
I/O Locations: Cassette Set Unit and Feed/Load Conveyor Unit A list of motor, clutch, solenoid, pump, and solenoid valve names and functions is
presented below.
Locations of the motors, clutches, solenoids, pumps, and solenoid valves are
illustrated below. Cassette set unit
Symbol Name Type Function
SOLA1, 2, 3, Cassette hold solenoid Power-down Holds and releases the
4 solenoid cassette hold pin.
MA1, 2, 3, 4 Suction cup driving Pulse motor Drives the suction cup arm
motor and ejects a cassette when the
clutch is turned ON.
PA1, 2, 3, 4 IP suction pump Pump Sucks when turned ON.
SVA1, 2, 3, 4 IP leak valve Solenoid Leaks when turned ON.
valve
CLA1, 2, 3, 4 Cassette ejection clutch Clutch Transfers the motive power of
the suction cup driving motor
to the rollers during cassette
ejection.
Feed/load conveyor unit
Symbol Name Type Function
MB1 IP transport motor Pulse motor Transports an IP.
MB2 IP transport motor Pulse motor Transports an IP.
MB3 Convergence path Pulse motor Changes the conveyance path.
changeover guide driving
motor
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-8
MD-9
I/O Locations: Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit, Subscanning A list of motor names and functions is presented below.
Unit, and Post-Reading Conveyor Unit Side-positioning conveyor unit
Locations of the motors are illustrated below.
Symbol Name Type Function
MC1 Side-positioning motor Pulse motor Drives the side-positioning
mechanism
FRONT
MC2 Grip release motor Pulse motor Grips and releases the grip roller.
MC3 IP transport motor Pulse motor Transports an IP.
MC4 Cleaning guide driving motor Pulse motor Drives the cleaning guide.
Side-positioning
conveyor unit
Subscanning unit
Symbol Name Type Function
MC4
MD2 MZ1 Subscanning motor 5-phase Transports an IP.
pulse motor
MZ2 Grip driving motor DC motor Grips and releases the driving and
driven shafts.
MD1
MZ3 Dust removal motor DC motor Removes dust deposited on the
light-collecting guide and mirror.
MZ4 IP stopper driving motor Pulse motor Drives the IP stopper.
Post-reading conveyor unit
Post-reading MC3 Symbol Name Type Function
conveyor unit MC1
MD1 Grip release motor Pulse motor Grips and releases the grip roller.
MZ2 MZ3
MC2 MD2 IP transport motor Pulse motor Transports an IP.
MZ4
MZ1
Subscanning unit
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-9
MD-10
I/O Locations: Erasure Conveyor Unit, Housing and Power Unit A list of motor, solenoid names and functions is presented below.
Locations of the motors, solenoids are illustrated below. Erasure conveyor unit
ME1 Symbol Name Type Function
ME1 IP transport motor Pulse motor Transports an IP.
ME2 Side-positioning motor Pulse motor Drives the side-positioning
mechanism.
ME3 Grip release motor Pulse motor Grips and releases the grip
roller.
SOLE1 Branch path changeover Power-down Effects path changeover.
guide driving solenoid solenoid
ME3
ME2
Erasure conveyor unit SOLE1
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-10
MD-11
1.4.4 Board Locations
LED board Start-point detection board
(ERS37B) (SYN12A)
Polygon driver board
(PCK17P)
ONT
FR LD driver board
(LDD12A)
Sensor driver board
(SND39A(1))
Sensor driver board
(SND39A(2))
T
ON
FR
PNL board
(PNL38A)
LED board
Photomultiplier board
(LED17A)
(PMT27B)
CPU board
(CPU39A)
IP leading-edge
detection board
Photomultiplier board (PMR27B) (SED23A)
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-11
MD-12
1.5 System Block Diagram
PSU39A Board SND39A Board(1) Cassette Set IP Removal Unit(1)
Power Supply SOLA1: Solenoid
Inlet Power Switch MA1: Pulse Motor
C
ERS37B Board
AC100-240V LED’s PA1: Pump
50-60Hz A
5.5A SVA1: Solenoid Valve
ERS37B Board
B B LED’s CLA1: Clutch
Sensor
mOZP-350-24- +24V PNL38A Board LCD Panel
AC-P12 JSER 14.6A Barcode Reader: BCRA1
(AC250V,15A) (25A Peak)
Input:
AC100-240V Cassette Set IP Removal Unit(2)
50-60Hz, Erasure Conveyor Unit
SOLA2: Solenoid
Output: Pulse Moter: ME1
DC+24V 10A Input: MA2: Pulse Motor
3120-F521-P7T1-W01J-10A Pulse Moter: ME2
(AC250V,10A) DC+24V
PA2: Pump
Output: Pulse Moter: ME3
DC+24V SVA2: Solenoid Valve
DC+15V Solenoid: SOLE1
AC Line FANG1 DC-15V CLA2: Clutch
GND Line DC+5V Sensor
Sensor
DC Line
Barcode Reader: BCRA2
Cassette Set IP Removal Unit(3)
Subscanning Unit
LED39A Board SND39A Board(2) SOLA3: Solenoid
CPU39A Board Sensor
CRD Board
MA3: Pulse Motor
DC Moter: MZ1
PA3: Pump
DC Moter: MZ2
LED17A Board(1)
SVA3: Solenoid Valve
DC Moter: MZ3
LAN CLA3: Clutch
LAN isolator LED17A Board(2) DC Moter: MZ4
Sensor
Barcode Reader: BCRA3
LED17A Board(3) Side-positioning Converyor Unit
Pulse Moter: MC1
Cassette Set IP Removal Unit(4)
LED17A Board(4) Pulse Moter: MC2 SOLA4: Solenoid
Pulse Moter: MC3 MA4: Pulse Moteor
SED23A Board Pulse Moter: MC4 PA4: Pump
Sensor SVA4: Solenoid Valve
BCRC1: Barcode Reader CLA4: Clutch
Sensor
Laser Unit
839Y100086 Barcode Reader: BCRA4
Feed/load Conveyor Unit
Sensor
PMT27B Board Light Collection Rear Convevor Unit
Inverter
Guide Pulse Moter: MB1
MD1: DC Motor
PMR27B Board Light Collection Pulse Moter: MB2 MD2: DC Motor
Inverter
Guide
Pulse Moter: MB3 Sensor
Sensor
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-12
MD-13
2. Descriptions of Software Control
u NOTE u
In this chapter, the "RU Application," "RU IP Address," and "RU Configuration" are
referred to shortly as RU-AP, RU IP ADDR, and CONFIGURATION, respectively.
2.1 Network Settings
Settings for respective network items are made as follows.
The contents that have been set from Machine Maintenance (LCD panel) are retained
in the FLASH ROM on the CPU39A board.
Setup items Setting means Factory default values
RU IP address Machine Maintenance 172.16.1.10
RU subnet mask Machine Maintenance 255.255.0.0
RU default gateway Machine Maintenance 0.0.0.0
FTP server IP address Machine Maintenance 172.16.1.20
CL IP address RU PC-TOOL EDIT CL NAME 172.16.1.20
u NOTE u
The IP address of the RU can only be set from Machine Maintenance (LCD panel).
REFERENCE
As a rule, the IP addresses of the CL and RU are used as the same setting.
However, if the FTP server is centrally managed at a single location by distinguishing
between the IP addresses of the FTP server and CL, you should gain full
understanding of this setup before use.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-13
MD-14
2.2 Master CL Switching Function Example of Master CL Switching
Once several master CL's are registered in the RU PC-TOOL, the User Utility allows Scenario where the system is operated with RU-A set in master CL-A and RU-B/C set
the user to selectively switch the master CL; provided that the following restrictions in master CL-B, but is switched to a system with RU-A/B/C under control of CL-B.
should be met.
{IN:Appendix 2._Setting the Master CL}
Restrictions {Instruction Manual}
When the master CL is switched, the following service information
and service procedures are inaccessible while switching is being
done.
Exercise due care when the master CL switching function is used.
Service information: ERRLOG, HISTORYLOG
Service procedures: All procedures performed from the RU PC-TOOL
The RU should have been registered in CONFIGURATION of the CL to
be switched.
REFERENCES
- The master CL is a CL that controls the RU. If the master CL goes down,
system processing cannot be executed.
- Up to four master CL's may be registered into the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-14
MD-15
2.3 Error Handling 2.4 SLEEP Mode
The RU resumes its operation by attempting a retry(s), except under condition where The "SLEEP mode" is such that in order to conserve power, the state within the
it is inoperable. machine automatically transitions to the power-saving mode when the RU is not
operated within a specified period of time.
2.3.1 Error Handling
When an I/O error (mechanical, scanner, etc.) occurs between cassette insertion and 2.4.1 Operation in SLEEP Mode
IP reading, the IP is returned to the cassette.
(1) When the machine transitions to the SLEEP mode, the following
2.3.2 Cases where Retry is Impossible (FATAL Error) operations are performed and the power-saving mode is activated.
- The energization of the motors, except for the cassette set unit, is stopped.
(1) When the function of the CPU located on the CPU39A board stops. The cassette set unit keeps its motors energized in order to allow the cassette
(2) When the power supply voltage output stops. to be loaded at all times.
- The LCD backlight is turned OFF.
(3) When the communication between the RU and CL stops. → The LCD screen turns blank.
(2) Even in the SLEEP mode, the cassette removal lamp and cassette
loading lamp remain unchanged. That is because they indicate that
the cassette may be loaded or removed even in the SLEEP mode.
Operation panel
Shelf number
Cassette removal lamp
Cassette loading lamp
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-15
MD-16
2.4.2 Transition to the SLEEP Mode 2.4.3 Recovery from SLEEP Mode
Transition Requirements Recover Requirements
(1) If "SLEEP Mode ON" is set in the User Utility and the RU is not (1) When the LCD panel is touched.
operated within the preset "SLEEP mode transition time" while the
(2) When the cassette is loaded.
RU remains in READY state, then the state transitions to the SLEEP
mode. (3) When the cassette is removed.
REFERENCE - Recovers when the cassette is removed from the eject position.
- Does not recover when the cassette is removed from any halfway position.
The SLEEP mode is not activated while operation is being performed in the User
Utility and while an error message is being displayed.
SLEEP mode Diagnosis upon recovery Routine state
(2) When "SLEEP Mode ON" is set from the LCD panel during shutdown
processing. Requirements Image reading Image reading
→ The state immediately transitions to the SLEEP mode. described above About
(1)or(2)or(3) 10 seconds
Setting of Transition Time
- The setting of "SLEEP Mode" is made by the "Sleep Timer" of the User Utility.
- Time setting may be done with "SLEEP Mode ON" enabled.
- The time is settable in 1-minute or 10-minute increments.
Black screen Buttons are not displayed. Buttons are displayed.
Diagnosis upon Recovery
The RU performs the following diagnostics upon recovery.
- Mechanical diagnostics 3 (home positioning)
Because motor energization is stopped while in the SLEEP mode, it always
performs mechanical home positioning before recovering to the Ready state.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-16
MD-17
2.5 Bootup Processing 2.6 RU Shutdown Processing
Initialization progress can be confirmed by the progress bar displayed during bootup. Mechanical shutdown processing and saving of log data are referred to as "RU
shutdown processing".
Progress Completed Items u NOTE u
30% “Mechanical Initialization 1” - If the power is turned OFF without performing RU shutdown processing, log data will
45% “Mechanical Initialization 1” & “Scanner Initialization” not be saved.
- The log data on FTP server will not be updated when shut down in an offline
55% “Mechanical Initialization 1” & “Mechanical Initialization 2” environment. In such instances, the log data will be saved in the RU, and the
70% “Mechanical Initialization 1” & “Mechanical Initialization 2” & “Scanner Initialization” log data on the FTP server will be updated next time when startup in an online
environment.
85% “Mechanical Initialization 1” & “Mechanical Initialization 2” & “Mechanical Initialization 3”
“Mechanical Initialization 1” & “Mechanical Initialization 2” & “Mechanical Initialization 3”
100%
& “Scanner Initialization” Flow of RU Shutdown Processing
REFERENCE (1) "Shutdown processing" command
There are two scenarios: "when system shutdown is performed for the CL" and
- During bootup, it may not be possible to visually confirm all percentage “xx %” above. "when the system is shut down from the RU operation panel."
- “xx %” changes depending on the time when initialization completes for each unit.
- Since the progress display may disappear in no time, it may not be possible to (2) Execute "mechanical shutdown processing" and "saving of log data",
visually confirm all percentage “xx %”. and turn OFF the power.
- Mechanical shutdown processing
Move the IP stopper (MZ4 motor) of the subscanning unit to its home position.
About update of log on FTP server Put the grip mechanism (MZ2 motor) of the subscanning unit in its gripped
The log file will be also saved in RU when RU is terminated normally. condition.
If the log file on the FTP is old, it will be replaced by the latest one saved in the RU at - Saving of log data
the time of bootup with network connected. Save HISTORY LOG, TRACE LOG, and ERROR LOG to the FTP server.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-17
MD-18
3. Descriptions of Mechanical Half-Clutch
The half-clutch that conveys the driving force only in one direction is used. This
Components and Their Operations permits a single motor to provide driving forces for several mechanisms.
3.1 Features of Components Used for Each
Unit
Electrically-Conductive Bearing
Because an electrically-conductive housing and bearing are employed, static
electricity charged from the IP to the roller is removed.
Grip Cam
The cams used in the grip mechanism are identical for both right and left sides of the
unit.
By changing the gear engaging position with reference to the timing marks on the
spur gears that drive the cam, identical components can be used for both right and left
sides of the machine.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-18
MD-19
Guides Snap-Fit Pinion Gears
The IP that is being conveyed is protected by use of guides and shock absorbers. The employed pinion gears can be installed and removed without using retaining
members or tools.
Guides Servicing precautions
u NOTE u
Shock absorbers
Never use ethanol or a moistened cloth. When installing the pinion gear over the shaft, ensure that it is properly oriented.
Rubber guides They should be cleaned only by use of a
vacuum cleaner. If you install it over the shaft while it is reversed, its claws may become damaged.
Brushing guides
Photosensors
A photosensor of claw-locked type (for preventing misalignment) is used.
u NOTE u
When removing or installing the photosensor, use a steel rule or the like and exercise
care not to damage the sensor claws.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-19
MD-20
Engraved Marks on the Side Plate
Gear attachment orientations, sensor numbers, and other marks are directly engraved
in the side plate of the unit to enhance ease of servicing.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-20
MD-21
3.2 IP Conveyance Flow
[1] Feed the IP. {MD:3.3_Cassette Set Unit}
[2] Convey the IP to the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MD:3.4_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
[3] Side-position the IP. {MD:3.5_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
[4] Read the image. {MD:3.6_Subscanning Unit}
[5] Convey the IP from the subscanning unit to the {MD:3.7_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}
erasure conveyor unit.
[6] Erase the IP. {MD:3.8_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
[7] Side-position the IP again. {MD:3.8_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
[8] Convey the IP to the cassette set unit. {MD:3.4_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
[9] Load the IP. {MD:3.3_Cassette Set Unit}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-21
MD-22
3.3 Cassette Set Unit
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-22
MD-23
l Continued from the previous page 3.3.1 Operation during IP Feed and Load
A flow of cassette set unit operation is illustrated below. The cassette set unit is
No. Name Symbol Function Detail either in the feed state where the cassette is set ([A] in illustration below) and in the
Detects that the cassette is load state where the IP, after being read, is returned to the cassette ([B] in illustration
[1] Cassette ejection sensor SA1, 7, 13, 19 below).
ejected.
Detects that the cassette is The operation is identical for all of the four shelves of the cassette set unit.
[2] Cassette IN sensor SA2, 8, 14, 20
inserted.
Detects that cassette hold is
[3] Cassette hold sensor SA3, 9, 15, 21
completed.
SA4, 10, 16, Detects that the suction cup
[4] Suction cup HP sensor
22 arm is in its home position.
Detects that the suction cups
[5] Suction sensor SA5, 11, 17, 23
suck the IP.
SA6, 12, 18,
[6] Inch/metric sensor Determines the IP width. {MD:3.3.2}
24
Eliminates the need for
Movable guide assembly
[7] - switching the inch/metric {MD:3.3.2}
common to inch/metric
setting.
Holds/releases the cassette
[8] Cassette hold solenoid SOLA1, 2, 3, 4
hold pin.
Drives cassette ejection when
the suction cup arm and
[9] Suction cup drive motor MA1, 2, 3, 4
cassette ejection clutch are
ON.
The suction cups suck the IP
[10] IP suction pump PA1, 2, 3, 4
when ON.
Suck the IP. They are of
type with greater durability
[11] Suction cups -
that eliminates the need for
periodic replacement.
Integral hose that relays
between the suction cups and
[12] Hose -
pump. Conventionally, the
branch joint was used.
[13] IP leak valve SVA1, 2, 3, 4 Leaks when ON.
Clutch that translates the force
of the suction cup drive motor
[14] Cassette ejection clutch CLA1, 2, 3, 4
to the cassette ejection rubber
roller.
Cassette ejection rubber Rubber roller that is intended
[15] -
roller to eject the cassette.
Rubber roller shock Prevent scratches on the IP
[16] -
absorbers surface.
Reads the barcode of the
[17] Barcode reader BCRA1, 2, 3, 4
both-side IP cassette
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-23
MD-24
n Operation during Feed n Operation during Load
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-24
MD-25
3.3.2 How to Detect the IP Size n Inch/Metric Movable Guide Assembly
The CR-IR 363 recognizes the IP sizes by use of the following three types of Inch and metric cassettes are identified by the movable guide (identification guide).
mechanisms. The mechanism of identification is illustrated below.
l Inch metric movable guide assembly: SA6 (SA12, SA18, SA24)
It distinguishes between the inch cassette and metric cassette, and recognizes the
IPs of inch size and metric size. For more detail on how to determine the cassette,
see "n Inch/Metric Movable Guide Assembly."
l IP detection by SB5 (feed/load conveyor unit)
It counts the passing time, thereby recognizing the length of the IP.
l IP detection by SG2 (between feed/load conveyor unit and side-
positioning unit)
It determines the width of the IP, thereby recognizing whether the IP is of large width
size (14"x17" or 14"x14") or not.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-25
MD-26
3.4 Feed/Load Conveyor Unit
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-26
MD-27
l Continued from the previous page 3.4.1 Path Changeover Guide/Convergence Path Changeover
Guide
No. Name Symbol Function Detail
Detects whether the IP is The feed/load conveyor unit employs two types of changeover guides, i.e., path
[1] IP feed/load sensor SB1, 2, 3, 4 changeover guide and convergence path changeover guide, to change the
present or not.
conveyance path of the IP.
Provides force to convey the
[2] IP transport motor MB1
IP. The path changeover guide effects a changeover to convey the IP to one of the four
Detects the size (length) of cassette inserting entrances. The convergence path changeover guide effects a
[3] Pre-BCR IP sensor SB5 changeover of a convergence point for the erasure conveyor unit and side-positioning
the IP.
conveyor unit.
Pre-convergence IP Detects whether the IP is
[4] SB6
sensor present or not. The same single motor is used to provide two types of changeover guide operations.
Path changeover shelf Detects the position of the As the motor rotates clockwise, the path changeover guide is activated; as it rotates
[5] SB7, 8, 9
sensor path changeover guide. counterclockwise, the convergence path changeover guide is activated. To avoid
Detects the home position reverse operation for each of the changeover guides, half-clutches act to prevent
Convergence path reverse rotations.
[6] SB10 of the convergence path
changeover sensor
changeover guide.
Detects the machine
Path changeover HP initial position and detects
[7] SB11
sensor the position of the path
changeover guide.
Provides force to convey the
[8] IP transport motor MB2
IP.
Changeover guide drive Provides force to change the
[9] MB3 {MD:3.4.1}
motor path of the IP.
Changes the conveyance
[10] Path changeover guide - {MD:3.4.1}
path of the IP.
Convergence path Changes the conveyance
[11] - {MD:3.4.1}
changeover guide path of the IP.
Remove dust deposited on
[12] Brush roller - {MD:3.4.2}
the IP.
Handle used to manually
[13] IP jam handling handle - rotate the rubber rollers when
an IP jam occurs.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-27
MD-28
n Operation of Path Changeover Guide n Convergence Path Changeover Guide
The path changeover guides effect a changeover for the second, third, and fourth The convergence path changeover guide effects a changeover for the conveyance
shelves of the cassette inserting entrances (the first guide always remains open). The path of the IP that is conveyed to the side-positioning conveyor unit and the IP that is
path changeover guide opens the IP conveyance path by its associated cam, and the returned from the erasure conveyor unit.
three path changeover guides operate according to the mechanism illustrated below.
Their feature is such that the three cams are arranged as offset by 90 degrees,
thereby ensuring that two or more path changeover guides will not open at the same
time.
REFERENCE
The cam is prevented from rotating in reverse direction by the ratchet head.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-28
MD-29
3.4.2 Brush Rollers
The brush rollers clean (remove dust from) the IP.
The operation of the brush rollers differ depending on whether the IP is passed or not.
IP passed or not Motor driving Condition of brush rollers
The half-clutch stops the brush rollers.
Passed Normal direction As they are stopped, the dust is removed from the
IP.
The brush rollers rotate.
Not passed Reverse direction Dust deposited on the brush rollers is removed by
the edges of the box.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-29
MD-30
3.5 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit 3.5.2 Cleaning Guides
They clean the both-side IP (mammography).
3.5.1 Side-Positioning Mechanism As the IP starts to pass, the two guides clean it by sandwiching it between them.
It performs side-positioning operation prior to IP reading. It prevents reading error due
to obliquing of the IP.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-30
MD-31
3.6 Subscanning Unit 3.6.2 Dust Removal Mechanism
It remove dust deposited on the upper light-collecting guide and light-collecting mirror.
3.6.1 IP Stopper Mechanism Dust removal operation may be initiated by the user.
The IP stopper mechanism stops the IP during side-positioning operation performed
at the side-positioning conveyor unit.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-31
MD-32
3.6.3 Reading Mode 3.6.4 Center Guide and Grip Rollers
The subscanning unit has five reading modes. Because the reading speed (IP The center guide and grip rollers of the subscanning unit are subjected to positional
conveyance speed) varies with each of the reading modes, the grip-down/grip- adjustments in units of 10 microns.
up timings and speeds for the grip rollers are changed in order to avoid gripping When servicing the subscanning unit, exercise due care not to bend or fold the center
unevenness relative to their respective reading speeds. guide and grip rollers or not to hit them against each other or other objects.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-32
MD-33
3.7 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit 3.8 Erasure Conveyor Unit
3.7.1 Movable Guide 3.8.1 Switchback Mechanism
This guide leads the IP to the rubber rollers. It is intended to prevent IP jams. It performs IP switchback (operation to switch front to back, and vice versa).
The conveyance path where the switchback is performed is a location where the IP is
bent most within the machine. As such, an IP jam is likely to occur. To prevent such
IP jams, consideration is given to the conveyance speed and timing.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-33
MD-34
3.8.2 Side-Positioning Mechanism 3.8.3 Filter of Erasure Lamp
It performs side-positioning prior to cassette insertion. It is intended to prevent
cassette insertion error.
Lamp case
DETAIL A
Filter face
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-34
MD-35
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-35
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
12.06.2019 01 New release All pages
02.28.2020 02 Revision All pages
CR-IR 363 Service Manual
Troubleshooting (MT)
011-211-02E CR-IR 363 Service Manual
02.28.2020
MT-1
1. Overview of Troubleshooting 1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting
n Error Classifications
Trouble occurred
RU errors can be roughly classified into the following five categories:
Checking the Error Log 1. Errors causing the CL screen or the LCD of the RU to display an error code
Mechanical, electrical, scanner, or software errors that cause the CL screen or the
{MT:1.2.1_Checking the Error Log} LCD of the RU to display an error code upon error detection
1. Errors causing the CL screen or the LCD of the RU to display 2. Errors causing the LCD of the RU to display a “line error”.
an error code
CL-to-RU communication errors that inhibit the RU from becoming ready
3. Errors causing image abnormalities
{MT:1.2_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Errors that result in image abnormalities due to laser light blockage caused by a
scratched IP or dust or due to electrical/scanner system component abnormalities
{MT:2._Error Code Table} 4. Errors interrupting the progress of a process and causing the inability to detect an
{MT:3._Detail Code} error code
Errors that occur due to a CPU board or LCD abnormality, interrupt the progress of a
2. Errors causing the LCD of the RU to display a "line error". process, and cause the inability to detect an error code.
5. Errors causing the inability to upgrade the software or save data
{MT:6._Line Error between CL and RU} Errors that cause a problem between the FTP server and CPU board due to an
improper FTP server setting, IP address setting, or RU name setting
3. Errors causing image abnormalities
{MT:7._Abnormal Images}
4. Analysis of errors causing the inability to display an error code
and the inability of the machine to boot
{MT:9._Troubleshooting Failures where Error Code Is
Undetectable and Machine does not Boot Up}
5. Errors causing the inability to update the software or save data
{MT:4._Troubleshooting the Errors that Cause the Inability to Update
the Software Version or Back Up the Machine Shipment Control Data}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-1
MT-2
1.2 Troubleshooting from Error Log n Purpose of Making a Backup of the Error Log
An error log is added to the file whenever an error occurs during the operation of the
1.2.1 Checking the Error Log machine, and when the file becomes full, its entries are overwritten on a first-in, first-
out basis.
Using the RU PC-TOOL ERROR DB, view the error log and check the occurrence of Before troubleshooting, back up the error log, which contains the information about
error codes. errors encountered during the user’s use of the machine.
If the error log is not backed up beforehand, the information about errors encountered
START during troubleshooting may overwrite the previously logged error information.
Therefore, you may lose the information about errors that occurred during the user’s
use of the machine.
Start the RU PC-TOOL. n Purpose of Viewing the Error Log
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} When an error occurs, it may incur two or more additional errors. The error code
displayed on the CL represents the last-encountered error.
You must therefore view the error log to locate the error code related to the
encountered trouble before proceeding to perform troubleshooting.
Back Up the ERROR LOG.
{MU:4.3.14_BACKUP}
Start the ERROR DB to view the error log.
{MU:4.3.17_ERROR DB}
END
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-2
MT-3
1.2.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered n Error Occurrence Time Recording in Error Log
Trouble When errors occur at RU startup, their occurrence time indications vary with the error
occurrence timing.
1. Group the errors that occurred.
l When errors occurred after "time data" was acquired from the CL
2. Locate the error that is responsible for the encountered trouble (the Determine the order of error occurrences in accordance with the "occurrence time"
error that occurred first). indications.
(Example)
- Error occurrence groups A and B are judged as separate error occurrence Error code Occurrence date and time
groups, because the difference between their error occurrence times is 14 12256 xxxx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx 00257D tiphscan____ Error code that occurred second
minutes. 3D0004 ScnCmFnc.c 2817
12255 xxxx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx 00258D tiphscan____
- The first error in Group A is "12302". 3D0004 400000,00 00 00 609C 6098 Code of the error that occurred first.
Perform troubleshooting with this error code.
n When an error occurred after "time data" was acquired from the FR9H2106.EPS
CL l When errors occurred before "time data" was acquired from the CL
The resulting occurrence date/time indications look like "0000.00.00 00.00.25".
Note, however, that the time elapsed after power ON is indicated in the "seconds"
position (underlined) of the "occurrence time" field.
The error having the smallest "seconds" value occurred first.
n Purpose of Grouping Errors and Identifying Error that Occurred
n When an error occurred before "time data" was acquired from First
the CL
If two or more errors are logged and you perform troubleshooting in accordance with
the error that is not responsible for the encountered trouble, troubleshooting will not
easily be accomplished. It is therefore necessary to locate the error responsible for
the encountered trouble (the error that occurred first) before proceeding to conduct
troubleshooting.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-3
MT-4
1.2.3 Performing Analyses based on the Error Code Table X: Error level
l
As the encountered trouble is determined, check “Probable Cause and Remedy” of Error level notations
the error code table and perform the procedures.
FATAL error: 0
- The user is notified of an error occurrence.
n Error Code Table Description - Level of error where the routine processing cannot be resumed.
The error code table lists error codes in ascending order to facilitate your error code - It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action.
search.
WARNING: 2
Each error code is furnished with an error name and a brief description of error
- An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
occurrence conditions.
- Level of error where the function associated with the error is rendered unusable.
- It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action.
n Error Code Detail
WARNING: 1
- The user is notified of an error occurrence.
- Errors that occur due to erroneous user operation (incorrect loading of the cassette
or IP, etc.).
- If this level of error occurred at the same time with another level of warning, it is
necessary to troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 4
- An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
- Errors that occur when a retry operation is performed.
- If the same error occurs frequently and if this level of error occurs at the same time
with another level of warning, it is necessary to troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 3
- An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
- Errors that occur when servicing procedures are performed.
l Y: Error category
0: OS (operating system software), libraries
1: Image processing CPU
2: Scanner control (for front side)
3: Conveyance control
4: Overall control
5: Network control
6: Scanner control (for back side)
7: Electrical/hardware related
8: Reserved
9: Others (software installation, version update, etc.)
l ZZ: Reference number
It is managed according to each error category.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-4
MT-5
1.3 Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch
CAUTION
Be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch when troubleshooting is to be made
with the machine cover removed and the power supply turned ON.
The photomultiplier gets damaged if the power supply of the machine is turned
ON while the high-voltage switch is ON.
1. Remove the upper right-hand side cover.
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the CPU39A board.
SW5
HV ON
HV OFF
CPU39A board
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-5
MT-6
2. Error Code Table
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
During initializing process, an error of FLASH ROM file is detected on the - Reinstall the application.
10001 File open error (1) CPU39A board. - Replace the CPU board.
During initializing process, an error of FLASH ROM file is detected on the - Reinstall the application.
10002 File read error (1) CPU39A board. - Replace the CPU board.
During initializing process, an error of FLASH ROM file is detected on the - Reinstall the application.
10003 File format error (1) CPU39A board. - Replace the CPU board.
During initializing process, an error of FLASH ROM file is detected on the - Reinstall the application.
10004 File write error (1) CPU39A board. - Replace the CPU board.
During initializing process, an error of FLASH ROM file is detected on the - Reinstall the application.
10005 File close error (1) CPU39A board. - Replace the CPU board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
During initializing process, an connection (power supply) error of the
10210 SED board power supply error leading-edge detection (SED) board is detected.
- Replace the SED board.
- Replace the power supply.
- Check the cables and connectors.
During bootup and routine processing, error for the PMT analog power - Replace the PMT board.
10222 PMT15V voltage error supply signal (+15VOKH, +15VOKL) is detected. - Replace the power supply.
- Replace the CPU board.
During initializing process, it is detected that HV high voltage data is out of - Check the light shielding (covers or the like)
10223 HV-ON high voltage value error the range when in the status of HV ON. - Replace the PMT board.
During bootup and routine processing, the polygon OK signal is not - Check the cables and connectors.
10243 Polygon lock timeout (After retry) detected within the specified time period after the polygon is turned ON (the - Replace the Scanning Optics Unit.
second time).
- Check the cables and connectors.
During routine processing, there was no interruption of back-end detection - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
10251 Back-end detection timeout within a certain time period. - Replace the side-positioning IP sensor (SC3)
- Replace the SND board.
During bootup and routine processing, an error occurs when reading - Reinstall the application.
10252 Image reading error images. - Replace the CPU board.
During bootup and routine processing, image buffer FIFO becomes - Reinstall the application.
10253 FIFO overflow overflow. - Replace the CPU board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-6
MT-7
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
During routine processing, the interruption of completion from DSP is not - Reinstall the application.
10254 DSP interruption timeout detected within the specified time period. - Replace the CPU board.
During routine processing, the SYN count is below the expected value - Replace the Scanning Optics Unit.
10255 SYN count detection error even though the Laser has been turned ON.
- Check the DIP switch.
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Reinstall the application.
10286 Scanner retry During bootup and routine processing, retries for polygon or HV ON occur.
- Replace the PMT/PMR board.
- Replace the Scanning Optics Unit.
- Replace the CPU board.
- Reinstall the application.
In routine processing value, it was detected that QL value is 80 or more in
10287 Light shielding check the S- value fluctuations detection.
- Replace the PMT/PMR board.
- Replace the CPU board.
- Reinstall the application.
When an attempt is made to operate the scanner device during bootup and - Replace the PMT/PMR board.
10299 Scanner device error routine processing, the specified device cannot be opened. - Replace the Scanning Optics Unit.
- Replace the CPU board.
During routine processing, the IP transport motor (MB2, MC3) is driven - Check the cables and connectors.
for barcode reading retry operation (return conveyance), but the side- - Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
10343 IP barcode reading retry error (2) positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) does not transition to CLOSE within - Replace IP Transport Motor (MB2,MC3).
the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
During routine processing, the IP transport motor (MC3) is driven for
- Replace IP Transport Motor (MC3).
10344 IP barcode reading retry error (1) barcode reading retry operation, but the side-positioning IP sensor (SC3)
- Replace side-positioning IP sensor (SC3).
does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.
- Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
Side-positioning unit IP During routine processing, the IP transport motor (MC3) is driven for IP
- Replace IP Transport Motor (MC3).
10346 side- positioning conveyance, but the side-positioning IP sensor (SC3)
- Replace side-positioning IP sensor (SC3).
conveyance error does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.
- Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
Subscanning unit IP leading- During routine processing excluding "secondary erasure," the subscanning
- Replace subscanning motor (MZ1).
10347 motor (MZ1) is driven, but the IP leading-edge sensor (SZ1) does not
- Replace IP leading-edge sensor (SZ1).
edge detection error transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.
- Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
Subscanning unit IP ejection During routine processing excluding "secondary erasure," the subscanning
- Replace subscanning motor (MZ1).
10348 motor (MZ1) is driven, but the post-reading conveyance IP sensor (SD2)
- Replace post-reading conveyance IP sensor (SD2).
error (1) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.
- Replace the SND board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-7
MT-8
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
During secondary erasure processing, the IP transport motor (MC3, MD2) - Check the cables and connectors.
Side-positioning unit IP ejection and subscanning motor (MZ1) are driven to read the IP after IP side- - Replace IP Transport Motor (MC3,MD2).
10349 positioning, but the side-positioning IP sensor (SC3) does not transition to - Replace side-positioning IP sensor (SC3).
error (2) OPEN within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (MD2, ME1) is
- Replace IP Transport Motor (MD2,ME1).
Erasure unit entrance IP sensor driven to convey the IP to the erasure conveyor unit after the IP is read;
- Replace post-reading conveyance standby IP
10350 however, the CLOSE state of the switchback standby IP sensor (SE2) is
sensor (SE1).
status error (1) detected before the post-reading conveyance standby IP sensor (SE1)
- Replace switchback standby IP sensor (SE2).
transitions to CLOSE.
- Replace the SND board.
During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (MD2, ME1) - Check the cables and connectors.
is driven to convey the IP to the erasure conveyor unit after the IP is - Replace IP Transport Motor (MD2,ME1).
Erasure unit entrance IP sensor read, and the switchback standby IP sensor (SE2) transitions to CLOSE; - Replace post-reading conveyance standby IP
10351 however, after the MD2, ME1 stops, the post-reading conveyance standby sensor (SE1).
status error (2) IP sensor (SE1) does not transition to CLOSE, so that the system goes - Replace switchback standby IP sensor (SE2).
down. - Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (MD2, ME1) is
Post-reading conveyor unit IP driven to convey the IP to the erasure conveyor unit after the IP is read;
- Replace IP Transport Motor (MD2,ME1).
10352 however, the post-reading conveyance standby IP sensor (SE1) does not
- Replace post-reading conveyance standby IP
ejection error (1) transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.
sensor (SE1).
- Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (MD2, ME1) is
Post-reading conveyor unit IP driven to convey the IP to the erasure conveyor unit after the IP is read;
- Replace IP Transport Motor (MD2,ME1).
10353 however, the post-reading conveyance standby IP sensor (SE1) does not
- Replace post-reading conveyance standby IP
ejection error (2) transition to OPEN within the specified period of time.
sensor (SE1).
- Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace branch path guide driving solenoid
During bootup/routine processing, the branch path changeover guide
Switchback unit IP conveyance drive solenoid (SOLE1) and IP transport motor (ME1) are driven for IP
(SOLE1).
10354 switchback operation, but the CLOSE state of the post-reading conveyance
- Replace IP Transport Motor (ME1).
error (1) standby IP sensor (SE1) is detected.
- Replace post-reading conveyance standby IP
sensor (SE1).
- Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
During routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1) is driven for IP - Replace IP Transport Motor (ME1).
Switchback unit IP conveyance switchback operation, but the CLOSE state of the post-reading conveyance - Replace post-reading conveyance standby IP
10355 standby IP sensor (SE1) is detected before the switchback standby IP sensor (SE1).
error (2) sensor (SE2) transitions to OPEN. - Replace switchback standby IP sensor (SE2).
- Replace the SND board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-8
MT-9
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
During routine processing, the IP erasure processing conveyance ends - Check the cables and connectors.
Switchback unit IP conveyance by driving the IP conveyance motor (ME1), however, the CLOSE of the - Replace IP Transport Motor (ME1).
10356 switchback standby IP sensor (SE2) is detected, so that the system goes - Replace switchback standby IP sensor (SE2).
error (3) down. - Replace the SND board.
Although the IP transport motor (ME1) operation was retried three times - Check the cables and connectors.
into Erasure unit IP transporting for IP conveyance (erasure conveyor) during routine processing, the - Replace IP Transport Motor (ME1).
10357 switchback standby IP sensor (SE2) was closed because the IP did not - Replace switchback standby IP sensor (SE2).
retry error pass the sensor within the specified time. - Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
During routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1) is driven to convey
- Replace IP Transport Motor (ME1).
10358 Erasure unit IP ejection error the IP to the feed/load conveyor unit, but the pre-convergence IP sensor
- Replace pe-convergence IP sensor (SB6).
(SB6) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.
- Replace the SND board.
During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1, MB1, MB2) - Check the cables and connectors.
is driven to convey the IP to the cassette after the IP is erased, and the - Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
10360 Load IP conveyance error (1) pre-BCR sensor (SB5) transitions to CLOSE; however, the IP feed/load - Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
sensor (SB1/2/3/4) for the shelf of interest does not transition to CLOSE - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1, MB1, MB2)
Post-erasure path guide status is driven to eject the IP to the cassette after the IP is erased; however, the
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
10361 IP feed/load sensor (SB1/2/3/4) transitions to CLOSE before the CLOSE
- Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
error (1) state of the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) is detected.
- Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
- Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1, MB1, MB2)
Post-erasure path guide status is driven to convey the IP to the cassette after the IP is erased, and the
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
10362 pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) transitions to CLOSE; however, the IP feed/load
- Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
error (2) sensor (SB1/2/3/4) for other than the shelf of interest transitions to CLOSE.
- Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
- Replace the SND board.
During bootup/routine processing/abnormality processing, the IP transport - Check the cables and connectors.
motor (MB1, MB2) is driven to convey the IP to the cassette; however, the - Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2).
10364 Load IP conveyance error (2) IP feed/load sensor (SB1/2/3/4) for the shelf of interest does not transition - Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
to OPEN within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
During abnormality processing, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3)
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
10365 Load IP conveyance error (3) is driven to eject the IP to the cassette; however, the IP feed/load sensor
- Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
(SB1/2/3/4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time.
- Replace the SND board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-9
MT-10
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
- Check the cables and connectors.
During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path
- Replace convergence path changeover guide
changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven to perform home-positioning
driving motor (MB3).
of the path changeover guide (feed/load conveyor unit); however, the path
10369 Path guide HP detection error changeover shelf sensor (SB7/8/9) and path changeover HP sensor (SB11)
- Replace path changeover shelf sensors (SB7/8/9).
- Replace path changeover HP sensor (SB11).
do not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time, resulting in
- Replace half-clutch spur gears (x2).
a retry (twice or more).
- Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path - Replace convergence path changeover guide
Path guide changeover detection changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven to perform path changeover driving motor (MB3).
10371 operation (feed/load conveyor unit); however, the path changeover shelf - Replace path changeover shelf sensors (SB7/8/9).
error sensor (SB7/8/9) and path changeover HP sensor (SB11) do not transition - Replace path changeover HP sensor (SB11).
to CLOSE within the specified period of time. - Replace half-clutch spur gears (x2).
- Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path
- Replace convergence path changeover guide
Convergence path guide HP changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven to perform path changeover
driving motor (MB3).
10372 operation (feed/load conveyor unit) after IP erasure; however, the
- Replace convergence path changeover sensor (SB10).
positioning error convergence path changeover sensor (SB10) does not transition to
- Replace half-clutch spur gears (x2).
CLOSE within the specified period of time.
- Replace the SND board.
During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MC2) is driven to perform - Check the cables and connectors.
Side-positioning unit grip HP grip home-positioning of the side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the - Replace grip release HP sensor (SC2).
10374 OPEN or CLOSE of the grip release HP sensor (SC2) is not detected. - Replace grip release motor (MC2).
detection error After two retries are executed, this is not detected, so that the system goes - Replace the SND board.
down.
During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MD1) is driven to perform - Check the cables and connectors.
Post-reading conveyor unit grip grip home-positioning of the Post-reading conveyor unit; however, the - Replace grip release motor (MD1).
10378 OPEN or CLOSE of the grip release HP sensor (SD1) is not detected. - Replace grip release HP sensor (SD1).
HP detection error After two retries are executed, this is not detected, so that the system goes - Replace the SND board.
down.
During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (ME3) is driven to perform - Check the cables and connectors.
Erasure unit grip HP detection grip home-positioning of the Erasure conveyor unit; however, the OPEN - Replace grip release motor (ME3).
10382 or CLOSE of the grip release HP sensor (SE5) is not detected. After two - Replace grip release HP sensor (SE5).
error retries are executed, this is not detected, so that the system goes down. - Replace the SND board.
Side-positioning unit side- During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor
(MC1) is driven to perform side-positioning mechanism home-positioning
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace side-positioning motor (MC1).
10386 positioning mechanism HP of the side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the OPEN or CLOSE of - Replace side-positioning mechanism HP sensor (SC1).
the side-positioning mechanism HP sensor (SC1) is not detected. After two - Replace the SND board.
detection error retries are executed, this is not detected, so that the system goes down.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-10
MT-11
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor (ME2) - Check the cables and connectors.
Erasure unit side-positioning is driven to perform side-positioning mechanism home-positioning of the - Replace side-positioning motor (ME2).
10390 erasure conveyor unit; however, the OPEN or CLOSE of the erasure side- - Replace erasure side-positioning mechanism HP
mechanism HP detection error positioning mechanism HP sensor (SE4) is not detected. After two retries sensor (SE4).
are executed, this is not detected, so that the system goes down. - Replace the SND board.
During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the suction cup drive motor - Check the cables and connectors.
(MA1/2/3/4) is driven to perform suction cup home-positioning; however, - Perform mechanical check for suction cup assembly.
10394 Suction cup HP detection error the OPEN or CLOSE of .the suction cup HP sensor (SA4/10/16/22) is not - Replace suction cup driving motors (MA1/2/3/4).
detected. After two retries are executed, this is not detected, so that the - Replace suction cup HP sensor (SA4/10/16/22).
system goes down. - Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
Although load conveyance retry has been executed, IP feed/load sensor - Check the shape of IP. Replace the IP if it is deformed.
10397 Load conveyance retry error (SB1/2/3/4) did not CLOSE. - Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
- Replace the SND board.
During bootup/M-Utility, the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) is driven to - Check the cables and connectors.
Cleaning guide HP detection perform home-positioning of the cleaning guide; however, the OPEN or - Replace cleaning guide driving motor (MC4).
10398 CLOSE of the cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4) is not detected. After two - Replace cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4).
error retries are executed, this is not detected, so that the system goes down. - Replace the SND board.
During bootup/M-Utility, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) is driven to - Check the cables and connectors.
perform home-positioning of the IP stopper; however, the OPEN or CLOSE - Replace IP stopper driving motor (MZ4).
10403 IP stopper HP detection error of the IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5) is not detected. After two retries are - Replace IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5).
executed, this is not detected, so that the system goes down. - Replace the SND board.
During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) - Check the cables and connectors.
is stopped to protrude the IP stopper; however, the OPEN or CLOSE of the - Replace IP stopper driving motor (MZ4).
10406 IP stopper protrusion error IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5) is not detected. After two retries are executed, - Replace IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5).
this is not detected, so that the system goes down. - Replace the SND board.
During routine processing/M-Utility, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to - Check the cables and connectors.
perform grip release operation for the driving shaft; however, the driving- - Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
10410 Driving-shaft grip release error side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) does not transition to CLOSE within the - Replace driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2).
specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
During routine processing/M-Utility except for secondary erasure, the grip - Check the cables and connectors.
drive motor (MZ2) is driven to perform grip operation for the driving shaft; - Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
10411 Driving-shaft grip error however, the driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) does not transition - Replace driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2).
to OPEN within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
During routine processing/M-Utility, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven - Check the cables and connectors.
at high speed to perform grip operation for the driving shaft; however, the - Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
10412 Driving-shaft fast grip error driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) does not transition to OPEN - Replace driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2).
within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-11
MT-12
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
During routine processing/M-Utility except for secondary erasure, the grip - Check the cables and connectors.
drive motor (MZ2) is driven at high speed to perform grip release operation - Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
10413 Driven-shaft grip release error for the driven shaft; however, the driven-side grip release HP sensor (SZ3) - Replace driven-side grip release HP sensor (SZ3).
does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
During routine processing/M-Utility, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to - Check the cables and connectors.
perform grip release operation for the driven shaft; however, the driven- - Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
10414 Driven-shaft grip error side grip release HP sensor (SZ3) does not transition to CLOSE within the - Replace driven-side grip release HP sensor (SZ3).
specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
During secondary erasure/M-Utility, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven at - Check the cables and connectors.
Driven-shaft fast grip release high speed to perform grip release operation for the driven shaft; however, - Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
10415 the driven-side grip release HP sensor (SZ3) does not transition to OPEN - Replace driven-side grip release HP sensor (SZ3).
error within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
For the correction processing during bootup/at the end of reading, the - Check the cables and connectors.
grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to perform operation for correcting the - Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
Driving-shaft grip correction error grip speed of the driving shaft for GR use; however, the driving-side grip - Replace driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2).
10416 release HP sensor (SZ2) does not transition to OPEN within the specified - Replace the SND board.
(4) period of time. After three retries are executed, OPEN is not detected
within allowed time, so that the system goes down.
For the correction processing during bootup/at the end of reading, the grip - Check the cables and connectors.
drive motor (MZ2) is driven to perform operation for correcting the grip - Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
speed of the driving shaft for ST type use; however, the driving-side grip - Replace driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2).
Driving- shaft grip correction release HP sensor (SZ2) does not transition to OPEN within the specified - Replace the SND board.
10417 period of time. Alternatively, the MZ2 does not transition to the interlocked
error (1) state, then three times or more grip speed correction are executed,
however, SZ2 does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of
time, so that the system goes down.
For the correction processing during bootup/at the end of reading, the - Check the cables and connectors.
grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to perform operation for correcting the - Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
grip speed of the driving shaft for HR one-side use; however, the driving- - Replace driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2).
Driving-shaft grip correction error side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) does not transition to OPEN within - Replace the SND board.
10418 the specified period of time. Alternatively, the MZ2 does not transition to
(2) the interlocked state, then three times or more grip speed correction are
executed, however, SZ2 does not transition to OPEN within the specified
period of time, so that the system goes down.
For the correction processing during bootup/at the end of reading, the - Check the cables and connectors.
grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to perform operation for correcting the - Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
grip speed of the driving shaft for HR two-side use; however, the driving- - Replace driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2).
Driving-shaft grip correction error side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) does not transition to OPEN within - Replace the SND board.
10419 the specified period of time. Alternatively, the MZ2 does not transition to
(3) the interlocked state, then three times or more grip speed correction are
executed, however, SZ2 does not transition to OPEN within the specified
period of time, so that the system goes down.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-12
MT-13
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
During bootup, two or more sensors of the IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4) - Check the cables and connectors.
10420 IP-initialization IP search error (1) are CLOSE for the remaining IP search processing, so that the system - Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
goes down. Several IPs are detected at the cassette set unit. - Replace the SND board.
- Check the cables and connectors.
During bootup, two or more sensors of the path changeover HP sensor
- Replace path changeover shelf sensors (SB7/8/9).
10421 IP-initialization IP search error (2) (SB11) and path changeover shelf sensor (SB7/8/9) are CLOSE for the
- Replace path changeover HP sensor (SB11).
remaining IP search processing.
- Replace the SND board.
IP-initialization IP search error (3) During bootup, the pre-convergence IP sensor (SB6) and side-positioning
entrance IP sensor (SG1) are CLOSE, and the post-reading conveyance
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace pe-convergence IP sensor (SB6).
standby IP sensor (SE1) or switchback standby IP sensor (SE2) is CLOSE - Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
10422 for the remaining IP search processing. There are three or more IPs in the - Replace post-reading conveyance standby IP
machine. sensor (SE1).
- Replace switchback standby IP sensor (SE2).
- Replace the SND board.
IP-initialization IP search error (4) During bootup, when the presence of the cassette is checked, the IP is
detected at the cassette set unit, but no cassette is present at the cassette
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
10425 set unit. Additionally, the hold pin (SOLA1/2/3/4: ON) is not lowered. - Replace cassette hold solenoids (SOLA1/2/3/4).
- Replace the SND board.
Initialization remaining IP ejection During bootup, the IP is detected, one by one, at the feed/load conveyor
unit, erasure conveyor unit, and side-positioning conveyor unit for the
- Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
- Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
error remaining IP search. - Replace pe-convergence IP sensor (SB6).
10426 - Replace post-reading conveyance standby IP
sensor (SE1).
- Replace switchback standby IP sensor (SE2).
- Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
Dust removal HP detection error During bootup, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (counterclockwise)
to perform home-positioning of the dust removal mechanism; however, the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace dust removal motor (MZ3).
10430 (1) (CCW) dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to CLOSE. After four - Replace dust-removal HP sensor (SZ4).
retries are executed, this is not detected, so that the system goes down. - Replace the SND board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-13
MT-14
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Dust removal HP detection error During bootup, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (counterclockwise)
to perform home-positioning of the dust removal mechanism; however,
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace dust removal motor (MZ3).
10431 (2) (CCW) the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to OPEN within the - Replace dust-removal HP sensor (SZ4).
specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
Dust removal HP detection error During bootup, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (clockwise) to
perform home-positioning of the dust removal mechanism; however, the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace dust removal motor (MZ3).
10432 (3) (CW) dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to CLOSE within the - Replace dust-removal HP sensor (SZ4).
specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
Dust removal HP detection error During bootup, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (clockwise) to
perform home-positioning of the dust removal mechanism; however, the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace dust removal motor (MZ3).
10433 (4) (CW) dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to OPEN within the - Replace dust-removal HP sensor (SZ4).
specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
Dust removal HP detection error During bootup, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (clockwise) to
perform home-positioning of the dust removal mechanism; however, the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace dust removal motor (MZ3).
10434 (5) (CW) dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to CLOSE within the - Replace dust-removal HP sensor (SZ4).
specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
Dust removal operation error (1) During M-Utility, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (clockwise) to - Check the cables and connectors.
perform dust removal operation; however, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) - Replace dust removal motor (MZ3).
10435 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. - Replace dust-removal HP sensor (SZ4).
- Replace the SND board.
Dust removal operation error (2) During M-Utility, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (clockwise) to - Check the cables and connectors.
perform dust removal operation; however, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) - Replace dust removal motor (MZ3).
10436 does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. - Replace dust-removal HP sensor (SZ4).
- Replace the SND board.
Dust removal operation error (3) During M-Utility, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (counterclockwise) - Check the cables and connectors.
to perform dust removal operation; however, the dust removal HP sensor - Replace dust removal motor (MZ3).
10437 (SZ4) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. - Replace dust-removal HP sensor (SZ4).
- Replace the SND board.
Dust removal operation error (4) During M-Utility, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (counterclockwise) - Check the cables and connectors.
to perform dust removal operation; however, the dust removal HP sensor - Replace dust removal motor (MZ3).
10438 (SZ4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. - Replace dust-removal HP sensor (SZ4).
- Replace the SND board.
Dust removal operation error (5) During routine processing, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) is driven
(clockwise) to perform the system shutdown processing; however, the dust
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP stopper driving motor (MZ4).
10439 removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified - Replace dust-removal HP sensor (SZ4).
period of time. - Replace the SND board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-14
MT-15
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Initialization convergence path IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to
perform the remaining IP search processing; however, the side-positioning
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP transport motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
10440 conveyance error (1) entrance IP sensor (SG1) and pre-convergence IP sensor (SB6) do not - Replace pe-convergence IP sensor (SB6).
transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. - Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
- Replace the SND board.
Initialization convergence path IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, ME1) is driven to
perform the remaining IP search processing; however, the side-positioning
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
10441 conveyance error (2) entrance IP sensor (SG1) does not transition to CLOSE within the - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
allowed time. Or in the case that the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) and pre- - Replace pe-convergence IP sensor (SB6).
convergence IP sensor (SB6) do not transition to OPEN within the allowed - Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
time. - Replace the SND board.
Initialization convergence path IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to
perform the remaining IP search processing; however, the side-positioning
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP transport motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
10442 conveyance error (3) entrance IP sensor (SG1) and pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) do not transition - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
to OPEN within the allowed time. Or in the case that the pre-convergence - Replace pe-convergence IP sensor (SB6).
IP sensor (SB6) does not transition to CLOSE within the allowed time. - Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
- Replace the SND board.
Initialization feed path IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2) is driven to perform the
remaining IP search processing; however, the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5)
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2).
10443 conveyance error (1) (UP) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
- Replace the SND board.
Initialization feed path IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2) is driven to perform the
remaining IP search processing; however, the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5)
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2).
10444 conveyance error (2) (DOWN) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
- Replace the SND board.
Initialization feed entrance IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to
perform the remaining IP search processing; however, the IP feed/load
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
10445 conveyance error (1) (DOWN) sensor (SB1/2/3/4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period - Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
of time. - Replace the SND board.
Initialization feed entrance IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, ME1) is driven to
perform the remaining IP search processing; however, the IP feed/load
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP transport motors (MB1,MB2,ME1).
10446 conveyance error (2) (DOWN) sensor (SB1/2/3/4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period - Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
of time. (When the IP in the feed/load conveyor unit is moved into the side- - Replace the SND board.
positioning conveyor unit.)
Initialization side-positioning unit During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven in the
direction of subscanning conveyance to perform the remaining IP search
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
10447 IP conveyance error (1) (DOWN) processing; however, the side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) does - Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-15
MT-16
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Initialization side-positioning unit During bootup, the IP transport motor (MC3) is driven in the direction of
feed/load conveyor unit to perform the remaining IP search processing;
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motor (MC3).
10448 IP conveyance error (2) (UP) however, the side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) does not transition - Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
to CLOSE within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
Initialization side-positioning unit During bootup, the IP transport motor (MC3) and subscanning motor (MZ1)
are driven to perform the remaining IP search processing; however, the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motor (MC3).
10449 IP conveyance error (3) (UP) side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) does not transition to CLOSE - Replace subscanning motor (MZ1).
within the specified period of time. - Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
- Replace the SND board.
Initialization side-positioning unit During bootup, the IP transport motor (MC3) and subscanning motor (MZ1)
are driven to perform the remaining IP search processing; however, the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motor (MC3).
10450 IP conveyance error (4) (UP) side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) does not transition to CLOSE - Replace subscanning motor (MZ1).
within the specified period of time. (In the case that the IP is detected in - Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
the side-positioning unit for the subscanning conveyor unit processing.) - Replace the SND board.
Initialization erasure unit IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, ME1) is driven to
perform the remaining IP search processing; however, the pre-convergence
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP transport motors (MB1,MB2,ME1).
10451 ejection error (1) IP sensor (SB6) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of - Replace pe-convergence IP sensor (SB6).
time. - Replace the SND board.
Initialization erasure unit IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (ME1) is driven to perform the
remaining IP search processing; however, the pre-convergence IP sensor
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motor (ME1).
10452 ejection error (2) (SB6) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. - Replace pe-convergence IP sensor (SB6).
- Replace the SND board.
Initialization erasure unit IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MD2, ME1) is driven at low speed
to perform the remaining IP search processing; however, the post-reading
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motor (MD2,ME1).
10453 conveyance error conveyance standby IP sensor (SE1) does not transition to OPEN within - Replace post-reading conveyance standby IP
the specified period of time. sensor (SE1).
- Replace the SND board.
Initialization post-reading conveyor During bootup, the IP transport motor (MD2) is driven to perform the
remaining IP search processing; however, the post-reading conveyance IP
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP transport motors (MD2).
10454 unit IP ejection error (1) (UP) sensor (SD2) does not transition to OPEN within the allowed time. (In the - Replace post-reading conveyance IP sensor (SD2).
case that the IP is detected in the post-reading conveyor unit also, during - Replace the SND board.
the IP search processing in the subscanning unit.)
Initialization post-reading conveyor During bootup, the IP transport motor (MD2) and subscanning motor (MZ1)
are driven to perform the remaining IP search processing; however, the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP transport motors (MD2).
10455 unit IP ejection error (2) (UP) post-reading conveyance IP sensor (SD2) does not transition to OPEN - Replace subscanning motor (MZ1).
within the specified period of time. - Replace post-reading conveyance IP sensor (SD2).
- Replace the SND board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-16
MT-17
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Initialization post-reading conveyor During bootup, the IP transport motor (MD2) is driven to perform the
remaining IP search processing; however, the post-reading conveyance IP
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP transport motors (MD2).
10456 unit IP ejection error (3) (DOWN) sensor (SD2) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of - Replace post-reading conveyance IP sensor (SD2).
time. - Replace the SND board.
Initialization subscanning unit IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MD2) and subscanning motor (MZ1)
are driven to perform the remaining IP search processing; however, the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP transport motors (MD2).
10457 ejection error (1) post-reading conveyance IP sensor (SD2) does not transition to OPEN - Replace subscanning motor (MZ1).
within the specified period of time. - Replace post-reading conveyance IP sensor (SD2).
- Replace the SND board.
Initialization subscanning unit IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MC3) is driven to perform the
remaining IP search processing; however, the post-reading conveyance
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motor (MC3).
10458 ejection error (2) IP sensor (SD2) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of - Replace post-reading conveyance IP sensor (SD2).
time. - Replace the SND board.
Initialization IP position During bootup, the CMOS information of the machine (IP found) does not - Reinstall the application.
10459 coincide with the remaining IP search processing result (IP not found) so - Replace the CPU board.
information error that the system goes down by user selection.
Initialization IP load conveyance During bootup, when an IP is loaded into the cassette, the IP feed/load - Check the cables and connectors.
10460 sensor (SB1/2/3/4) on the shelf of interest does not transition to OPEN - Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
error (1) within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
Initialization IP load conveyance During bootup, when an IP is loaded into the cassette from the erasure - Check the cables and connectors.
10461 conveyor unit, the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) does not transition to CLOSE - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
error (2) within the allowed time. - Replace the SND board.
Initialization IP load conveyance During bootup, when an IP is loaded into the cassette from the erasure - Check the cables and connectors.
10462 conveyor unit, the IP feed/load sensor (SB1/2/3/4) does not transition to - Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
error (3) OPEN within the allowed time. - Replace the SND board.
10463 Reading retry parameter error Reading retry parameter error - Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
10622 Back-side PMT15V voltage error During bootup and routine processing, error for the PMR analog power
supply signal (+15VOKH, +15VOKL) is detected.
- Replace PMR board.
- Replace CPU board.
Back-side HV-ON high voltage During initializing process, it is detected that HV high voltage data is out of - Check the light shielding (covers or the like)
10623 the range when in the status of HV ON. - Replace the PMT board.
value error
10653 Back-side FIFO overflow During bootup and routine processing, image buffer FIFO becomes
overflow.
- Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-17
MT-18
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
10810 SND board Fuse error During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the fuse on - Replace the SND board.
the SND39A board is blown.
10811 SND board motor driver error During bootup and during routine processing, overcurrent or overheat is
detected on the SND39A board.
- Replace the SND board.
10812 SND board overflow error During bootup and routine processing, WDT error / overflow is detected on
the SND39A board.
- Replace the SND board.
10813 SND board configuration defect During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the
SND39A board configurations are inappropriate.
- Replace the SND board.
10820 CPU board Fuse error During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the fuse on - Replace the CPU board.
the CPU39A board is blown.
CAN life check timeout (CPU39A) Timeout of life check monitoring between PNL38A board and CPU39A - Check the cables and connectors.
10901 (monitoring on the CPU39A side). - Replace the CPU board.
- Replace touch panel assembly.
USB communication error A USB communication error is detected between PNL38A board and - Check the cables and connectors.
10902 CPU39A board. - Replace the CPU board.
(PNL38A) - Replace touch panel assembly.
CAN communication error A CAN communication error is detected between PNL38A board and - Check the cables and connectors.
10903 CPU39A board. - Replace the CPU board.
(PNL38A) - Replace touch panel assembly.
CAN life check timeout (PNL38A) Timeout of life check monitoring between PNL38A board and CPU39A - Check the cables and connectors.
10951 (monitoring on the PNL side). - Replace the CPU board.
- Replace touch panel assembly.
PNL38A board startup waiting When PNL38A board starts up, a startup permission from CPU39A board
was not received within the predetermined time. Or in the case that
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace the CPU board.
10952 timeout the USB communication error occurs so that the permission cannot be - Replace touch panel assembly.
received.
PNL38A board startup error During PNL38A board startup, USB access failed. - Reinstall the application.
10953 - Replace PNL38A board.
USB access error
PNL38A board startup During PNL38A board startup, a file to be accessed on CPU39A board was - Reinstall the application.
10954 not found. - Replace the CPU board.
USB file error - Replace PNL38A board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-18
MT-19
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
10990 Software logic error (Fatal) A software control logic error is detected by the application. - Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
Image data variation or image When the virtual data transfer diagnostics was conducted for bootup,
virtual image A/D conversion data is out of predetermined range.
- Check if the exterior covers are attached correctly.
- Reinstall the application.
11200 signal connector error during bootup - Repace light-collecting guide, PMT/PMR board.
- Replace the CPU board.
Initialization LD driving current During bootup, the laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times - Reinstall the application.
11230 the factory default value. - Replace the Scanning Optics Unit.
value error - Replace the CPU board.
[FRONT]S-value fluctuations (1) Compare the SK (current SK) calculated during routine processing with the - Perform shading/sensitivity correction.
11270 initialization SK (SKSTART), and convert it to S value, ±50 to ±70% error - Reinstall the application.
was detected. - Replace the CPU board.
[FRONT]S-value fluctuations (2) Compare the SK (current SK) calculated during routine processing with the - Perform shading/sensitivity correction.
11271 initialization SK (SKSTART), and convert it to S value, ±70% or more error - Reinstall the application.
was detected. - Replace the CPU board.
Laser life warning LD lighting accumulated time reaches the expected lifetime (3000hrs). - Replace the Scanning Optics Unit.
11274 (Warning level) - Reset the time and count of the laser in "EDIT
HISTORY" window of PC TOOL.
High-voltage OFF during bootup During bootup, the photomultiplier (PMT board) high voltage is OFF. - Check that the high voltage (HV) switch of the CPU
board has been set to ON.
11280 - Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace the PMT board.
- Replace the power supply.
SHD correction data IP size SHD correction data has been generated based on a 18x24 IP. However, a - Perform HR-BD shading/sensitivity correction with a
11290 24x30 IP is inserted for normal reading so the IP is ejected without reading. 24x30 IP.
unsupported
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-19
MT-20
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Cassette setting status error (1) <User operation>After the cassette is loaded, the cassette is pulled out
immediately. <Occurrence condition>During routine processing/M-Utility,
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace cassette hold solenoids (SOLA1/2/3/4).
the cassette hold solenoid (SOLA1/2/3/4) is turned OFF to hold the - Replace cassette hold sensors (SA3/9/15/21).
11320 cassette, and the cassette hold sensor (SA3/9/15/21) detects the OPEN - Replace cassette IN sensors (SA2/8/14/20).
state; however, the cassette IN sensor (SA2/8/14/20) detects the OPEN - Replace the SND board.
state.
Cassette setting status error (2) During routine processing/M-Utility, the cassette hold solenoid
(SOLA1/2/3/4) is turned OFF and the hold pin protrudes to hold the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace cassette hold solenoids (SOLA1/2/3/4).
11321 cassette; however, the cassette hold sensor (SA3/9/15/21) does not - Replace cassette hold sensors (SA3/9/15/21).
transition to OPEN. Although the retries (twice or more) are executed, the - Replace the SND board.
cassette cannot be held. (A message is notified.)
Cassette setting status error (3) During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the OPEN state of the cassette - Check the cables and connectors.
11322 IN sensor (SA2/8/14/20) is detected for the sensor check processing just - Replace cassette IN sensors (SA2/8/14/20).
before the IP is sucked after cassette loading. - Replace the SND board.
Cassette setting status error (4) During routine processing/M-Utility, the CLOSE state of the cassette hold
sensor (SA3/9/15/21) is detected for the sensor check processing just
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace cassette hold solenoids (SOLA1/2/3/4).
11323 before the IP is sucked after cassette loading. - Replace cassette hold sensors (SA3/9/15/21).
- Replace the SND board.
Hold pin release error During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the cassette hold solenoid
(SOLA1/2/3/4) is turned ON to release the cassette hold; however, the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace cassette hold solenoids (SOLA1/2/3/4).
11324 cassette hold sensor (SA3/9/15/21) does not transition to CLOSE. Although - Replace cassette hold sensors (SA3/9/15/21).
the retries (twice or more) are executed, the hold cannot be released. (A - Replace the SND board.
message is notified.) Press cancel and the shelf regresses.
Feed IP suction error (1) During routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP suction
pump (PA1/2/3/4) is driven to convey the IP from the cassette to the feed/
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP suction pumps (PA1/2/3/4).
11328 load conveyor unit; however, the suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) does not - Replace suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23).
transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. Though the retries - Replace the SND board.
(twice) are executed, the IP is not sucked.
Feed IP suction error (2) (drop) During routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP is
sucked to perform suction conveyance of the IP from the cassette to
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP suction pumps (PA1/2/3/4).
the feed/load conveyor unit; however, the CLOSE state (IP drop) of the - Replace suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23).
11329 suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) is detected during IP conveyance. Though - Replace the SND board.
the retries (twice) for the IP suction are executed, the IP drop is detected
again.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-20
MT-21
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Feed/load unit entrance IP feed During routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, an attempt
is made to convey the IP from the cassette to the feed/load conveyor
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
11330 retry unit; however, the IP feed/load sensor (SB1/2/3/4) does not transition to - Replace the SND board.
CLOSE. After that, it was unable to convey it to IP feed/load sensor even
though retries (twice) for suction operation have been executed.
Feed IP conveyance error (1) During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2,
MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the feed/load conveyor unit to the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
11332 side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
Feed IP conveyance error (2) During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2,
MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the feed/load conveyor unit to the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
11333 side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the side-positioning entrance IP - Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
sensor (SG1) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of - Replace the SND board.
time.
Feed IP conveyance error (3) During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2,
MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the feed/load conveyor unit to the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
11334 side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
Feed IP conveyance error (4) During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2,
MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the feed/load conveyor unit to the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
11335 side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the side-positioning IP sensor - Replace side-positioning IP sensor (SC3).
(SC3) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
Feed IP sensor failure (1) (SB5 During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2,
MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the feed/load conveyor unit to the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
11336 failure) side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the side-positioning IP sensor - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
(SC3) or side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) transitions to CLOSE - Replace side-positioning IP sensor (SC3).
before the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) transitions to CLOSE. - Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
- Replace the SND board.
Feed IP sensor failure (2) (SG1 During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2,
MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the feed/load conveyor unit to the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
11337 failure) side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the side-positioning IP sensor - Replace side-positioning IP sensor (SC3).
(SC3) transitions to CLOSE before the side-positioning entrance IP sensor - Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
(SG1) transitions to CLOSE. - Replace the SND board.
Cassette type error During routine processing/M-Utility, an out-of-spec cassette is loaded into
11338 the machine (CR-IR362) equipped with a both-side cassette error detection
option.
Cassette barcode reading error <User operation>A cassette that is not compatible with the machine is
11339 loaded. <Occurrence condition>During routine processing, the barcode of
the cassette can be read, but the data is defective.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-21
MT-22
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
IP size detection error (1) During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2),
convergence path changeover guide drive motor (MB3), and side-
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2).
positioning motor (MC1) are driven to determine the IP size; when the IP - Replace convergence path changeover guide
passage time for the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5), the detection status of the driving motor (MB3).
"11x14 IP" determination sensor (SG2), and the sensor status of the inch/ - Replace side-positioning motor (MC1).
11340 metric sensor (SA6, SA12, SA18, SA24) are checked, the result does - Replace Inch/Metric sensors
not indicate a sensor combination that is used for IP size determination. (SA6,SA12,SA18,SA24).
Nonconformance of the IP size is detected. - Replace the Pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
- Replace "11x14 IP" determination sensor (SG2).
- Replace the SND board.
IP size detection error (2) During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP size detected by the machine is
11341 compared with the IP barcode information; however, error is detected in
the barcode information.
IP barcode reading error During routine processing, the barcode cannot be read by the barcode
reader (BCRC1) of the side-positioning conveyor unit. Though the retries
- Make sure the IP's barcode is clean.
- Check the cables and connectors.
11343 (twice) for reading the barcode are executed, it also cannot read, so that a - Replace barcode reader (BCRC1).
barcode data message which is input manually by user is displayed. - Replace the SND board.
IP type error During routine processing/M-Utility, the barcode information of the IP and
11345 the IP type that is set in CONFIG are compared; however, the barcode
information of an IP type other than the CONFIG setting is detected.
Load IP suction error (1) During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP
suction pump (PA1/2/3/4) is driven to load the IP to the cassette; however,
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP suction pumps (PA1/2/3/4).
11366 the suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) does not transition to OPEN within the - Replace suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23).
specified period of time. Though the retries (twice) are executed, the IP - Replace the SND board.
cannot be sucked.
Load IP suction error (2) (drop) During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the IP is sucked to perform
suction conveyance of the IP from the feed/load conveyor unit to the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP suction pumps (PA1/2/3/4).
11367 cassette; however, the CLOSE state (IP drop) of the suction sensor - Replace suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23).
(SA5/11/17/23) is detected during IP conveyance. Though the retries (twice) - Replace the SND board.
for the IP suction are executed, the IP drop is detected again.
Initialization cassette status error During bootup, the IP is detected in the cassette set unit; however, the
OPEN state of the cassette IN sensor (SA2/8/14/20) or the CLOSE state
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace cassette IN sensors (SA2/8/14/20).
11425 of the cassette hold sensor (SA3/9/15/21) is detected for the confirmation - Replace cassette hold sensors (SA3/9/15/21).
of the presence of cassette, so that inconsistency of the sensor status is - Replace the SND board.
detected.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-22
MT-23
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Initialization IP position During bootup, the CMOS information (IP found) of the machine does not
11459 coincide with the remaining IP search processing result (IP not found), so
information error that the user is notified.
11490 IP is overexposed An overexposed IP was detected during bootup or routine processing.
11493 Dummy cassette ejection request During bootup, a dummy cassette is detected, and ejection of the cassette
is requested.
11494 Dummy cassette request As no dummy cassette is detected upon termination, and insertion of the
dummy cassette is requested.
11495 Remove an empty cassette An empty cassette was detected during bootup.
Press urgency and the shelf regresses.
11496 Unread IP was ejected A cassette was loaded while the CL was not ready for reading.
11497 Barcode manual input The manual input window opens when barcode reading failed.
Empty the largest cassette and The IP size was unknown or the ejection destination cassette was not
11498 found during bootup.
insert the cassette
11499 IP reading suspended A remaining IP that could not be returned as an unprocessed IP was
detected at a position behind the subscanning unit during bootup.
11510 Unread IP ejection (1) During routine processing, IP was returned to the cassette without being
read because of reasons of CL.
Patient information not registered <User operation>This error occurs during image output when the
menu is not selected. <Occurrence condition>The patient information
11511 corresponding to the barcode of the processed IP has not been registered
in the CL. Or in the case that the barcode cannot be read because the
barcode affixed on the IP is soiled or the like.
ID information obtaining error Although the RU sent an ID information inquiry to the CL during
routine processing, the RU could not obtain ID information due to a CL
abnormality. (except when the ID information could not be acquired due to
11512 an unregistered ID or barcode error). After the processed IP returns to a
cassette, the cassette is ejected so that the associated message appears
on the RU panel.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-23
MT-24
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Invalid response from Start-Read Although the RU has sent the Start-Read command to the CL, the CL
11527 received the reject command so a message is displayed accordingly.
command CL
11530 Image data retransmission The RU has retransmitted the image data to the CL
Retransmission retry failure During routine processing, an attempt is made to retransmit the unsent
image data from the RU to the CL after communication with the CL is
- Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
11531 suspended; however, the CL rejects it, so that the image data is lost and
the cassette is ejected.
Image data variation or back- When the virtual data transfer diagnostics was conducted for bootup,
virtual image A/D conversion data is out of predetermined range.
- Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
11600 side image signal connector error
during bootup
[BACK]S-value fluctuations (1) Compare the SK (current SK) calculated during routine processing with the - Check if the exterior covers are attached correctly.
initialization SK (SKSTART), and convert it to S value, ±50 to ±70% error - Reinstall the application.
11670 was detected. - Replace the light-collecting guide, PMR board.
- Replace the CPU board.
[BACK]S-value fluctuations (2) Compare the SK (current SK) calculated during routine processing with the - Check if the exterior covers are attached correctly.
initialization SK (SKSTART), and convert it to S value, ±70% or more error - Reinstall the application.
11671 was detected. - Replace the light-collecting guide, PMR board.
- Replace the CPU board.
Insufficient image erasure Insufficiently erased IP was ejected to the cassette because some of the
image erasure lamps were unlit.To confirm the number of unlit lamps, see
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace lamp case.
11700 because some of the erasure Chapter MD.
lamps were unlit.
Erasure time extension due to During bootup and routine processing, when the erasure lamps are turned - Check the cables and connectors.
11701 on during IP erasure, a single lamp is unlit. A message appears to notify - Replace lamp case.
erasure lamp illumination failure the user that the IP will be inadequately erased.
Erasure lamp life end advance A predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time was exceeded. - Replace lamp case.
11702 Therefore, the message appeared to indicate that the lamp life end is
notice about to be reached.
11703 Erasure lamp life end 1 The life end warning message appeared because a predetermined
cumulative erasure lamp illumination time was exceeded.
- Replace lamp case.
11704 Erasure lamp life end 2 The life end message appeared because a predetermined cumulative
erasure lamp illumination time was exceeded.
- Replace lamp case.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-24
MT-25
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Erasure lamp cleaning end A predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time was exceeded. - Clean lamp case.
11790 Therefore, the message appeared to indicate that the lamp life end is
advance notice about to be reached.
11791 Erasure lamp cleaning end 1 The life end warning message appeared because a predetermined
cumulative erasure lamp illumination time was exceeded.
- Clean lamp case.
11905 IP suction pump life end The message appeared and the error was logged because the life end of
the IP suction pump was reached. Replace the pump.
- Replace IP suction pumps (PA1/2/3/4).
12020 File backup restoration During initializing process, since file reading failure, the system has been
restored by using the backup on the FLASH ROM.
- Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
FTP server access error During bootup and during routine processing, the FTP server cannot be - Check that the master CL has been started up.
12071 accessed because of communication from the RU to the CL. Or, the FTP - Reinstall the application.
server may be accessed, but a connection cannot be established. - Replace the CPU board.
12072 History file restore As the history file on the FTP server is destroyed, it is restored from the
backup file.
- Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
MUTL mode multiple access “MUTL mode” functions are simultaneously activated for the RU. The first - Reinstall the application.
12080 input function operates, but the second input function does not. The error - Replace the CPU board.
warning is logged.
SED board power supply error During initializing and routine processing, an connection (power supply) - Check the cables and connectors.
12210 error of the leading-edge detection (SED) board is detected. - Replace the SED board.
- Replace the power supply.
12223 HV-ON high voltage value error During routine process, it is detected that HV high voltage data is out of
the range when in the status of HV ON.
- Check the light shielding (covers or the like)
- Replace the PMT board.
12230 LD driving current value error During routine processing, the laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than - Check the cables and connectors.
1.4 times the factory default value. - Replace the Scanning Optics Unit.
Driving current maximum value During bootup and routine processing, the driving current maximum value - Check the cables and connectors.
12232 is more than “initial current maximum value” + “defined value”. - Replace the Scanning Optics Unit.
update
12233 LD light intensity error During routine processing, the laser light intensity is less than 50%. - Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace the Scanning Optics Unit.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-25
MT-26
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Polygon index signal error During bootup and routine processing, there is an error on period of index - Check the cables and connectors.
12242 signal for each rotation of polygon, and a interruption occurred. - Replace the Scanning Optics Unit.
- Replace the CPU board.
Polygon lock timeout During bootup and routine processing, the polygon OK signal is not - Check the cables and connectors.
12243 detected within the specified time period after the polygon is turned ON (the - Replace the Scanning Optics Unit.
first time). - Replace the CPU board.
Polygon lock error During bootup and routine processing, error for the polygon lock signal - Check the cables and connectors.
12244 (POL_LOCK) is detected. - Replace the Scanning Optics Unit.
- Replace the CPU board.
12245 Polygon counter timeout During bootup and routine processing, interruptions were not notified within - Check the cables and connectors.
300ms from LD-ON. - Replace the Scanning Optics Unit.
Leading-edge detection timeout During routine processing, there was no interruption of leading-edge - Check the cables and connectors.
12250 detection within a certain time period. - Replace the Scanning Optics Unit.
- Replace the CPU board.
Back-end detection timeout During routine processing, there was no interruption of back-end detection
within a certain time period.
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
12251 - Replace the side-positioning IP sensor (SC3)
- Replace the SND board.
DSP interruption timeout During routine processing, there was no interruption of DSP completion - Reinstall the application.
12254 within a certain time period, but normal completion was detected by - Replace the CPU board.
checking DSP status, so the process continues.
[FRONT]S-value fluctuations (1) Compare the SK (current SK) calculated during routine processing with the - Perform shading/sensitivity correction.
12270 initialization SK (SKSTART), and convert it to S value, ±50 to ±70% error - Reinstall the application.
was detected. - Replace the CPU board.
[FRONT]S-value fluctuations (2) Compare the SK (current SK) calculated during routine processing with the - Perform shading/sensitivity correction.
12271 initialization SK (SKSTART), and convert it to S value, ±70% or more error - Reinstall the application.
was detected. - Replace the CPU board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-26
MT-27
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
12274 Laser life warning (log) LD lighting accumulated time reaches the expected lifetime (3000hrs). (Log
level)
Format adjustment data error During bootup/M-Utility, out-of-range format Machine-Specific Data is input. - Reinstall the application.
12284 - Replace the CPU board.
(when loading file)
File restore error During MUTL, an error occurs when restoring the SCN data list. - Check that the data for restoration is not corrupted.
12285 - Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
Scanner retry During bootup and routine processing, retries for polygon or HV ON occur
(the first time).
- Check the DIP switch.
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Reinstall the application.
12286 - Replace the PMT/PMR board.
- Replace the Scanning Optics Unit.
- Replace the CPU board.
Cassette setting status warning <User operation>After the cassette is loaded, the cassette is pulled out
immediately. <Occurrence Condition> During routine processing/M-Utility,
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace cassette hold solenoids (SOLA1/2/3/4).
12320 (1) the cassette hold solenoid (SOLA1/2/3/4) is turned OFF and the hold pin - Replace cassette ejection sensors (SA1/7/13/19).
protrudes to hold the cassette; however, the cassette ejection sensor - Replace the SND board.
(SA1/7/13/19) transition to OPEN.
Cassette hold retry During routine processing/M-Utility, the cassette hold solenoid
(SOLA1/2/3/4) is turned OFF to hold the cassette, and the hold pin
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace cassette hold solenoids (SOLA1/2/3/4).
12321 protrudes; however, the cassette hold sensor (SA3/9/15/21) does not - Replace cassette ejection sensors (SA1/7/13/19).
transition to OPEN, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Cassette setting status warning During routine processing/M-Utility, when a sensor check is made
after cassette loading, the OPEN state of the cassette ejection sensor
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace cassette hold solenoids (SOLA1/2/3/4).
12322 (2) (SA1/7/13/19) is detected. - Replace cassette ejection sensors (SA1/7/13/19).
- Replace the SND board.
Hold pin release retry During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the cassette hold solenoid
(SOLA1/2/3/4) is turned ON to release the cassette hold; however, the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace cassette hold solenoids (SOLA1/2/3/4).
12324 cassette hold sensor (SA3/9/15/21) does not transition to CLOSE, thus - Replace cassette ejection sensors (SA1/7/13/19).
resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Cassette loading inlet disabled During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the user disables the shelf after
12325 occurrence of "11324" error or “11495” error.
setting
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-27
MT-28
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Feed IP suction retry (1) During routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP suction
pump (PA1/2/3/4) is driven to convey the IP from the cassette to the feed/
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP suction pumps (PA1/2/3/4).
12328 load conveyor unit; however, the suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) does not - Replace suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23).
transition to OPEN within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a - Replace the SND board.
retry.
Feed IP suction retry (2) (drop) During routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP is
sucked to convey the IP from the cassette to the feed/load conveyor
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP suction pumps (PA1/2/3/4).
12329 unit; however, the CLOSE state of the suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) is - Replace suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23).
detected during IP conveyance, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Feed/load unit entrance IP feed During routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, an attempt
is made to convey the IP from the cassette to the feed/load conveyor
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
12330 conveyance retry unit; however, the IP feed/load sensor (SB1/2/3/4) does not transition - Replace the SND board.
to CLOSE. After that, retries (twice) for suction operation have been
executed.
IP-feed air leak warning During routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP leak
valve (SVA1/2/3/4) is driven to convey the IP from the cassette to the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP suction pumps (PA1/2/3/4).
12331 feed/load conveyor unit, and the IP suction pump (PA1/2/3/4) is stopped; - Replace IP leak valve (SVA1/2/3/4).
however, the suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) does not transition to CLOSE - Replace suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23).
within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
Feed IP conveyance error (1) During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2,
MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the feed/load conveyor unit to the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
12332 side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. It has - Replace the SND board.
been retried
Feed IP conveyance error (2) During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2,
MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the feed/load conveyor unit to the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
12333 side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the side-positioning entrance IP - Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
sensor (SG1) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of - Replace the SND board.
time.
Feed IP conveyance error (3) During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2,
MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the feed/load conveyor unit to the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
12334 side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. It has been - Replace the SND board.
retried
Feed IP conveyance error (4) During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2,
MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the feed/load conveyor unit to the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
12335 side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the side-positioning IP sensor - Replace side-positioning IP sensor (SC3).
(SC3) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. It - Replace the SND board.
has been retried
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-28
MT-29
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Feed IP sensor failure (1) During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2,
MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the feed/load conveyor unit to the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
12336 (SB5 failure) side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the side-positioning IP sensor - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
(SC3) or side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) transitions to CLOSE - Replace side-positioning IP sensor (SC3).
before the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) transitions to CLOSE. It has been - Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
retried - Replace the SND board.
Feed IP sensor failure (2) During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2,
MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the feed/load conveyor unit to the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
12337 (SG1 failure) side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the side-positioning IP sensor - Replace side-positioning IP sensor (SC3).
(SC3) transitions to CLOSE before the side-positioning entrance IP sensor - Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
(SG1) transitions to CLOSE. It has been retried - Replace the SND board.
IP barcode reading retry During routine processing, the barcode cannot be read by the IP barcode - Check the cables and connectors.
12343 reader (BCRC1) of the side-positioning conveyor unit. - Replace barcode reader (BCRC1).
- Replace CPU board.
12347 Reading and conveyance retry As the IP cannot be conveyed to the reader unit within a specified time, a
retry is made.
SE2 IP sensor status warning During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (MD2, ME1) is
driven to convey the IP to the erasure conveyor unit after the IP is read,
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motor (MD2,ME1).
and the post-reading conveyance standby IP sensor (SE1) transitions - Replace post-reading conveyance standby IP
12350 to CLOSE; however, the switchback standby IP sensor (SE2) does not sensor (SE1).
transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. - Replace switchback standby IP sensor (SE2).
- Replace the SND board.
Switchback conveyance retry During bootup/routine processing, although the IP has been conveyed to
the switchback conveyance, IP conveyance to IP detection sensor (SE1)
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace post-reading conveyance standby IP
12351 has been retried by rotating backward ME1 since the IP has gone through sensor (SE1).
the IP detection sensor (SE1). - Replace the SND board.
Conveyance error after reading With conveyance driving (high-speed) after reading, since changes of
the sensor (SE2) are detected after the motor (MD2/ME1) is activated,
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motor (MD2,ME1).
12352 (1) suspension of motor has been waited, however timeout (TE13) occurred. - Replace switchback standby IP sensor (SE2).
- Replace the SND board.
Erasure lamp IP transporting Although the IP transport motor (ME1) was driven for IP conveyance
(erasure conveyor) during routine processing, the switchback standby IP
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motor (ME1).
12357 retry warning sensor (SE2) was closed because the IP did not pass the sensor within the - Replace switchback standby IP sensor (SE2).
specified time. Consequently, the IP transport motor (ME1) operation was - Replace the SND board.
retried.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-29
MT-30
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Post-erasure feed/load unit IP During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1, MB1, MB2)
is driven to convey the IP to the cassette after the IP is erased; however,
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
12359 conveyance error the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) does not transition to CLOSE within the - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
specified period of time. It has been retried - Replace the SND board.
Load IP conveyance error (1) During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1, MB1, MB2)
is driven to convey the IP to the cassette after the IP is erased, and the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP transport motors (ME1,MB1,MB2).
12360 pre-BCR sensor (SB5) transitions to CLOSE; however, the IP feed/load - Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
sensor (SB1/2/3/4) for the shelf of interest does not transition to CLOSE - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
within the specified period of time. It has been retried - Replace the SND board.
Load IP conveyance error (4) During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1, MB1,
MB2) is driven to convey the IP to the feed/load conveyor unit after the IP
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP transport motors (ME1,MB1,MB2).
12363 is erased; however, the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) does not transition to - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
OPEN within the specified period of time. It has been retried - Replace the SND board.
Load IP suction retry (1) During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the
IP suction pump (PA1/2/3/4) is driven to return the processed IP to the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP suction pumps (PA1/2/3/4).
12366 cassette; however, the suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) does not transition to - Replace suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23).
OPEN within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a suction retry. - Replace the SND board.
Load IP suction retry (2) (drop) During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the IP suction pump (PA1/2/3/4)
is driven to perform IP load conveyance, and the suction sensor
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP suction pumps (PA1/2/3/4).
12367 (SA5/11/17/23) transitions to OPEN; however, the SA5/11/17/23 transitions - Replace suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23).
to CLOSE (IP drop) during IP load conveyance, thus resulting in a suction - Replace the SND board.
retry.
IP-load air leak warning During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP
lead valve (SVA1/2/3/4) is driven to return the processed IP from the feed/
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP suction pumps (PA1/2/3/4).
12368 load conveyor unit to the cassette, and the IP suction pump (PA1/2/3/4) is - Replace IP leak valve (SVA1/2/3/4).
stopped; however, the suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) does not transition to - Replace suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23).
CLOSE within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
Path guide HP detection retry (1) During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path
changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven to perform home-positioning
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace convergence path changeover guide
of the path changeover guide (feed/load conveyor unit); however, the path driving motor (MB3).
12369 changeover HP sensor (SB11) does not transition to CLOSE within the - Replace path changeover HP sensor (SB11).
specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace half-clutch spur gears (x2).
- Replace the SND board.
Path guide HP detection retry (2) During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path
changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven to perform home-positioning
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace convergence path changeover guide
of the path changeover guide (feed/load conveyor unit); however, the path driving motor (MB3).
12370 changeover shelf sensor (SB7/8/9) does not transition to CLOSE within the - Replace path changeover shelf sensors (SB7/8/9).
specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace half-clutch spur gears (x2).
- Replace the SND board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-30
MT-31
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Path guide changeover retry During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path
changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven to perform path changeover
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace convergence path changeover guide
operation (feed/load conveyor unit); however, the path changeover shelf driving motor (MB3).
12371 sensor (SB7/8/9) and path changeover HP sensor (SB11) do not transition - Replace path changeover shelf sensors (SB7/8/9).
to CLOSE within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace path changeover HP sensor (SB11).
- Replace half-clutch spur gears (x2).
- Replace the SND board.
Convergence path guide During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path
changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven to perform path changeover
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace convergence path changeover guide
12372 changeover warning operation (feed/load conveyor unit) after IP erasure; however, the driving motor (MB3).
convergence path changeover sensor (SB10) does not transition to - Replace convergence path changeover sensor (SB10).
CLOSE within the specified period of time, thus resulting in HP positioning. - Replace the SND board.
Convergence path guide HP During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path
changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven to perform path changeover
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace convergence path changeover guide
12373 detection retry (2) operation (feed/load conveyor unit) after IP erasure; however, the driving motor (MB3).
convergence path changeover sensor (SB10) does not transition to - Replace convergence path changeover sensor (SB10).
CLOSE within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
Side-positioning unit grip HP During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MC2) is driven for one
pulse to perform grip home-positioning of the side-positioning conveyor
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip release HP sensor (SC2).
12374 detection retry (1) unit; however, the grip release HP sensor (SC2) does not transition to - Replace grip release motor (MC2).
CLOSE within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Side-positioning unit grip HP During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MC2) is driven to perform
grip home-positioning of the side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip release HP sensor (SC2).
12375 detection retry (2) grip release HP sensor (SC2) does not transition to CLOSE within the - Replace grip release motor (MC2).
specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Side-positioning unit grip HP During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MC2) is driven to perform
grip home-positioning of the side-positioning conveyor unit; however,
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip release HP sensor (SC2).
12376 detection retry (3) the grip release HP sensor (SC2) does not transition to OPEN within the - Replace grip release motor (MC2).
specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Side-positioning unit grip HP During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MC2)
is driven to perform grip operation of the side-positioning conveyor unit;
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip release HP sensor (SC2).
12377 detection warning however, the grip release HP sensor (SC2) does not transition to CLOSE, - Replace grip release motor (MC2).
so that home-positioning is performed. - Replace the SND board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-31
MT-32
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Post-reading conveyor unit grip During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MD1) is driven for one
pulse to perform grip home-positioning of the post-reading conveyor unit;
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip release motor (MD1).
12378 HP detection retry (1) however, the grip release HP sensor (SD1) does not transition to CLOSE - Replace grip release HP sensor (SD1).
within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Post-reading conveyor unit grip During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MD1) is driven to perform
grip home-positioning of the post-reading conveyor unit; however, the grip
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip release motor (MD1).
12379 HP detection retry (2) release HP sensor (SD1) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified - Replace grip release HP sensor (SD1).
period of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Post-reading conveyor unit grip During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MD1) is driven to perform
grip home-positioning of the post-reading conveyor unit; however, the grip
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip release motor (MD1).
12380 HP detection retry (3) release HP sensor (SD1) does not transition to OPEN within the specified - Replace grip release HP sensor (SD1).
period of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Post-reading conveyor unit grip During routine processing/primary erasure/M-Utility, the grip release motor - Check the cables and connectors.
(MD1) is driven after IP reading; however, the grip release HP sensor (SD1) - Replace grip release motor (MD1).
12381 HP detection retry (4) does not transition to CLOSE, so that home-positioning is performed. - Replace grip release HP sensor (SD1).
- Replace the SND board.
Erasure unit grip HP detection During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (ME3) is driven for one
pulse to perform grip home-positioning of the erasure conveyor unit;
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip release motor (ME3).
12382 retry (1) however, the grip release HP sensor (SE5) does not transition to CLOSE - Replace grip release HP sensor (SE5).
within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Erasure unit grip HP detection During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (ME3) is driven to perform
grip home-positioning of the erasure conveyor unit; however, the grip
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip release motor (ME3).
12383 retry (2) release HP sensor (SE5) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified - Replace grip release HP sensor (SE5).
period of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Erasure unit grip HP detection During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (ME3) is driven to perform
grip home-positioning of the erasure conveyor unit; however, the grip
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip release motor (ME3).
12384 retry (3) release HP sensor (SE5) does not transition to OPEN within the specified - Replace grip release HP sensor (SE5).
period of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Erasure unit grip HP detection During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (ME3) is driven to convey
the IP after IP erasure; however, the grip release HP sensor (SE5) does
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip release motor (ME3).
12385 warning not transition to CLOSE, so that home-positioning is performed. - Replace grip release HP sensor (SE5).
- Replace the SND board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-32
MT-33
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Side-positioning unit side- During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor
(MC1) is driven for one pulse to perform home-positioning of the side-
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace side-positioning motor (MC1).
12386 positioning mechanism HP positioning mechanism (side-positioning conveyor unit); however, the side- - Replace side-positioning mechanism HP sensor (SC1).
positioning mechanism HP sensor (SC1) does not transition to CLOSE - Replace the SND board.
detection retry (1) within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.
Side-positioning unit side- During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor
(MC1) is driven to perform home-positioning of the side-positioning
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace side-positioning motor (MC1).
12387 positioning mechanism HP mechanism (side-positioning conveyor unit); however, the side-positioning - Replace side-positioning mechanism HP sensor (SC1).
mechanism HP sensor (SC1) does not transition to CLOSE within the - Replace the SND board.
detection retry (2) specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.
Side-positioning unit side- During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor
(MC1) is driven to perform home-positioning of the side-positioning
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace side-positioning motor (MC1).
12388 positioning mechanism HP mechanism (side-positioning conveyor unit); however, the side-positioning - Replace side-positioning mechanism HP sensor (SC1).
mechanism HP sensor (SC1) does not transition to OPEN within the - Replace the SND board.
detection retry (3) specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.
Erasure unit side-positioning During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor
(ME2) is driven for one pulse to perform side-positioning mechanism
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace side-positioning motor (ME2).
12390 mechanism HP detection retry (1) home-positioning of the erasure conveyor unit; however, the erasure side- - Replace erasure side-positioning mechanism HP
positioning mechanism HP sensor (SE4) does not transition to CLOSE sensor (SE4).
within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Erasure unit side-positioning During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor (ME2)
is driven to perform side-positioning mechanism home-positioning of the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace side-positioning motor (ME2).
12391 mechanism HP detection retry (2) erasure conveyor unit; however, the erasure side-positioning mechanism - Replace erasure side-positioning mechanism HP
HP sensor (SE4) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period sensor (SE4).
of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Erasure unit side-positioning During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor (ME2)
is driven to perform side-positioning mechanism home-positioning in the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace side-positioning motor (ME2).
12392 mechanism HP detection retry (3) erasure conveyor unit; however, the erasure side-positioning mechanism - Replace erasure side-positioning mechanism HP
HP sensor (SE4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of sensor (SE4).
time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-33
MT-34
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Suction cup HP detection retry (1) During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the suction cup drive motor
(MA1/2/3/4) is driven for one pulse to perform suction cup home-
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace suction cup driving motors (MA1/2/3/4).
12394 positioning; however, the suction cup HP sensor (SA4/10/16/22) does not - Replace suction cup HP sensor (SA4/10/16/22).
transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a - Replace the SND board.
retry.
Suction cup HP detection retry (2) During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the suction cup drive motor
(MA1/2/3/4) is driven to perform suction cup home-positioning; however,
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace suction cup driving motors (MA1/2/3/4).
12395 the suction cup HP sensor (SA4/10/16/22) does not transition to CLOSE - Replace suction cup HP sensor (SA4/10/16/22).
within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Suction cup HP detection retry (3) During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the suction cup drive motor
(MA1/2/3/4) is driven to perform suction cup home-positioning; however,
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace suction cup driving motors (MA1/2/3/4).
12396 the suction cup HP sensor (SA4/10/16/22) does not transition to OPEN - Replace suction cup HP sensor (SA4/10/16/22).
within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Load conveyance retry After erasure, the IP transport motor (MC1) is driven to eject the IP to the
cassette; however, the IP passed over the IP feed/load sensor (SB1/2/3/4)
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP transport motor (MB1).
12397 after the motor stopped. (It used to be OPEN) - Replace IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4).
- Replace the SND board.
Cleaning guide HP detection During bootup/M-Utility, the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) is driven
for one pulse to perform cleaning guide home-positioning; however, the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace cleaning guide driving motor (MC4).
12398 retry (1) cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4) does not transition to CLOSE within the - Replace cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4).
specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Cleaning guide HP detection During bootup/M-Utility, the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) is driven to
perform cleaning guide home-positioning; however, the cleaning guide HP
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace cleaning guide driving motor (MC4).
12399 retry (2) sensor (SC4) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of - Replace cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4).
time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Cleaning guide HP detection During bootup/M-Utility, the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) is driven to
perform cleaning guide home-positioning; however, the cleaning guide HP
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace cleaning guide driving motor (MC4).
12400 retry (3) sensor (SC4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of - Replace cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4).
time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Cleaning guide grip operation During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the cleaning guide drive motor
(MC4) is driven to grip the cleaning guide (guide-down); however, the
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace cleaning guide driving motor (MC4).
12401 detection warning cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4) does not transition to OPEN. - Replace cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4).
- Replace the SND board.
Cleaning guide HP detection During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the cleaning guide drive
motor (MC4) is driven to release the grip of the cleaning guide (guide-
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace cleaning guide driving motor (MC4).
12402 warning up); however, the cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4) does not transition to - Replace cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4).
CLOSE, so that home-positioning is performed. - Replace the SND board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-34
MT-35
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
IP stopper HP detection retry (1) During bootup/M-Utility, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) is driven for one
pulse to perform IP stopper home-positioning; however, the IP stopper HP
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP stopper driving motor (MZ4).
12403 sensor (SZ5) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of - Replace IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5).
time, thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
IP stopper HP detection retry (2) During bootup/M-Utility, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) is driven to
perform IP stopper home-positioning; however, the IP stopper HP sensor
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP stopper driving motor (MZ4).
12404 (SZ5) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time, - Replace IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5).
thus resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
IP stopper HP detection retry (3) During bootup/M-Utility, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) is driven to
perform IP stopper home-positioning; however, the IP stopper HP sensor
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP stopper driving motor (MZ4).
12405 (SZ5) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time, thus - Replace IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5).
resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
IP stopper protrusion detection During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) - Check the cables and connectors.
is driven for IP stopper protruding operation; however, the IP stopper HP - Replace IP stopper driving motor (MZ4).
12406 warning sensor (SZ5) does not transition to OPEN, thus resulting in HP positioning. - Replace IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5).
- Replace the SND board.
IP stopper HP detection warning During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4)
is driven for IP stopper retreating operation; however, the IP stopper HP
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP stopper driving motor (MZ4).
12407 sensor (SZ5) does not transition to CLOSE, so that home-positioning is - Replace IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5).
performed. - Replace the SND board.
Suction cup HP detection During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, when the suction cup home
position is checked, the suction cup HP sensor (SA4/10/16/22) does not
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace suction cup driving motors (MA1/2/3/4).
12408 warning (1) transition to CLOSE, so that home-positioning is performed. - Replace suction cup HP sensor (SA4/10/16/22).
- Replace the SND board.
Suction cup HP detection During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, when the suction cup home
position is checked, the suction cup HP sensor (SA4/10/16/22) does not
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace suction cup driving motors (MA1/2/3/4).
12409 warning (2) transition to CLOSE, so that home-positioning is performed. - Replace suction cup HP sensor (SA4/10/16/22).
- Replace the SND board.
Driving-shaft grip release warning During routine processing/M-Utility, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to
perform grip release operation for the driving shaft; however, the driving-
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
12410 side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) does not transition to CLOSE within the - Replace driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2).
specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
Driving-shaft grip velocity During routine processing/M-Utility except for secondary erasure, the
grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to perform driving shaft grip operation;
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
12411 correction process operation however, the variation of the grip speed within the allowable range is - Replace the SND board.
detected, so that the speed was corrected after reading was finished.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-35
MT-36
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Driven-shaft grip release velocity During routine processing/M-Utility except for secondary erasure, the grip
drive motor (MZ2) was used to monitor the speed of a driven shaft grip
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
12413 correction process operation release operation, the speed deviated from normal but remained within the - Replace the SND board.
acceptable range. Therefore, the speed correction process was performed
after the reading was finished.
Driven-shaft grip warning During routine processing/M-Utility, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to
perform grip release operation for the driven shaft; however, the driven-
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
12414 side grip release HP sensor (SZ3) does not transition to CLOSE within the - Replace driven-side grip release HP sensor (SZ3).
specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
Driving-shaft high-speed grip During secondary erasure/M-Utility, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven at
high speed to perform grip release operation for the driven shaft; however,
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
12415 release warning the driven-side grip release HP sensor (SZ3) does not transition to OPEN - Replace driven-side grip release HP sensor (SZ3).
within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
Driving-shaft grip speed For the correction processing during bootup/at the end of reading, the
grip speed of the driving shaft is corrected; however, the driving-side grip
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
12417 correction value warning release HP sensor (SZ2) does not transition to OPEN within the specified - Replace driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2).
period of time, thus resulting in a retry for grip speed correction. - Replace the SND board.
Driving-shaft grip speed For the correction processing during bootup/at the end of reading, the grip
drive motor (MZ2) is driven to perform operation for correcting the grip
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
12418 correction failure speed of the driving shaft; however, the driving-side grip release HP sensor - Replace driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2).
(SZ2) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. - Replace the SND board.
Dust removal HP detection During routine processing, the home position of the dust removal
mechanism has been checked. As the dust removal HP detection sensor
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace dust removal motor (MZ3).
12430 warning (SZ4) is in CLOSE, home-positioning was performed. - Replace dust-removal HP sensor (SZ4).
- Replace the SND board.
Dust removal HP detection retry During bootup, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (counterclockwise)
to perform home-positioning of the dust removal mechanism; however,
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace dust removal motor (MZ3).
12433 (1) the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to OPEN within the - Replace dust-removal HP sensor (SZ4).
specified period of time, resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Dust removal HP detection retry During bootup, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (counterclockwise)
to perform home-positioning of the dust removal mechanism; however,
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace dust removal motor (MZ3).
12434 (2) the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to CLOSE within the - Replace dust-removal HP sensor (SZ4).
specified period of time, resulting in a retry. - Replace the SND board.
Initialization convergence path IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to
perform the remaining IP search processing, and before the side-
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
12440 conveyance warning (1) positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) and pre-convergence IP sensor (SB6) - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
transition to OPEN, the OPEN state of the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) is - Replace pe-convergence IP sensor (SB6).
detected. The IP should be checked for any scratch because the IP may - Replace side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1).
have been scratched. - Replace the SND board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-36
MT-37
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
Initialization convergence path IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to perform
the remaining IP search processing, and the MB1, MB2, ME1 is stopped
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace IP Transport Motors (MB1,MB2,MC3).
12441 conveyance warning (2) after the pre-convergence IP sensor (SB6) transitions to CLOSE; however, - Replace the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5).
the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) does not transition to OPEN. The IP should - Replace pe-convergence IP sensor (SB6).
be checked for any scratch because the IP may have been scratched. - Replace the SND board.
12522 ACK receiving time-out During bootup or routine processing, a message is transmitted from RU to
CL, however, RU cannot receive ACK, thus resulting in a time-out.
- Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
12623 HV-ON high voltage value error During routine process, it is detected that HV high voltage data is out of
the range when in the status of HV ON.
- Check the light shielding (covers or the like)
- Replace the PMT board.
[BACK]S-value fluctuations (1) Compare the SK (current SK) calculated during routine processing with the - Perform HR-BD shading / sensitivity correction.
12670 initialization SK (SKSTART), and convert it to S value, ±50 to ±70% error - Reinstall the application.
was detected. - Replace the CPU board.
[BACK] S-value fluctuations (2) Compare the SK (current SK) calculated during routine processing with the - Perform HR-BD shading / sensitivity correction.
12671 initialization SK (SKSTART), and convert it to S value, ±70% or more error - Reinstall the application.
was detected. - Replace the CPU board.
12700 Unlit erasure lamp detection retry A retry has been executed since an unlit erasure lamp is detected. - Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace lamp case.
USB communication retry A retry has been executed since the USB communication failed between - Check the cables and connectors.
12902 PNL38A board and CPU39A board. - Replace the CPU board.
- Replace touch panel assembly.
12904 PNL board demand error An unexpected command ID has been sent from PNL38A board. - Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace touch panel assembly.
PNL board parameters error The parameters sent from PNL38A board to CPU39A board are not - Check the cables and connectors.
12906 correct. - Replace the CPU board.
- Replace touch panel assembly.
12907 PNL board Installer open error PNL board installer is not in the predetermined place when performing the
installation.
- Reinstall the application.
- Replace touch panel assembly.
13001 Error log clear failure MUTL: an error log clear failure is detected. - Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
13281 [SHD record] Reading IP size error During MUTL, the IP of the size other than the input size is inserted for
shading correction so that an error is detected.
- Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
[SHD record] SHD/POLY During MUTL, the correction data failed to be generated since the - Reinstall the application.
13282 difference between MIN - MAX for QL value of shading data exceeds - Replace the CPU board.
correction data error specified value.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-37
MT-38
Error
Error Name Occurrence Condition Probable Cause and Remedy
Code
[SHD record] Sensitivity correction During MUTL, an out-of-spec HV is input. - Check the light shielding (covers or the like)
- Replace the PMT board.
13283 HVCNT is beyond the scope of
the assumption
13284 [UTY]Format adjustment data error During MUTL, when format adjustments are performed, out-of-range data
is input.
- Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
13288 [SHD record] SHD data writing error During MULT, SHD data failed to be written into FLASH ROM. - Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
[SHD record] Record was During MUTL, the shading correction data failed to be generated. Perform
the shading correction again.
- Perform shading correction.
13289 canceled because of timeout or
other reasons
Driving-shaft grip velocity During routine processing/M-Utility except for secondary erasure, the
grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to perform driving shaft grip operation;
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
13411 correction process operation however, the variation of the grip speed within the allowable range is - Replace the SND board.
detected, so that the speed was corrected after reading was finished.
Driven-shaft grip release velocity During routine processing/M-Utility except for secondary erasure, the grip
drive motor (MZ2) was used to monitor the speed of a driven shaft grip
- Check the cables and connectors.
- Replace grip driving motor (MZ2).
13413 correction process operation release operation, the speed deviated from normal but remained within the - Replace the SND board.
acceptable range. Therefore, the speed correction process was performed
after the reading was finished.
13703 Flash ROM read/write error An error is detected for the flash ROM read/write test in MUTL: Board
Check.
- Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
13710 Sensor test error An error is detected for the sensor test in MUTL: Board Check. - Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
13711 Panel LED error An error is detected for the panel LED test in MUTL: Board Check. - Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
13712 Solenoid error An error is detected for the solenoid test in MUTL: Board Check. - Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
13713 Pulse motor error An error is detected for the pulse motor test in MUTL: Board Check. - Reinstall the application.
- Replace the CPU board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-38
MT-39
3. Detail Code
3.1 Error Log
3.1.1 How to Understand Detail Code
The error log contains the operation mode of the RU and detail code associated with
the error that occurred.
This section describes the detail code display format and meaning of each item.
n Display of Detail Code
SD1-2 SZ1-4 Barcode
SA1-24 SB1-11 SC1-4 SE1/2/4/5 SG1-2
[11366] 2003/07/29 14 : 07 : 42 159E22 @ 101110101111101111001010 : 00000001010 : 1101 : 10 : 0001 : 1000 : 00/ a41213735c/ 3/ 4
[12328] 2003/07/29 14 : 11 : 32 15F7DE @ 101110110111110011110011 : 00000000010 : 1101 : 10 : 0101 : 1000 : 00/ a-------------c/ 3/ 4
Error code Occurrence Checkout Sensor status Shelf
date
IP size
l Sensor status
0: OPEN
1: CLOSE
l IP size
1. 14" x 17"
2. 14" x 14"
3. 10" x 12"
4. 8" x 10"
5. 1824
6. 24 x 30 ST
7. 24 x 30 HR
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-39
MT-40
3.1.2 Detail Codes for Scanner Errors n Meaning of Six-Digit Detail Code
Scanner errors are detected by checking a plurality of scanner I/O states and finding a To each bit of a six-digit detail code is assigned an object to be checked during error
combination of defects and/or failures. check, so that a bit value of “1” indicates that the object to checked is in error.
Each I/O status at the time of error occurrence can be identified by checking the detail
code in the error log.
n Display of Detail Code
The detail code is displayed in six hexadecimal digits, located in the error log as
shown below.
NO. Object to be checked Signal source Value of bit
Hexadecimal
1 Start-point sensor SYN12A board 1 2 3 4
2 Leading-edge sensor SED23A board 0 0 0 0 0
I
3 Start-point mask signal SND39A board 1 0 0 0 1
4 Polygon index POL (polygon) 2 0 0 1 0
1 - - 3 0 0 1 1
2 - - 4 0 1 0 0
II
3 - - 5 0 1 0 1
4 - - 6 0 1 1 0
1 PMT analog power
PMT27B/PMR27B board 7 0 1 1 1
supply
III 2 Laser light intensity error LDD12A board 8 1 0 0 0
3 Polygon lock POL (polygon) 9 1 0 0 1
4 Polygon rpm POL (polygon) A 1 0 1 0
1 PLL function SND39A board B 1 0 1 1
2 Start-point period SYN12A board C 1 1 0 0
IV 3 High-voltage command
SND39A board D 1 1 0 1
value diagnostics
4 High-voltage detection
PMT27B/PMR27B board E 1 1 1 0
value diagnostics
1 - - F 1 1 1 1
2 - -
V
3 - -
4 LD drive current LDD12A board
1 - -
2 - -
VI 3 Reading status error SND39A board
4 Operation line status
SND39A board
error
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-40
MT-41
3.2 Operation Log 3.2.2 Contents of OPE.LOG
Shown below is an example of the operation log.
3.2.1 OPE.LOG and Storage Folder The displayed data appears in the order of “Year/month/day; Hour/min/sec; … Mode
IP size; IP serial number and Detected erasure dose”.
When RU is terminated normally, the operation log is automatically stored in the
following folder of the CL.
“C:\program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\CR-IR363a\system\IP address (example: Date and time IP serial number
172.16.1.210)\log\TRACE”
Detected erasure dose
(unit: mR)
Mode IP size
0: Read 0: 8 x 10
1: Primary erasure 1: 10 x 12
2: Secondary erasure 2: 14 x 14 (35 cm x 35 cm)
3: 14 x 17 (35 cm x 43 cm)
6: 24 cm x 30 cm
7: 18 cm x 24 cm
8: 24 cm x 30 cm (HR)
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-41
MT-42
4. Troubleshooting the Errors that 4.1 Checking the IIS
Cause the Inability to Update the Unless the IIS ("Internet Information Service") is not installed, the FTP server cannot
be used.
Software Version or Back Up the Make sure that the IIS has been installed in the CL that is used as the FTP server.
Machine Shipment Control Data n Check Procedures
This chapter summarizes the procedures for troubleshooting the errors that causes
the inability to update the software version or back up the machine shipment control 1 Press the key.
data.
Troubleshoot the errors in accordance with the check procedures in each section.
n Analysis Procedures 2 Select [Settings] - [Control Panel].
u NOTE u
Troubleshoot the errors in accordance with the following steps. Otherwise, they
3 Exit the CL software.
cannot be troubleshooted.
4 Double-click the "Administrative Tools" icon in "Control Panel".
m START
Q1 "CR Console communication error" displayed on the LCD panel of the RU?
Y
Restore
N {MT:6.1_Analysis Flow for Line Error between CL and RU}
Q2 Network Check from the RU OK?
5. Make sure that "IIS (Internet Information Service)" has been installed
{MU:3.3.7_Network Check}
in "Administrative Tools".
Y
END
N
Q3 Check the IIS.
{MT:4.1_Checking the IIS}
If the IIS has not been installed, install it.
Q4 Check the FTP server operating status.
{MT:4.2_Checking the Operating Status of the FTP Server}
Q5 Check the IP address of the CL.
{MT:4.3_Checking the IP Address of the CL}
Q6 Make sure that the RU has been registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU" of the RU PC-
TOOL
{MT:4.4_Checking "LIST OF EXISTING RU"}
END
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-42
MT-43
4.2 Checking the Operating Status of the FTP 4.3 Checking the IP Address of the CL
Server
n Check Procedures
n Check Procedures 1. Exit the CL software.
1. Exit the CL software.
2. Double-click on the desktop.
2 Press the key. → The “My Computer” window opens.
3 Select [Settings] - [Control Panel]. 3. Double-click .
4 Double-click “Administrative Tools” in “Control Panel”. → The “Control Panel” window opens.
4. Double-click .
→ The “Network and Dial-up connection” window opens.
5 Double-click “Internet Service Manager”.
5. Double-click .
→ The “Local Area Connection” window opens.
6. Click .
→ The “Local Area Connection Properties” window opens.
6. Make sure that “Default FTP Site” has been started (i.e., “Stopped” is
not displayed).
u NOTES u
- If it has been started, this procedure is completed.
- If "Stopped" is displayed, select [Start] from the [Action] menu
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-43
MT-44
7. Choose and then click . 4.4 Checking "LIST OF EXISTING RU"
→ The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
n Check Procedures
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
8. Make sure that the IP address of the FTP server matches “FTP-SERVER
IP ADDRESS” that is set in the RU.
If they are not matched, set the IP addresses of the RU and CL as appropriate.
{MT:4.5_Checking the FTP Server Address of the RU}
u INSTRUCTION u
If the RU is not registered yet, install it.
{IN:8_Installing the RU Software}
2. Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.2_Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-44
MT-45
4.5 Checking the FTP Server Address of the 3. Check the IP address of the FTP server.
RU
n Check Procedures
1. Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
2. Touch the [FTP Server] button.
Maintenance
u INSTRUCTION u
1/2
RU IP Address
FTP Server
Touch [FTP Server].
Default Gateway
Subnet Mask
Check whether the IP address setting agrees with the CL’s IP address, which
can be confirmed as directed under "4.3 Checking the IP Address of the CL". If
they differ from each other, change the setting as needed to match the CL’s IP
address.
REFERENCES
- Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be modified, and
touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits.
- To set the FTP server address of the RU to "172.16.1.11", enter all the digits in
the form of "172.016.001.011".
4. Touch the [OK] button.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 BS
Cancel OK
Touch [OK].
5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-45
MT-46
5. Procedures for Checking the 5.1.2 Exiting the Monitoring Function
Sensors 1. Click on the [STOP] button.
Whether the sensor is normal or not can be checked by sensor monitoring.
5.1 Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function
With the RU PC-TOOL sensor monitoring function activated, turn ON/OFF the sensor
to be checked. If the sensor status changes corresponding to the ON/OFF timing, it
can be judged that the sensor is normal.
2. Click on the button.
5.1.1 Starting the Monitoring Function
1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU.
2. Click on the [MON] button.
3. Click on the [START] button.
→ When the RU operates under this condition, display entries are added whenever
the I/O changes.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-46
MT-47
5.1.3 Examples of the Monitoring Logs n 2430 (ST): When an IP with barcode a********c was read at the second shelf
SA7 CLOSE 14:12:36 SE5 OPEN 14:13:11
n 14"x17": When an IP with barcode a********c was read at the first shelf SA8 CLOSE 14:12:36 SE4 OPEN 14:13:12
SA9 OPEN 14:12:37 SB6 OPEN 14:13:12
SA1 CLOSE 14:09:25 SE1 CLOSE 14:10:00
BCR2 ON 14:12:37 SB6 CLOSE 14:13:12
SA6 CLOSE 14:09:25 SE2 CLOSE 14:10:00
SA10 CLOSE 14:12:37 SE5 CLOSE 14:13:13
SA2 CLOSE 14:09:26 SZ1 CLOSE 14:10:01
SA10 OPEN 14:12:37 SE4 CLOSE 14:13:14
SA3 OPEN 14:09:26 SZ1 OPEN 14:10:01
SB11 OPEN 14:12:37 SB10 OPEN 14:13:14
BCR1 ON 14:09:26 SE1 OPEN 14:10:02
SA11 OPEN 14:12:38 SB5 CLOSE 14:13:16
SA4 CLOSE 14:09:26 SZ1 CLOSE 14:10:02
SB7 CLOSE 14:12:38 SB6 OPEN 14:13:16
SA4 OPEN 14:09:26 SZ1 OPEN 14:10:03
SA11 CLOSE 14:12:39 SB5 OPEN 14:13:16
SA5 OPEN 14:09:27 SE2 OPEN 14:10:05
SA10 CLOSE 14:12:39 SB2 CLOSE 14:13:17
SA5 CLOSE 14:09:28 SB6 CLOSE 14:10:07
SB2 CLOSE 14:12:39 SB2 OPEN 14:13:17
SA4 CLOSE 14:09:28 SB6 OPEN 14:10:08
BCR0 ON 14:12:39 SB10 CLOSE 14:13:19
SB1 CLOSE 14:09:28 SE5 OPEN 14:10:09
SB2 OPEN 14:12:40 SA10 OPEN 14:13:19
BCR0 ON 14:09:28 SE4 OPEN 14:10:09
SB5 CLOSE 14:12:41 SA11 OPEN 14:13:20
SB1 OPEN 14:09:30 SE5 CLOSE 14:10:10
SG1 CLOSE 14:12:41 SA11 CLOSE 14:13:20
SB5 CLOSE 14:09:30 SE4 CLOSE 14:10:10
SB5 OPEN 14:12:41 SA9 CLOSE 14:13:21
SG1 CLOSE 14:09:30 SB6 CLOSE 14:10:10
SG1 OPEN 14:12:42 SA8 OPEN 14:13:21
SG2 CLOSE 14:09:30 SB10 OPEN 14:10:11
SC3 CLOSE 14:12:42 SA10 CLOSE 14:13:22
SB5 OPEN 14:09:31 SB5 CLOSE 14:10:12
BCR0 READ a********c 14:12:42 SA7 OPEN 14:13:24
SG1 OPEN 14:09:31 SB6 OPEN 14:10:12
SC2 OPEN 14:12:42 SA10 OPEN 14:13:24
SG2 OPEN 14:09:31 SB5 OPEN 14:10:13
SC1 OPEN 14:12:42
SC3 CLOSE 14:09:31 SB1 CLOSE 14:10:13
SC2 CLOSE 14:12:44
BCR0 READ a********c 14:09:31 SB1 OPEN 14:10:14
SC1 CLOSE 14:12:45
SC2 OPEN 14:09:31 SB10 CLOSE 14:10:16
SZ5 CLOSE 14:12:45
SC1 OPEN 14:09:32 SA4 OPEN 14:10:16
SD1 OPEN 14:12:45
SC2 CLOSE 14:09:33 SA5 OPEN 14:10:16
SZ3 CLOSE 14:12:46
SC1 CLOSE 14:09:33 SA5 CLOSE 14:10:17
SC2 OPEN 14:12:46
SZ5 CLOSE 14:09:34 SA3 CLOSE 14:10:18
SZ1 CLOSE 14:12:47
SD1 OPEN 14:09:34 SA2 OPEN 14:10:18
SZ2 OPEN 14:12:52
SZ3 CLOSE 14:09:35 SA4 CLOSE 14:10:18
SD2 CLOSE 14:12:53
SC2 OPEN 14:09:35 SA6 OPEN 14:10:20
SC3 OPEN 14:12:56
SZ1 CLOSE 14:09:36 SA1 OPEN 14:10:20
SZ3 OPEN 14:13:01
SZ2 OPEN 14:09:40 SA4 OPEN 14:10:20
SZ1 OPEN 14:13:02
SD2 CLOSE 14:09:41
SC2 CLOSE 14:13:03
SC3 OPEN 14:09:51
SZ5 OPEN 14:13:03
SZ3 OPEN 14:09:56
SZ3 CLOSE 14:13:03
SZ1 OPEN 14:09:57
SD1 CLOSE 14:13:03
SC2 CLOSE 14:09:58
SZ3 OPEN 14:13:03
SZ5 OPEN 14:09:58
SZ2 CLOSE 14:13:04
SZ3 CLOSE 14:09:58
SD2 OPEN 14:13:05
SD1 CLOSE 14:09:58
SE1 CLOSE 14:13:05
SZ3 OPEN 14:09:59
SE2 CLOSE 14:13:05
SZ1 CLOSE 14:09:59
SE1 OPEN 14:13:06
SZ1 OPEN 14:09:59
SE2 OPEN 14:13:09
SZ2 CLOSE 14:10:00
SB6 CLOSE 14:13:11
SD2 OPEN 14:10:00
SZ1 CLOSE 14:10:00
SZ1 OPEN 14:10:00
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-47
MT-48
n 1824 (HR-BD): When an IP with barcode a********c was read at the third shelf
SA13 CLOSE 14:14:46 SE5 OPEN 14:15:45
SA14 CLOSE 14:14:47 SE4 OPEN 14:15:45
SA15 OPEN 14:14:47 SE5 CLOSE 14:15:46
BCR3 ON 14:14:47 SE4 CLOSE 14:15:47
BCR3 READ a********c 14:14:47 SB6 CLOSE 14:15:48
SA16 CLOSE 14:14:47 SB10 OPEN 14:15:48
SA16 OPEN 14:14:47 SB5 CLOSE 14:15:49
SB7 OPEN 14:14:48 SB6 OPEN 14:15:49
SA17 OPEN 14:14:48 SB5 OPEN 14:15:50
SB8 CLOSE 14:14:48 SB3 CLOSE 14:15:50
SA17 CLOSE 14:14:49 SB3 OPEN 14:15:50
SA16 CLOSE 14:14:50 SB10 CLOSE 14:15:52
SB3 CLOSE 14:14:50 SA16 OPEN 14:15:52
SB3 OPEN 14:14:51 SA17 OPEN 14:15:53
SB5 CLOSE 14:14:51 SA17 CLOSE 14:15:53
SG1 CLOSE 14:14:51 SA15 CLOSE 14:15:54
SB5 OPEN 14:14:51 SA14 OPEN 14:15:54
SC4 OPEN 14:14:52 SA16 CLOSE 14:15:55
SG1 OPEN 14:14:52 SA13 OPEN 14:15:56
SC3 CLOSE 14:14:52 SA16 OPEN 14:15:56
SC2 OPEN 14:14:53
SC1 OPEN 14:14:53
SC4 CLOSE 14:14:53
SC2 CLOSE 14:14:55
SC1 CLOSE 14:14:56
SZ5 CLOSE 14:14:56
SD1 OPEN 14:14:56
SZ3 CLOSE 14:14:57
SC2 OPEN 14:14:57
SZ1 CLOSE 14:14:58
SC3 OPEN 14:15:09
SZ2 OPEN 14:15:11
SD2 CLOSE 14:15:19
SZ3 OPEN 14:15:22
SZ1 OPEN 14:15:31
SC2 CLOSE 14:15:31
SZ5 OPEN 14:15:31
SD1 CLOSE 14:15:31
SZ3 CLOSE 14:15:32
SZ3 OPEN 14:15:32
SZ2 CLOSE 14:15:33
SD2 OPEN 14:15:33
SE1 CLOSE 14:15:34
SE2 CLOSE 14:15:34
SE1 OPEN 14:15:35
SE2 OPEN 14:15:37
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-48
MT-49
6. Line Error between CL and RU Q7 Remove and insert the LAN cable again to check if the connection becomes online.
6.1 Analysis Flow for Line Error between CL Q8 Restart the RU and check if the connection becomes online.
and RU
N
Q2
m START Y
END
Q1 Dose the connection keep off-line after reinserting the LAN cable during system is running?
Y
Q7 Q9 Check the RU’s IP address.
N {MT:6.6_Checking the IP Address of the RU}
Q2 PING from the CL acceptable?
{MT:6.2_Checking Connection from the CL} Q10 PING from the CL acceptable?
{MT:6.2_Checking Connection from the CL}
N
Q9 N
Y Restore the network connection.
Y
Q3 Check the NETWORK CONFIGURATION information of the CL.
{MT:6.3_Checking Configuration Information of the CL} END
Q4 Check the IP address of the CL.
{MT:6.4_Checking the IP Address of the CL}
Q5 Check to see whether the IP address of the master CL that is set in the RU is correct.
{MT:6.5_Checking the IP Address of the Master CL}
Q6 Check to see whether the FTP server setting is correct.
{MT:4._Troubleshooting the Errors that Cause the Inability to Update
the Software Version or Back Up the Machine Shipment Control Data}
END
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-49
MT-50
6.2 Checking Connection from the CL 4. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window.
Using the "PING" function of the "RU PC-TOOL", check the connection between the
RU and CL.
n Check Procedures
1. Start the "RU PC-TOOL".
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
2. From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select the RU that is targeted for a
connection check. REFERENCE
"Lost = (0% loss)" means that there is no problem as a result of executing the
PING command. If other than "(0% loss)", it is a sign that there was some
problem.
l GOOD indication
If the following message appears, the result is normal.
3. Click on the [PING] button. | Ping statistics for 172.16.1.110: |
The command prompt window opens to display the test result. | Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
l NO GOOD indication
Other than above is all abnormal.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-50
MT-51
6.3 Checking Configuration Information of the CL 5. Check the setting of "CONNECTING EQUIPMENT".
Make sure that the RU that was checked at step 4 is set.
n Check Procedures If the setting is improper, modify the setting. If nothing is set, set it anew.
{FCR XG-1/CR CL Service Manual}
1. Exit the CL software.
2. Start the IIP Service Utility.
3. Click on the [Setup Configuration Item] button.
4. Check the setting of "NETWORK CONFIG".
Make sure that the RU name and IP address are identical to those registered in
"LIST OF EXISTING RU" of the RU PC-TOOL.
If not, modify the setting.
6. Exit the IIP Service Utility.
7. Turn ON the RU power.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-51
MT-52
6.4 Checking the IP Address of the CL
n Check Procedures
1. Exit the CL software.
2. Double-click on the desktop.
→ The “My Computer” window opens.
3. Double-click .
→ The “Control Panel” window opens.
4. Double-click .
→ The “Network and Dial-up connection” window opens.
5. Double-click .
→ The “Local Area Connection” window opens.
6. Click .
→ The “Local Area Connection Properties” window opens.
7. Choose and then click .
→ The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
Take note of the "IP address" and "Subnet mask" displayed.
u INSTRUCTION u
Take note of the "IP address" displayed.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-52
MT-53
6.5 Checking the IP Address of the Master CL 3. Check the IP address displayed.
Make sure that the IP address displayed is identical to the IP address noted at step
n Check Procedures 7 of Section "6.4 Checking the IP Address of the CL".
If it is not identical, modify "CL IP ADDRESS", and click on the [SET] button.
1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the list of master
CL's is to be checked, and click on the [EDIT CL NAME] button.
REFERENCE
For "CL NAME", any name (20 bytes: 20 alphanumeric characters, or 10 Kanji
characters) may be entered.
2. Click on the [MODIFY] button.
4. Click on the button.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-53
MT-54
6.6 Checking the IP Address of the RU 4. Touch the [OK] button.
n Check Procedures 1
4
2
5
3
1.
7 8 9
Start the Machine Maintenance. 0 BS
Cancel OK
Touch [OK].
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
2. Touch the [RU IP Address] button. 5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.
Maintenance
1/2
{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
RU IP Address
FTP Server
Touch [RU IP Address].
Default Gateway
Subnet Mask
3. Check the IP address of the RU.
Make sure that it is identical to the IP address registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU"
of the RU PC-TOOL.
If it is not identical, modify the IP address of the RU.
REFERENCES
- To correct the setting, erase it with the [BS] key and then enter a new one.
- To set the IP address of the RU to "172.16.1.21", enter all the digits in the form
of "172.016.001.021".
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-54
MT-55
7. Abnormal Images n Horizontal streaks (main scanning direction)
REFERENCE No.1 Pale nonuniformity on [Possible cause]
leading edge or trailing edge of IP Error on grip mechanism.
If errors occur only on certain IP or cassette, the possible cause of abnormal image
<Example> 14x17inch (35x43cm) IP
may be on the IP/cassette.
Clean or exchange the cassette/IP.
[Countermeasure]
• Check grip mechanism.
7.1 Troubleshooting for Each Abnormal Type
n Vertical streaks (subscanning direction)
No.1 Vertical streaks [Possible cause]
(in the subscanning direction)
<Example> 14x17inch (35x43cm) IP
[Countermeasure]
• When only occuring on certain size:
Check the roller and guide of that specific
location.
• When errors occur on PMT Virtual Read:
Remove and reconnect connectors of PMT/
PMR board. If the erorr recurs, perform the
following in order.
1. Replace PMT/PMR board
2. Replace CPU board
l Checking the IP Size and Nonuniformity Occurrence Location
• When errors occur on LED Virtual Read:
Replace light-collecting unit The nonuniformity occurrence location differs depending on the IP size.
• Clean light-collecting guide, light-collecting IP contact position center during
IP type IP size Event
mirror and scanning optics unit. If the erorr gripping
recurs, perform the following in order.
1. Replace scanning optics unit 14" x 17"
2. Replace CPU board 14" x 14"
3. Replace PMT/PMR boards, light-
collecting mirror Reading leading edge 70 mm, trailing 10" x 12"
ST
edge 70 mm: White streak (24 x 30)
8" x 10" Grip operation
(18 x 24)
Reading leading edge 55 mm, trailing
HR-BD 24×30
edge 90 mm: White streak
Reading leading edge 55 mm, trailing
HR-BD 18×24
edge 55 mm: White streak
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-55
MT-56
No.2 Thin, distinct nonuniformity [Possible cause] No.3 Periodic, thin, horizontal streaks [Possible cause]
• Error on grip mechanism. over entire image • The polygon mirror in scanning optics
<Example> 14x17inch (35x43cm) IP • Error on MZ1 motor. unit is not clean.
[Countermeasure]
• Check grip roller.
Remove driven/driving shaft grip rollers (upper). [Countermeasure]
{MC:12.20_Driven Shaft Grip Roller • Replace the scanning optics unit.
(Upper)}
{MC:12.21_Driving Shaft Grip Roller
(Upper)}
Check the following items to make sure
there is no abnormality on grip roller (upper)
and grip roller (lower).
- No abnormality on adhesion of the rollers.
- Hold both ends of the bearing and turn
the shaft to check the roller can rotate
smoothly.
- Check that there is a contact between
antistatic brush and the grip roller (lower).
- Check the light shielding (cover is
attached correctly).
• Perform continuity check between the
shield of PMT/PMR board and main body.
Repair it if there is any conduction of
electricity.
• Check sub scanning motor (MZ1).
Check it with MUTL. If an error code is
displayed at the end of "RESULT-OK",
check that code with the error code table
and perform the analysis. Repair it if
abnormal noise occurs.
{MU:5.3[6-6-5]_Conveyance Motor Stop/ No.4 Abnormal irregularities on [Possible cause]
Drive} 30mm from trailing edge • Light from the erasure unit went into the
photomultiplier of light collecting unit so the
image color changed partially.
• The tip shape of antistatic brush changed
so light went through between brush tips.
[Countermeasure]
• Check the covers are all attached correctly.
• Replace the antistatic brush.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-56
MT-57
n Ring-like streaks (concentric circle) n Abnormal image in mammography
No.1 Thin streaks in shape of [Possible cause] No.1 Structural object on chest wall side [Possible cause]
concentric circle • Poor conduction of electricity on PMT27B • Compression plate for mammography is
board or PMR27B board. in the image.
[Countermeasure] [Countermeasure]
• Measure the resistance value between test • Try not to let the compression plate
pin TP1(GNB) and high-voltage shield case come into the image.
to check the conduction of electricity.
Tester
High-voltage
shield case
TP1
(GNB)
• There is conduction of electricity:
The cause is not in the PMT27B board
or PMR27B board. Proceed with another
analysis for the image abnormality.
• There is no conduction of electricity:
Replace the PMT27B board or the
PMR27B board.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-57
MT-58
8. Removing the IP 3. Rotate the IP jam processing handle of the feed/load conveyor unit
until the leading edge of the IP can be checked.
When an IP jam occurs, check the location where the IP is jammed, and perform
appropriate removal procedures according to the occurrence location.
8.1 Removing the IP from the Feed/Load
Conveyor Unit
The IP that is jammed in the cassette set unit, feed/load conveyor unit, and side-
positioning conveyor unit should be removed from the feed/load conveyor unit.
8.1.1 When the IP is Jammed in the Cassette Set Unit
1. Remove the covers.
- Upper left-hand side cover
- Upper rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Manually convey the IP in the cassette set unit toward the feed/load
conveyor unit.
4. Remove the guide at a position where the leading edge of the IP is
visible.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-58
MT-59
5. Rotate the IP jam processing handle to remove the IP. 8.1.2 When the IP is Jammed in the Side-Positioning
Conveyor Unit
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Upper left-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
- Upper rear cover
- Lower rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Manually convey the IP in the side-positioning conveyor unit toward
the feed/load conveyor unit.
6. Reinstall the guide in reverse order of step 4.
7. Reinstall the covers.
- Upper left-hand side cover
- Upper rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-59
MT-60
3. Rotate the IP jam processing handle of the feed/load conveyor unit 5. Rotate the IP jam processing handle to remove the IP.
until the leading edge of the IP can be checked.
4. Remove the guide at a position where the leading edge of the IP is
visible.
6. Reinstall the guide in reverse order of step 4.
7. Reinstall the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Upper left-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
- Upper rear cover
- Lower rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-60
MT-61
8.2 Removing the IP from the Erasure Conveyor 3. Open the guide of the IP switchback assembly.
Unit u INSTRUCTION u
The IP that is jammed in the subscanning unit, post-reading conveyor unit, and Make sure that the guide of the IP switchback assembly is secured to the
erasure conveyor unit should be removed from the erasure conveyor unit (IP housing by a magnet, before proceeding to the next step.
switchback assembly).
8.2.1 When the IP is Jammed in the Subscanning Unit or
Post-Reading Conveyor Unit
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Upper front light protect plate
- Lower front light protect plate
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Manually convey the IP in the subscanning unit toward the post-
reading conveyor unit.
4. Remove the guide.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-61
MT-62
5. Manually convey the IP in the post-reading conveyor unit toward the 7. Reinstall the guide in reverse order of step 4.
erasure conveyor unit.
8. Close the guide of the IP switchback assembly.
u NOTE u
Firmly secure the guide of the IP switchback assembly by the retainers.
Otherwise, an IP jam might be caused.
6. Remove the IP from the erasure conveyor unit.
9. Reinstall the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Upper front light protect plate
- Lower front light protect plate
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-62
MT-63
8.2.2 When the IP is Jammed in the Erasure Conveyor Unit 3. Open the guide of the IP switchback assembly.
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Upper front light protect plate
- Lower front light protect plate
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Rotate the belt of the erasure conveyor unit to convey the IP toward
the IP switchback assembly.
4. Remove the IP from the IP switchback assembly.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-63
MT-64
5. Close the guide of the IP switchback assembly.
u NOTE u
Firmly secure the guide of the IP switchback assembly by the retainers.
Otherwise, an IP jam might be caused.
6. Reinstall the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Upper front light protect plate
- Lower front light protect plate
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-64
MT-65
9. Troubleshooting Failures where Q5 DIP switch on the CPU board properly set?
{MT:Appendix 3._DIP Switch Setup}
Error Code Is Undetectable and N
Machine does not Boot Up
Restore
Y
If the error code is not displayed and the machine does not boot up, perform the m Perform the procedures for restoring the RU application.
following steps. {MT:Appendix 1._Procedures for Restoring (Initializing) the Application}
9.1 Analysis Flow for Bootup Failure
Q6 Mechanical initialization effected after RU startup?
m START
N
Q8
Y
Q1 POWER lamp ( ) lit when RU circuit breaker is turned ON?
Q7 LCD panel indications normal
N
Check the connection and continuity of cables.
Y
N
Q9
Q2 RU in one of the following states? Y
- The LCD panel remains black and shows nothing.
- Only the cassette IN and cassette OUT lamps illuminated.
END
Y
Q5
N Q8 Error recurs when the CPU board is reseated?
N
Q9
Q3 Message “Now Loading...” repeatedly displayed on the LCD panel? Y
If the bootup processing keeps repeating, check the progress bar at bootup screen to
confirm the progress. m Replace the CPU board.
{MD:2.5_Bootup Processing} {MC:13.1_CPU Board}
N
Q9
Y Q9 LCD panel cable properly connected?
N
Restore
Q4 Connector connections between the boards normal?
Y
N Q10 Error recurs?
Restore
Y Y
Replace the parts in the order named.
m Replace the boards in the order named. N 1. Touch panel assembly
1. CPU board {MC:4.11_Touch Panel Assembly}
{MC:13.1_CPU Board} 2. CPU39A board
2. SND board {MC:13.1_CPU Board}
{MC:13.2_SND39A(1) Board} END
{MC:13.3_SND39A(2) Board}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-65
MT-66
10. Checking the Status of Each Unit l Normal procedure
The cassette is inserted.
10.1 Checking the Cassette Set Unit
The status of operation of the cassette set unit is checked to know where a failure
occurs during the operation. After the location of the failure is determined, return to
the analysis flow for troubleshooting.
The shutter opens, and
The normal operation status of the cassette set unit is mentioned below. the cassette ejection sensor
(SA1, 7, 13 or 19) closes.
l During bootup
Turn ON the power of the RU.
↓
Mechanical initialization starts, and whether each sensor opens or closes is checked.
↓
The solenoid is turned ON/OFF, and the hold pin descends/ascends. A “click” sounds The movable guide moves down,
each time the hold pin of each shelf ascends. and the inch/metric sensor (SA6,
↓ 12, 18 or 24) closes.
Mechanical initialization ends, and the POWER lamp ( ) and the cassette loading (The sensor is kept open when
lamp ( ) light up. a cassette of metric size is
inserted).
The actuator activates, and the
cassette IN sensor (SA2, 8, 14
or 20) closes.
The hold pin holds the cassette
and a “click” sounds.
The cassette hold sensor (SA3,
9, 15 or 21) opens.
An alarm sounds, and the
cassette conveyance lamp ( )
lights up. The IP is conveyed.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-66
MT-67
REFERENCE
The following displays appear if the status change of the cassette set unit sensors is
When the IP returns to the checked by means of the monitoring function for operations of setting the cassette on
cassette, the cassette hold a shelf on the first stage, reading the IP, and removing the cassette.
solenoid is released, and the
cassette hold sensor (SA3, 9,
15 or 21) closes.
The clutch activates to push
out the cassette. The actuator
ascends and the cassette IN
sensor (SA2, 8, 14 or 20) opens.
The cassette removal lamp
( ) lights up.
When the cassette is drawn out,
the movable guide ascends.
The inch/metric sensor (SA6,
12, 18 or 24) opens.
When the cassette is removed,
the shutter closes. The cassette
ejection sensor (SA1, 7, 13 or
19) opens.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-67
MT-68
10.2 Checking the Erasure Conveyer Unit
Check the installation of the housing and the bearing from the bottom of the erasure
conveyer unit.
Check to ensure that the housing and the bearing have not fallen from the side plate
of the erasure conveyer unit on the six locations indicated by dotted lines below.
Repair if any has fallen.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-68
MT-69
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-69
MT-70
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-70
MT-71
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-71
Appx MT-1
Appendix 1. Procedures for Restoring 1. Procedures for Restoring the RU
(Initializing) the Application Application
CAUTION
u NOTE u
Check that the RU whose IP address is set to “172.16.1.10” is not connected
Be sure to set the CL’s IP to “172.16.1.20” before initializing the application. Restore
on the network, before following the procedures below. If any connected,
the IP address to the user specified value after the initialization.
isolate the RU from the network by disconnecting the network cable or the like.
Otherwise, the application will not be able to be restored normally.
For devices with CPU39A board, initializing the application is possible without using
DIP switch. In stead of that, RU's IP address needs to be changed.
1. Check the RU’s IP address and record it.
Change the CL's IP address
to "172.16.1.20".
u NOTE u
The RU’s IP address must be restored to the user specified value after the RU
application is initialized. Be sure to confirm the RU’s IP address (user specified
Change RU’s IP address to value) and record it.
the following.
RU IP Address: 172.16.1.10
FTP-Serv: 172.16.1.20 2. Change the RU’s IP address to the following.
RU IP Address : 172.16.1.10
FTP-Serv : 172.16.1.20
3. Check the CL’s IP address and record it.
Follow the procedures for restoring the application.
u NOTE u
The CL’s IP address must be restored to the user specified value after the RU
application is initialized. Be sure to confirm the CL’s IP address (user specified
value) and record it.
4. Change the CL’s IP address to “172.16.1.20”.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-1
Appx MT-2
5. Put the RU-Appl CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the CL. 8. Once the initialization of the application is completed, press the
<Enter> key.
6. Perform the following procedures. REFERENCE
u NOTE u The initialization of the application takes about 15 seconds.
Always input “172.16.1.10” in RU IP ADDR.
#1 [Check]
#2 [Press]
<Enter> key
9. Turn OFF the power of the RU.
10. Restore the CL’s IP address to the value recorded in the step 3 (user
specified value).
7. Check to ensure that the RU IP address input in the step 6 (172.16.1.10)
is displayed, and click on [OK].
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-2
Appx MT-3
11. Turn ON the power of the RU. 12. Set the IP address of the RU.
u NOTE u
Initializing the application resets the RU’s IP address setting for the RU to the
factory default. Be sure to enter the RU’s IP address that is entered from the CL.
Maintenance
#2
1/2
RU IP Address
#1
[Push] FTP Server
Default Gateway
Subnet Mask
Touch [RU IP Address].
#1
[Push] 172 016 001 010
#2
Touch the [BS] key to delete digits.
1 2 3
4 5 6 1 2 3
7 8 9
0 BS 4 5 6 172 016 001 010
Cancel OK
7 8 9
1 2 3
0 BS
P-II_IN_0030.ai 4 5 6
Cancel OK
17 28 39
REFERENCE
40 5 6
BS
It takes about 2 minutes until the READY screen (CR Console communication 172 016 001 011
#3
error status) appears on the touch panel after the RU is powered ON. 1
4
2
5
3
6 1 2 3
7
Cancel
8
Sequentially OK
9
touch
7
0
8
BS
9
4 5 6 "1",0"7", "2", "0",
BS "1", "6", "0", "0",
Cancel OK
7 8 9
, "1", "0", "1", "1" on the ten-key
0 BS
padCancel
to enter aOKvalue.
Cancel OK
1 2 3
172 016 001 011
4 5 6
71 82 93
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 BS 04 5 6
BS
Cancel OK
#4 7 8 9
Touch [OK]. Cancel OK
0 BS
Cancel OK
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-3
Appx MT-4
13. Set the IP address of the FTP server. 14. Execute "Network Check".
u NOTE u Maintenance
2/2
Initializing the application resets the FTP server’s IP address setting for the RU to
Secure Host
#1
Secure Net
the factory default. Be sure to enter the CL’s IP address.
Network Check
HV ON/OFF
Touch [Network Check].
Maintenance
1/2
RU IP Address
FTP Server
Default Gateway #1 Network Check
Subnet Mask
Touch [FTP Server]. FTP Server
Default Gateway
#2
Touch [Check].
Check
172 016 001 020
#2
Touch the [BS] key to delete digits.
1 2 3
#3
4 5 6 1 2 3
7 8 9 Network Check
4 5 6 172 016 001 020
0
Cancel
BS
OK
FTP Server
Default Gateway [Check]
7 8 9
● GOOD indication
1 2 3
0 BS
4 5 6
Cancel OK
Check
FTP Server OK
17 28 39
Default Gateway OK or Not in Use
40 5 6
● NO GOOD indication
BS
172 016 001 021
#3
7 8 9
Sequentially touch FTP Server Error
1 2 3
4 5 6 1 2 3 Cancel OK
7
0
8
BS
9
4 5 6 "1",0"7", "2", "0",
BS "1", "6", "0", "0",
Default Gateway Error
Cancel OK
7 8 9
, "1", "0", "2", "1" on the ten-key
padCancel
to enter aOKvalue.
0 BS
u NOTE u
Cancel OK
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
1 2 3
172 016 001 021
{Troubleshooting}
4 5 6
1 2 3
1
7 2
8 3
9
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 BS
4
0 5 6
BS
Cancel OK
#4 7 8 9
Touch [OK]. Cancel OK
0 BS
Cancel OK
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-4
Appx MT-5
u NOTE u 17. Check "RU VERSION", and click on [OK].
If the “VERSION UP” command cannot be executed in steps 15 through 20, execute
the “INSTALL” command.
The following screen appears when the “VERSION UP” command cannot be
executed.
18. Confirm the installation precautions.
CAUTIONS
While data is being written into the FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the power
of the RU. If the power of the RU is turned OFF, the program residing in the
15. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its version update, and memory is corrupted, so that the RU cannot be rebooted
click on [VERSION UP].
16. Click on [OK].
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-5
Appx MT-6
19. Click on [OK]. 20. When writing to the FLASH ROM is completed, press the [Enter] key.
#1 u NOTE u
[Click]
The following screen may fail to open due to an application error. If the following
screen does not appear on the display, wait about 10 minutes after the click of [OK]
in step 19, and then press the [Enter] key.
REFERENCE
Writing to the FLASH ROM will take about four minutes.
#2
[Check]
While the flash ROM is being written
into, the LED blinks.
(LED keeps blinking after
install completes.)
REFERENCE
The installation process screen appears on the CL display.
21. Click [OK].
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-6
Appx MT-7
22. Check the version of the RU software. 25. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the IP address is to
be set, and enter "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME" of the CL.
u INSTRUCTION u
"IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME" of the CL that were checked before performing
the procedures for restoring the application should be entered.
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, return to step 15 and perform version
update procedures all over again.
23. Turn OFF the power of the RU.
24. Turn ON the power of the RU.
u NOTE u
Unless the power of the RU is turned OFF and back ON, the state only allows
you to perform INSTALL and VERSION UP
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-7
Appx MT-8
26. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its data restore, and 27. Close the SetUp PC-TOOL.
restore the "CONFIGURATION", "HISTORY LOG", and "SCN ALL
DATA" data.
u NOTE u
If the data to be restored is not on hand, perform setup as directed below:
- CONFIGURATION: Perform setup again from the RU PC-TOOL’s “EDIT
CONFIG”.
- HISTORY LOG: Perform setup again from the RU PC-TOOL’s “EDIT
HISTORY” as much as possible.
- SCN ALL DATA: Restore the data from the machine shipment control data
that is supplied with the machine.
28. Turn OFF the power of the RU.
29. Turn ON the power of the RU.
REFERENCE
For details on the restore procedure, see under “22. BACKUP/RESTORE
Procedure” in the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment volume.
{MC:22._BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-8
Appx MT-9
30. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
Image reading
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.
{MC:19._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-9
Appx MT-10
Appendix 2. Dimensions in the 2. General Dimensions of the Conveyance
Conveyance Path Path
1. Rollers and Sensors Installed in the
Conveyance Path
The grip rollers and sensors in the conveyance path (corresponding to the conveyance
sensor check of the MUTL) are located as shown below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-10
Appx MT-11
3. Dimensions of Members in the Conveyance
Path
Locations of such members that might cause damage on the IP during the conveyance
are shown below.
A numerical value in the figure refers to a distance from the reference plane to a
member.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-11
Appx MT-12
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-12
Appx MT-13
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-13
Appx MT-14
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-14
Appx MT-15
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-15
Appx MT-16
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-16
Appx MT-17
Appendix 3. DIP Switch Setup CPU39A Board
HV ON
SND39A Board
HV OFF
SW5
Turn ON
* When it is set to “HV OFF”
HV is turned OFF forcibly
OFF ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
OFF OFF
ON ON
SW4
SND B board S1 SND A board S1 Turn OFF all
Turn ON “1” Turn OFF all
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-17
Appx MT-18
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-18
Appx MT-19
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-19
Appx MT-20
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx MT-20
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
12.06.2019 01 New release All pages
02.28.2020 02 Revision All pages
CR-IR 363 Service Manual
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
Parts (MC)
011-211-02E CR-IR 363 Service Manual
02.28.2020
MC-1
1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for INSTRUCTION
The yellow-painted screws require adjustments when components are reinstalled.
Each Unit When reinstalling the components, follow the check/adjustment procedures.
Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment NOTE
- In this volume, descriptions are omitted regarding components that do not require The TP screw used to secure the ground wire is similar in shape to a DT screw.
special attention or adjustment during their removal/reinstallation. For removal
When attaching the screw, check its shape to avoid confusing it with a wrong one.
procedures for such components, refer to the Parts List Volume.
- When performing check/replacement/adjustment procedures on the machine, the
following precautions should be observed
WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, power OFF the machine before performing the
procedures.
WARNING/CAUTION
Checking the Protective Grounding
Observe the warnings and cautions described in the "Safety Precautions."
INSTRUCTION
CAUTIONS Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and
- When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and
- Do not remove the cover of the scanning optics unit. retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set
- Never remove the red-painted screws. forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to
properly secure the parts.
INSTRUCTION
Some of the illustrations in this volume contain check/adjustment and half-punch
indicators as needed.
For removal and reinstallation, perform the procedures as instructed by such
indicators.
- Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the
installation location when the part or component
removed is to be reinstalled.
This indicator is placed in the illustration that depicts
the procedures for removing the parts and components.
When you see this indicator, refer to its relevant
" Check/ Adjustment Procedures.”
- Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches
when installing the parts or components.
However, it is not indicated for the half-punches for
improving ease of assembly or preventing erroneous
assembly procedures.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-1
MC-2
2. Table of Contents 5. Cassette Set Unit 5.
5.1
Cassette Set Unit
Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit
MC-23
MC-23
5.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit MC-26
5.3 Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf) MC-28
3. Covers 3. Covers MC-7 5.4 Shutter Assemblies
3.1 Covers MC-7 (for the Second and Third Shelves) MC-29
3.2 Filters MC-8 5.5 Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf) MC-30
3.3 Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf) MC-9 5.6 Arms (White) MC-30
5.7 Shutters MC-31
5.8 LEDs (for the First, Second, and Third Shelves) MC-32
5.9 LED (for the Fourth Shelf) MC-33
5.10 Antistatic Members MC-33
5.11 Suction Cup Driving Motors (MA1, 2, 3, 4) MC-34
5.12 Barcode Reader Assembly MC-35
5.13 Exposure Markers Receiving Boxes MC-36
5.14 Hold Release Arm MC-36
5.15 Hoses MC-37
5.16 Cassette Ejection Clutches (CLA1, 2, 3, 4) MC-38
5.17 Cassette Ejection Sensors (SA1, 7, 13, 19) MC-39
5.18 Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21) MC-39
5.19 Suction Cup HP Sensors (SA4, 10, 16, 22) MC-40
5.20 Suction Sensors (SA5, 11, 17, 23) MC-41
4. Housing Unit 4. Housing Unit MC-10 5.21 Suction Cup Assemblies MC-42
4.1 Circuit Breaker MC-10 5.22 Suction Cups MC-43
4.2 Socket MC-12 5.23 Roller Assemblies MC-44
4.3 Antistatic Member (Front) MC-13 5.24 Cassette Ejection Rollers MC-45
4.4 Antistatic Members (Rear) MC-13 5.25 Cassette Set Base Assemblies MC-47
4.5 Side-Positioning Entrance IP Sensor (SG1) MC-14 5.26 Stoppers MC-49
4.6 "11x14IP" Determination Sensor (SG2) MC-14 5.27 Inch/Metric Sensors (SA6, 12, 18, 24) MC-49
4.7 Cassette Hold Release Pin MC-15 5.28 Guide Plates MC-50
4.8 Power Supply Unit MC-16 5.29 Cassette IN Sensors (SA2, 8, 14, 20) MC-51
4.9 PSU39A Board MC-17 5.30 Stoppers MC-52
4.10 Fan (Power Supply Unit) MC-19 5.31 Suction Pump Bracket Assemblies MC-53
4.11 Touch Panel Assembly MC-21 5.32 IP Removal Arms MC-55
5.33 Bearings (IP Removal Link Shafts) MC-57
5.34 Solenoid Assemblies (SOLA1, 2, 3, 4) MC-59
5.35 IP Leak Valves (SVA1, 2, 3, 4) MC-60
5.36 IP Suction Pumps (PA1, 2, 3, 4) MC-61
5.37 Cassette Hold Pins MC-62
5.38 Movable Guide Assemblies MC-62
5.39 Movable Guides MC-63
5.40 Tapes MC-64
5.41 Guides MC-65
5.42 IP Stoppers MC-65
5.43 Reinforcement Bracket MC-66
5.44 Torsion Coil Springs MC-67
5.44.1 Removal Procedures
(Actuator: 366N200005A) MC-67
5.44.2 Reinstallation Procedures
(Actuator: 366N200005A) MC-69
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-2
MC-3
6. Feed/Load Conveyor 6. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit MC-72 6.28 Guide (Convergence Unit Lower Side) MC-111
Unit 6.1 Feed/Load Conveyor Unit MC-72 6.29 Rubber Rollers (I, J, K, and L) MC-112
6.2 IP Feed/Load Sensors (SB1, 2, 3, 4) MC-74 6.30 Rubber Rollers (M and N) MC-113
6.3 Path Changeover Shelf Sensors (SB7, 8, 9) MC-74 6.31 Rubber Rollers (O and P) MC-115
6.4 Convergence Path Changeover Sensor (SB10) MC-75 6.32 Rubber Rollers (Q and R) MC-116
6.5 Path Changeover HP Sensor (SB11) MC-75 6.33 Convergence Path Changeover Guide MC-118
6.6 IP Jam Handling Assembly MC-76 6.34 Rubber Rollers (S and T) MC-120
6.7 Brush Roller Assembly MC-76 6.35 Guide (Convergence Unit Upper Side) MC-121
6.8 Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side) MC-78 6.36 Half-Clutch Spur Gear (Upper Reference Side)MC-123
6.8.1 Removal Procedures MC-78 6.36.1 Removal Procedures MC-123
6.8.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-79 6.36.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-124
6.9 Path Changeover Mechanism MC-80
6.9.1 Removal Procedures MC-80 7. Side-Positioning 7. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit MC-126
Conveyor Unit 7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit MC-126
6.9.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-81
7.1.1 Removal Procedures MC-126
6.10 Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side) MC-84
7.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-129
6.10.1 Removal Procedures MC-84
7.2 Side-Positioning Mechanism HP Sensor (SC1) MC-133
6.10.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-86
7.3 Spur Gears (Reference Side) MC-133
6.11 Gears Bracing Bracket
7.4 Grip Release HP Sensor (SC2) MC-134
(Upper Opposite-Reference Side) MC-88
7.5 Side-Positioning IP Sensor (SC3) MC-135
6.12 Gears Bracing Bracket
7.6 Cleaning Guide HP Sensor (SC4) MC-135
(Lower Opposite-Reference Side) MC-88
7.7 Timing Belt MC-136
6.13 Conveyance Mechanism
7.8 Side-Positioning Motor (MC1) MC-137
(Opposite-Reference Side Gears) MC-89
7.9 Grip Release Motor (MC2) MC-138
6.14 Pre-BCR IP Sensor (SB5) MC-90
7.10 IP Transport Motor (MC3) MC-139
6.15 Pre-Convergence IP Sensor (SB6) MC-90
7.11 Cleaning Guide Driving Motor (MC4) MC-140
6.16 IP Transport Motor (MB1) MC-91
7.12 Latch Drive Unit (Overall) MC-141
6.17 Convergence Unit IP Transport Motor (MB2) MC-92
7.13 Latch Assembly (Latch Driver) MC-143
6.18 Convergence Path Changeover Guide
7.14 Latch Assembly (Reference Side) MC-144
Driving Motor (MB3) MC-93
7.15 Tensioner MC-145
6.19 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies
7.16 Planetary Gear Assembly MC-145
(for the First, Second, and Third Shelves) MC-94
7.17 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) MC-146
6.20 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly
7.18 Antistatic Members MC-146
(for the Fourth Shelf) MC-94
7.19 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side) MC-147
6.21 Antistatic Members MC-95
7.20 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side) MC-148
6.22 Shock-Absorbing Rollers (Convergence Unit) MC-95
7.21 Grip Shaft MC-149
6.23 Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H) MC-96
7.22 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly MC-149
6.23.1 Removal Procedures MC-96
7.23 Rubber Roller (A) MC-150
6.23.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-98
7.24 Rubber Roller (B) MC-151
6.24 Arm and Bearing (for the First Shelf) MC-102
7.25 Rubber Rollers (C and D) MC-152
6.24.1 Removal Procedures MC-102
7.26 Rubber Roller (E) MC-154
6.24.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-103
7.27 Rubber Roller (F) MC-156
6.25 Arms and Bearings (for the Second,
7.28 Guide MC-158
Third, and Fourth Shelves) MC-104
7.29 Cleaning Guide Assembly MC-159
6.25.1 Removal Procedures MC-104
7.30 Cleaning Guide MC-161
6.25.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-105
7.31 Tape MC-163
6.26 Path Changeover Guides (for the First,
7.31.1 Removal Procedures MC-163
Second, Third, and Fourth Shelves) MC-107
7.31.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-166
6.27 Guides (for the First, Second, Third,
and Fourth Shelves) MC-108
6.27.1 Removal Procedures MC-108
6.27.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-109
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-3
MC-4
8. Post-Reading 8. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit MC-171 9.16 Conveyance Mechanism
Conveyor Unit 8.1 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit MC-171 (Opposite Reference Side Gears) MC-214
8.1.1 Removal Procedures MC-171 9.17 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side) MC-215
8.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-173 9.18 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side) MC-216
8.2 Tensioner Assembly MC-176 9.18.1 Removal Procedures MC-216
8.3 Timing Belt MC-176 9.18.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-217
8.4 Spur Gears (Opposite Reference Side) MC-177 9.19 Tensioner Assembly MC-218
8.5 Grip Release HP Sensor (SD1) MC-178 9.20 Guide (A) MC-218
8.6 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side) MC-178 9.21 Guide (B) MC-219
8.7 Planetary Gear Assembly MC-179 9.22 Guide (C) MC-220
8.8 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side) MC-180 9.23 Latch Drive Unit MC-221
8.9 Grip Release Motor (MD1) MC-180 9.23.1 Removal Procedures MC-221
8.10 Post-Reading Conveyance IP Sensor (SD2) MC-181 9.23.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-223
8.11 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly MC-181 9.24 Latch Assembly (Reference Side) MC-226
8.12 Spur Gears (Reference Side) MC-182 9.25 IP Transport Motor (ME1) MC-226
8.13 IP Transport Motor (MD2) MC-182 9.26 Side-Positioning Motor (ME2) MC-227
8.14 Variable Guide Assembly MC-183 9.27 Grip Release Motor (ME3) MC-227
8.15 Rubber Rollers (A and B) MC-185 9.28 Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, and F) MC-228
8.16 Rubber Rollers (C and D) MC-187 9.29 Rubber Rollers (G and H) MC-230
8.17 Rubber Rollers (E and F) MC-189 9.30 Rubber Rollers (I and J) MC-231
8.18 Rubber Rollers (G and H) MC-190 9.31 Guide (D) MC-233
8.19 Guide (A) MC-191 9.31.1 Removal Procedures MC-233
8.20 Guide (B) MC-192 9.31.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-235
8.21 Grip Shaft MC-193 9.32 Guide (E) MC-238
9.32.1 Removal Procedures MC-238
9. Erasure Conveyor 9. Erasure Conveyor Unit MC-194
9.32.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-240
Unit 9.1 Erasure Conveyor Unit MC-194
9.33 Grip Shaft MC-242
9.2 Lamp Case MC-197
9.34 Guide (F) MC-243
9.3 Filter MC-199
9.35 Branch Path Changeover Guide MC-244
9.4 IP Switchback Assembly MC-200
9.36 Guide Pressure Bracket MC-247
9.5 Post-Reading
9.37 Branch Path Changeover Guide
Conveyance Standby IP Sensor (SE1) MC-201
Driving Arm (Right) MC-248
9.6 Switchback Standby IP Sensor (SE2) MC-201
9.37.1 Removal Procedures MC-248
9.7 Erasure Side-Positioning
9.37.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-249
Standby HP Sensor (SE4) MC-202
9.38 Branch Path Changeover Guide
9.8 Brackets MC-203
Driving Arm (Left) MC-250
9.9 Grip Release HP Sensor (SE5) MC-204
9.38.1 Removal Procedures MC-250
9.10 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly MC-204
9.38.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-251
9.11 Branch Path Guide Driving Solenoid (SOLE1) MC-205
9.39 Tension Coil Spring MC-252
9.12 Reflection Plate MC-206
9.39.1 Removal Procedures MC-252
9.13 Timing Belt (A) MC-207
9.39.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-253
9.13.1 Removal Procedures MC-207
9.13.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-208
9.14 Timing Belt (B) MC-210
9.14.1 Removal Procedures MC-210
9.14.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-211
9.15 Timing Belt (C) MC-212
9.15.1 Removal Procedures MC-212
9.15.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-213
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-4
MC-5
10. Scanning Optics Unit 10. Scanning Optics Unit MC-255 12. Subscanning Unit 12. Subscanning Unit MC-273
10.1 Removal Procedures MC-255 12.1 Subscanning Unit MC-273
10.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-256 12.2 Transparent Cover MC-277
10.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures MC-258 12.3 Antistatic Member MC-277
12.4 SUS Belt MC-278
12.5 Kapton® Belt MC-279
12.6 Tensioner (Right-Hand Side) MC-280
12.7 Tensioner (Left-Hand Side) MC-280
12.8 Flywheel MC-281
12.9 Sub Scanning Motor (MZ1) MC-282
12.10 Cleaning Brush Assembly MC-284
12.11 Driving-Side Grip Release HP Sensor (SZ2) and
Driven-Side Grip Release HP Sensor (SZ3) MC-285
12.12 IP Stopper HP Sensor (SZ5) MC-286
12.13 Grip Drive Motor (MZ2) MC-287
12.14 Dust Removal Motor (MZ3) MC-289
12.15 IP Stopper Drive Motor (MZ4) MC-291
12.16 Driving Shaft Grip Release Arm MC-292
11. Light-Collecting Unit 11. Light-Collecting Unit MC-259 12.17 Driven Shaft Grip Release Arm and IP Stopper MC-294
11.1 Upper Light-Collecting Guide MC-259 12.18 Spur Gears MC-296
11.2 Lower Light-Collecting Guide MC-264 12.19 Dust Removal HP Sensor (SZ4) MC-297
11.3 PMT27B Board MC-269 12.20 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) MC-298
11.4 PMR27B Board MC-271 12.21 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) MC-299
12.22 Antistatic Member MC-300
12.23 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) MC-301
12.24 Light-Collecting Mirror MC-302
12.25 Light-Collecting Shaft MC-303
12.26 Glass Guide MC-304
12.27 Center Guide MC-306
12.28 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) and
Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) MC-307
12.29 Grounding Wires MC-308
12.30 Shock-Absorbing Rubbers MC-309
12.31 Subscanning Unit (Top) MC-310
12.32 Bracket Assembly MC-311
12.33 Lower Light-Collecting Guide Brace Assembly MC-312
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-5
MC-6
13. PC Boards 13. PC Boards MC-313 17. Shading/Sensitivity 17. Shading/Sensitivity Correction for
13.1 CPU Board MC-313 Correction for IP IP Type HR-BDMC-347
13.1.1 Replacement Procedures MC-313 Type HR and HR-BD 17.1 Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR-BD
13.1.2 Machine Data Backup MC-313 (Both Side) MC-348
13.1.3 Replacing the CPU Board MC-315 17.2 Shading Correction for IP Type HR-BD MC-350
13.1.4 Setting the IP Addresses of 17.3 Special Sensitivity Correction for
the RU and Console MC-318 IP Type HR-BD MC-352
13.1.5 Updating the RU Software Version MC-319 17.3.1 Special Sensitivity Correction for
13.1.6 Restoring the Machine Data MC-322 IP Type HR-BD Using Tungsten X-ray Tube MC-353
13.1.7 Confirming the S Value MC-323
13.1.8 S Value Correction/LED Initialization MC-323 18. Data Backup/Image 18. Data Backup/Image Checks MC-355
Checks 18.1 Backing Up the Scanner Data MC-355
13.2 SND39A(1) Board MC-324
18.2 Checking the Image MC-356
13.3 SND39A(2) Board MC-326
19. Image/Conveyance 19. Image/Conveyance Checks MC-358
Checks 19.1 Check Before Procedures MC-358
19.2 Image/Conveyance Checks MC-359
20. List of Jigs and Tools 20. List of Jigs and Tools MC-361
14. Updating Software 14. Updating Software Versions MC-328 20.1 Jigs and Tools MC-361
Versions 21. Installing the RU Software MC-362
21. Installing the RU
15. Format Adjustment MC-334 Software 21.1 Installing the RU Software MC-362
15. Format Adjustment
15.1 Main Scan Format Adjustment MC-334 22. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure MC-363
15.1.1 Main Scan Position (Pixel) Adjustment MC-334 22. BACKUP/RESTORE
Procedure 22.1 Backup Procedure MC-363
15.1.2 Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment MC-335 22.2 Restore Procedure MC-365
15.1.3 Optic Setting MC-337
15.2 IP Leading-Edge Adjustment (Sub-scanning) MC-338
16. Shading/Sensitivity 16. Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type STMC-340
Correction for IP 16.1 Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST (SR)MC-341
Type ST/ST-BD 16.2 Shading Correction for the IP Type of ST (FR) MC-343
16.3 Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST MC-345
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-6
MC-7
3. Covers
3.1 Covers
{SP:INDEX}
Reinstallation Procedures
Removal Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
1. Remove the covers.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-7
MC-8
3.2 Filters
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
1. Remove the filters.
Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-8
MC-9
3.3 Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Upper front cover
- Lower front cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the shelf cover (for the fourth shelf).
Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
When installing the shelf cover (for the fourth shelf), avoid the cable and connector
beforehand so as not to pinch them.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-9
MC-10
4. Housing Unit 3. Remove the FAST-ON terminal.
u NOTE u
The FAST-ON terminal should be detached by pressing the shaded portion in the
4.1 Circuit Breaker illustration below.
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the bracket.
{CHECK 1}
4. Remove the circuit breaker.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-10
MC-11
n Reinstallation Procedures
WARNING
Before attaching the circuit breaker, place the breaker switch in the OFF
position.
u NOTES u
- Plug the FAST-ON terminals all the way in.
- Pay attention to the attachment position of the FAST-ON terminal.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedure
l CHECK 1
Attach the circuit breaker with its orientation in mind.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-11
MC-12
4.2 Socket 3. Remove the FAST-ON terminal.
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u
The FAST-ON terminal should be detached by pressing the shaded portion in the
n Removal Procedures illustration below.
1. Remove the cover.
- Lower rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the bracket.
4. Remove the socket.
n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTES u
- Plug the FAST-ON terminals all the way in.
- Pay attention to the attachment position of the FAST-ON terminal.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-12
MC-13
4.3 Antistatic Member (Front) 4.4 Antistatic Members (Rear)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit. 1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the antistatic member (front).
2. Remove the antistatic members (rear).
{SP:02B_FRAME 2}
{SP:02A_FRAME 1}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-13
MC-14
4.5 Side-Positioning Entrance IP Sensor (SG1) 4.6 "11x14IP" Determination Sensor (SG2)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. 1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the SG1. 2. Remove the SG2.
n Reinstallation Procedures n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-14
MC-15
4.7 Cassette Hold Release Pin n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cover.
- Top cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Pull out the cassette set unit.
{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}
3. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
4. Remove the cassette hold release pin.
u INSTRUCTION u
The replacement procedures should be performed from the rear side.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-15
MC-16
4.8 Power Supply Unit 3. Disconnect the connectors.
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cover. Power supply unit
- Lower front cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the connectors, screws, and pull out power supply assembly.
#1 [Disconnect] #2 [Disconnect]
u NOTE u Connector (CN10) Connector (CN11)
The power supply unit will not fall down even if pulling it out from the frame
because there are two brackets, one is on the rear side of the power supply unit,
another(stopper) is on the frame. Must pull out the power supply unit until the two
brackets get stuck with each other.
#3 [Disconnect] #4 [Disconnect]
Connector (CN8) Connector (CN1)
4. Remove the screws, and remove the power supply unit.
#1 [Remove]
5-TP3x6
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-16
MC-17
n Reinstallation Procedures 4.9 PSU39A Board
u NOTE u {SP:INDEX}
To install the power supply unit, securely attach the ground wire. CAUTION
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cover.
- Lower front cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the connectors, screws, and pull out power supply assembly.
u NOTE u
The power supply unit will not fall down even if pulling it out from the frame because there
are two brackets, one is on the rear side of the power supply unit, another(stopper) is on the
frame. Must pull out the power supply unit until the two brackets get stuck with each other.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-17
MC-18
3. Disconnect the connectors. 4. Remove the screws, and remove the PSU39A board.
PSU39A Board
#1 [Remove]
6-TP3x6
#2 [Disconnect] #3 [Disconnect] #4 [Disconnect]
Connector (PSU2) Connector (PSU3) Connector (PSU4)
#1 [Disconnect]
Connector (PSU1)
#5 [Disconnect]
n Reinstallation Procedures
Connector (PSU5) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
#6 [Disconnect]
Connector (PSU9)
#7 [Disconnect] #8 [Disconnect] #9 [Disconnect]
Connector (PSU8) Connector (PSU7) Connector (PSU6)
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-18
MC-19
4.10 Fan (Power Supply Unit) 3. Disconnect the connectors.
{SP:INDEX}
1. Remove the cover.
- Lower front cover PSU39A Board
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the connectors, screws, and pull out power supply assembly.
u NOTE u #1 [Disconnect]
The power supply unit will not fall down even if pulling it out from the frame Connector (PSU4)
because there are two brackets, one is on the rear side of the power supply unit,
another(stopper) is on the frame. Must pull out the power supply unit until the two
brackets get stuck with each other.
#2 [Disconnect]
Connector (PSU9)
#3 [Disconnect] #4 [Disconnect] #5 [Disconnect]
Connector (PSU8) Connector (PSU7) Connector (PSU6)
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-19
MC-20
4. Hold and raise up the right side of the power supply unit, and remove n Reinstallation Procedures
the power supply assembly by passing it over the stopper on the frame. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the fan is attached in its correct orientation.
5. Release the clamp, disconnect the connector, remove the screws, and
remove the fan.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-20
MC-21
4.11 Touch Panel Assembly 3. Disconnect the connectors.
{SP:INDEX}
DETAIL A
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Upper front cover #1 [Disconnect]
- Upper right-hand side cover A Connector (PNL9)
{MC:3.1_Covers} #2 [Disconnect]
Connector (PNL6)
2. Move the touch panel assembly away.
#3 [Disconnect]
USB connector
#4 [Disconnect]
Connector (PNL10)
#5 [Disconnect] #6 [Disconnect]
Connector (LED2) Connector (LED1)
4. Move back touch panel assembly to where it was.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-21
MC-22
5. Remove the touch panel assembly. n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-22
MC-23
5. Cassette Set Unit 4. Disconnect the connectors.
5.1 Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When pulling out or reinstalling the cassette set unit, be sure to remove the
touch panel assembly before doing so.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Upper front cover
- Lower front cover
- Upper right-hand side cover
- Upper left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the shelf cover (for the fourth shelf).
{MC:3.3_Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)}
3. Remove the touch panel assembly.
u NOTE u
After removing the touch panel assembly, secure the disconnected cables and
connectors to the housing with tape or the like to prevent them from becoming
entangled.
{MC:4.11_Touch Panel Assembly}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-23
MC-24
5. Move the cables away. n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
To push the cassette set unit into the housing, get hold of the portions indicated in the
illustration below. If other areas are grasped, portions of the cassette set unit may be
damaged.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
6. Pull out the cassette set unit.
u NOTE u
Get hold of the portions indicated by the "Hold Here" labels to pull out the
cassette set unit.
{n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 6)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-24
MC-25
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 6)
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-25
MC-26
5.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
Because the cassette set unit is heavy, pay attention to the following points when
removing, installing, and moving it.
- Before proceeding with the procedures, secure sufficient working space around the
machine.
- Get hold of the portions indicated by the "Hold Here" labels.
- While assuming a comfortable posture, lift or hold up the unit.
- Two persons should cooperate with each other to perform the procedures.
n Removal Procedures
CAUTION
Unless the cassette set unit is to be removed, do not take off the brackets.
Otherwise, the cassette set unit would drop from the housing, causing you
physical injury.
1. Pull out the cassette set unit.
{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}
2. Remove the cassette set unit.
u NOTE u
Get hold of the portions indicated by the "Hold Here" labels to pull out the
cassette set unit.
{n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 2)}
n Reinstallation Procedures
CAUTION
After reinstalling the brackets, be sure to paint their screws in red.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-26
MC-27
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 2)
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-27
MC-28
5.3 Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf) 4. Remove the shutter assembly.
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u
Put the disconnected cable and connector in an unobstructive corner beforehand
n Removal Procedures to prevent them from being entangled.
1. Remove the cover.
- Upper front cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the touch panel assembly.
u NOTE u
After removing the touch panel assembly, secure the disconnected cables and
connectors to the housing with tape or the like to prevent them from becoming
entangled
{MC:4.11_Touch Panel Assembly}
3. Disconnect the connector.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-28
MC-29
5.4 Shutter Assemblies 3. Remove the shutter assembly.
(for the Second and Third Shelves) u NOTE u
{SP:INDEX} Put the disconnected cable and connector in an unobstructive corner beforehand
to prevent them from being entangled.
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the shutter assemblies for the second and third
shelves are the same, except removal/reinstallation procedures for their connector.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cover.
- Upper front cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Disconnect the connectors.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-29
MC-30
5.5 Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf) 5.6 Arms (White)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers. 1. Pull out the cassette set unit.
- Upper front cover {MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}
- Lower front cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the arms (white).
{SP:03C_CASSETTE SET UNIT 3}
2. Remove the shelf cover (for the fourth shelf).
{MC:3.3_Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)}
3. Remove the shutter assembly (for the fourth shelf).
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-30
MC-31
5.7 Shutters n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the shutters for the first, second, third, and fourth n Check/Adjustment Procedures
shelves are all identical.
l CHECK 1
Move the shutter to make sure that the sensor and shutter do not interfere with each
n Removal Procedures other.
1. Remove the shutter assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the shutter assembly for the shelf where the shutter to be removed is
installed.
{MC:5.3_Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)}
{MC:5.4_Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)}
{MC:5.5_Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)}
2. Remove the shutter.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-31
MC-32
5.8 LEDs 3. Remove the LED.
(for the First, Second, and Third Shelves)
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the LEDs for the first, second, and third shelves are
all identical.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the shutter assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the shutter assembly for the shelf where the LED to be removed is
installed.
{MC:5.3_Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)}
{MC:5.4_Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)}
{MC:5.5_Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)}
2. Remove the shelf cover.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-32
MC-33
5.9 LED (for the Fourth Shelf) 5.10 Antistatic Members
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the antistatic members for the first, second, third, and
1. Remove the shelf cover (for the fourth shelf). fourth shelves are all identical.
{MC:3.3_Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)}
2. Remove the LED (for the fourth shelf). n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the shutter assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the shutter assembly for the shelf where the antistatic members to be
removed are installed.
{MC:5.3_Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)}
{MC:5.4_Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)}
{MC:5.5_Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)}
2. Remove the antistatic members.
{SP:03A_CASSETTE SET UNIT 1}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-33
MC-34
5.11 Suction Cup Driving Motors (MA1, 2, 3, 4) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4 are all identical. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
This section describes the replacement procedures for the MA1.
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the MA1 is installed in its correct orientation.
n Removal Procedures
1. Pull out the cassette set unit.
{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}
2. Remove the shutter assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
To remove the MA2, MA3, or MA4, remove its relevant shelf and the shutter
assembly for the shelf immediately above.
{MC:5.3_Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)}
{MC:5.4_Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)}
{MC:5.5_Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)}
3. Remove the MA1.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-34
MC-35
5.12 Barcode Reader Assembly n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the barcode reader assemblies for the first, second, n Check/Adjustment Procedures
third, and fourth shelves are all identical.
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the barcode reader assembly does not pinch its surrounding cables.
n Removal Procedures
1. Pull out the cassette set unit.
{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}
2. Remove the barcode reader assembly.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-35
MC-36
5.13 Exposure Markers Receiving Boxes 5.14 Hold Release Arm
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u n Removal Procedures
The replacement procedures for the exposure markers receiving boxes for the first,
second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical. 1. Pull out the cassette set unit.
{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}
n Removal Procedures 2. Remove the hold release arm.
1. Pull out the cassette set unit.
{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}
2. Remove the barcode reader assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the barcode reader assembly for the shelf where the exposure markers
receiving box cover to be removed is installed.
{MC:5.12_Barcode Reader Assembly}
3. Remove the exposure markers receiving box.
{SP:03A_CASSETTE SET UNIT 1}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-36
MC-37
5.15 Hoses n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the hoses for the first, second, third, and fourth n Check/Adjustment Procedures
shelves are all identical.
l CHECK 1
To attach the hose, push it all the way.
n Removal Procedures
l CHECK 2
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. Make sure that the hose is attached in a proper position as illustrated below.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the hose.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-37
MC-38
5.16 Cassette Ejection Clutches (CLA1, 2, 3, 4) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the CLA1, CLA2, CLA3, and CLA4 are all identical. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
This section describes the replacement procedures for the CLA1.
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the tab of the bracket engages with the U-shaped notch of the cassette
n Removal Procedures ejection clutch.
1. Pull out the cassette set unit.
{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}
2. Remove the CLA1.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-38
MC-39
5.17 Cassette Ejection Sensors (SA1, 7, 13, 19) 5.18 Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the SA1, SA7, SA13, and SA19 are all identical. The replacement procedures for the SA3, SA9, SA15, and SA21 are all identical.
This section describes the replacement procedures for the SA1. This section describes the replacement procedures for the SA3.
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the shutter assembly. 1. Pull out the cassette set unit.
u INSTRUCTION u {MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}
Remove the shutter assembly for the shelf where the cassette ejection sensor to 2. Remove the SA3.
be removed is installed. {SP:03E_CASSETTE SET UNIT 5}
{MC:5.3_Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)} n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:5.4_Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)}
{MC:5.5_Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)} u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
2. Remove the SA1.
{SP:03A_CASSETTE SET UNIT 1}
n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-39
MC-40
5.19 Suction Cup HP Sensors (SA4, 10, 16, 22) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u
u NOTE u Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
The replacement procedures for the SA4, SA10, SA16, and SA22 are all identical.
This section describes the replacement procedures for the SA4.
n Removal Procedures
1. Pull out the cassette set unit.
{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}
2. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
3. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.
4. Remove the SA4.
{SP:03B_CASSETTE SET UNIT 2}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-40
MC-41
5.20 Suction Sensors (SA5, 11, 17, 23) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the SA5, SA11, SA17, and SA23 are all identical. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
This section describes the replacement procedures for the SA5.
l CHECK 1
n Removal Procedures To attach the hose, push it all the way.
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the SA5.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-41
MC-42
5.21 Suction Cup Assemblies 3. Remove the suction cup assembly.
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u
u NOTE u When installing or removing the suction cup assembly, perform the procedures
while supporting the IP removal arm by hand. If you try to perform the procedures
The replacement procedures for the suction cup assemblies for the first, second, third, without supporting the IP removal arm, the IP removal arm may be bent.
and fourth shelves are all identical.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
2. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
- To attach the hose, push it all the way.
- Make sure that the route of the hose is stress-free and normal.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-42
MC-43
5.22 Suction Cups n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Removal Procedures
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the suction cup assembly.
l CHECK 1
{MC:5.21_Suction Cup Assemblies}
When attaching the suction cups, make sure that metal powder scraped by the
2. Remove the suction cups. screwdriver or the like is not deposited on them.
l CHECK 2
After attaching the KL clips, move them in orientations as illustrated below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-43
MC-44
5.23 Roller Assemblies 3. Remove the roller assemblies.
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the roller assemblies for the first, second, third, and
fourth shelves are all identical.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
2. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-44
MC-45
5.24 Cassette Ejection Rollers 5. Move the IP removal arms to the positions illustrated below.
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the cassette ejection rollers for the first, second, third,
and fourth shelves are all identical.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the shutter assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the shutter assembly for the shelf where the cassette ejection roller to
be removed is installed.
{MC:5.3_Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)}
{MC:5.4_Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)}
{MC:5.5_Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)}
2. Remove the barcode reader assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the barcode reader assembly for the shelf where the cassette ejection
roller to be removed is installed. 6. Disconnect the connectors.
{MC:5.12_Barcode Reader Assembly}
3. Remove the hold release arm.
{MC:5.14_Hold Release Arm}
4. Remove the cassette ejection clutch.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the cassette ejection clutch for the shelf where the cassette ejection
roller to be removed is installed.
{MC:5.15_Cassette Ejection Clutches (CLA1, 2, 3, 4)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-45
MC-46
7. Remove the brackets. 9. Remove the cassette ejection roller (for the first shelf).
8. Remove the planetary gear assembly.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-46
MC-47
5.25 Cassette Set Base Assemblies 4. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the cassette set base assemblies for the first,
second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the shutter assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the shutter assembly for the shelf where the cassette set base assembly
to be removed is installed.
{MC:5.3_Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)}
{MC:5.4_Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)}
{MC:5.5_Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)}
2. Remove the barcode reader assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the barcode reader assembly for the shelf where the cassette ejection
roller to be removed is installed.
{MC:5.12_Barcode Reader Assembly}
3. Remove the cassette hold sensor.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the cassette hold sensor for the shelf where the cassette ejection roller
to be removed is installed.
{MC:5.18_Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-47
MC-48
5. Remove the cassette set base assembly. n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Because you may get your hand pinched, do not perform the reinstallation procedures
by grasping the lower front portion of the cassette set base assembly
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-48
MC-49
5.26 Stoppers 5.27 Inch/Metric Sensors (SA6, 12, 18, 24)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the stoppers for the first, second, third, and fourth The replacement procedures for the SA6, SA12, SA18, and SA24 are all identical.
shelves are all identical.
n Removal Procedures
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cassette set base assembly.
1. Remove the cassette set base assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the cassette set base assembly for the shelf where the inch/metric
Remove the cassette set base assembly for the shelf where the stoppers to be sensor to be removed is installed.
removed are installed.
{MC:5.25_Cassette Set Base Assemblies}
{MC:5.25_Cassette Set Base Assemblies}
2. Remove the inch/metric sensor.
2. Remove the stoppers. {SP:03A_CASSETTE SET UNIT 1}
{SP:03E_CASSETTE SET UNIT 5}
n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-49
MC-50
5.28 Guide Plates n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the guide plates for the first, second, third, and fourth n Check/Adjustment Procedures
shelves are all identical.
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the latches of the guide plates are properly hooked into the bracket.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cassette set base assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the cassette set base assembly for the shelf where the guide plates to
be removed are installed
{MC:5.25_Cassette Set Base Assemblies}
2. Remove the guide plates.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-50
MC-51
5.29 Cassette IN Sensors (SA2, 8, 14, 20) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} 1. Install the cassette IN sensor.
u NOTE u {SP:03E_CASSETTE SET UNIT 5}
The replacement procedures for the SA2, SA8, SA14, and SA20 are all identical.
2. Install the actuator (cassette IN detection).
{MC:5.44.2_Reinstallation Procedures (Actuator: 366N200005A)}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the stoppers.
3. Complete the remaining reinstallation procedures by reversing the
removal procedures.
{MC:5.26_Stoppers}
2. Remove the guide plates.
{MC:5.28_Guide Plates}
3. Remove the actuator (cassette IN detection).
{MC:5.44.1_Removal Procedures (Actuator: 366N200005A)}
4. Remove the cassette IN sensor.
{SP:03E_CASSETTE SET UNIT 5}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-51
MC-52
5.30 Stoppers n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the stoppers for the first, second, third, and fourth n Check/Adjustment Procedures
shelves are all identical.
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the compression coil spring is attached properly.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cassette set base assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the cassette set base assembly for the shelf where the stoppers to be
removed are installed.
{MC:5.25_Cassette Set Base Assemblies}
2. Remove the stopper.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-52
MC-53
5.31 Suction Pump Bracket Assemblies 3. Disconnect the connector.
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the suction pump bracket assemblies for the first,
second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the suction cup HP sensor.
{MC:5.19_Suction Cup HP Sensors (SA4, 10, 16, 22)}
2. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-53
MC-54
4. Remove the suction pump bracket assembly. n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Before removing the suction pump bracket assembly on the fourth shelf, remove
the reinforcement bracket. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{MC:5.43_Reinforcement Bracket}
l CHECK 1
To attach the hose, push it all the way.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-54
MC-55
5.32 IP Removal Arms 3. Remove the suction pump bracket assembly.
{SP:INDEX} u INSTRUCTION u
u NOTE u Remove the suction pump bracket assembly for the shelf where the IP removal
arms to be removed is installed.
The replacement procedures for the IP removal arms for the first, second, third, and
fourth shelves are all identical. {MC:5.31_Suction Pump Bracket Assemblies}
n Removal Procedures 4. Remove the bearings.
{CHECK 1}
1. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.
2. Remove the arms (white).
{MC:5.6_Arms (White)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-55
MC-56
5. Remove the IP removal arm. n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The right and left slide bearings should be attached in different orientations. Make
sure that they are attached in their correct orientations.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-56
MC-57
5.33 Bearings (IP Removal Link Shafts) 3. Remove the KL clips.
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u u NOTEu
The replacement procedures for the bearings (IP removal link shafts) for the first, A machine with a serial number of 21140 or earlier employs TP3x6 as a retaining
second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical. screw of the gear attached to the IP removal link shaft. If this screw is loose,
replace it with BR3x6.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the arms (white).
{MC:5.6_Arms (White)}
2. Remove the suction pump bracket assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the suction pump bracket assembly for the shelf where the bearing to be
removed is installed.
{MC:5.31_Suction Pump Bracket Assemblies}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-57
MC-58
4. Remove the bearings. n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the bearings are attached in their correct positions.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-58
MC-59
5.34 Solenoid Assemblies (SOLA1, 2, 3, 4) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the SOLA1, SOLA2, SOLA3, and SOLA4 are all n Check/Adjustment Procedures
identical.
This section describes the replacement procedures for the SOLA1. l CHECK 1
Make sure that the shaft of the solenoid is properly attached to the bracket.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cassette set base assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the cassette set base assembly for the shelf where the solenoid
assembly to be removed is installed.
{MC:5.25_Cassette Set Base Assemblies}
2. Remove the SOLA1.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-59
MC-60
5.35 IP Leak Valves (SVA1, 2, 3, 4) n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
u NOTE u When attaching the bracket, make sure that the surrounding cables are not pinched.
The replacement procedures for the SVA1, SVA2, SVA3, and SVA4 are all identical.
l CHECK 2
This section describes the replacement procedures for the SVA1.
To attach the hose, push it all the way.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the SVA1.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-60
MC-61
5.36 IP Suction Pumps (PA1, 2, 3, 4) n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
u NOTE u Make sure that the hose is attached in a proper position as illustrated below.
The replacement procedures for the PA1, PA2, PA3, and PA4 are all identical.
This section describes the replacement procedures for the PA1.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the PA1.
l CHECK 2
To attach the hose, push it all the way.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
u NOTE u
Use new binding bands to secure the pump, and make sure it is firmly fixed.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-61
MC-62
5.37 Cassette Hold Pins 5.38 Movable Guide Assemblies
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the cassette hold pins for the first, second, third, and The replacement procedures for the movable guide assemblies for the first, second,
fourth shelves are all identical. third, and fourth shelves are all identical.
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the solenoid assembly. 1. Remove the roller assemblies.
{MC:5.34_Solenoid Assemblies (SOLA1, 2, 3, 4)} {MC:5.23_Roller Assemblies}
2. Remove the cassette hold pin. 2. Remove the guide plates.
{MC:5.28_Guide Plates}
3. Remove the movable guide assemblies.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-62
MC-63
5.39 Movable Guides n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the movable guides for the first, second, third, and n Check/Adjustment Procedures
fourth shelves are all identical.
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the compression coil springs are properly attached between the
n Removal Procedures movable guides and bracket.
1. Remove the movable guide assemblies.
{MC:5.38_Movable Guide Assemblies}
2. Remove the movable guides.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-63
MC-64
5.40 Tapes n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
u NOTE u Attach the tape along the path illustrated below.
The replacement procedures for the tapes for the first, second, third, and fourth
shelves are all identical.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the IP removal arm.
{MC:5.32_IP Removal Arms}
2. Remove the tapes.
n Reinstallation Procedures
u INSTRUCTION u
When the tapes are to be replaced, degrease the surface of the bracket with ethanol
before attaching them.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-64
MC-65
5.41 Guides 5.42 IP Stoppers
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the guides for the first, second, third, and fourth The replacement procedures for the IP stoppers for the first, second, third, and fourth
shelves are all identical. shelves are all identical.
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. 1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the guides. 2. Remove the IP stopper.
{SP:03C_CASSETTE SET UNIT 3}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-65
MC-66
5.43 Reinforcement Bracket 3. Remove the reinforcement bracket.
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Pull out the cassette set unit.
{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}
2. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-66
MC-67
5.44 Torsion Coil Springs
{SP:INDEX}
5.44.1 Removal Procedures (Actuator: 366N200005A)
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following l When the torsion coil spring on the third shelf is to be removed:
parts concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, Reference Part concerned
to remove the parts.
{MC:3.1} Covers
l When the torsion coil spring on the first shelf is to be removed:
{MC:3.3} Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)
Reference Part concerned
{MC:4.11} Touch Panel Assembly
{MC:3.1} Covers
{MC:5.1} Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit
{MC:3.3} Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)
{MC:5.4} Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)
{MC:4.11} Touch Panel Assembly
{MC:5.12} Barcode Reader Assembly
{MC:5.1} Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.18} Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21)
{MC:5.3} Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)
{MC:5.25} Cassette Set Base Assemblies
{MC:5.12} Barcode Reader Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
{MC:5.18} Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21)
{MC:5.25} Cassette Set Base Assemblies
l When the torsion coil spring on the fourth shelf is to be removed:
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Covers
l When the torsion coil spring on the second shelf is to be
{MC:3.3} Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)
removed:
{MC:4.11} Touch Panel Assembly
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit
{MC:3.1} Covers
{MC:5.5} Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)
{MC:3.3} Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)
{MC:5.12} Barcode Reader Assembly
{MC:4.11} Touch Panel Assembly
{MC:5.18} Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21)
{MC:5.1} Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.25} Cassette Set Base Assemblies
{MC:5.4} Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
{MC:5.12} Barcode Reader Assembly
{MC:5.18} Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21)
{MC:5.25} Cassette Set Base Assemblies
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-67
MC-68
2. Remove the screws, and remove the stopper. 4. Carry out the operation of the procedure 5 from the direction indicated
by the arrow in the figure.
5. Push up the end of the actuator, check that orientations of the shaft
end of the actuator and the notch on the bracket coincide with each
3. Remove the screws, and remove the guide plate. other, and then raise up straight for removal.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-68
MC-69
5.44.2 Reinstallation Procedures (Actuator: 366N200005A) 4. Reinstall the actuator with the shaft end of the actuator aligning with
the notch of the bracket in orientation, while holding the actuator as
1. Remove the cassette IN sensor. shown in the figure.
2. Reinstall the torsion coil spring on the actuator with the orientation
indicated in the figure below.
5. Rotate the actuator and the torsion coil spring concurrently in the
direction of the arrow, and hook the torsion coil spring under the
bracket.
3. Carry out operations of the procedures 4 to 8 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-69
MC-70
6. Reinstall the cassette IN sensor while lifting the tip of the actuator. 9. Reinstall the guide plate, and retain it with the screws.
7. Check that the torsion coil spring hooks under the bracket. Check
that the torsion coil spring holds the actuator.
10. Reinstall the stopper, and retain it with the screws.
8. Manually move the actuator several times. Check to make sure that
the actuator can move without being caught on the bracket.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-70
MC-71
11. Reinstall the following parts concerned with the operation, and
restore the machine. Reinstall the parts of interest according to the
procedures mentioned as the reference.
l When the torsion coil spring on the third shelf is attached:
l When the torsion coil spring on the first shelf is attached:
Reference Part concerned
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.25} Cassette Set Base Assemblies
{MC:5.25} Cassette Set Base Assemblies
{MC:5.18} Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21)
{MC:5.18} Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21)
{MC:5.12} Barcode Reader Assembly
{MC:5.12} Barcode Reader Assembly
{MC:5.4} Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)
{MC:5.3} Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)
{MC:5.1} Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.1} Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit
{MC:4.11} Touch Panel Assembly
{MC:4.11} Touch Panel Assembly
{MC:3.3} Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)
{MC:3.3} Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)
{MC:3.1} Covers
{MC:3.1} Covers
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
l When the torsion coil spring on the fourth shelf is attached:
l When the torsion coil spring on the second shelf is attached:
Reference Part concerned
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.25} Cassette Set Base Assemblies
{MC:5.25} Cassette Set Base Assemblies
{MC:5.18} Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21)
{MC:5.18} Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21)
{MC:5.12} Barcode Reader Assembly
{MC:5.12} Barcode Reader Assembly
{MC:5.5} Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)
{MC:5.4} Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)
{MC:5.1} Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.1} Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit
{MC:4.11} Touch Panel Assembly
{MC:4.11} Touch Panel Assembly
{MC:3.3} Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)
{MC:3.3} Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)
{MC:3.1} Covers
{MC:3.1} Covers
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-71
MC-72
6. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit 2. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
6.1 Feed/Load Conveyor Unit
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
Because the feed/load conveyor unit is heavy, pay attention to the following points
when removing, installing, and moving it.
- Before proceeding with the procedures,secure sufficient working space around the
machine.
- Get hold of the portions indicated by the "Hold Here" labels.
- While assuming a comfortable posture, lift or hold up the unit.
Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Upper left-hand side cover
- Upper rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-72
MC-73
Reinstallation Procedures 2. Secure the feed/load conveyor unit in place.
1. Mount the feed/load conveyor unit onto the housing.
u NOTE u
Use care so that the side plate bottom portions of the feed/load conveyor unit do
not ride onto the brackets of the housing.
3. Reinstall the covers.
- Upper left-hand side cover
- Upper rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-73
MC-74
6.2 IP Feed/Load Sensors (SB1, 2, 3, 4) 6.3 Path Changeover Shelf Sensors (SB7, 8, 9)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the SB1, SB2, SB3, and SB4 are all identical. The replacement procedures for the SB7, SB8, and SB9 are all identical.
This section describes the replacement procedures for the SB1. This section describes the replacement procedures for the SB7.
Removal Procedures Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. 1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the SB1. 2. Remove the SB7.
{SP:04C_FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 3}
Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Attach the sensor with its orientation in mind.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-74
MC-75
6.4 Convergence Path Changeover Sensor 6.5 Path Changeover HP Sensor (SB11)
(SB10) {SP:INDEX}
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
Removal Procedures 1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} 2. Remove the SB11.
2. Remove the SB10. {SP:04C_FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 3}
{SP:04C_FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 3} Reinstallation Procedures
Reinstallation Procedures u NOTE u
u NOTE u Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-75
MC-76
6.6 IP Jam Handling Assembly 6.7 Brush Roller Assembly
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. 1. Remove the cover.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} - Upper rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the IP jam handling assembly.
2. Remove the brush roller assembly.
{CHECK 1}
Exploded View
For the exploded view of the IP jam handling assembly, see the Service Parts List.
{SP:04A_FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 1}
Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-76
MC-77
Exploded View Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the brush roller assembly and brush rollers are attached in their correct
orientations.
Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-77
MC-78
6.8 Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference 4. Remove the cam bracket assembly.
Side)
{SP:INDEX}
6.8.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
2. Carry out the operation of the step 3 from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure below.
3. Release the clamp and disconnect the connector.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-78
MC-79
6.8.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Connect the connector and secure the clamp.
1. Make sure that the half-clutch spur gear is secured by the rods of the
bracket.
4. Reinstall the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
2. Reinstall the cam bracket assembly.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-79
MC-80
6.9 Path Changeover Mechanism 3. Remove the cams.
{SP:INDEX}
6.9.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side).
{MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)}
2. Rotate the cam until it orients as indicated in the figure below.
u NOTE u
If the cam has not been rotated to the orientation indicated in the figure below,
the actuator and the sensor might possibly interfere with each other, resulting in
the damage of the sensor.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-80
MC-81
4. Remove the ratchet head, the spur gear and the half-clutch spur gear. 6.9.2 Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u u NOTE u
The inner member of the half-clutch spur gear may pop out. If the inner member 327Y0176C with countermeasures taken against a failure is marked in red on the
pops out, push it back where it was. If the inner member is removed, it may surface of a half-clutch spur gear.
cause trouble or failure.
1. Reinstall the ratchet head, the spur gear and the half-clutch spur gear.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-81
MC-82
2. Reinstall the cams. 3. Verify the attachment location of the cam
u NOTE u
Check to ensure that the ratchet head and the protruding portion inside the cam
are snugly attached at all of three portions.
If the cam and the spur gear are mounted with their engagement lost even at one
P
of the cogs, the path changeover mechanism does not work normally.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-82
MC-83
4. Rotate the cam until the actuator is viewed from the hole on the 5. Make sure that the half-clutch spur gear is secured by the rods of the
bracket, and verify the attachment location of the cam. bracket.
6. Reinstall the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side).
{MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-83
MC-84
6.10 Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference 4. Remove the bracket.
Side)
{SP:INDEX}
6.10.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
2. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 7 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
5. Remove the bracket.
3. Release the clamps and disconnect the connector.
6. Remove the bracket.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-84
MC-85
7. Remove the cam and half-clutch spur gear.
u NOTE u
The inner member of the half-clutch spur gear may pop out. If the inner member
pops out, push it back where it was. If the inner member is removed, it may
cause trouble or failure.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-85
MC-86
6.10.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Reinstall the bracket.
1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 7 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
2. Reinstall the cam and half-clutch spur gear. 4. Attach the screws.
u NOTE u
The inner member of the half-clutch spur gear may pop out. If the inner member
pops out, push it back where it was. If the inner member is removed, it may
cause trouble or failure.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-86
MC-87
5. Reinstall the bracket. 7. Connect the connector and secure the clamps.
u NOTE u
Rotate the cam in the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Align
the half-clutch spur gear, the holes of the bracket and the rods of the bracket in
position. Then, reintall the bracket.
8. Reinstall the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
6. Reinstall the bracket.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-87
MC-88
6.11 Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite- 6.12 Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-
Reference Side) Reference Side)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. 1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side). 2. Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side).
Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-88
MC-89
6.13 Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite- Check/Adjustment Procedures
Reference Side Gears) Attach the spur gears in accordance with the engravings on the side plate.
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
1. Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side).
{MC:6.11_Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side)}
2. Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side).
{MC:6.12_Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-Reference Side)}
3. Remove the spur gears.
{SP:04B_FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 2}
Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-89
MC-90
6.14 Pre-BCR IP Sensor (SB5) 6.15 Pre-Convergence IP Sensor (SB6)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cam bracket assembly (lower reference side) 1. Remove the cam bracket assembly (lower reference side)
{MC:6.10_Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side)} {MC:6.10_Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side)}
2. Remove the SB5. 2. Remove the SB6.
Reinstallation Procedures Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1 l CHECK 1
Attach the SB5 with its orientation in mind. Attach the SB6 with its orientation in mind.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-90
MC-91
6.16 IP Transport Motor (MB1) 4. Remove the MB1.
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
1. Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side).
{MC:6.11_Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side)}
2. Put the feed/load conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below.
Reinstallation Procedures
3. Remove the spur gears. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gear is attached at its correct orientation.
{MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)_
n Check/Adjustment Procedures}
l CHECK 2
Make sure that the MB1 is installed in its correct orientation.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-91
MC-92
6.17 Convergence Unit IP Transport Motor (MB2) Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Removal Procedures Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side).
l CHECK 1
{MC:6.12_Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-Reference Side)}
Make sure that the spur gear is attached at its correct orientation.
2. Put the feed/load conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below. {MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)_
■ Check/Adjustment Procedures}
l CHECK 2
Make sure that the MB2 is installed in its correct orientation.
3. Remove the MB2.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-92
MC-93
6.18 Convergence Path Changeover Guide Reinstallation Procedures
Driving Motor (MB3) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{SP:INDEX}
Check/Adjustment Procedures
Removal Procedures
l CHECK 1
1. Remove the cam bracket assembly (lower reference side) Make sure that the spur gear is attached at its correct orientation.
{MC:6.10_Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side)} {MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)_
■ Check/Adjustment Procedures}
2. Put the feed/load conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below.
l CHECK 2
Make sure that the MB3 is installed in its correct orientation.
3. Remove the MB3.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-93
MC-94
6.19 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies (for the 6.20 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly (for the
First, Second, and Third Shelves) Fourth Shelf)
{SP:INDEX}
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the shock-absorbing roller assemblies for the first,
Removal Procedures
second, and third shelves are all identical.
1. Remove the MB1.
{MC:6.16_IP Transport Motor (MB1)}
Removal Procedures
2. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
2. Put the feed/load conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below.
3. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-94
MC-95
6.21 Antistatic Members 6.22 Shock-Absorbing Rollers (Convergence
{SP:INDEX} Unit)
u NOTE u {SP:INDEX}
The replacement procedures for the antistatic members for the first, second, third, and
fourth shelves are all identical. Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
Removal Procedures {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}
1. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly. 2. Remove the shock-absorbing rollers.
{SP:04D_FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 4}
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly for the shelf where the antistatic
member to be removed is installed.
{MC:6.19_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies (for the First, Second, and
Third Shelves)}
{MC:6.20_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)}
2. Remove the antistatic member.
Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-95
MC-96
6.23 Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H) 3. Carry out the operation of the step 4 from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure below.
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the rubber rollers A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H are all
identical. This section describes the replacement procedures for the rubber rollers A
and B.
Locations of Rubber Rollers
4. Remove the spur gears and tension coil spring.
6.23.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side).
{MC:6.11_Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side)}
2. Put the feed/load conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below.
5. Carry out the operations in the steps 6 to 8 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-96
MC-97
6. Remove the spur gear and tension coil spring. 9. Carry out the operations of the steps 10 and 11 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
u INSTRUCTION u
The spur gear to be removed depends on the removed rubber roller. Remove
the spur gear mounted forward to the tension coil spring.
10. Rotate the housing until the orientation indicated in the figure below is
reached, and then remove it.
7. Rotate the housing until the orientation indicated in the figure below is
reached, and then remove it.
11. Rotate the housing until the orientation indicated in the figure below is
reached, and then remove it.
8. Rotate the housing until the orientation indicated in the figure below is
reached, and then remove it.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-97
MC-98
12. Carry out the operations of the steps 13 and 14 from the direction 6.23.2 Reinstallation Procedures
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 5 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
13. Move the rubber roller (A) inward, and then remove it.
2. Insert one of ends of the rubber roller (B) into the side plate.
u NOTE u
Pay attention to the attachment location and the orientation of the rubber roller.
14. Move the rubber roller (B) inward, and then remove it.
3. Insert the other end of the robber roller into the side plate.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-98
MC-99
4. Insert one of ends of the rubber roller (A) into the side plate. 6. Carry out the operations of the steps 7 and 8 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
u NOTE u
Pay attention to the attachment orientation of the rubber roller.
7. Align the housing with the hole on the side plate in orientation, and
then reinstall it.
5. Insert the other end of the robber roller into the side plate.
8. Align the housing with the hole on the side plate in orientation, and
then reinstall it.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-99
MC-100
9. Carry out the operations in the steps 10 to 12 from the direction 12. Attach the spur gears and tension coil spring.
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
10. Align the housing with the hole on the side plate in orientation, and
then reinstall it.
11. Align the housing with the hole on the side plate in orientation, and
then reinstall it.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-100
MC-101
13. Carry out the operation of the step 14 from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure below.
14. Attach the tension coil spring and spur gear.
u NOTE u
The orientation of attaching the spur gear differs depending on the location to be
attached. Verify the orientation of the spur gear before attaching it.
{MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)_
n Check/Adjustment Procedures}
15. Reinstall the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side)
{MC:6.11_Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-101
MC-102
6.24 Arm and Bearing (for the First Shelf) 5. Remove the bearing.
{SP:INDEX}
6.24.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the SB1.
{MC:6.2_IP Feed/Load Sensors (SB1, 2, 3, 4)}
2. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly (for the first shelf).
{MC:6.19_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies (for the First, Second, and Third
Shelves)}
3. Remove the rubber rollers (A and B).
{MC:6.23_Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H)}
6. Remove the spur gear, tension coil spring, and arm.
4. Carry out the operations of the steps 5 and 6 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-102
MC-103
6.24.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Reinstall the arm.
1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 4 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
2. Reinstall the bearing. 4. Reinstall the tension coil spring and spur gear.
5. Reinstall the rubber rollers (A and B).
{MC:6.23_Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H)}
6. Reinstall the shock-absorbing roller assembly (for the first shelf).
{MC:6.19_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies (for the First, Second, and Third
Shelves)}
7. Reinstall the SB1.
{MC:6.2_IP Feed/Load Sensors (SB1, 2, 3, 4)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-103
MC-104
6.25 Arms and Bearings (for the Second, Third, 5. Carry out the operations in the steps 6 and 7 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
and Fourth Shelves)
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the arms and bearings for the second, third, and
fourth shelves are all identical.
6.25.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the IP feed/load sensor. 6. Remove the arm and tension coil spring.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the IP feed/load sensor for the shelf where the arm and bearing to be
removed are installed.
{MC:6.2_IP Feed/Load Sensors (SB1, 2, 3, 4)}
2. Remove the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side).
{MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)}
3. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly for the shelf where the arm and
bearing to be removed are installed.
{MC:6.19_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies (for the First, Second, and
Third Shelves)}
{MC:6.20_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)} 7. Remove the spur gear and bearing.
4. Remove the rubber rollers.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the rubber rollers for the shelf where the arm and bearing to be removed
are installed.
{MC:6.23_Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-104
MC-105
6.25.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Reinstall the spur gear and bearing.
1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 and 3 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
2. Reinstall the arm and tension coil spring.
4. Reinstall the rubber rollers.
u INSTRUCTION u
Install the rubber roller for the shelf where the mounted arm and bearing are
installed.
{MC:6.23_Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H)}
5. Reinstall the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Install the shock-absorbing roller assembly for the shelf where the mounted arm
and bearing are installed.
{MC:6.19_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies (for the First, Second, and
Third Shelves)}
{MC:6.20_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-105
MC-106
6. Reinstall the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side).
{MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)}
7. Reinstall the IP feed/load sensor.
u INSTRUCTION u
Install the IP feed/load sensor (cassette side) for the shelf where the mounted
arm and bearing are installed.
{MC:6.2_IP Feed/Load Sensors (SB1, 2, 3, 4)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-106
MC-107
6.26 Path Changeover Guides (for the First, Reinstallation Procedures
Second, Third, and Fourth Shelves) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the path changeover guides for the first, second,
third, and fourth shelves are all identical.
Removal Procedures
1. Remove the arm and bearing.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the arm and bearing for the shelf where the path changeover guide to
be removed is installed.
{MC:6.24_Arm and Bearing (for the First Shelf)}
{MC:6.25_Arms and Bearings (for the Second, Third, and Fourth Shelves)}
2. Remove the path changeover guide.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-107
MC-108
6.27 Guides (for the First, Second, Third, and 4. Remove the screws.
Fourth Shelves)
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the guide for the first, second, third, and fourth
shelves are all identical.
6.27.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the path changeover guide assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the path changeover guide for the shelf where the guide to be removed
is installed. 5. Carry out the operations in the steps 6 and 7 from the direction
{MC:6.26_Path Changeover Guides (for the First, Second, Third, and Fourth indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
Shelves)}
2. Carry out the operations in the steps 3 and 4 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
6. Flip down the guide in the direction indicated by the arrow in the
figure below.
3. Remove the screws.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-108
MC-109
7. Raise the guide straight up and remove it. 6.27.2 Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u 1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 and 3 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
Raise the guide straight up while keeping clear of the half punches inside the side
plate to remove it. If the guide is tilted, it might be caught with the side plate and
cannot be removed.
2. Insert the guide horizontally and mount it on the lower half punches.
u NOTE u
Insert the guide horizontally into the feed load conveyer unit while keeping clear
of the half punches inside the side plate. If the guide is tilted, it might be caught
with the side plate and cannot be removed.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-109
MC-110
3. Flip down the guide forward, and check to ensure that the guide is 6. Reinstall the screws.
mounted on the half punch.
7. Reinstall the path changeover guide assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Install the path changeover guide for the shelf of the mounted guide.
4. Carry out the operations of the steps 5 and 6 from the direction {MC:6.26_Path Changeover Guides (for the First, Second, Third, and Fourth
indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Shelves)}
5. Reinstall the screws.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-110
MC-111
6.28 Guide (Convergence Unit Lower Side) 5. Remove the guide (convergence unit lower side).
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
1. Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side).
{MC:6.12_Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-Reference Side)}
2. Remove the SB6.
{MC:6.15_Pre-Convergence IP Sensor (SB6)}
3. Remove the shock-absorbing rollers (convergence unit).
{MC:6.22_Shock-Absorbing Rollers (Convergence Unit).}
4. Remove the bracket.
Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-111
MC-112
6.29 Rubber Rollers (I, J, K, and L) 3. Remove the guide and spur gear.
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the rubber rollers I, J, K, and L are all identical.
This section describes the replacement procedures for the rubber rollers I and J.
Locations of Rubber Rollers
Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side).
{MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)}
2. Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side).
{MC:6.11_Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-112
MC-113
4. Remove the rubber rollers (I and J). 6.30 Rubber Rollers (M and N)
{SP:INDEX}
Locations of Rubber Rollers
Removal Procedures
1. Remove the IP jam handling assembly.
Reinstallation Procedures {MC:6.6_IP Jam Handling Assembly}
u NOTE u 2. Remove the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side).
The rubber rollers differ in length and shape depending on where they are attached. {MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)}
Pay attention to their attachment locations.
3. Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {MC:6.11_Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side)}
Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gear is attached at its correct orientation.
{MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)_
n Check/Adjustment Procedures}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-113
MC-114
4. Remove the guide and spur gears. Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
The rubber rollers differ in length and shape depending on where they are attached.
Pay attention to their attachment locations.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gear is attached at its correct orientation.
{MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)_
n Check/Adjustment Procedures}
5. Remove the rubber rollers (M and N).
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-114
MC-115
6.31 Rubber Rollers (O and P) 5. Remove the guide and spur gear.
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}
Locations of Rubber Rollers
Removal Procedures 6. Remove the rubber rollers (O and P).
1. Remove the IP jam handling assembly.
{MC:6.6_IP Jam Handling Assembly}
2. Remove the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side).
{MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)}
3. Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side).
{MC:6.11_Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side)}
4. Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side).
{MC:6.12_Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-Reference Side)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-115
MC-116
Reinstallation Procedures 6.32 Rubber Rollers (Q and R)
u NOTE u {SP:INDEX}
The rubber rollers differ in length and shape depending on where they are attached.
Pay attention to their attachment locations. Locations of Rubber Rollers
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gear is attached at its correct orientation.
{MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)_
n Check/Adjustment Procedures}
Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cam bracket assembly (lower reference side)
{MC:6.10_Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side)}
2. Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side).
{MC:6.12_Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-Reference Side)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-116
MC-117
3. Remove the guides and spur gears. Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
The rubber rollers differ in length and shape depending on where they are attached.
Pay attention to their attachment locations.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gear is attached at its correct orientation.
{MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)_
n Check/Adjustment Procedures}
4. Remove the rubber rollers (Q and R).
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-117
MC-118
6.33 Convergence Path Changeover Guide Removal Procedures
{SP:INDEX} 1. Remove the cam bracket assembly (lower reference side)
{MC:6.10_Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side)}
2. Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side).
{MC:6.12_Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-Reference Side)}
3. Remove the guides.
l Without spacer
l With spacer
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-118
MC-119
4. Remove the spacer. Check/Adjustment Procedures
{CHECK 1}
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spacer is attached correctly.
5. Remove the convergence path changeover guide.
l CHECK 2
{CHECK 2}
The convergence path changeover guide should be installed in an orientation
illustrated below. If the convergence path changeover guide is not installed correctly,
other guides could not be installed.
Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-119
MC-120
6.34 Rubber Rollers (S and T) 3. Remove the rubber rollers (S and T).
{SP:INDEX}
Locations of Rubber Rollers
Removal Procedures
1. Remove the brush roller assembly.
{MC:6.7_Brush Roller Assembly}
2. Remove the convergence path changeover guide.
{MC:6.33_Convergence Path Changeover Guide}
Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
The rubber rollers differ in length and shape depending on where they are attached.
Pay attention to their attachment locations.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gear is attached at its correct orientation.
{MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)_
n Check/Adjustment Procedures}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-120
MC-121
6.35 Guide (Convergence Unit Upper Side) Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} 1. Reinstall the guide.
Removal Procedures
1. Remove the SB5.
{MC:6.14_Pre-BCR IP Sensor (SB5)}
2. Remove the rubber rollers (Q and R).
{MC:6.32_Rubber Rollers (Q and R)}
3. Remove the convergence path changeover guide.
{MC:6.33_Convergence Path Changeover Guide}
4. Remove the guide (convergence unit upper side).
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-121
MC-122
2. Reinstall the convergence path changeover guide.
{MC:6.33_Convergence Path Changeover Guide}
3. Reinstall the rubber rollers (Q and R).
{MC:6.32_Rubber Rollers (Q and R)}
4. Reinstall the SB5.
{MC:6.14_Pre-BCR IP Sensor (SB5)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-122
MC-123
6.36 Half-Clutch Spur Gear (Upper Reference 3. Remove the half-clutch spur gear and cam.
Side) u NOTE u
{SP:INDEX} The inner member of the half-clutch spur gear may pop out. If the inner member
pops out, push it back where it was. If the inner member is removed, it may
cause trouble or failure.
6.36.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side).
{MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)}
2. Rotate the cam until it orients as indicated in the figure below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-123
MC-124
6.36.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Verify the attachment location of the cam
1. Verify the attachment location of the cam u NOTE u
Check to ensure that the ratchet head and the protruding portion inside the cam
are snugly attached at all of three portions.
If the cam and the spur gear are mounted with their engagement lost even at one
P
of the cogs, the path changeover mechanism does not work normally.
2. Reinstall the half-clutch spur gear and the cam while applying tension
to the ratchet head.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-124
MC-125
4. Rotate the cam until the actuator is viewed from the hole on the 5. Make sure that the half-clutch spur gear is secured by the rods of the
bracket, and verify the attachment location of the cam. bracket.
6. Reinstall the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side).
{MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-125
MC-126
7. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit 3. Disconnect the connector.
7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{SP:INDEX}
7.1.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Lower right-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
- Lower rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Carry out the operations in the steps 3 and 4 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
4. Remove the screws.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-126
MC-127
5. Carry out the operations in the steps 6 to 8 from the direction 8. Remove the screws.
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
6. Disconnect the connector.
9. Carry out the operations in the step 10 from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure below.
7. Disconnect the connectors.
10. Disconnect the connector.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-127
MC-128
11. Carry out the operations in the steps 12 and 13 from the direction 13. Pull out and remove the side-positioning conveyer unit.
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
12. Slightly lift the side-positioning conveyer unit and flip it down forward.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to bring the upper portion of the side-positioning conveyer unit
into contact with the ceiling of the housing (shadowed portion in the figure) when
slightly lifting the side-positioning conveyer unit and flipping it down forward.
The guide of the side-positioning conveyer unit might possibly deform or get
damaged.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-128
MC-129
7.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Push in the lower portion of the side-positioning conveyer unit
horizontally.
1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 4 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below. u NOTE u
Push the side-positioning conveyer unit horizontally without lifting it. Otherwise,
the upper portion of the side-positioning conveyer unit might come into contact
with the ceiling of the housing, resulting in deformation or damage of the guide of
the side-positioning conveyer unit.
2. Mount the side-positioning conveyer unit onto the housing.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to bring the upper portion of the side-positioning conveyer unit
into contact with the ceiling of the housing (shadowed portion in the figure) when
mounting the side-positioning conveyer unit onto the housing. The guide of the
side-positioning conveyer unit might possibly deform or get damaged.
REFERENCE
When the lower portion of the side-positioning conveyer unit is pushed in, the pin
(lower) for retaining with the subscanning unit is inserted into its retained position.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-129
MC-130
4. Push in the upper portion of the side-positioning conveyer unit 5. Carry out the operations in the step 6 from the direction indicated by
horizontally. the arrow in the figure below.
u NOTE u
Push the side-positioning conveyer unit horizontally without lifting it. Otherwise,
the upper portion of the side-positioning conveyer unit might come into contact
with the ceiling of the housing, resulting in deformation or damage of the guide of
the side-positioning conveyer unit.
6. Connect the connector.
REFERENCE
When the upper portion of the side-positioning conveyer unit is pushed in, the pin
(upper) for retaining with the subscanning unit gets caught with the guide inside
the subscanning unit, to have the side-positioning conveyer unit retained.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-130
MC-131
7. Carry out the operations in the steps 8 to 10 from the direction 10. Connect the connectors.
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
11. Carry out the operations in the steps 12 and 13 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
8. Connect the connector.
9. Attach the screws.
12. Attach the screws.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-131
MC-132
13. Connect the connector.
14. Reinstall the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Lower right-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
- Lower rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-132
MC-133
7.2 Side-Positioning Mechanism HP Sensor 7.3 Spur Gears (Reference Side)
(SC1) {SP:INDEX}
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
n Removal Procedures 1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
1. Remove the cover. {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
- Lower rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the bracket.
2. Remove the SC1.
{SP:05E_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5}
n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-133
MC-134
3. Move the actuator as appropriate. 7.4 Grip Release HP Sensor (SC2)
u NOTE u {SP:INDEX}
The spur gears should be removed or installed under condition where the
actuator does not interfere with the SC2. Otherwise, the SC2 might be damaged. n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the spur gears.
{MC:7.3_Spur Gears (Reference Side)}
2. Remove the SC2.
4. Remove the spur gears.
n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-134
MC-135
7.5 Side-Positioning IP Sensor (SC3) 7.6 Cleaning Guide HP Sensor (SC4)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. 1. Remove the covers.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} - Lower front cover
- Lower right-hand side cover
2. Remove the SC3. {MC:3.1_Covers}
{SP:05B_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2} 2. Remove the SC4.
{SP:05A_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-135
MC-136
7.7 Timing Belt n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
Attach the timing belt along to route indicate below.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the timing belt.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-136
MC-137
7.8 Side-Positioning Motor (MC1) 3. Remove the MC1.
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
2. Lay down the side-positioning conveyor unit in such an orientation as
illustrated below.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the MC1 is installed in such an orientation as illustrated below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-137
MC-138
7.9 Grip Release Motor (MC2) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Removal Procedures n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the spur gears (reference side). l CHECK 1
Make sure that the MC2 is installed in such an orientation as illustrated below.
{MC:7.3_Spur Gears (Reference Side)}
2. Remove the MC1.
{MC:7.8_Side-Positioning Motor (MC1)}
3. Remove the MC2.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-138
MC-139
7.10 IP Transport Motor (MC3) 4. Remove the MC3.
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the timing belt.
{MC:7.7_Timing Belt}
3. Lay down the side-positioning conveyor unit in such an orientation as
illustrated below.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the MC3 is installed in such an orientation as illustrated below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-139
MC-140
7.11 Cleaning Guide Driving Motor (MC4) 3. Remove the MC4.
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the cleaning guide driving motor assembly.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the MC4 is installed in such an orientation as illustrated below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-140
MC-141
7.12 Latch Drive Unit (Overall) 5. Remove the latch drive unit (overall).
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the MC2.
{MC:7.9_Grip Release Motor (MC2)}
2. Remove the MC3.
{MC:7.10_IP Transport Motor (MC3)}
3. Disconnect the connectors and cables.
4. Move the latch assembly to such a position as illustrated below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-141
MC-142
n Reinstallation Procedures 3. Move the latch assembly to its home position.
1. Move the latch assembly to such a position as illustrated below.
2. Mount the latch drive unit (overall) onto the side-positioning conveyor
4. Reinstall the latch drive unit (overall).
unit.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-142
MC-143
7.13 Latch Assembly (Latch Driver) n Exploded View
{SP:INDEX} For the exploded view of the latch assembly (latch drive unit), see the Service Parts
List.
n Removal Procedures {SP:05E_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5}
1. Remove the latch drive unit (overall). n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:7.12_Latch Drive Unit (Overall)} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
2. Move the latch assembly (latch drive unit) as appropriate.
REFERENCE
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
To remove the latch assembly, slide the latch assembly in the direction of the l CHECK 1
arrow as illustrated below to facilitate access to the E-rings that retain the shaft.
Make sure that the bearing is placed in the slot of the latch assembly.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-143
MC-144
7.14 Latch Assembly (Reference Side) 3. Remove the latch assembly (reference side).
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the spur gears (reference side).
{MC:7.3_Spur Gears (Reference Side)}
2. Move the latch assembly (reference side) to its home position.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the tension coil spring is attached properly.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-144
MC-145
7.15 Tensioner 7.16 Planetary Gear Assembly
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the timing belt. 1. Remove the timing belt.
{MC:7.7_Timing Belt} {MC:7.7_Timing Belt}
2. Remove the tensioner. 2. Remove the planetary gear assembly.
{SP:05C_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3} {SP:05C_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-145
MC-146
7.17 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) 7.18 Antistatic Members
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the planetary gear assembly. 1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.16_Planetary Gear Assembly} {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the spur gear (opposite reference side). 2. Remove the antistatic members.
{SP:05C_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3} {SP:05A_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-146
MC-147
7.19 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} u INSTRUCTION u
The cams differ in shape depending on where they are attached. When attaching the
n Removal Procedures cams, use care not to confuse their attachment locations and orientations.
1. Remove the spur gears. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{MC:7.3_Spur Gears (Reference Side)}
2. Remove the grip arms. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the cam is attached properly.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-147
MC-148
7.20 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} u INSTRUCTION u
The cams differ in shape depending on where they are attached. When attaching the
n Removal Procedures cams, use care not to confuse their attachment locations and orientations.
1. Remove the tensioner. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{MC:7.15_Tensioner}
2. Remove the planetary gear assembly. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{MC:7.16_Planetary Gear Assembly}
l CHECK 1
3. Remove the grip arms. Make sure that the cam is attached properly.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-148
MC-149
7.21 Grip Shaft 7.22 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side). 1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.19_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)} {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side). 2. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
{MC:7.20_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}
3. Remove the grip shaft.
{SP:05B_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-149
MC-150
7.23 Rubber Roller (A) 3. Remove the rubber roller (A).
{SP:INDEX}
n Rubber Roller Locations
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the spur gear (opposite reference side).
{MC:7.17_Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)}
2. Remove the guide.
u NOTE u
The guide removed should not be placed with its IP contacting face down.
Otherwise, the contacting face might be scratched or soiled.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The tension coil springs differ in length depending on where they are attached. Make
sure that the tension coil springs are attached in their correct locations.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-150
MC-151
7.24 Rubber Roller (B) 2. Remove the rubber roller (B).
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u
The guide removed should not be placed with its IP contacting face down.
n Rubber Roller Locations Otherwise, the contacting face might be scratched or soiled.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the rubber roller (A).
{MC:7.23_Rubber Roller (A)}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-151
MC-152
7.25 Rubber Rollers (C and D) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Rubber Roller Locations n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The tension coil springs differ in length depending on where they are attached. Make
sure that the tension coil springs are attached in their correct locations.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).
{MC:7.19_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}
2. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).
{MC:7.20_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}
3. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
{MC:7.22_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly}
4. Remove the rubber rollers (C and D).
{n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-152
MC-153
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)
{CHECK 1}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-153
MC-154
7.26 Rubber Roller (E) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Rubber Roller Locations n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The tension coil springs differ in length depending on where they are attached. Make
sure that the tension coil springs are attached in their correct locations.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).
{MC:7.19_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}
2. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).
{MC:7.20_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}
3. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
{MC:7.22_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly}
4. Remove the rubber roller (E).
{■ Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-154
MC-155
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)
{CHECK 1}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-155
MC-156
7.27 Rubber Roller (F) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Rubber Roller Locations n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The tension coil springs differ in length depending on where they are attached. Make
sure that the tension coil springs are attached in their correct locations.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the latch drive unit (overall).
{MC:7.12_Latch Drive Unit (Overall)}
2. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).
{MC:7.19_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}
3. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).
{MC:7.20_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}
4. Remove the rubber roller (F).
{■ Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-156
MC-157
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)
{CHECK 1}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-157
MC-158
7.28 Guide 3. Remove the guide.
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the rubber rollers (C and D).
{MC:7.25_Rubber Roller (C and D)}
2. Remove the rubber roller (E).
{MC:7.26_Rubber Roller (E)}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-158
MC-159
7.29 Cleaning Guide Assembly 4. Remove the cleaning guide assembly.
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the guide.
u NOTE u
The guide removed should not be placed with its IP contacting face down.
Otherwise, the contacting face might be scratched or soiled.
3. Lay down the side-positioning conveyor unit in such an orientation as
illustrated below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-159
MC-160
n Reinstallation Procedures 2. Secure the cleaning guide assembly and guide in place.
1. Mount the cleaning guide assembly onto the side-positioning
conveyor unit.
3. Connect the connector.
4. Reinstall the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-160
MC-161
7.30 Cleaning Guide 3. Remove the cleaning guide.
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}
{CHECK 2}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the MC4.
{MC:7.11_Cleaning Guide Driving Motor (MC4)}
2. Remove the cleaning guide assembly.
{MC:7.29_Cleaning Guide Assembly}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-161
MC-162
n Reinstallation Procedures l CHECK 2
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. Make sure that the tension coil spring is attached properly.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the cleaning guide is installed in its correct orientation.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-162
MC-163
7.31 Tape REFERENCE
When the spur gear is rotated, the latch assembly moves inward. Otherwise, the
{SP:INDEX} tape cannot be applied as the latch is in its way.
7.31.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
2. Carry out the operation of the step 3 from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure below.
4. Lay down the side-positioning conveyor unit in such an orientation as
illustrated below.
3. Rotate the spur gear fully clockwise.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-163
MC-164
5. Carry out the operations in the steps 6 and 7 from the direction 8. Remove the antistatic brush assembly.
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
6. Remove the screw.
9. Carry out the operations in the steps 10 and 11 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
7. Remove the screw.
10. Remove the screw.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-164
MC-165
11. Remove the screw. 14. Remove the tape.
12. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
13. Carry out the operation of the step 14 from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-165
MC-166
7.31.2 Reinstallation Procedures 4. Apply the tape.
u NOTES u
1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 9 from the direction
- Apply the tape on the position where the end surface of the guide is not viewed
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
from the holes on the tape.
- Align the end of the tape with the corner of the guide.
- Apply the tape so that a difference between the tape holes (difference in length
between the portions A and B in the figure below) is within 0.5 mm.
2. Clean the portion where the tape is to be applied by a cleaner.
3. Peel off approximately a half of the tape mount.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-166
MC-167
5. Apply the tape to the rear of the guide. 7. Check the distance between the rubber end to the tape end.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Apply carefully not to leave air bubbles between the tape and the guide. Measure a distance from the rubber end to the tape end. If the difference
(difference in width between the A and B portions in the figure below) is larger
than 2 mm, return to the step 1 and re-apply a new tape.
6. Apply the tape while keeping it by the finger.
u NOTES u
- Apply carefully not to leave air bubbles between the tape and the guide.
- Apply carefully not to leave wrinkles on the tape.
8. Fold the tape inside the guide.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-167
MC-168
9. Apply the tape to the rear of the guide. 11. Attach the screw.
u NOTE u
Apply carefully not to leave air bubbles between the tape and the guide.
12. Attach the screw.
10. Reinstall the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
13. Reinstall the antistatic brush assembly.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-168
MC-169
14. Carry out the operations in the steps 15 and 16 from the direction 17. Lay down the side-positioning conveyor unit in such an orientation as
indicated by the arrow in the figure below. illustrated below.
15. Secure the screw. 18. Carry out the operations in the step 19 from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure below.
16. Secure the screw.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-169
MC-170
19. Rotate the spur gear fully counterclockwise.
REFERENCE
By rotating the spur gear fully counterclockwise, the latch assembly restores to its
home position.
20. Reinstall the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-170
MC-171
8. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit 4. Remove the screws.
8.1 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit
{SP:INDEX}
8.1.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the lower light-collecting guide.
{MC:11.2_Lower Light-Collecting Guide}
2. Carry out the operations in the steps 3 and 4 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
5. Carry out the operations in the steps 6 and 7 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
3. Disconnect the connector.
6. Disconnect the connector.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-171
MC-172
7. Remove the screws. 9. Slightly lift the post-reading conveyor unit and flip it down forward.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to bring the upper portion of the post-reading conveyor unit
into contact with the ceiling of the housing (shadowed portion in the figure) when
slightly lifting the post-reading conveyor unit and flipping it down forward. The
guide of the post-reading conveyor unit might possibly deform or get damaged.
8. Carry out the operations in the steps 9 and 10 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
10. Slightly pull out the post-reading conveyor unit for removal.
u NOTE u
Pull out the post-reading conveyor unit carefully not to allow the retaining pin at
the tip of the unit to come off from the rail in the subscanning unit. Otherwise, the
sensor around the tip might get damaged.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-172
MC-173
8.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Raise up the upper portion of the post-reading conveyor unit, and
push it into the subscanning unit.
1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 and 3 from the direction
u NOTE u
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
- Exercise care not to bring the upper portion of the post-reading conveyor unit
into contact with the ceiling of the housing (shadowed portion in the figure)
when raising up the pos-treading conveyor unit. The guide of the post-reading
conveyor unit might possibly deform or get damaged.
- Push in the post-reading conveyor unit without lifting it. Otherwise, the upper
portion of the post-reading conveyor unit might come into contact with the
ceiling of the housing, resulting in the deformation or damage of the guide of
the post-reading conveyor unit.
2. Mount the pin for retaining the post-reading conveyor unit on the rail
inside the subscanning unit, and then push it horizontally.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to allow the retaining pin for the post-reading conveyor unit to
come off from the rail in the subscanning unit when pushing in the post-reading
conveyor unit.
REFERENCE
When the upper portion of the post-reading conveyor unit is pushed in, the pin
for retaining with the subscanning unit gets caught with the guide inside the
subscanning unit, to have the post-reading conveyor unit retained.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-173
MC-174
4. Carry out the operations of the steps 5 and 6 from the direction 7. Carry out the operations of the steps 8 and 9 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below. indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
5. Secure the screws. 8. Secure the screws.
6. Connect the connector. 9. Connect the connector.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-174
MC-175
10. Reinstall the lower light-collecting guide.
{MC:11.2_Lower Light-Collecting Guide}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-175
MC-176
8.2 Tensioner Assembly 8.3 Timing Belt
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. 1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the tensioner assembly. 2. Remove the timing belt.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
n Reinstallation Procedures l CHECK 1
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. Mount the timing belt along the route illustrated below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-176
MC-177
8.4 Spur Gears (Opposite Reference Side) 3. Remove the spur gears (opposite reference side).
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the bracket.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Before attaching the spur gears, make sure that the positions of the actuator and
sensor are such that they do not interfere with each other.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-177
MC-178
8.5 Grip Release HP Sensor (SD1) 8.6 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the spur gears (opposite reference side). 1. Remove the spur gears (opposite reference side).
{MC:8.4_Spur Gears (Opposite Reference Side)} {MC:8.4_Spur Gears (Opposite Reference Side)}
2. Remove the SD1. 2. Remove the grip arm (reference side).
n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
n Reinstallation Procedures
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that cam and spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-178
MC-179
8.7 Planetary Gear Assembly 3. Remove the planetary gear assembly.
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the timing belt.
{MC:8.3_Timing Belt}
2. Remove the bracket.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The planetary gear assembly should be attached with its orientation in mind.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-179
MC-180
8.8 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side) 8.9 Grip Release Motor (MD1)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the planetary gear assembly. 1. Remove the spur gears (opposite reference side).
{MC:8.7_Planetary Gear Assembly} {MC:8.4_Spur Gears (Opposite Reference Side)}
2. Remove the grip arm (opposite reference side). 2. Remove the MD1.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that cam and spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-180
MC-181
8.10 Post-Reading Conveyance IP Sensor (SD2) 8.11 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. 1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the SD2. 2. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
n Exploded View
l CHECK 1 For the exploded view of the shock-absorbing roller assembly, see the Service Parts
The SD2 should be attached with its orientation in mind. List.
{SP:06C_AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 3}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-181
MC-182
8.12 Spur Gears (Reference Side) 8.13 IP Transport Motor (MD2)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. 1. Remove the planetary gear assembly.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} {MC:8.7_Planetary Gear Assembly}
2. Put the post-reading conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below. 2. Remove the spur gears (reference side).
{MC:8.12_Spur Gears (Reference Side)}
3. Remove the MD2.
3. Remove the spur gears (reference side).
n Reinstallation Procedures
n Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-182
MC-183
8.14 Variable Guide Assembly n Exploded View
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the variable guide assembly.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-183
MC-184
n Reinstallation Procedures
1. Reinstall the variable guide assembly.
2. Reinstall the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-184
MC-185
8.15 Rubber Rollers (A and B) n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
n Locations of Rubber Rollers The rubber rollers (A) and (B) differ in length. Pay attention to their attachment
locations.
l CHECK 2
The tension coil springs differ in length depending on whether they are attached.
Make sure that the tension coil springs are attached at their correct positions.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).
{MC:8.6_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}
2. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).
{MC:8.8_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}
3. Remove the planetary gear assembly.
{MC:8.7_Planetary Gear Assembly}
4. Remove the rubber rollers (A and B).
{n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-185
MC-186
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)
{CHECK 1}
{CHECK 2}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-186
MC-187
8.16 Rubber Rollers (C and D) n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
n Locations of Rubber Rollers The rubber rollers (C) and (D) differ in length. Pay attention to their attachment
locations.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the variable guide assembly.
{MC:8.14_Variable Guide Assembly}
2. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).
{MC:8.6_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}
3. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).
{MC:8.8_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}
4. Remove the rubber rollers (C and D).
{n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-187
MC-188
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)
{CHECK 1}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-188
MC-189
8.17 Rubber Rollers (E and F) 4. Remove the rubber rollers (E and F).
{SP:INDEX}
n Locations of Rubber Rollers
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the spur gears.
{MC:8.12_Spur Gears (Reference Side)}
3. Put the post-reading conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The rubber rollers (E) and (F) differ in shape depending on where they are attached.
Pay attention to the rubber roller attachment locations.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-189
MC-190
8.18 Rubber Rollers (G and H) 4. Remove the rubber rollers (G and H).
{SP:INDEX}
n Locations of Rubber Rollers
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the spur gears.
{MC:8.12_Spur Gears (Reference Side)}
3. Put the post-reading conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The rubber rollers (G) and (H) differ in shape depending on where they are attached.
Pay attention to the rubber roller attachment locations.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-190
MC-191
8.19 Guide (A) 4. Remove the guide (A).
{SP:INDEX}
n Locations of Guides
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the SD2.
{MC:8.10_Post-Reading Conveyance IP Sensor (SD2)}
2. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
{MC:8.11_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly}
3. Remove the rubber rollers (A) and (C).
{MC:8.15_Rubber Rollers (A and B)}
{MC:8.16_Rubber Rollers (C and D)}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-191
MC-192
8.20 Guide (B)
{SP:INDEX}
n Locations of Guides
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the rubber rollers (E) and (G).
{MC:8.17_Rubber Rollers (E and F)}
{MC:8.18_Rubber Rollers (G and H)}
2. Remove the guide (B).
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-192
MC-193
8.21 Grip Shaft n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Removal Procedures
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).
{MC:8.6_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)} l CHECK 1
2. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side). Make sure that cam and spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.
{MC:8.8_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}
3. Remove the grip shaft.
l CHECK 2
Make sure that cam and spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-193
MC-194
9. Erasure Conveyor Unit 4. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
u NOTE u
When removing the erasure conveyor unit, take hold of the designated portions
9.1 Erasure Conveyor Unit to perform the procedures. If you grasp the rollers, guides, or other portions, they
{SP:INDEX} may be deformed.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Upper front light protect plate
- Middle right-hand side cover
- Upper left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the lamp case.
{MC:9.2_Lamp Case}
3. Open the guide.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-194
MC-195
n Reinstallation Procedures 2. Reinstall the erasure conveyor.
1. Open the guide. u NOTE u
When installing the erasure conveyor unit, take hold of the designated portions to
perform the procedures. If you grasp the rollers, guides, or other portions, they
may be deformed.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-195
MC-196
3. Close the guide.
4. Reinstall the lamp case.
{MC:9.2_Lamp Case}
5. Reinstall the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Upper front light protect plate
- Middle right-hand side cover
- Upper left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-196
MC-197
9.2 Lamp Case 1. Remove the lamp case.
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u
- When handling the lamp case, wear gloves so that the filter located on the
CAUTION bottom face of the lamp case is not soiled.
Do not touch the surface of lamp case (filter side) right after operation stopped. - Do not grasp the filter face when holding the lamp case. Otherwise, the shock
The high temperature may cause you burned. absorbing member might be peeled off.
- Place the lamp case with the filter face up. If the lamp case is placed with the
filter face down, the filter may be damaged.
INSTRUCTION
When handling the lamp case, hold the lamp case at the parts shown below.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Upper left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-197
MC-198
n Reinstallation Procedures 2. Reinstall the covers.
- Lower front cover
1. Reinstall the lamp case. - Upper left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-198
MC-199
9.3 Filter
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the lamp case.
{MC:9.2_Lamp Case}
2. Remove the filter.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-199
MC-200
9.4 IP Switchback Assembly 3. Remove the IP switchback assembly.
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
2. Close the guide.
n Exploded View
For the exploded view of the IP switchback assembly, see the Service Parts List.
{SP:07G_ERASURE CONVEYOR 7}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-200
MC-201
9.5 Post-Reading Conveyance Standby IP 9.6 Switchback Standby IP Sensor (SE2)
Sensor (SE1) {SP:INDEX}
{SP:INDEX} n Removal Procedures
n Removal Procedures 1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit. {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} 2. Remove the SE2.
2. Remove the SE1.
n Reinstallation Procedures
n Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
l CHECK 1 Attach the SE2 with its orientation in mind.
Attach the SE1 with its orientation in mind.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-201
MC-202
9.7 Erasure Side-Positioning Standby HP n Reinstallation Procedures
Sensor (SE4) u NOTE u
{SP:INDEX} Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
2. Move the latch assembly to the position illustrated below.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Before attaching the sensors, make sure that the actuator and sensor are in such a
position that they do not interfere with each other.
3. Remove the SE4.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-202
MC-203
9.8 Brackets n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Removal Procedures
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
l CHECK 1
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
Before attaching the brackets, make sure that the actuator and sensor are in such a
2. Remove the brackets. position that they do not interfere with each other.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-203
MC-204
9.9 Grip Release HP Sensor (SE5) 9.10 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the brackets. 1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.8_Brackets} {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the SE5. 2. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
{SP:07A_ERASURE CONVEYOR 1}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-204
MC-205
9.11 Branch Path Guide Driving Solenoid (SOLE1) 4. Remove the SOLE1.
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
2. Disconnect the connectors.
3. Remove the bracket.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the shaft of the solenoid is attached properly to the bracket.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-205
MC-206
9.12 Reflection Plate n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
n Removal Procedures When attaching the reflection plate guide, make sure that there is no gap between the
reflection plate guide and the guide.
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the reflection plate.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-206
MC-207
9.13 Timing Belt (A) 4. Remove the E-ring, and remove the timing belt (A) and the timing belt
wheels.
{SP:INDEX}
n Locations of Timing Belts
9.13.1 Removal Procedures
5. Remove the spacers and bearings.
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
2. Carry out the operations in the steps 3 to 5 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
3. Remove the bracket.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-207
MC-208
9.13.2 Reinstallation Procedures 4. Use the E-ring to reinstall the timing belt (A) and the timing belt
wheels.
1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 6 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
2. Reinstall the spacers and bearings.
3. Put the erasure conveyor unit in such an orientation as illustrated
below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-208
MC-209
5. Verify the attachment of the housing and the bearing from the bottom
of the erasure conveyer unit.
u NOTE u
Check to ensure that the portions indicated by the dotted lines in the figure below
have not come off from the side plate of the erasure conveyer unit.
6. Reinstall the bracket.
7. Reinstall the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-209
MC-210
9.14 Timing Belt (B) 3. Remove the screw.
{SP:INDEX}
n Locations of Timing Belts
9.14.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit. 4. Remove the tension coil spring.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
2. Carry out the operations in the steps 3 to 5 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-210
MC-211
5. Remove the timing belt (B). 9.14.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
REFERENCE
The timing belt (B) is mounted in the passage indicated in the figure below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-211
MC-212
9.15 Timing Belt (C) 3. Remove the E-ring, and remove the timing belt (C) and the timing belt
wheels.
{SP:INDEX}
n Locations of Timing Belts
9.15.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit. 4. Remove the spacers and bearings.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
2. Carry out the operations in the steps 3 and 4 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-212
MC-213
9.15.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Use the E-ring to reinstall the timing belt (C) and the timing belt
wheels.
1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 and 3 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
2. Reinstall the spacers and bearings.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-213
MC-214
4. Verify the attachment of the housing and the bearing from the bottom 9.16 Conveyance Mechanism
of the erasure conveyer unit.
(Opposite Reference Side Gears)
u NOTE u
{SP:INDEX}
Check to ensure that the portions indicated by the dotted lines in the figure below
have not come off from the side plate of the erasure conveyer unit.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the timing belt (B).
{MC:9.14_Timing Belt (B)}
2. Remove the spur gears.
5. Reinstall the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-214
MC-215
9.17 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side) 4. Remove the grip arm.
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the brackets.
{MC:9.8_Brackets}
2. Remove the timing belt (A).
{MC:9.13_Timing Belt (A)}
3. Remove the spur gears.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.
l CHECK 2
Make sure that the cam and spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-215
MC-216
9.18 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side) 5. Remove the E-ring and the KL clip, and remove the spacer and the
grip arm.
{SP:INDEX}
9.18.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the timing belt (C).
{MC:9.15_Timing Belt (C)}
2. Remove the conveyance mechanism (opposite reference side gears).
{MC:9.16_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gears)}
3. Carry out the operations in the steps 4 and 5 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
4. Remove the bracket.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-216
MC-217
9.18.2 Reinstallation Procedures 4. Reinstall the E-ring, spacer, and KL clip.
1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 5 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
2. Verify the attachment locations of the cam and the spur gear. 5. Reinstall the bracket.
3. Reinstall the grip arm. 6. Reinstall the conveyance mechanism (opposite reference side gears).
{MC:9.16_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gears)}
7. Reinstall the timing belt (C).
{MC:9.15_Timing Belt (C)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-217
MC-218
9.19 Tensioner Assembly 9.20 Guide (A)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Locations of Guides
1. Remove the timing belt (B).
{MC:9.14_Timing Belt (B)}
2. Remove the tensioner assembly.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Upper front light protect plate
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the guide (A).
{SP:07A_ERASURE CONVEYOR 1}
n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u n Reinstallation Procedures
The tensioner assembly is positioned by the tension coil spring. Attach the tension For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
coil spring before securing the tensioner assembly in place.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-218
MC-219
9.21 Guide (B) 5. Remove the guide (B).
{SP:INDEX}
n Locations of Guides
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the tensioner assembly.
{MC:9.19_Tensioner Assembly}
3. Remove the guide (A).
{MC:9.20_Guide (A)}
4. Put the erasure conveyor unit in such an orientation as illustrated
below.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-219
MC-220
9.22 Guide (C) 2. Remove the guide (C).
{SP:INDEX}
n Locations of Guides
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
{MC:9.10_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-220
MC-221
9.23 Latch Drive Unit 6. Rotate the spur gear of the latch drive unit to the position indicated by
the arrow.
{SP:INDEX}
9.23.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).
{MC:9.17_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}
2. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).
{MC:9.18_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}
3. Remove the guide pressure bracket.
{MC:9.36_Guide Pressure Bracket}
4. Carry out the operations of the steps 5 and 6 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
u NOTE u
When the spur gear is rotated, the latch assembly moves inward. Unless the
spur gear has moved to a specified position, the latch of the latch assembly might
get damaged when the latch drive unit is removed.
5. Release the clamp, and disconnect the connector and the screw.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-221
MC-222
7. Carry out the operations of the steps 8 and 9 from the direction 10. Carry out the operations of the step 11 from the direction indicated by
indicated by the arrow in the figure below. the arrow in the figure below.
11. Remove the latch drive unit.
8. Remove the screws.
9. Remove the screws.
n Exploded View
For the exploded view of the latch drive unit, see the Service Parts List.
{SP:07C_ERASURE CONVEYOR 3}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-222
MC-223
9.23.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Reinstall the latch drive unit.
1. Rotate the spur gear of the latch drive unit to the position indicated by
the arrow.
u NOTE u
When the spur gear is rotated, the latch assembly moves inward. Unless the
spur gear has moved to a specified position, the latch of the latch assembly might
get damaged when the latch drive unit is removed.
2. Carry out the operations in the steps 3 to 5 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-223
MC-224
4. Rotate the spur gear of the latch drive unit fully counterclockwise. 6. Carry out the operations of the steps 7 and 8 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
7. Attach the screws.
5. Push in the latch drive unit to its retained position.
8. Attach the screws.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-224
MC-225
9. Carry out the operations in the step 10 from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure below.
10. Connect the connector and the screw, and secure the clamp.
11. Reinstall the guide pressure bracket.
{MC:9.36_Guide Pressure Bracket}
12. Reinstall the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).
{MC:9.18_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}
13. Reinstall the grip mechanism (reference side).
{MC:9.17_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-225
MC-226
9.24 Latch Assembly (Reference Side) 9.25 IP Transport Motor (ME1)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side). 1. Remove the conveyance mechanism (opposite reference side gears).
{MC:9.17_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)} {MC:9.16_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gears)}
2. Remove the latch assembly.
2. Remove the ME1 assembly.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
3. Remove the ME1.
{SP:07A_ERASURE CONVEYOR 1}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-226
MC-227
9.26 Side-Positioning Motor (ME2) 9.27 Grip Release Motor (ME3)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the latch drive unit. 1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).
{MC:9.23_Latch Drive Unit} {MC:9.17_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}
2. Remove the ME2 assembly. 2. Remove the ME2.
{MC:9.26_Side-Positioning Motor (ME2)}
3. Remove the ME3.
3. Remove the ME2.
{SP:07C_ERASURE CONVEYOR 3} n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-227
MC-228
9.28 Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, and F) n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
n Locations of Rubber Rollers The tension coil springs differ in length depending on where they are attached. Make
sure that the tension coil springs are attached at their correct positions.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the latch drive unit.
{MC:9.23_Latch Drive Unit}
2. Remove the rubber rollers (A, B, C, D, E, and F).
{n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)} l CHECK 2
The rubber rollers (D, E, and F) differ in shape depending on where they are attached.
Make sure that the rubber rollers (D, E, and F) are attached at their correct positions.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-228
MC-229
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)
{CHECK 1}
{CHECK 2}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-229
MC-230
9.29 Rubber Rollers (G and H) 3. Remove the rubber rollers (G and H).
{SP:INDEX}
n Locations of Rubber Rollers
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the SE2.
{MC:9.6_Switchback Standby IP Sensor (SE2)}
2. Remove the timing belt (B).
{MC:9.14_Timing Belt (B)}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The tension coil springs differ in length depending on where they are attached.
Make sure that the tension coil springs are attached at their correct positions.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-230
MC-231
9.30 Rubber Rollers (I and J) 3. Remove the rubber rollers (I and J).
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}
n Locations of Rubber Rollers
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the SOLE1.
{MC:9.11_Branch Path Guide Driving Solenoid (SOLE1)}
2. Remove the timing belt (B).
{MC:9.14_Timing Belt (B)}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-231
MC-232
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Align the hole of the side plate and the housing together before attaching the rubber
roller.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-232
MC-233
9.31 Guide (D) 5. Remove the screw.
{SP:INDEX}
n Locations of Guides
9.31.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the ME1.
{MC:9.25_IP Transport Motor (ME1)}
6. Remove the screws.
2. Remove the ME3.
{MC:9.27_Grip Release Motor (ME3)}
3. Remove the latch assembly (reference side).
{MC:9.24_Latch Assembly (Reference Side)}
4. Carry out the operations of the steps 5 and 6 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-233
MC-234
7. Carry out the operations of the steps 8 and 9 from the direction 9. Remove the guide while keeping clear of the half punches inside the
indicated by the arrow in the figure below. side plate.
u NOTE u
Remove the guide carefully not to allow the guide to tilt laterally. If the guide is
tilted, it might get caught with the side plate and cannot be removed.
8. Raise the rear of the guide.
REFERENCE
Shown below is how to remove the guide when viewed from the side face of the
machine.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-234
MC-235
9.31.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Insert the tip of the guide between the rods of the rubber rollers, and
lead the tip of the guide onto the half punch in the side plate.
1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 and 3 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
2. Insert the guide while keeping clear of the half punches in the side
plate.
u NOTE u
Insert the guide carefully not to allow the guide to tilt laterally. If the guide is tilted,
it might get caught with the side plate and cannot be installed.
REFERENCE
Shown below is how to reinstall the guide when viewed from the side face of the machine.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-235
MC-236
4. Carry out the operations in the step 5 from the direction indicated by 6. Carry out the operations of the steps 7 and 8 from the direction
the arrow in the figure below. indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
5. Check to ensure that the tip of the guide is mounted on the half punch.
u NOTE u 7. Attach the screw.
If the tip of the guide is not mounted on the half punch in the side plate, it might
cause the IP to get jammed.
8. Attach the screws.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-236
MC-237
9. Reinstall the latch assembly (reference side).
{MC:9.24_Latch Assembly (Reference Side)}
10. Reinstall the ME3.
{MC:9.27_Grip Release Motor (ME3)}
11. Reinstall the ME1.
{MC:9.25_IP Transport Motor (ME1)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-237
MC-238
9.32 Guide (E) 5. Remove the screws.
{SP:INDEX}
n Locations of Guides
9.32.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the ME1.
{MC:9.25_IP Transport Motor (ME1)}
6. Remove the screws.
2. Remove the ME3.
{MC:9.27_Grip Release Motor (ME3)}
3. Remove the latch assembly (reference side).
{MC:9.24_Latch Assembly (Reference Side)}
4. Carry out the operations of the steps 5 and 6 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
7. Carry out the operations of the steps 8 and 9 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-238
MC-239
8. Raise the rear of the guide and move it backward. 9. Remove the guide while keeping clear of the half punches inside the
side plate.
u NOTE u
Move the guide backward carefully not to allow the guide to tilt laterally. If the
u NOTE u
guide is tilted, it might get caught with the side plate and cannot be removed. Remove the guide carefully not to allow the guide to tilt laterally. If the guide is
tilted, it might get caught with the side plate and cannot be removed.
REFERENCE
Shown below is how to remove the guide when viewed from the side face of the
machine.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-239
MC-240
9.32.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Insert the tip of the guide between the rods of the rubber rollers and
lower the rear of the guide.
1. Insert the guide while keeping clear of the half punches, and lead the
tip of the guide onto the half punch in the side plate. u NOTE u
u NOTE u Move the guide carefully not to allow the guide to tilt laterally. If the guide is tilted,
it might get caught with the side plate and cannot be installed.
Insert the guide carefully not to allow the guide to tilt laterally. If the guide is tilted,
it might get caught with the side plate and cannot be installed.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-240
MC-241
3. Carry out the operations in the steps 4 and 5 from the direction 6. Reinstall the latch assembly (reference side).
indicated by the arrow in the figure below. {MC:9.24_Latch Assembly (Reference Side)}
7. Reinstall the ME3.
{MC:9.27_Grip Release Motor (ME3)}
8. Reinstall the ME1.
{MC:9.25_IP Transport Motor (ME1)}
4. Attach the screws.
5. Attach the screws.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-241
MC-242
9.33 Grip Shaft n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Removal Procedures n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side). l CHECK 1
{MC:9.17_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}
Make sure that the cam and spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.
2. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).
{MC:9.18_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}
3. Remove the grip shaft.
l CHECK 2
Make sure that the cam and spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-242
MC-243
9.34 Guide (F) 3. Remove the guide (F).
{SP:INDEX}
n Locations of Guides
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the ME3.
{MC:9.27_Grip Release Motor (ME3)}
2. Remove the rubber rollers (A and B).
{MC:9.28_Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, and F)}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-243
MC-244
9.35 Branch Path Changeover Guide 5. Remove the guide.
{SP:INDEX}
n Locations of Guides
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the SE2.
{MC:9.6_Switchback Standby IP Sensor (SE2)}
2. Remove the SOLE1.
{MC:9.11_Branch Path Guide Driving Solenoid (SOLE1)}
3. Remove the tensioner assembly.
{MC:9.19_Tensioner Assembly}
4. Remove the guide (B).
{MC:9.21_Guide (B)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-244
MC-245
6. Remove the shaft. 8. Remove the branch path changeover guide.
7. Remove the shaft.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-245
MC-246
n Reinstallation Procedures REFERENCE
With reference to the illustration below, install the branch path changeover guide and
u NOTE u bearings.
When the branch path changeover guide is of an old type, apply tapes.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-246
MC-247
9.36 Guide Pressure Bracket
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the brackets.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-247
MC-248
9.37 Branch Path Changeover Guide Driving 4. Remove the bracket.
Arm (Right)
{SP:INDEX}
9.37.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
2. Carry out the operations in the steps 3 to 9 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
5. Remove the spring.
3. Disconnect the connectors.
6. Release the clamp.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-248
MC-249
7. Remove the screws. 9.37.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
8. Remove the main body of the solenoid, and then remove the shaft of
the solenoid.
9. Remove the branch path changeover guide driving arm (right).
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-249
MC-250
9.38 Branch Path Changeover Guide Driving 4. Remove the tension coil spring.
Arm (Left)
{SP:INDEX}
9.38.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
2. Carry out the operations in the steps 3 to 8 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
5. Remove the timing belt (B).
3. Remove the retaining screw of the tensioner.
u NOTE u
Tension of the timing belt is defined by the tension coil spring. When attaching
the retaining screw of the tensioner, do not apply excessive force to the tensioner
by holding it or by other means.
REFERENCE
The timing belt (B) is mounted in the passage indicated in the figure below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-250
MC-251
6. Remove the tension coil spring. 9.38.2 Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
When reversing the step 3, be sure to follow the note to attach the retaining screw.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
7. Remove the KL clip. Remove the bearing, spur gear, bearing and
tensioner assembly.
8. Remove the branch path changeover guide driving arm (left).
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-251
MC-252
9.39 Tension Coil Spring 5. Remove the bracket.
{SP:INDEX}
9.39.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the timing belt (B).
{MC:9.14_Timing Belt (B)}
2. Remove the timing belt (C).
{MC:9.15_Timing Belt (C)}
3. Carry out the operations in the steps 4 to 7 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
6. Remove the E-ring and the KL clip, and remove the spacer and the
grip arm.
4. Remove the spur gears and bearing.
7. Remove the tension coil spring.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-252
MC-253
9.39.2 Reinstallation Procedures 4. Reinstall the E-ring, spacer, and KL clip.
1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 7 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
5. Reinstall the bracket.
2. Attach the tension coil spring.
3. Reinstall the grip arm.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-253
MC-254
6. Attach the spur gear. 8. After the spur gear is pushed in with the rod end held, check to ensure
that the latch of the spur gear gets caught in the groove of the rod and
u NOTE u does not come off.
Attach the spur gear in the orientation where the engraving “B” is visible.
9. Reinstall the timing belt (C).
7. Attach the bearing and the spur gear.
{MC:9.15_Timing Belt (C)}
u NOTE u
Pay attention to the orientation of attaching the bearing. 10. Reinstall the timing belt (B).
{MC:9.14_Timing Belt (B)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-254
MC-255
10. Scanning Optics Unit 10.1 Removal Procedures
{SP:INDEX} 1. Remove the covers.
- Lower right-hand side cover
WARNING - Lower left-hand side cover
The scanning optics unit should not be removed or installed by other than a {MC:3.1_Covers}
service engineer who has been trained to do so.
2. Remove the scanning optics unit.
CAUTION
When servicing the scanning optics unit, be sure to wear an anti-static
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
u INSTRUCTION u
Do not remove the top cover of the scanning optics unit.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-255
MC-256
10.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. While pressing the scanning optics unit in the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure, retain the subscanning unit.
1. Mount the scanning optics unit on the subscanning unit.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-256
MC-257
REFERENCE 3. Connect the connectors.
By pressing the two positioning brackets and the knob of the scanning optics
unit against the frame of the subscanning unit, the scanning optics unit can be
installed in place.
4. Check to ensure that the screws once removed are snugly retained.
5. Reinstall the covers.
- Lower right-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
6. Carry out the Check/Adjustment Procedures.
{MC:10.3_Check/Adjustment Procedures}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-257
MC-258
10.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures 4. Check the following points.
u INSTRUCTION u l The RU normally enters the READY state.
When the scanning optics unit is replaced with a new one, it is necessary to install the
machine-specific data bundled therewith.
Take the following steps to install the machine-specific data.
1. Set a machine-specific data into the drive.
2. Open the RU PC-TOOL window and select the relevant RU from [LIST
OF EXISTING RU].
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.
{MC:19._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
3. Install the machine-specific data for the scanning optics unit.
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU IP ADDR
RESTORE
SCN OPTICAL DATA
BACKUP RESTORE
EXECUTE
#1
ALL RUs SETTING
[Select] #2
[Click]
RU PC-TOOL
Completed.
OK
#3
[Click]
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-258
MC-259
11. Light-Collecting Unit 2. Disconnect the connectors.
u NOTE u
Hold the part shown below and keep the connector vertical to the board when
11.1 Upper Light-Collecting Guide removing the connector(CN2).
{SP:INDEX} If holding other places, the cable may be damaged.
CAUTION
- Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you
are wearing gloves.
- Always confirm the S-value according to the “Check/Adjustment Procedures”
after the light-collecting guide and PMT board are replaced. Confirm the
S-value without sensitivity correction or shading sensitivity correction. If the
S-value exhibits an abnormal value (2000 or larger with a dose of 1 mR) or the
read image is whitened , a wrong combination of the light-collecting guide
and the PMT board might have been made. Check the part Nos. of the light-
collecting guide and the PMT board.
- When either Light-Collecting Guide or PMT board was replaced, machine-
specific data installation and LED data initialization must be performed.
u INSTRUCTION u
When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves.
Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-259
MC-260
3. Remove the screws. 4. Remove the upper light-collecting guide.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-260
MC-261
Reinstallation Procedures 2. Secure the upper light-collecting guide in place.
1. Reinstall the upper light-collecting guide.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-261
MC-262
3. Connect the connectors. Check/Adjustment Procedures
u NOTE u u INSTRUCTION u
The CN2 should be attached at right angles relative to the board. If it is attached When the upper light-collecting guide is replaced with a new one, it is necessary to
aslant, the connector located on the board might be damaged. install the machine-specific data bundled therewith and to initialize the LED data.
Take the following steps to install the machine-specific data and initialize the LED data.
1. Set a machine-specific data into the drive.
2. Open the RU PC-TOOL window and select the relevant RU from [LIST
OF EXISTING RU].
3. Install the machine-specific data.
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU IP ADDR
RESTORE
SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA(FRONT ONLY)
BACKUP RESTORE
EXECUTE
#1
ALL RUs SETTING
[Select] #2
[Click]
RU PC-TOOL
4. Reinstall the post-reading conveyor unit. Completed.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}
OK
#3
[Click]
4. Initialize the LED data.
{MU:5.3 [5-6-4]_Light collecting parts replacement}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-262
MC-263
5. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.
{MC:19._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-263
MC-264
11.2 Lower Light-Collecting Guide Removal Procedures
{SP:INDEX} 1. Remove the covers.
CAUTION - Lower front cover
- Lower front light protect plate
- Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you - Lower right-hand side cover
are wearing gloves.
- Lower left-hand side cover
- Always confirm the S-value according to the “Check/Adjustment Procedures”
after the light-collecting guide and PMR board are replaced. Confirm the {MC:3.1_Covers}
S-value without sensitivity correction or shading sensitivity correction. If the 2. Remove the retaining member.
S-value exhibits an abnormal value (2000 or larger with a dose of 1 mR) or
the read image is whitened, a wrong combination of the light-collecting guide
and the PMR board might have been made. Check the part No. of the light-
collecting guide and the PMR board.
- When either Light-Collecting Guide or PMR board was replaced, machine-
specific data installation and LED data initialization must be performed.
u INSTRUCTION u
When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-264
MC-265
3. Disconnect the connectors. 4. Remove the screws.
u NOTE u
Hold the part shown below and keep the connector vertical to the board when
removing the connector(CN2).
If holding other places, the cable may be damaged.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-265
MC-266
5. Remove the lower light-collecting guide. Reinstallation Procedures
1. Reinstall the lower light-collecting guide.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-266
MC-267
2. Secure the lower light-collecting guide in place. 3. Connect the connectors.
u NOTE u
The CN2 should be attached at right angles relative to the board. If it is attached
aslant, the connector located on the board might be damaged.
4. Reinstall the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Lower front light protect plate
- Lower right-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-267
MC-268
Check/Adjustment Procedures 5. Check the following points.
u INSTRUCTION u l The RU normally enters the READY state.
When the lower light-collecting guide is replaced with a new one, it is necessary to
install the machine-specific data bundled therewith and to initialize the LED data.
Take the following steps to install the machine-specific data and initialize the LED data.
1. Set a machine-specific data into the drive.
2. Open the RU PC-TOOL window and select the relevant RU from [LIST
OF EXISTING RU].
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.
{MC:19._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
3. Install the machine-specific data.
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU IP ADDR
RESTORE
SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA(REAR ONLY)
BACKUP RESTORE
EXECUTE
ALL RUs SETTING
#1
[Select] #2
[Click]
RU PC-TOOL
Completed.
OK
#3
[Click]
4. Initialize the LED data.
{MU:5.3 [5-6-4]_Light collecting parts replacement}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-268
MC-269
11.3 PMT27B Board 2. Remove the PMT27B board together with the shield member.
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u
CAUTION Hold the part shown below and keep the connector vertical to the board when
removing the connector(CN2).
- When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static If holding other places, the cable may be damaged.
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
- Always confirm the S-value according to the “ Check/Adjustment
Procedures” in “11.1 Upper Light-Collecting Guide” after the light-collecting
guide and PMT board are replaced. Confirm the S-value without sensitivity
correction or shading sensitivity correction. If the S-value exhibits an
abnormal value (2000 or larger with a dose of 1 mR) or the read image is
whitened, a wrong combination of the light-collecting guide and the PMT
board might have been made. Check the part No. of the light-collecting guide
and the PMT board.
- When either Light-Collecting Guide or PMT board was replaced, machine-
specific data installation and LED data initialization must be performed.
Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Lower right-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-269
MC-270
3. Remove the PMT27B board. Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Turn ON the power of the RU.
2. Perform the procedures of “ Check/Adjustment Procedures” in “11.1
Upper Light-Collecting Guide”.
{MC:11.1_Upper Light-Collecting Guide_ Check/Adjustment Procedures}
Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
To attach the PMT27B board together with the shield member, mount it so that the
socket of the PMT27B board and the connecting portion of the light-collecting guide
assembly are parallel to each other.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-270
MC-271
11.4 PMR27B Board 2. Remove the PMR27B board together with the shield member.
{SP:INDEX} u NOTES u
CAUTION Hold the part shown below and keep the connector vertical to the board when
removing the connector(CN2).
- When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static If holding other places, the cable may be damaged.
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
- Always confirm the S-value according to the “ Check/Adjustment
Procedures” in “11.2 Lower Light-Collecting Guide” after the light-collecting
guide and PMR board are replaced. Confirm the S-value without sensitivity
correction or shading sensitivity correction. If the S-value exhibits an
abnormal value (2000 or larger with a dose of 1 mR) or the read image is
whitened, a wrong combination of the light-collecting guide and the PMR
board might have been made. Check the part No. of the light-collecting guide
and the PMR board.
- When either Light-Collecting Guide or PMR board was replaced, machine-
specific data installation and LED data initialization must be performed.
Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Lower front light protect plate
{MC:3.1_Covers}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-271
MC-272
3. Remove the PMR27B board. Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Turn ON the power of the RU.
2. Perform the procedures of “ Check/Adjustment Procedures” in “11.2
Lower Light-Collecting Guide”.
{MC:11.2_Lower Light-Collecting Guide_ Check/Adjustment Procedures}
■ Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
To attach the PMR27B board together with the shield member, mount it so that the
socket of the PMR27B board and the connecting portion of the light-collecting guide
assembly are parallel to each other.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-272
MC-273
12. Subscanning Unit 4. Disconnect the connectors.
12.1 Subscanning Unit
{SP:INDEX}
NOTE
Because the subscanning unit is heavy, pay attention to the following points when
removing, installing, and moving it.
- Before proceeding with the procedures, secure sufficient working space around the
machine.
- While assuming a comfortable posture, lift or hold up the unit.
- Two persons should cooperate with each other to perform the procedures.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the upper light-collecting guide.
{MC:11.1_Upper Light-Collecting Guide}
3. Remove the scanning optics unit.
{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-273
MC-274
5. Pull out the subscanning unit. 6. Remove the subscanning unit.
CAUTION CAUTION
- Do not pull out the subscanning unit too much. The subscanning unit might When putting down the subscanning unit in another place, use care not to get
topple down and be damaged. your feet pinched by the side plate.
- Do not remove the screws on the bracket to determine the fixing position of
subscanning unit.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-274
MC-275
n Reinstallation Procedures 2. Secure the subscanning unit in place.
1. Reinstall the subscanning unit.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-275
MC-276
3. Connect the connectors. 4. Reinstall the scanning optics unit.
{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}
5. Reinstall the upper light-collecting guide.
{MC:11.1_Upper Light-Collecting Guide}
6. Reinstall the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-276
MC-277
12.2 Transparent Cover 12.3 Antistatic Member
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cover. 1. Remove the transparent cover.
- Lower right-hand side cover {MC:12.2_Transparent Cover}
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the antistatic member.
2. Remove the transparent cover. {SP:10G_SUB SCANNING UNIT 7}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-277
MC-278
12.4 SUS Belt n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} NOTE
n Removal Procedures Use care not to confuse the front and back of the SUS belt when attaching it.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
1. Remove the transparent cover.
{MC:12.2_Transparent Cover}
2. Remove the SUS belt. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Manually rotate the driving shaft grip roller (lower) and driven shaft grip roller (lower)
to ensure that the SUS belt does not come off.
l CHECK 2
Before attaching the SUS belt, clean the driving shaft grip roller (lower) and driven
shaft grip roller (lower) by use of ethanol.
REFERENCE
The SUS belt and the tension coil spring are attached in the positional relation
shown below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-278
MC-279
12.5 Kapton® Belt n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} NOTE
n Removal Procedures - Use care not to damage the Kapton® belt.
- Clean the Kapton® belt with a moistened cloth before attaching it.
1. Remove the cover. - Hook the Kapton® belt to the pulley before attaching the Kapton® belt.
- Lower left-hand side cover
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the Kapton® belt.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
NOTE
After removing the tension coil spring, support the tensioner by hand. Otherwise, l CHECK 1
the tensioner might incline by its own weight, thereby damaging the Kapton® belt. - Make sure that the Kapton® belt is mounted with its date indicating side up, so that
the arrow mark faces the side plate.
- Manually rotate the flywheel to verify that the Kapton® belt does not come off.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-279
MC-280
12.6 Tensioner (Right-Hand Side) 12.7 Tensioner (Left-Hand Side)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures
NOTE NOTE
When removing the tensioner, be sure to remove the SUS belt as well. If you try to When removing the tensioner, be sure to remove the Kapton® belt as well. If you try to
remove the tensioner with the SUS belt attached, the SUS belt may be damaged. remove the tensioner with the Kapton® attached, the Kapton® belt may be damaged.
1. Remove the SUS belt. 1. Remove the Kapton® belt.
{MC:12.4_SUS Belt} {MC:12.5_Kapton® Belt}
2. Remove the tensioner. 2. Remove the tensioner.
{SP:10A_SUB SCANNING UNIT 1} {SP:10B_SUB SCANNING UNIT 2}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-280
MC-281
12.8 Flywheel n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} NOTE
n Removal Procedures - Use care not to damage the surface in contact with the Kapton® belt.
- Before reinstalling the flywheel, clean the Kapton® belt contacting surface with
1. Remove the Kapton® belt. ethanol.
{MC:12.5_Kapton® Belt}
2. Remove the flywheel.
NOTE
Insert an Allen wrench into the hole of the driving shaft to secure the shaft in
place, and then remove the nut.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-281
MC-282
12.9 Sub Scanning Motor (MZ1) 3. Remove the 5PM motor.
{SP:INDEX}
NOTES
- When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
- Do not give any shock to the motor shaft.
n Removal Procedures (5PM Motor)
1. Remove the Kapton® belt. NOTE
{MC:12.5_Kapton® Belt} When you replace the pulley, verify the allowable value of the subscan length in
accordance with “■Check/Adjustment Procedure”.
2. Remove the 5PM motor assembly. If the allowable value of the subscan length is not within the predefined range,
{CHECK} adjust the subscan speed of the MUTL.
n Reinstallation Procedures (5PM Motor)
u INSTRUCTION u
Before fixing the hexagon-headed setscrew (WP4x6) of the pulley, insert it to the
position where it touches the edge of the D-cut flat surface of the shaft.
FRDH3D01.EPS
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-282
MC-283
n Removal Procedures (CRD5107P board) n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the CRD5107P board. If the MZ1 is replaced, perform the following check procedures.
- Preparation for output image (exposure)
- Subscan length check
l Preparation for output image (exposure)
1. Perform primary erasure on the IP to be used for subscan length
check.
{Instruction}
NOTE
- The IP type to be used should be the VI type.
- Make sure that no important image data has been exposed on the IP to be
used.
2. Place a steel rule and expose it at 1 mR.
n Reinstallation Procedures (CRD5107P board)
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
REFERENCE
If the IP cannot be exposed at 1 mR, it should be exposed at 1 mR, with
reference to the following exposure conditions.
Note, however, that those conditions are for standard IP setup reference.
Distance: 1.8m
Voltage: 80kV
Amperage: 50mA
Time: 0.013 sec
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-283
MC-284
l Subscan length check 12.10 Cleaning Brush Assembly
1. Output the image exposed at 1 mR. {SP:INDEX}
CL exposure menu selection screen:
“TEST”, “Image Format” or “Image Format-2”, “SINGLE” n Removal Procedures
{Instruction}
1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
2. Calculate the length (theoretical value) of the steel rule on the film. {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the cleaning brush assembly.
3. Calculate the allowable value of the subscan length.
n Exploded View
For the exploded view of the cleaning brush assembly, see the Service Parts List.
{SP:10B_SUB SCANNING UNIT 2}
4. Measure the length of the steel rule (actual measurement) of the
calipers on the output film, and verify that it is within the allowable n Reinstallation Procedures
value calculated.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
149.6 mm Actual measurement 151.4 mm
NOTE
If the subscan length is beyond the allowable value, confirm that the screw of the pulley is
not loosed and that the belt is not come off from the pulley, and perform the exposure again.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-284
MC-285
12.11 Driving-Side Grip Release HP Sensor (SZ2) 3. Remove the SZ2 and SZ3.
and Driven-Side Grip Release HP Sensor (SZ3)
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cover.
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Disconnect the connectors.
n Reinstallation Procedures
NOTE
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-285
MC-286
12.12 IP Stopper HP Sensor (SZ5) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} NOTE
n Removal Procedures Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
1. Remove the cover.
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the shock-absorbing rubbers.
{MC:12.30_Shock-Absorbing Rubbers}
3. Remove the SZ5.
NOTE For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
When removing or installing the SZ5, make sure that the actuator is in such a
position that it does not interfere with the SZ5. Otherwise, the SZ5 might be
damaged.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-286
MC-287
12.13 Grip Drive Motor (MZ2) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Removal Procedures n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the scanning optics unit. l CHECK 1
{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit} The threaded holes for mounting the MZ2 assembly are adjacent to the threaded
holes for mounting the sensor bracket.
2. Remove the SZ2 and SZ3. With reference to the illustration below, install the grip drive motor assembly as
{MC:12.11_Driving-Side Grip Release HP Sensor (SZ2) and Driven-Side Grip appropriate.
Release HP Sensor (SZ3)}
3. Remove the grip drive motor assembly.
{CHECK 2}
NOTE
The upper light-collecting guide is located below the MZ2 assembly. Use care
not to drop the MZ2 assembly.
4. Remove the MZ2.
{SP:10D_SUB SCANNING UNIT 4}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-287
MC-288
l CHECK 2
Make sure that the bearings of the driven shaft and driving shaft grip release arms are
in contact with the outer periphery of the cam.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-288
MC-289
12.14 Dust Removal Motor (MZ3) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} u INSTRUCTION u
n Removal Procedures Align the positions of the slit (large), slit (small), and the D-cut flat surface of the
light-collecting shaft as appropriate.
1. Remove the flywheel.
{MC:12.8_Flywheel}
2. Remove the MZ3 assembly.
{CHECK 1}
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
3. Remove the MZ3.
{SP:10F_SUB SCANNING UNIT 6}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-289
MC-290
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
1. Check the mounting orientations for the D-cut flat surface of the
light-collecting shaft, gear (large), and gear (small).
2. Check to see whether the engagement between the spur gear (large)
and the worm gear of the MZ3 has some backlash.
GOOD: There should be some backlash.
NO GOOD: There is no backlash (the gear (large) and the worm gear of the
MZ3 move).
u INSTRUCTION u
If the engagement between the gears is “NO GOOD,” loosen the screws that
retain the MZ3 assembly, and adjust the engagement as appropriate.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-290
MC-291
12.15 IP Stopper Drive Motor (MZ4) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Removal Procedures
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the cleaning brush assembly.
l CHECK 1
{MC:12.10_Cleaning Brush Assembly}
Make sure that the bearing of the MZ4 assembly is fitted into the slot of the stopper.
2. Remove the SZ5.
{MC:12.12_IP Stopper HP Sensor (SZ5)}
3. Disconnect the connector and remove the screws.
l CHECK 2
Make sure that the bracket of the MZ4 assembly is hooked into the side plate of the
subscanning unit.
4. Remove the MZ4 assembly.
5. Remove the MZ4.
{SP:10C_SUB SCANNING UNIT 3}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-291
MC-292
12.16 Driving Shaft Grip Release Arm 3. Remove the driving shaft grip release arm.
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the flywheel.
{MC:12.8_Flywheel}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-292
MC-293
n Exploded View n Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
l
Make sure that the bearing of the driving shaft grip release arm is in contact with the
outer periphery of the cam.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
CHECK 2
l
Make sure that there is no gap between the bracket and fork.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-293
MC-294
12.17 Driven Shaft Grip Release Arm and IP 3. Remove the driven shaft grip release arm.
Stopper {CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the transparent cover.
{MC:12.2_Transparent Cover}
2. Remove the MZ4.
{MC:12.15_IP Stopper Drive Motor (MZ4)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-294
MC-295
n Exploded View n Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
l
Make sure that the bearing of the driven shaft grip release arm is in contact with the
outer periphery of the cam.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
CHECK 2
l
Make sure that there is no gap between the bracket and fork.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-295
MC-296
12.18 Spur Gears n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} CHECK 1
l
n Removal Procedures Refer to the illustration below when attaching the spur gears.
1. Remove the MZ3.
{MC:12.14_Dust Removal Motor (MZ3)}
2. Remove the spur gears.
CHECK 2
l
Installation should be done in the positions illustrated below.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-296
MC-297
12.19 Dust Removal HP Sensor (SZ4)
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the spur gears.
{MC:12.18_Spur Gears}
2. Remove the SZ4.
n Reinstallation Procedures
NOTE
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-297
MC-298
12.20 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Removal Procedures n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the transparent cover. CHECK 1
l
{MC:12.2_Transparent Cover} Refer to the illustration below when attaching the driven shaft grip roller (upper).
2. Remove the cleaning brush assembly.
{MC:12.10_Cleaning Brush Assembly}
3. Remove the shock-absorbing rubbers.
{MC:12.30_Shock-Absorbing Rubbers}
4. Remove the driven shaft grip roller (upper).
CHECK 2
l
Make sure that that the hook is securely fitted into the slots of the side plate.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-298
MC-299
12.21 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Removal Procedures n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the upper light-collecting guide. CHECK 1
l
{MC:11.1_Upper Light-Collecting Guide} Refer to the illustration below when attaching the driving shaft grip roller (upper).
2. Remove the transparent cover.
{MC:12.2_Transparent Cover}
3. Remove the MZ2.
{MC:12.13_Grip Drive Motor (MZ2)}
4. Remove the driving shaft grip roller (upper).
CHECK 2
l
To attach the hook, securely fit it into the slots of the side plate.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-299
MC-300
12.22 Antistatic Member n Check/Adjustment Procedures
If image abnormalities such as streaks are observed in the IP conveyance direction,
{SP:INDEX}
moderate warpage of the antistatic member.
n Removal Procedures NOTE
Be sure to check on a horizontal working table.
1. Remove the flywheel.
{MC:12.8_Flywheel} 1. Place the antistatic member on the working table with its surface
2. Remove the driven shaft grip roller (upper). facing upward, and check clearances at both ends and at the center.
{MC:12.20_Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)} Check that:
- there is no clearance at both ends;
3. Remove the antistatic member. - there is a clearance of 1 to 2 mm at the center.
2. If the clearance at the center is not 1 to 2 mm, hold both ends of the
antistatic member, and apply force to the center for adjustment.
NOTE
Slowly apply force not to break the antistatic member.
3. Check warpage of the antistatic member. If the clearance at the center
n Reinstallation Procedures is not 1 to 2 mm, repeat the procedure 2.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. 4. Check image/conveyance.
{MC:19._Image/Conveyance Checks}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-300
MC-301
12.23 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Removal Procedures n Check
1. Remove the antistatic member. CHECK 1
l
{MC:12.22_Antistatic Member} Make sure that the cable is attached along the bracket, side by side.
2. Remove the SZ1.
NOTES
- Use care so that the flat cable is not damaged by the side plate, and so forth.
- Exercise care not to crease the flat cable.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-301
MC-302
12.24 Light-Collecting Mirror 3. Remove the light-collecting mirror.
{SP:INDEX} REFERENCE
u INSTRUCTION u When removing the light-collecting mirror, rotate the light-collecting shaft until the
light-collecting mirror retaining screws are easily accessible.
When handling the light-collecting mirror, pay attention to the following points.
- Wear gloves.
However, never touch the reflection surface of the light-collecting mirror even when
you are wearing the gloves.
- Wear a mask so that saliva does not come into contact with the light collecting
mirror.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the spur gears.
{MC:12.18_Spur Gears}
2. Remove the SZ1.
{MC:12.23_IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1)}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-302
MC-303
12.25 Light-Collecting Shaft n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Removal Procedures
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the light-collecting mirror.
CHECK 1
l
{MC:12.24_Light-Collecting Mirror}
Make sure that the guide is attached in the orientation as illustrated below.
2. Remove the light-collecting shaft.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-303
MC-304
12.26 Glass Guide 4. Shift the operation direction from the back of the machine to the front
of the machine.
{SP:INDEX}
u INSTRUCTIONS u 5. Move the bracket.
- If the glass guide is soiled, clean it by use of ethanol.
- Wear gloves when handling the glass guide.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the scanning optics unit.
{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}
2. Remove the light-collecting mirror.
{MC:12.24_Light-Collecting Mirror}
3. Loosen the special screw.
u INSTRUCTION u
The glass guide retaining bracket is secured by special screws. To attach
or remove them, use the special tool designed for them.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-304
MC-305
6. Remove the glass guide. n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
l
When attaching the glass guide, do so in such an orientation as illustrated below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-305
MC-306
12.27 Center Guide n Removal Procedures
{SP:INDEX} 1. Remove the light-collecting shaft.
CAUTION {MC:12.25_Light-Collecting Shaft}
Never remove or loosen the base mounting screws that retain the center guide 2. Remove the glass guide.
in place. If they were removed or loosened, image nonuniformity and IP jam {MC:12.26_Glass Guide}
would occur, so that it becomes necessary to replace the unit.
3. Remove the center guide.
u INSTRUCTION u
The center guide is secured by its special screws. For its installation/removal,
use the special tool designed for those screws.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-306
MC-307
12.28 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) and n Reinstallation Procedures
Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{SP:INDEX}
NOTE
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
- When handling the driving shaft grip roller (lower) and driven shaft grip roller (lower), CHECK 1
l
use care not to scratch or shock them.
Make sure that BR3x6 screws and M4 washers are used to secure the leaf spring.
- Always replace both the driving shaft grip roller (lower) and the driven shaft grip
roller (lower) when replacing the roller. Replacing either of them may cause image
nonuniformity.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the SUS belt.
{MC:12.4_SUS Belt}
2. Remove the center guide.
{MC:12.27_Center Guide}
3. Remove the driving shaft grip roller (lower) and driven shaft grip roller
(lower).
NOTE
To secure the leaf spring, use BR screws and M4 washers. If TP screws were
used, the upper light-collecting guide might be damaged.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-307
MC-308
12.29 Grounding Wires 4. Remove the grounding wires.
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Lower front light protect plate
- Lower right-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
- Lower rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
3. Remove the retaining member.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-308
MC-309
12.30 Shock-Absorbing Rubbers 4. Remove the shock-absorbing rubbers.
{SP:INDEX}
NOTE
When replacing the shock-absorbing rubbers, replace all the two rubbers.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Lower right-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:3.1_Covers} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
2. Remove the transparent cover.
{MC:12.2_Transparent Cover}
3. Remove the shock-absorbing rubber assembly.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-309
MC-310
12.31 Subscanning Unit (Top) 3. Remove the subscanning unit (top).
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the shock-absorbing rubbers.
{MC:12.30_Shock-Absorbing Rubbers}
2. Remove the subscanning unit.
{MC:12.1_Subscanning Unit}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-310
MC-311
12.32 Bracket Assembly
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the subscanning unit (top).
{MC:12.31_Subscanning Unit (Top)}
2. Remove the bracket assembly.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-311
MC-312
12.33 Lower Light-Collecting Guide Brace 3. Remove the lower light-collecting guide brace assembly.
Assembly
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the transparent cover.
{MC:12.2_Transparent Cover}
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-312
MC-313
13. PC Boards 13.1.2 Machine Data Backup
NOTE
When the CPU board is replaced, network settings on the RU all restore to the default
13.1 CPU Board settings. However, since the Console keeps the settings before the replacement,
The FLASH ROM of the CPU board stores the RU machine data (configuration it cannot be connected if the network settings have been modified to site-specific
information, scanner information and log information). values. Temporarily change the network settings for re-connection. You need take a
Since the CPU board shipped as a service part does not contain the machine data set, note of the addresses for the purpose.
it is necessary to restore the RU as exactly it was before the replacement by updating
the software version and adjusting the machine data after replacement.
1. Turn ON the power of the Console.
For the adjustment of the machine data, take either of the following procedures
depending on the RU conditions. 2. Turn ON the circuit breaker of the RU.
- When the RU can boot up, back up the machine data, and restore the backed up
machine data after the replacement of the CPU board. 3. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
- When the machine cannot boot up and the machine data cannot be backed up, {MU:4.2_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
restore the machine-specific data by means of the machinespecific data CD-ROM
attached to the machine. If no machine-specific data CD-ROM is available, adjust
the machine data through format adjustment, and shading/sensitivity correction.
4. Connect a media (for saving backup data) to the Console.
NOTE
When the machine data is to be backed up in an arbitrary place in the hard disk
13.1.1 Replacement Procedures of the Console, the step 4. is not required. Proceed to step 5.
Replace the CPU board according to the procedures mentioned in the following
reference list.
Reference Part concerned
5. Select the RU whose machine data is to be backed up from the “LIST
OF EXISTING RU”.
{13.1.2} Machine Data Backup Configuration(C)
LIST OF EXISTING RU
EACH RU SETTING
#1
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU IP ADDR
{13.1.3} Replacing the CPU Board [Select] RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION
BACKUP RESTORE
ru0 172.16.1.10 PROFECT V1.0
{13.1.4} Setting the IP Address of the RU and Console
ALL RUs SETTING
{13.1.5} Updating the RU Software Version
{13.1.6} Restoring the Machine Data
{13.1.7} Confirming the S Value
{13.1.8} S Value Correction/LED Initialization
NOTE
When the IP address of the RU of “172.16.1.10” and the IP address of the Console of
“172.16.1.20” (initial value) are employed, the procedure (7) in “13.1.2 Machine Data
Backup” and the procedures of “13.1.4 Setting the IP addresses of the RU and the
Console” need not be taken.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-313
MC-314
6. Back up the following items. 8. Write down the Internet settings of the Console.
- "LOG ALL" ("CONFIGURATION" and "HISTORY LOG" included) #1 Click [Network and Sharing Center] on the control panel.
- "SCN ALL DATA"
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
BACKUP #2 Click [View status].
CONNECTION TEST
LOG ALL
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
→ The “Local Area Connection Status” window appears.
RU IP ADDR
EXECUTE #2
BACKUP RESTORE
#3 Click [Properties].
#1
ALL RUs SETTING
→ The “Local Area Connection Properties” window appears.
#4 Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)”, and click [Properties].
BACKUP
#5 Take a note of the addresses of “IP address”, “Subnet mask” and “Default Gateway”.
#3 SCN ALL DATA
#4
EXECUTE
9. Turn OFF the main power switch of the RU.
7. Open the machine maintenance screen of RU and take a note of the IP
10. Disconnect the power cable and the I/F cable from the RU.
address.
Maintenance 11. Remove the backup media from the Console after the machine data
has been backed up.
1/2
RU IP Address #1 12. Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.
FTP Server #2 {MU:13.1.1_Replacement Procedures}
Default Gateway
#3
Subnet Mask #4
Maintenance
2/2
Secure Host #5
Secure Net #6
Network Check
HV ON/OFF
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-314
MC-315
13.1.3 Replacing the CPU Board 2. Remove the following connectors on the CPU39A board.
{SP:INDEX}
CPU21 CPU22 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3
CAUTIONS CPU16 CPU14
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
n Removal Procedures CPU20
1. Remove the upper right-hand side cover. CPU19
{MC:3.1_Covers} CPU4
CPU17
CPU15
CPU5
CPU13
CPU12
CPU11
CPU10
(USB)
CPU9
CPU6
CPU7
CPU8
(LAN)
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-315
MC-316
3. Remove the screws, and remove the CPU39A Board. Reinstallation Procedures
1. Make DIP SW4 setting as appropriate.
u INSTRUCTION u
This setting should be the same as that on the CPU39A board removed.
l Positions of DIP SW4
#1 [Remove]
8-TP3x6
OFF ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DipSW4
CPU39A board
4. Check the DIP SW4 setting.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-316
MC-317
2. Secure the CPU39A board. 3. Connect the following connectors on the CPU39A board.
CPU21 CPU22 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3
CPU16 CPU14
CPU20
#1 [Secure]
8-TP3x6 CPU19
CPU4
CPU17
CPU15
CPU5
CPU13
CPU12
CPU11
CPU10
(USB)
CPU9
CPU6
CPU7
CPU8
(LAN)
4. Install the upper right-hand side cover.
{MC:3.1_Covers}
5. Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.
{MU:13.1.1_Replacement Procedures}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-317
MC-318
13.1.4 Setting the IP Addresses of the RU and Console 6. Open the machine maintenance screen of RU and configure settings
according to the note taken at step 7 in “13.1.2 Machine Data Backup”.
1. Set the Internet settings of the Console.
#1 Click “Network and Sharing Center” on the control panel. Maintenance
1/2
#2 Click “View status”.
RU IP Address #1
→ The “Local Area Connection Status” window appears.
FTP Server #2
#3 Click “Properties”. Default Gateway
#3
→ The “Local Area Connection Properties” window appears. Subnet Mask #4
#4 Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)”, and click on “Properties”.
#5 Set the “IP address” and the “Subnet mask” in “Use the following IP address” to the
Maintenance
following default values.
2/2
IP address: :172.16.1.20
Subnet mask :255.255.0.0
Secure Host #5
Secure Net #6
2. Turn ON the circuit breaker of the RU. Network Check
3.
HV ON/OFF
Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2_Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
4. Select the RU whose address is to be changed from the “LIST OF
EXISTING RU”, and input “172”, “16”, “1” and “10” in “RU IP ADDR”. 7. Set the Internet settings of the Console to the settings noted at step 8
LIST OF EXISTING RU in “13.1.2 Machine Data Backup”.
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION
#1 ru0 172.16.1.10 CR-IR363 V1.0 8. Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.
{MU:13.1.1_Replacement Procedures}
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
#2
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10 RBMC04122.AI
5. Confirm the PING results, and click [x] to close the window.
{MU:4.3.6_PING}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-318
MC-319
13.1.5 Updating the RU Software Version 4. Check the IP address, and click [OK].
Update the RU software to its latest version.
After the updating, set the master CL.
1. Put the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the CL.
2. Click [START].
#1
[Click]
3. From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select the RU which is to be updated,
and click [FTP].
#1
[Select]
u NOTE u
In the case of “NO GOOD” indication
{Troubleshooting}
#2 5. From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select the RU which is to be updated,
[Click] and click on [VERSION UP].
#1
[Select]
#2
[Click]
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-319
MC-320
6. Click [OK]. 8. Confirm the installation precautions.
CAUTIONS
While data is being written into the FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the power
of the RU. If the power of the RU is turned OFF, the program residing in the
memory is corrupted, so that the RU cannot be rebooted.
7. Check “RU VERSION”, and click [OK].
9. Click [OK].
#2
[Check]
While the FLASH ROM is being written
into, the LED blinks.
(The LED keeps blinking after the
writing ends)
REFERENCES
The installation process screen appears on the CL display.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-320
MC-321
10. When writing to the FLASH ROM is completed, press the <Enter> key. 12. Check the version of the RU software, and close Setup PC-TOOL.
u NOTE u #1
The following screen may fail to open due to an application error. If the following [Check]
screen does not appear on the display, wait about 10 minutes after clicking [OK]
at step 9, and then press the <Enter> key.
REFERENCE
GOOD :
Writing into the FLASH ROM will take about four minutes.
Letter color is "black".
NO GOOD :
#1 Letter color is "red".
[Check]
#2
[Click]
#2
[Press]
<Enter> key
11. Click [OK].
#1
[Click] #3
[Click]
u NOTE u
In the case of “NO GOOD” indication, return to step 1 and perform install
procedures all over again.
13. Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.
{MU:13.1.1_Replacement Procedures}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-321
MC-322
13.1.6 Restoring the Machine Data 1. From the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select the RU of which machine
The machine is not properly adjusted after the replacement of the CPU board. data is to be restored.
Restore the system by using the backup data created in “13.1.2 Machine Data
Configuration(C)
LIST OF EXISTING RU
EACH RU SETTING
#1
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
Backup” to the conditions before the replacement of the CPU board. RU IP ADDR
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION
[Select]
BACKUP RESTORE
ru0 172.16.1.10 PROFECT V1.0
u INSTRUCTION u
ALL RUs SETTING
- If the RU was not able to boot up before the replacement of the CPU board and you
were not able to back up the machine data, restore the machine-specific data by
means of the machine-specific data CD-ROM attached to the machine. 2. Restore “CONFIGURATION”, “SCN ALL DATA”, “HISTORY LOG”.
- If no backup data or no machine-specific data is available, take the procedures for Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
RESTORE
CONNECTION TEST
the “Format Adjustment” and “Shading/Sensitivity Correction” to adjust the machine. CONFIGURATION
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU IP ADDR
Also perform “Shading Correction” when needed. EXECUTE #2
BACKUP RESTORE
● Format Adjustment #1
ALL RUs SETTING
{MU:5.3 [5-4]_Format Adjustment}
● Shading/Sensitivity Correction RESTORE
{MU:5.3 [5-5-1]_Shading/Sensitivity Correction} #3 SCN ALL DATA
EXECUTE #4
● Shading Correction
{MU:5.3 [5-5-2]_Shading Correction}
RESTORE
#5 HISTORY LOG
EXECUTE #6
RBMC04104.AI
3. Turn OFF the main power switch of the RU.
4. Turn ON the main power switch of the RU.
5. Check the following points.
● The RU normally enters the READY state.
● The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.
{MC:19._Image/Conveyance Checks}
● There is no error occurrence.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-322
MC-323
13.1.7 Confirming the S Value
1. Confirm the S value.
{IN:10._Confirming the S Value}
13.1.8 S Value Correction/LED Initialization
1. Correct the S value and initialize LED data.
{MU:5.3 [5-5-5]_Sensitivity S-Value Correction}
{MU:5.3 [5-6-4-1]_LED data initialization (front)}
{MU:5.3 [5-6-4-2]_LED data initialization (rear)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-323
MC-324
13.2 SND39A(1) Board 2. Disconnect the connectors.
{SP:INDEX}
SNDA3 SNDA4 SNDA5 SNDA6 SNDA7
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. SNDA2
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the top cover. SNDA1
{MC:3.1_Covers}
SNDA9
SNDA16 SNDA10
SNDA15
SND39A(1) Board SNDA11
SNDA14 SNDA13 SNDA12
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-324
MC-325
3. Remove the screws, and remove the SND39A(1) board. Reinstallation Procedures
#1 [Remove] For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps, and check the following points.
6-TP3x6
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.
{MC:19._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-325
MC-326
13.3 SND39A(2) Board 2. Disconnect the following connectors.
{SP:INDEX}
SNDB3 SNDB4 SNDB5 SNDB6 SNDB7
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity SNDB8
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. SNDB2
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cover. SNDB1
- Top cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
SNDB10
SND39A(2) Board
SNDB11
SNDB14 SNDB13 SNDB12
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-326
MC-327
3. Remove the screws, and remove the SND39A(2) board. Reinstallation Procedures
#1 [Remove] For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps, and check the following points.
6-TP3x6
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.
{MC:19._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-327
MC-328
14. Updating Software Versions 3. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
After the main screen appears, sequentially touch the upper left and upper right
corners of the touch panel.
1. Turn ON the power of the CL.
REFERENCE
2. Turn ON the power of the RU. If your touch is accepted by the panel, a “beep” alarm sound is generated.
#1 #2
[Touch] [Touch]
PROFECT
CS Plus
©2018 FUJIFILM Corporation
u INSTRUCTION u
If you cannot put the RU into the Maintenance Mode, turn OFF the power of the
RU and then reboot the RU all over again.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-328
MC-329
REFERENCE 8. When Uninstall is completed, click on [Finish].
For steps 4 through 8, perform “Uninstall Setup PC-TOOL.”
#1
[Click]
4. Put the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the CL.
5. Click on [UNINSTALL].
#1
[Click]
REFERENCE
For steps 9 through 16, perform “Install Setup PC-TOOL.”
6. Click on [NEXT]. 9. Click on [INSTALL].
#1
#1 [Click]
[Click]
7. Click on [Remove].
10. Select [For FTP Server], and click [SET].
#1
[Click]
#1
[Select]
#2
[Click]
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-329
MC-330
11. Click [NEXT]. 15. From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select the RU which is to be updated,
and click [FTP].
#1 #1
[Click] [Select]
12. Click [Install].
#2
#1 [Click]
[Click]
13. After the installation completes, click [Finish].
#1
[Click]
14. Click [START].
#1
[Click]
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-330
MC-331
16. Check the IP address, and click [OK]. REFERENCE
For steps 17 through 27, perform “Update RU Software Version.”
17. From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU for its version update, and
click on [VERSION UP].
#1
[Select]
#2
[Click]
18. Click [OK].
u NOTE u
In the case of “NO GOOD” indication
{Troubleshooting}
19. Check “RU VERSION”, and click [OK].
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-331
MC-332
20. Confirm the installation precautions. 22. When writing to the FLASH ROM is completed, press the [Enter] key.
CAUTIONS u NOTE u
While data is being written into the FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the power The following screen may fail to open due to an application error. If the following
of the RU. If the power of the RU is turned OFF, the program residing in the screen does not appear on the display, wait about 10 minutes after the click of [OK]
memory is corrupted, so that the RU cannot be rebooted. in step 21, and then press the [Enter] key.
21. Click [OK]. REFERENCE
Writing into the FLASH ROM will take about four minutes.
#1
[Check]
#2
[Check] #2
While the FLASH ROM is being written [Press]
into, the LED blinks. <Enter> key
(The LED keeps blinking after the
writing ends) 23. Click [OK].
#1
[Click]
REFERENCES
The installation process screen appears on the CL display.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-332
MC-333
24. Check the version of the RU software, and close Setup PC-TOOL. 25. Turn OFF the power of the RU.
#1
[Check] 26. Turn ON the power of the RU.
27. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
GOOD :
Letter color is "black".
NO GOOD :
Letter color is "red".
#2
[Click]
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.
{MC:19._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
#3
[Click]
u NOTE u
In the case of “NO GOOD” indication, return to step 1 and perform install procedures
all over again.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-333
MC-334
15. Format Adjustment 4. Enter the reading start position (e.g., “10”) calculated at step 3.
u NOTES u
- After entering the reading start position, do not turn OFF the power of the RU.
15.1 Main Scan Format Adjustment If the RU is powered OFF, the reading start position data will not be retained.
- “Input range” only accepts values ranging from -100 to 100.
u INSTRUCTION u
Of the IPs used by the user, the largest sized IP should be utilized for adjustment. REFERENCE
The white blank portion of the output image expands when a negative quantity (-)
15.1.1 Main Scan Position (Pixel) Adjustment value is entered, while it narrows when a positive quantity (+) value is entered.
1. Expose IPs of 14” x 14” (35cm x 35cm) or 14” x 17” (35cm x 43cm) size
#1
with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR.
[Click]
u INSTRUCTION u Scanner Check
At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment.
#2
[Click]
2. Using menus “TEST”, “Image Format” or “Image Format - 2”, and
“SINGLE”, read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an Format Adjustment
image output.
{MC:19.2_Image/Conveyance Checks} #3
3. Measure a misalignment of the reading start position. [Input]
Measure the size of the white blank portion, and calculate an adjustment value in Manual Adjustment (Pixel) Input range (-100 - 100)
accordance with the formula shown below. 10
#4
[Click]
SET
--- Example ---
If the positional misalignment is 1 mm when an IP of 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm) size
is outputted to a 14" x17" (35cm x 43cm) film:
(1/1 x 10) = 10 (PIXEL)
Thus, "Input range" is +10.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-334
MC-335
5. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. 15.1.2 Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment
u NOTE u
To adjust the main scan length, expose an IP to radiation while using a steel rule or
other thin article. If you use a tester or other thick article, the resulting image is larger
than the actual size so that the main scan length cannot be properly adjusted.
1. Place a 175mm-length steel rule on an IP of 14” x 14” (35cm x 35cm)
6. Using menus “TEST”, “Image Format” or “Image Format - 2”, and or 14” x 17” (35cm x 43cm) size, and expose it with the tungsten X-ray
“SINGLE”, read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an tube at about 1 mR.
image output. u INSTRUCTION u
u INSTRUCTION u At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment.
Be sure to follow the instruction mentioned in “19.2 Image/Conveyance Checks”
when outputting the image. 2. Using menus “TEST”, “Image Format” or “Image Format - 2”, and
“SINGLE”, read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an
「「」
{MC:19.2_Image/Conveyance Checks} image output.
{MC:19.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
7. Verify that there is no white blank portion and the resulting image is
not cut off.
3. Measure a misalignment of the reading width.
u NOTE u Measure the actual size of the 175mm-length steel rule and the size of the white
If anything abnormal is found with the image: blank portion, and calculate an adjustment value in accordance with the formula
{Troubleshooting} shown below.
8. Back up the data so adjusted into a HDD, CD-R, etc.
{MC:18.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}
u NOTE u
The result associated with the change becomes ineffective after reboot. Thus,
in order to make the saved setup values effective after reboot, it is necessary to
back up the configuration data.
--- Example ---
If the measured value of the reading width is 170 mm when an IP of 14"x14" (35cm
x 35cm) size is outputted to a 14" x17" (35cm x 43cm) film:
(175 - (170/1))/175x100 = 2.8 (%)
Thus, "Input range" is +2.8.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-335
MC-336
4. Enter the main scan length (e.g., “2.8”) calculated at step 3. 5. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.
u NOTES u
- After entering the main scan length, do not turn OFF the power of the RU. If
the RU is powered OFF, the main scan length data will not be retained.
- “Input range” only accepts values ranging from -5 to 5.
REFERENCE
The white blank portion of the output image narrows when a negative (-) value is 6. Using menus “TEST”, “Image Format” or “Image Format - 2”, and
entered, while it expands when a positive (+) value is entered. “SINGLE”, read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an
image output.
#1
u INSTRUCTION u
[Click]
Be sure to follow the instruction mentioned in “19.2 Image/Conveyance Checks”
Scanner Check
「
when outputting the image.
#2
{MC:19.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
[Click]
Format Adjustment
7. Measure the actual size of the 175mm-length steel rule and the size of
the white blank portion, and verify that there is no misalignment.
#3
[Input]
8. Back up the data so adjusted into HDD, CD-R, etc.
Manual Adjustment (FREQ) Input range (-5.0 - 5.0) {MC:18.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}
2.8
u NOTE u
The result associated with the change becomes ineffective after reboot. Thus,
in order to make the saved setup values effective after reboot, it is necessary to
#4 back up the configuration data.
[Click]
SET
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-336
MC-337
15.1.3 Optic Setting 3. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.
u NOTE u
Only when the machine-specific data bundled with the machine is not available and
you want to reset the machine to its factory default state, the following procedures
should be performed.
1. Check the value written on the top of the scanning optics unit, and
write it down on your notepad.
4. Place a 175mm-length steel rule on an IP of 14” x 14” (35cm x 35cm)
or 14” x 17” (35cm x 43cm) size, and expose it with the tungsten X-ray
tube at about 1 mR.
5. Using menus “TEST”, “Image Format” or “Image Format - 2”, and
“SINGLE”, read one of the IPs prepared in step 4, and generate an
image output.
u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure to follow the instruction mentioned in “19.2 Image/Conveyance Checks”
when outputting the image.
2. Type in the value noted at step 1. 「
{MC:19.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
#1
[Click]
Scanner Check
6. Verify that there is no white blank portion and the resulting image is
not cut off.
#2 u INSTRUCTION u
[Click]
If there is any white blank portion on the image or if the image is cut off, perform
Format Adjustment the procedures described in “15.1.1 Main Scan Position (Pixel) Adjustment.”
#3 {MC:15.1.1_Main Scan Position (Pixel) Adjustment}
[Input]
Optic Setting (FREQ) Input range (-5.0 - 5.0)
7. Measure the actual size of the 175mm-length steel rule and white
blank portion, and make sure that there is no misalignment.
-1.5
Optic Setting (Pixel) Input range (66 - 266) u INSTRUCTION u
173 If there is any image misalignment, perform the procedures described in “15.1.2
Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment.”
#4
[Click] {MC:15.1.2_Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment}
SET
u NOTE u
The result associated with the change becomes ineffective after reboot. Thus,
in order to make the saved setup values effective after reboot, it is necessary to
back up the configuration data.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-337
MC-338
15.2 IP Leading-Edge Adjustment (Sub-scanning) 4. Enter the IP leading-edge position calculated at step 3.
REFERENCES u NOTES u
- IP leading-edge adjustment is only effective for an IP of HR type. - After entering the IP leading edge position, do not turn OFF the power of the
- IP leading-edge adjustment may be made for each of the IP sizes. RU. If the RU is powered OFF, the IP leading edge position data will not be
retained.
- “Input range” only accepts values ranging from 1 to 50.
1. Expose IPs of a size (18” x 24” HR-BD or 24” x 30” HR-BD) to be
adjusted, with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 15 mR. #1
#1
u NOTE u [Click]
[Click]
At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment. Scanner Check
Scanner Check
2. Using menus “TEST”, “Image Format-1” or “Image Format-2”, and #2
#2
“SINGLE”, read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an [Click]
[Click]
image output. FormatAdjustment
Format Adjustment
{MC:19.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
3. Measure the leading edge of the IP.
Measure the length of the white blank portion, and calculate an adjustment value in
accordance with the formula shown below. #3
[Click]
REFERENCE
IP Leading-Edge Adjustment #4
If the entered adjustment value (C) is greater than the current value (A), the white
blank portion (b) expands. The white blank portion (b) narrows if the entered #3(Subscanning) [Input]
adjustment value (C) is smaller than the current value (A). [Click]
IP Leading-Edge Adjustment #4
(Subscanning) [Input]
IP conveyance
direction b
A C
(displayed (adjustment
value) value)
#5
#5
[Click]
[Click]
SET
A b x 10 =Adjustment value (digit)
--- Example ---
If you want to narrow the IP leading-edge position by 1 mm when an IP of 18" x
RU PC-TOOL / MUTL
Are you sure ?
#6
24" HR size is outputted to a film: OK CANCEL [Click]
30 (displayed value) - (10x1) = 20 OK
Thus, "Input range" is 20.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-338
MC-339
5. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.
6. Using menus “TEST”, “Image Format-1” or “Image Format-2”, and
“SINGLE”, read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an
image output.
u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure to follow the instruction mentioned in “19.2 Image/Conveyance Checks”
「
when outputting the image.
{MC:19.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
7. Verify that the white blank portion reaches the value so adjusted.
8. Back up the data so adjusted into HDD, CD-R, etc.
{MC:18.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}
u NOTE u
The result associated with the change becomes ineffective after reboot. Thus,
in order to make the saved setup values effective after reboot, it is necessary to
back up the configuration data.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-339
MC-340
16. Shading/Sensitivity Correction for Supplemental explanation
IP Type ST
In order to optimize the characteristics for each device in following cases, the
correction procedures below are needed.
- After the light-collecting guide is replaced:
u NOTE u optical characteristics of collecting guide, sensitivity characteristics of photomultiplier
- Use IP of which size is 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm) to - After the scanning optics unit is replaced:
perform shading/sensitivity correction. optical characteristics of scanning optics unit (polygon)
- Before shading/sensitivity correction, format adjustment should have been done. If Which correction procedures are required are determined according to IP type and
there is any white blank portion on the exposed image, error is likely to occur. reading mode. The correction procedures for ST type IP are described in this section.
- The image (uniformly gray image) output into CL is a false image generated by RU,
REFERENCE
it is not an actual read image. This image cannot be used on checking correction
results. For HR-BD type IP, see the following.
{MC:17._Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR-BD}
REFERENCE
Exposure reference conditions (approx. 1mR) ○ Correction Items for ST type IP
Distance Voltage Amperage Time
Correction items
Tungsten X-ray tube 1.8m 80KV 50mA 0.013 sec IP type
(reading mode) Shading correction and Shading correction sensitivity correction
sensitivity correction only only
Shading / sensitivity correction Sensitivity correction
ST-VI
{MC:16.1_Shading/ {MC:16.3_Sensitivity
(SR (normal) -
mode) Sensitivity Correction for Correction for IP
IP Type ST (SR)} Type ST}
Shading correction Sensitivity correction
ST-VI
{MC:16.2_Shading {MC:16.3_Sensitivity
(FR (high-speed) -
mode) Correction for the Correction for IP
IP Type of ST (FR)} Type ST}
REFERENCE
Correction data calculated here are used as following.
(1) Sensitivity correction data:
When reading IP, the high voltage (HV) is applied between electrodes in order to set the reading
sensitivity of photomultiplier. This correction data is used on setting the high voltage value.
(2) Shading correction data:
The light-collecting guide collects light radiated from the IP surface. There are some differences
in its focusing property depending on the position of the main scanning direction. In addition, a
polygon mirror has different optical characteristics among respective reflection surfaces. The
shading correction data is used to correct such nonuniformity of the optical characteristics.
Different correction data may be required for each reading mode (reading speed).
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-340
MC-341
16.1 Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST 3. Using MUTL of the maintenance mode on the CL, perform the shading/
sensitivity correction.
(SR)
u INSTRUCTION u
u NOTES u
Enter the value (x.xx) of the X-ray dose measured at step 1 into the field of
- The IP must be read for a one-minute period from 10 to 11 minutes after the X-ray shading/sensitivity correction.
exposure. Otherwise, correct correction on the sensitivity cannot be done. Exercise
care. REFERENCE
- Be sure to use the tungsten X-ray tube. The molybdenum X-ray tube will not result
in normal correction, because it suffers from tube-to-tube variability. If the measure value of the X-ray dose is 0.92 mR: The value to be entered is
- Be sure to initialize the LED data after the correction. "0.92".
If the measured value of the X-ray dose is 1.11 mR: The value to be entered is
u INSTRUCTIONS u "1.11".
- The calibrated X-ray dosimeter should be used to measure the X-ray dose.
- Correction of the reading must be done for a one-minute period from 10 to 11 #1
minutes after the exposure. [Click]
1. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose for exposing the Scanner Check
IP, and write it down.
#2
2. Expose an IP type ST (one side) with a size of 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm) [Click]
or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm), with the tungsten X-ray tube (approx. 1 mR). Correction
#3
[Input]
Shading/Sensitivity Correction ST (0.50- 9.99)
#4
[Click]
SET
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-341
MC-342
4. Read the IP exposed in step 2 for a one-minute period from 10 to 11 9. Initialize the LED data.
minutes after the exposure by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or {MU:5.3 [5-6-4]_Light collecting parts replacement}
“image format-2” and “SINGLE” in the CL menu, and output the image.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
The image (uniformly gray image) output in CL is a false image generated by RU, it is The result associated with the change becomes ineffective after reboot. Thus,
not an actual read image. This image cannot be used on checking correction results. in order to make the saved setup values effective after reboot, it is necessary to
back up the configuration data.
5. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.
6. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose for exposing the
IP, and write it down.
7. Expose an IP type ST (one side) with a size of 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm)
or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm), with the tungsten X-ray tube (approx. 1 mR).
8. Read the IP exposed in step 7 for a one-minute period from 10 to 11
minutes after the exposure by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or
“image format-2” and “SINGLE” in the CL menu, and output the image.
Make sure that the S value is normal with the measured X-ray dose and that
there is no particular irregularity.
REFERENCE
For 0.1 mR: The S value is 2000.
For 1 mR: The S value is 200.
For 10 mR: The S value is 20.
{MC:19.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-342
MC-343
16.2 Shading Correction for the IP Type of ST 2. Set the FR (FR speed).
(FR) #1
[Click]
Supplemental explanation Scanner Check
If the user uses the FR mode as a reading mode, a shading correction (for other than
SR mode) is required. The procedures are described below. #2
[Click]
u NOTE u Correction
Be sure to use the tungsten X-ray tube. The molybdenum X-ray tube will not result in
normal correction, because it suffers from tube-to-tube variability.
1. For the ST (one side), expose an IP of 14” x 14” (35cm x 35 cm) size or #3
14” x 17” (35cm x 43 cm) with a tungsten X-ray tube (approx. 1 mR). [Click]
Shading Correction
u INSTRUCTION u
At least four IPs should be exposed.
#4
[Click]
ST(FR)
3. Read the IP exposed in step 1 by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or
“image format-2” and “SINGLE” in the CL menu, and output the image.
Make sure that there is no unusual nonuniformity.
u NOTE u
The image (uniformly gray image) output in CL is a false image generated by RU, it is
not an actual read image. This image cannot be used on checking correction results.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-343
MC-344
4. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.
5. Read the IP exposed in step 1 by the use of “TEST”, “image format”
or “image format-2” and “SINGLE” in the CL menu, and output the
image.
Make sure that there is no unusual nonuniformity.
u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure to follow the instruction mentioned in “19.2 Image/Conveyance Checks”
「
when outputting the image.
{MC:19.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
6. Back up the data so adjusted into HDD, CD-R, etc.
{MC:18.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}
u NOTE u
The result associated with the change becomes ineffective after reboot. Thus,
in order to make the saved setup values effective after reboot, it is necessary to
back up the configuration data.
7. Perform the following procedures if the sensitivity correction is
required.
{MC:16.3_Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST}
REFERENCE
If "16.1 Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST (SR)" has been performed
previously, the sensitivity correction is not required.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-344
MC-345
16.3 Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST 3. Take the following procedures by the use of MUTL of the maintenance
mode on the CL.
Supplemental explanation Prepare for the sensitivity correction.
When only sensitivity correction is to be done without shading correction, follow the u INSTRUCTION u
procedures below. Enter the value (x.xx) of the X-ray dose measured at step 1 into the field of
u NOTE u sensitivity adjustment.
- The IP must be read for a one-minute period from 10 to 11 minutes after the X-ray REFERENCE
exposure. Otherwise, correct correction on the sensitivity cannot be done. Exercise If the measure value of the X-ray dose is 0.92 mR: The value to be entered is "0.92".
care. If the measured value of the X-ray dose is 1.11 mR: The value to be entered is "1.11".
- Be sure to initialize the LED data after the correction.
#1
u INSTRUCTIONS u [Click]
- The calibrated X-ray dosimeter should be used to measure the X-ray dose. Scanner Check
- Correction of the reading must be done for a one-minute period from 10 to 11
minutes after the exposure. #2
[Click]
1. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose for exposing the Correction
IP, and write it down.
2. For the ST (one side), expose an IP with a size of 14" x 14" (35cm x
35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm) with a tungsten X-ray tube (approx.
Sensitivity Correction ST (0.50- 9.99),HR-BD (10.00 - 199.00)
1 mR).
#4 #3
[Click] [Input]
SET
4. Read the IP exposed in step 2 for a one-minute period from 10 to 11
minutes after the exposure by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or
“image format-2” and “SINGLE” in the CL menu, and output the image.
u NOTE u
The image (uniformly gray image) output in CL is a false image generated by RU, it is
not an actual read image. This image cannot be used on checking correction results.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-345
MC-346
5. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. 10. Initialize the LED data.
{MU:5.3 [5-6-4]_Light collecting parts replacement}
11. Back up the data so adjusted into a HDD, CD-R, etc.
{MC:18.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}
u NOTE u
The result associated with the change becomes ineffective after reboot. Thus, in order
6. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose for exposing the to make the saved setup values effective after reboot, it is necessary to back up the
IP, and write it down. configuration data.
7. For the ST (one side), expose an IP with a size of 14" x 14" (35cm x
35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm) with a tungsten X-ray tube (approx.
1 mR).
8. Read the IP exposed in step 7 for a one-minute period from 10 to 11
minutes after the exposure by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or
“image format-2” and “SINGLE” in the CL menu, and output the image.
Make sure that the S value is normal with the measured X-ray dose and that
there is no particular irregularity.
REFERENCE
For 0.1 mR: The S value is 2000.
For 1 mR: The S value is 200.
For 10 mR: The S value is 20.
u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure to follow the instruction mentioned in “19.2 Image/Conveyance Checks”
「
when outputting the image.
{MC:19.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
9. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-346
MC-347
17. Shading/Sensitivity Correction for
IP Type HR-BD
CAUTION
Make sure that the IP type HR-BD is correctly inserted into the HR-BD cassette
before making correction using the IP type HR-BD. To check, open the cassette
via a knob on the rear lid of the cassette, and confirm that a green marker
indicating the IP type HR-BD is at the right corner of the IP.
Even though an IP of a wrong type is inserted, the machine cannot recognize
the error.
Supplemental explanation
In order to optimize the characteristics for each device in following cases, the
correction procedures below are needed.
- After the light-collecting guide is replaced:
optical characteristics of collecting guide, sensitivity characteristics of photomultiplier
- After the scanning optics unit is replaced:
optical characteristics of scanning optics unit (polygon)
Which correction procedures are required is determined according to IP type and
reading mode. The correction procedures for HR-BD type IP are described in this
section.
REFERENCE
For ST type IP, see the following.
{MC:16._Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST}
u INSTRUCTION u
The adjustment procedures differ depending on the IP type used. Check the
procedures as appropriate.
{MU:5.3 [5-5]_Correction}
u NOTES u
- Of the IPs used by the user, the largest sized IP should be utilized for adjustment.
- The type of the X-ray tube and X-ray dose differ depending on the item to be
corrected.
Sensitivity correction: The X-ray tube is molybdenum and the X-ray dose is 20 mR.
Shading correction: The X-ray tube is tungsten and the X-ray dose is 15 mR.
- The image (uniformly gray image) output in CL in correction procedures is a false
image generated by RU, it is not an actual read image. This image cannot be used
on checking correction results.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-347
MC-348
17.1 Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR-BD 3. Perform the sensitivity correction by the use of MUTL of the
maintenance mode on the CL.
(Both Side)
u INSTRUCTION u
Supplemental explanation
Enter the value (x.xx) of the X-ray dose measured at step 1 into the field of
The procedures for the correction for the user using HR-BD are described here.
sensitivity adjustment.
u NOTE u
- The IP must be read for a one-minute period from 10 to 11 minutes after the X-ray REFERENCE
exposure. Otherwise, correct correction on the sensitivity cannot be done. Exercise If the measure value of the X-ray dose is 18.1 mR: The value to be entered is "18.1".
care. If the measured value of the X-ray dose is 20 mR: The value to be entered is "20".
- Be sure to initialize the LED data after the correction.
u INSTRUCTIONS u #1
[Click]
- The calibrated X-ray dosimeter should be used to measure the X-ray dose.
Scanner Check
- Correction of the reading must be done for a one-minute period from 10 to 11
minutes after the exposure.
#2
[Click]
REFERENCE
Correction
Exposure reference conditions (approx. 20mR)
Distance Voltage Amperage Time
Molybdenum X-ray tube 0.55m 25Kv 100mA 0.053 sec
Sensitivitity Correction ST (0.50- 9.99),HR-BD (10.00 - 199.00)
1. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose for exposing the
IP, and write it down.
#4 #3
2. Expose an IP of 18"x 24" HR-BD (both side) or 24"x 30" HR-BD (both [Click] [Input]
side) size with a molybdenum X-ray tube (approx. 20 mR).
SET
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-348
MC-349
4. Read the IP exposed in step 2 for a one-minute period from 10 to 11 10. Back up the data so adjusted into HDD, CD-R, etc.
minutes after the exposure by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or {MC:18.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}
“image format-2” and “SINGLE” in the CL menu, and output the image.
u NOTE u
u NOTE u
The result associated with the change becomes ineffective after reboot. Thus,
The image (uniformly gray image) output in CL is a false image generated by RU, it is in order to make the saved setup values effective after reboot, it is necessary to
not an actual read image. This image cannot be used on checking correction results. back up the configuration data.
5. Make sure that "RESULT-OK" appears on screen.
6. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose for exposing the
IP, and write it down.
7. Expose an IP of 18"x 24" HR-BD or 24"x 30" HR-BD size with a
molybdenum X-ray tube (approx. 20 mR).
8. Read the IP exposed in step 7 for a one-minute period from 10 to 11
minutes after the exposure by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or
“image format-2” and “SINGLE” in the CL menu, and output the image.
Make sure that the S value is normal with the measured X-ray dose and that
there is no particular irregularity.
{MC:19.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
REFERENCE
For 2 mR: The S value is 1200.
For 20 mR: The S value is 120.
For 200 mR: The S value is 12.
9. Initialize the LED data.
{MU:5.3 [5-6-4]_Light collecting parts replacement}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-349
MC-350
17.2 Shading Correction for IP Type HR-BD 2. Set the HR (HR speed).
#1
u NOTE u
[Click]
Be sure to use the tungsten X-ray tube. The molybdenum X-ray tube will not result in
Scanner Check
normal correction, because it suffers from tube-to-tube variability.
#2
REFERENCE [Click]
Exposure reference conditions (approx. 15mR) Correction
Distance Voltage Amperage Time
Tungsten X-ray tube 1.8m 80Kv 160mA 0.056 sec
#3
1. Expose an IP of 18" x 24" HR-BD or 24" x 30" HR-BD size with a [Click]
tungsten X-ray tube (approx. 15 mR). Shading Correction
(At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment.)
#4
[Click]
HR-BD
011-211-01E
12.06.2019
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-350
MC-351
3. Read the IP exposed in step 1 for a one-minute period from 10 to 11
minutes after the exposure by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or
“image format-2” and “SINGLE” in the CL menu, and output the image.
u NOTE u
The image (uniformly gray image) output in CL is a false image generated by RU, it is
not an actual read image. This image cannot be used on checking correction results.
4. Make sure that "RESULT-OK" appears on screen.
5. Read the IP exposed in step 1 for a one-minute period from 10 to 11
minutes after the exposure by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or
“image format-2” and “SINGLE” in the CL menu, and output the image.
Make sure that there is no unusual nonuniformity.
{MC:19.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
6. Back up the data so adjusted into HDD, CD-R, etc.
{MC:18.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}
u NOTE u
The result associated with the change becomes ineffective after reboot. Thus,
in order to make the saved setup values effective after reboot, it is necessary to
back up the configuration data.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-351
MC-352
17.3 Special Sensitivity Correction for
IP Type HR-BD
Only when the following conditions are met, special sensitivity adjustment can be
achieved.
- When the IP type HR-BD (both side) is exposed with the tungsten X-ray tube
{MC:17.3.1_Special Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR-BD Using Tungsten
X-ray Tube}
CAUTION
When the shading data is of default, special sensitivity correction cannot be
done. Perform shading correction, before special sensitivity correction.
{MC:17.2_Shading Correction for IP Type HR-BD}
u NOTE u
- The IP must be read for a one-minute period from 10 to 11 minutes after the X-ray
exposure. Otherwise, correct correction on the sensitivity cannot be done. Exercise
care.
- Be sure to initialize the LED data after the correction.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- The calibrated X-ray dosimeter should be used to measure the X-ray dose.
- Correction of the reading must be done for a one-minute period from 10 to 11
minutes after the exposure.
REFERENCES
- Observe the following when selecting the type of X-ray tube.
When the tungsten X-ray tube is used: TUNGSTEN FIX
When the molybdenum X-ray tube is used: AUTO SELECT
- S value corresponding to the X-ray dose
For the tungsten X-ray tube
When the X-ray dose is 0.36 mR: The S value is 1200.
When the X-ray dose is 3.6 mR: The S value is 120.
When the X-ray dose is 36 mR: The S value is 12.
For the molybdenum X-ray tube
When the X-ray dose is 2 mR: The S value is 1200.
When the X-ray dose is 20 mR: The S value is 120.
When the X-ray dose is 200 mR: The S value is 12.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-352
MC-353
17.3.1 Special Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR-BD 3. Perform special sensitivity correction by the use of MUTL in the
Using Tungsten X-ray Tube maintenance mode on the CL.
1. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose for exposing the u INSTRUCTION u
IP, and write it down. Enter the value (x.xx) of the X-ray dose measured at step 1 into the field of
sensitivity adjustment.
2. Expose an IP of 18"x 24" HR-BD (both side) or 24"x 30" HR-BD (both
side) size with a tungsten X-ray tube (approx. 3.6 mR). REFERENCE
If the measure value of the X-ray dose is 3.4 mR: The value to be entered is "3.4".
If the measured value of the X-ray dose is 3 mR: The value to be entered is "3".
#1
[Click]
Scanner Check
#2
[Click]
Correction
#3
[Click]
Special Sensitivity Correction
#4
[Select]
TUNGSTEN FIX
Sensitivity Correction HR-BD (2.00 - 199.00)
#6 #5
[Click] [Input]
SET
011-211-01E
12.06.2019
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-353
MC-354
4. Read the IP exposed in step 2 for a one-minute period from 10 to 11
minutes after the exposure by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or
“image format-2” and “SINGLE” in the CL menu, and output the image.
u NOTE u
The image (uniformly gray image) output in CL is a false image generated by RU, it is
not an actual read image. This image cannot be used on checking correction results.
5. Make sure that "RESULT-OK" appears on screen.
6. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose for exposing the
IP, and write it down.
7. Expose an IP of 18” x 24” HR-BD or 24” x 30” HR-BD size with a
tungsten X-ray tube (approx. 3.6 mR).
8. Read the IP exposed in step 7 for a one-minute period from 10 to 11
minutes after the exposure by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or
“image format-2” and “SINGLE” in the CL menu, and output the image.
Make sure that the S value is normal with the measured X-ray dose and that
there is no particular irregularity.
{MC:19.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
9. Initialize the LED data.
{MU:5.3 [5-6-4]_Light collecting parts replacement}
10. Back up the data so adjusted into HDD, CD-R, etc.
{MC:18.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}
u NOTE u
The result associated with the change becomes ineffective after reboot. Thus,
in order to make the saved setup values effective after reboot, it is necessary to
back up the configuration data.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-354
MC-355
18. Data Backup/Image Checks
18.1 Backing Up the Scanner Data
1. Run the RU PC-TOOL.
2. From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU for its data backup, and
back up the following items.
- LOG ALL (CONFIGURATION is included)
- SCN ALL DATA
LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION
#1 ru0 172.16.1.11 CR-IR 363 V1.0
[Select]
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
BACKUP
#2 [Select] LOG ALL
EXECUTE #3 [Click]
BACKUP
#4 [Select] SCN ALL DATA
EXECUTE #5 [Click]
FR9H3J05.EPS
REFERENCE
For details on the backup procedure, see under “22. BACKUP/RESTORE
Procedure” in the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment volume.
{MC:22._BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-355
MC-356
18.2 Checking the Image u INSTRUCTION u
For IP type HR-BD, when the image menu is to be registered, the HQ flag should
1. On the examination reception screen of the CL, click on the [Add be set in “Detailed Exposure Menu Parameters Setting”.
Exposure Menu] button.
2. Select [IMAGE-FORMAT] or [IMAGE-FORMAT-2] from the [TEST] menu,
and click on the [OK] button.
3. Click on [Start Study].
4. Click on [SINGLE].
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-356
MC-357
5. Click on [IP#].
6. Enter the barcode of the cassette to be used.
7. Press the [ENTER] key.
→ The examination reservation is completed, and the following screen appears.
8. Insert the cassette with the barcode entered.
→ The IP reading starts, and the image is displayed on the CL.
9. Check the image displayed.
u NOTE u
If there is any unusual nonuniformity on the image displayed:
{Troubleshooting}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-357
MC-358
19. Image/Conveyance Checks 3. Perform IP exposures.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
The following checks are made in this section.
- Conveyance checks - Expose two IPs of maximum sizes for each of the IP types (ST type and HR-
- Image checks BD type) used at the institution, with the following doses.
- With the X-ray tube, the first IP should be exposed in a normal orientation, and
the second in a 180-degree upside-down orientation.
19.1 Check Before Procedures
u NOTES u l For "ST" IP
- If a cassette with a wrong IP type is inserted, appropriate image cannot be obtained. - X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube
When inserting an IP into a cassette, be sure to perform servicing after confirming - Exposure X-ray dose: 1 mR
the IP type. - Maximum size: IP of 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14"x17" (35cm x 43cm)
- For the IP used for image/conveyance checks, an IP of the maximum size used in size
the hospital should be employed. - Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m
- Make sure that the IP to be used does not contain any important image data Voltage 80 kV
exposed. Amperage 50 mA
Time 0.013 sec
1. Check to ensure that the "READY" screen appears. l For "HR-BD" IP
- X-ray tube: Molybdenum X-ray tube
- Exposure X-ray dose: 20 mR
- Maximum size: IP of 18"x24" HR-BD or 24"x30" HR-BD size
- Reference conditions: Distance 0.55 m
Voltage 25 kV
Amperage 100 mA
Time 0.053 sec
2. Perform "secondary erasure" on the spontaneous radiation and image
accumulated on the IP to be used.
{Instruction Manual}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-358
MC-359
19.2 Image/Conveyance Checks If there is any uneven density difference, compare the films outputted from the
two IPs of the same size, and determine whether such nonuniformity is caused
u NOTE u by the machine or X-ray tube.
Because the "MENU" and so forth differ depending on the IP type, image checks l If there is uneven density difference in the same direction on two films
should be performed with the "MENU" specified below.
1. Using “TEST”, “Image Format” or “Image Format-2” and “SINGLE”,
record the IP exposed at "20.1 Check Before Procedures", and
generate an image output.
REFERENCE
Refer to “18.2 Checking the Image” for detailed procedures for inputting the image.
{MC:18.2_Checking the Image}
2 Verify that there is no "unusual nonuniformity" found on the output
film or on the image displayed on the image monitor.
→ The machine may be the cause of such nonuniformity.
u CHECK u
{Troubleshooting}
- There should be no uneven density difference in the main scan direction.
- If images are output like the following (periodic nonuniformity in main scan l If positions of uneven density difference are different
direction), the polygon mirror in the scanning optics unit may be dirty. Since
opening the scanning optics unit is prohibited, replace the entire scanning
optics unit.
→ The X-ray tube may be the cause of such nonuniformity.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-359
MC-360
3 Check the image format.
Make sure that the white blank portion is 2 mm or less, as actually measured on
the IP, from the outermost edge of the image frame of the film outputted.
u CHECK u
The white blank portion should be 2 mm or less.
If anything abnormal is found:
」」
{Troubleshooting}
u NOTE u
The distance measured on the film may differ from the actual size on the IP,
depending on the reading size and film size. The actual size on the IP should be
calculated using the distance measured on the film and the reduction factor for
the film. Compute the actual size on the IP according to the following equation.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-360
MC-361
20. List of Jigs and Tools
20.1 Jigs and Tools
Name Code No. Manufacturer Model No.
Special bit
Y22S0114 Chapman CMB54
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-361
MC-362
21. Installing the RU Software
When the HDD of the CL is replaced or initialized, it is necessary to install the RU
software.
The procedures for installing the RU software are described below.
21.1 Installing the RU Software
1. Install the RU software.
{IN:8._Installing the RU Software}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-362
MC-363
22. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure CAUTION
This section describes the procedures for backing up and restoring the
Never use the machine-specific data disk for backup. If that disk is used, the
CONFIGURATION information and error log data.
factory default machine-specific data is lost.
22.1 Backup Procedure
1. From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU to be backed up.
The following four items of data can be backed up:
- LOG ALL (ERROR LOG/CONFIGURATION/TRACE LOG/HISTORY LOG)
- SCN ALL DATA
- SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA
- SCN OPTICAL DATA
CAUTION
- SCN ALL DATA
- SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA 2. Click on the [FTP] button.
- SCN OPTICAL DATA
When backing up SCN ALL DATA, SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA, or SCN
OPTICAL DATA, never turn OFF the RU power because the RU’s flash ROM will
be accessed. If you turn OFF the RU power, the program stored in the memory
becomes damaged so that the RU cannot restart.
REFERENCE
On the DOS prompt window displayed, check “RU NAME”, “HISTORY.LOG”, and
For details on the backup procedure, see under “4.3.14 BACKUP” in the Maintenance “RESULT: OK”.
Utility volume. {MU:4.3.8_FTP}
{MU:4.3.14_BACKUP}
3. From the "BACKUP" pull-down menu, select an item to be backed up.
4. Click on the [EXECUTE] button.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-363
MC-364
5. Select a data backup destination.
6. Confirm the displayed backup destination and then click the [OK].
7. Click the [OK].
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-364
MC-365
22.2 Restore Procedure 3. Click on the [EXECUTE].
The following six items of data can be restore:
- CONFIGURATION
- HISTORY LOG
- SCN ALL DATA
- SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA (FRONT ONLY)
- SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA (REAR ONLY)
- SCN OPTICAL DATA
4. Select a location of the data to be restored.
CAUTION
- SCN ALL DATA
- SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA (FRONT ONLY)
- SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA (REAR ONLY)
- SCN OPTICAL DATA
When restore SCN ALL DATA, SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA, or SCN
OPTICAL DATA, never turn OFF the RU power because the RU’s flash ROM will
be accessed. If you turn OFF the RU power, the program stored in the memory
becomes damaged so that the RU cannot restart.
REFERENCE
For details on the restore procedure, see under “4.3.15 RESTORE” in the
Maintenance Utility volume.
{MU:4.3.15_RESTORE}
1. From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU to be restored.
5. Confirm the location of the data to be restored, and then click the [OK].
6. Click the [OK].
2. From the "RESTORE" pull-down menu, select an item to be restored.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-365
MC-366
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-366
MC-367
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-367
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
12.06.2019 01 New release All pages
02.28.2020 02 Revision All pages
CR-IR 363 Service Manual
Maintenance Utility (MU)
011-211-02E CR-IR 363 Service Manual
02.28.2020
MU-1
1. Overview of RU Service Utility
The RU Service Utility consists of User Utility, Machine Maintenance, RU PC-TOOL,
and MUTL.
User Utility provides a maintenance tool used by the end user as well, while Machine
Maintenance, RU PC-TOOL, and MUTL offer maintenance tools used exclusively by
service engineers.
User Utility and Machine Maintenance are operated on the LCD panel of the RU
machine, while RU PC-TOOL and MUTL are operated on the CL.
1.1 Tree of RU Service Utility
The architecture of the RU Service Utility is shown in the tree diagram below.
n Tree Diagram
RU Service Utility
{MU:2._User Utility}
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
{MU:5._MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions}
u INSTRUCTION u
The menus of the MUTL for "For Design" should never be used for routine servicing
procedures. In the Maintenance Utility volume, their functions and procedures are not
described.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-1
MU-2
2. User Utility n Overview of Functions
The overview of the User Utility functions is presented below.
The User Utility provides a maintenance tool used by both the end user and service
engineer. This chapter describes functions and operating procedures for "Master CL l Selecting Master CL
Setting", which is important for servicing procedures. {MU:2.3_Selecting Master CL}
2.1 Overview of User Utility l Scanner Cleaning
The light-collecting mirror is rotated to clean the light-collecting face of the
The architecture of the User Utility is shown in the tree diagram below.
light-collecting guide and perform its home-positioning.
n Tree Diagram l Alarm Sound
Used to set how to stop the alarm sound and the volume of the sound.
User Utility l Key Touch Sound
{MU:2.3_Selecting Master CL} Used to set whether to enable or disable the sound when the LCD panel is touched.
Also used to set the volume of the key touch sound.
Scanner Cleaning*
Alarm Sound*
l Screen OFF Timer
Used to set the time until the backlight is automatically turned OFF when the LCD
Key Touch Sound* panel is idle.
See the Instruction Manual.
Screen OFF Timer* l Sleep Timer
Sleep Timer* Used to set the time until the RU automatically enters the sleep mode when the RU is
idle.
Equipment Information*
l Equipment Information
For more detail on those marked by *, see the Instruction Manual. "Equipment description", "No. of IP reading processing", "No. of IP conveyance", "Total
time of laser ON", and "Total time of erasure lamp ON", and "Date of installation" are
displayed.
For "Date of installation", the date in the HISTORY LOG file is displayed; thus, if the
information is updated by EDIT HISTORY, the resulting updated date is "Date of
installation".
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-2
MU-3
2.2 Starting and Exiting the User Utility 2.3 Selecting Master CL
The procedures for starting and exiting the User Utility are described below. During installation or from the CL's that have been registered by RU PC-TOOL, set
the CL to be used as a master CL.
2.2.1 Starting the User Utility
n Function
CAUTION The master CL can be changed. Up to four CL units can be registered. One of them
When starting the User Utility, make sure that all the processing, such as can be set as the RU’s default master CL.
reading, has been completed and the machine is in READY state.
CAUTION
Even when the master CL is changed, the IP address of the FTP server that is
1. Touch the [Utility] button. set in the RU remains unchanged. Information to be stored in the FTP server,
such as error logs, is written into the FTP server of the IP address that is set in
the RU.
#1
n Procedures
[Utility] u NOTE u
Do not change the master CL unless an emergency arises or the machine is faulty.
2.2.2 Exiting the User Utility Changing the master CL erases the "ERROR LOG", "HISTORY LOG", and other data
necessary for the user.
1. Touch the [Return] button. For the master CL change procedure, see "Appendix 2. Setting the Master CL" in the
ユーティリティー
Installation volume.
{IN:Appendix 2._Setting the Master CL}
#1
[Touch]
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-3
MU-4
3. Machine Maintenance 3.1 Tree of Machine Maintenance
It offers a maintenance tool used exclusively by the service engineer. n Tree Diagram of Machine Maintenance
Setting of RU's IP address and checking of network connection from the RU side,
among others, are operated on the LCD panel of the RU. Machine Maintenance
Setup items of the Machine Maintenance cannot be set from the CL. {MU:3.3.1_RU IP Address}
n Screen of Machine Maintenance {MU:3.3.2_FTP Server}
Maintenance Maintenance
1/2 2/2
{MU:3.3.3_Default Gateway}
RU IP Address Secure Host {MU:3.3.4_Subnet Mask}
FTP Server Secure Net
Default Gateway Network Check
{MU:3.3.5_Secure Host}
Subnet Mask HV ON/OFF
{MU:3.3.6_Secure Net}
{MU:3.3.7_Network Check}
u NOTE u
{MU:3.3.8_HV ON/OFF}
When the Machine Maintenance is started at the time of initialization, the [Return]
button in the lower right corner of a Machine Maintenance screen is hidden. This
provision is made to prevent an initialization process from being inadvertently started
during maintenance.
{MU:3.2.1_Starting the Machine Maintenance during Initialization}
Maintenance Maintenance
1/2 2/2
RU IP Address Secure Host
FTP Server Secure Net
Default Gateway Network Check
Subnet Mask HV ON/OFF
REFERENCE
Maintenance Maintenance
The Machine Maintenance consists of two screens. To toggle between them,
touch 1/2 or 1/2 .
RU IP AddressRU IP Address
FTP Server FTP Server
Default Gateway
Default Gateway
011-211-02E
Subnet Mask Subnet Mask
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-4
MU-5
3.2 Starting and Exiting the Machine 2. When the MODEL name appears, sequentially touch the upper left and
upper right corners of the LCD panel.
Maintenance
u INSTRUCTION u
You can start/exit the Machine Maintenance in two different manners.
REFERENCE If the Machine Maintenance does not start, turn OFF the power of the RU and then
repeat steps 1 and 2 all over again.
The RU does not become READY unless it is connected to the CL (the LCD panel
reads the error message “CR Console communication error”). However, even when #1 #2
Maintenance
the RU is not connected to the CL, the Machine Maintenance can be started, for [Touch] [Touch]
instance, to set the RU’s IP address. 1/2
3.2.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance during Initialization RU IP Address
FTP Server
1. Power ON the RU. PROFECT
CS Plus
Default Gateway
Subnet Mask
©2018 FUJIFILM Corporation
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-5
MU-6
3.2.2 Starting the Machine Maintenance in READY State 3.2.3 Exiting the Machine Maintenance
1. Touch the utility button, and then sequentially touch the upper left and n When the [Return] Button Is Not Displayed in the Lower Left
upper right corners of the LCD panel.
Corner of the LCD Panel
#2 #3
[Touch] [Touch] Maintenance
1. Turn OFF the power of the RU and back ON.
1/2
2. Check the following points.
RU IP Address
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
FTP Server
Default Gateway l There is no error occurrence.
Subnet Mask
n When the [Return] Button Is Displayed in the Lower Left Corner
of the LCD Panel
#1
[Touch]
1. Touch the [Return] button.
u INSTRUCTION u
If the Machine Maintenance will not start, touch the [Return] button to exit the
User Utility, and repeat the above step all over again.
#1
[Touch]
2. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
l There is no error occurrence.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-6
MU-7
3.3 Details of Machine Maintenance 3. Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be
modified, and touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits.
The Machine Maintenance offers a maintenance tool used by the service engineer for
servicing. 172 016 001 010
#1
Its items are operated on the LCD panel of the RU. 1 2 3
1 2 3 Touch the [BS] key to delete digits.
4 5 6
7 8 9
4 5 6 172 016 001 010
3.3.1 RU IP Address
0 BS
Cancel OK
7 8 9
1 2 3
Used to set the IP address of the RU. 0 BS
4 5 6
n Function
Cancel OK
17 28 39
Set the IP address of the RU into the flash memory on the CPU39A board of the RU. 40 5 6
BS
REFERENCES
172 016 001 011
#2
7 8 9
Sequentially touch
1 2 3
4 5 6 1 2 3 Cancel OK
- Upon touching the [OK] button, the setting that has been made becomes effective. 7
0
8
BS
9
4 5 6 "1",0"7", "2", "0",
BS "1", "6", "0", "0",
- By factory default for the CPU39A board, the IP address of the RU is set to Cancel OK
7 8 9
, "1", "0", "1", "1" on the ten-key
"172.016.001.010". 0 BS
padCancel
to enter aOKvalue.
Cancel OK
n Procedures: Example where the IP address of the RU is set to 1 2 3
"172.016.001.011" 172
4
016
5
001 011
6
1. Start the Machine Maintenance. REFERENCES 71 82 93
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance} - To correct the setting, erase
04
it5 with BSthe
6
[BS] key and then enter a new one.
- To set the IP address ofCancel
7the RU8 toOK"172.16.1.11",
9 enter all the digits in the form
2. Touch the [RU IP Address] button. of "172.016.001.011". 0 BS
4.
Maintenance
Cancel OK
1/2
Touch the [OK] button.
RU IP Address
FTP Server
#1
Default Gateway
Subnet Mask
[RU IP Address]
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 BS
Cancel OK
#1
[OK]
5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-7
MU-8
3.3.2 FTP Server 3. Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be
Used to set the IP address of the FTP server. modified, and touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits.
n Function 172 016 001 020
#1
Touch the [BS] key to delete digits.
1 2 3
1 2 3
Set the IP address of the FTP server that contains HISTORY.LOG, ERROR.LOG, and
4 5 6
7 8 9
172 016 001 020
configuration information, among others, into the flash memory on the CPU39A board 0 BS 4 5 6
of the RU.
Cancel OK
7 8 9
1 2 3
0 BS
REFERENCES 4 5 6
Cancel OK
- Upon touching the [OK] button, the setting that has been made becomes effective. 17 28 39
- By factory default for the CPU39A board, the IP address of the FTP server is set to 40 5 6
BS
"172.016.001.020". 172 016 001 021
#2
7 8 9
Sequentially touch
1 2 3
4 5 6 1 2 3 Cancel OK
7 8 9
"1",0"7", "2", "0",
BS "1", "6", "0", "0",
n Procedures: Example where the IP address of the FTP server is 0
Cancel
BS
OK
4 5 6
, "1", "0", "2", "1" on the ten-key
set to "172.016.001.021"
7 8 9
0 BS
padCancel
to enter aOKvalue.
1. Start the Machine Maintenance. Cancel OK
1 2 3
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance} 172 016 001 021
4 5 6
2. Touch the [FTP Server] button. REFERENCES 1
7 2
8 3
9
Maintenance
1/2
- The Machine Maintenance 4
0
is 5not capable
6
BS
of changing inputtable items. To
RU IP Address
correct the setting, erase7 it with
8 the9[BS] key and then enter a new one.
FTP Server
Default Gateway #1 Cancel OK
- To set the IP address to 0“172.16.1.21”, enter all the digits in the form of
BS
Subnet Mask
Touch [FTP Server]. “172.016.001.021”.
Cancel OK
4. Touch the [OK] button.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 BS
Cancel OK
#1
Touch [OK].
5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-8
MU-9
3.3.3 Default Gateway 3. Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be
Used to set the IP address of the gateway when network connection is established via modified, and touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits.
the gateway.
000 000 000 000
#1
n Function Touch the [BS] key to delete digits.
1 2 3
4 5 6 1 2 3
7 8 9
000 000 000 000
When network connection is established via a gateway, the IP address of that gateway 0 BS 4 5 6
is set into the flash memory on the CPU39A board of the RU.
Cancel OK
7 8 9
1 2 3
0 BS
REFERENCES 4 5 6
Cancel OK
- Upon touching the [OK] button, the setting that has been made becomes effective. 1
7 2
8 3
9
- By factory default for the CPU39A board, the IP address of the gateway is set to 4 5 6
0 BS
"000.000.000.000". 172 016 250 001
#2
- If the gateway is not used, its IP address should be set to "000.000.000.000". 1
4
2
5
3
6 1 2 3
7
Sequentially
Cancel
8
OK
9
touch
7
0
8
BS
9
4 5 6 "1", 0"7", "2", "0",
BS "1", "6",
"2", "5", "0", "0", "0", "1" on the ten-key
n Procedures: Example where the IP address of the gateway is set
Cancel OK
7 8 9
padCancel
to enter aOKvalue.
to "172.016.250.001"
0 BS
Cancel OK
1. Start the Machine Maintenance. 1
172 016
2
250
3
001
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance} 4 5 6
REFERENCES 1
7 2
8 3
9
2. Touch the [Default Gateway] button.
- The Machine Maintenance 4
0
is 5not capable
BS6
of changing inputtable items. To
Maintenance
correct the setting, erase7 it with
8 the9[BS] key and then enter a new one.
1/2 Cancel OK
RU IP Address - To set the IP address to 0“172.16.250.1”,
BS
enter all the digits in the form of
#1 “172.016.250.001”.
FTP Server
Default Gateway
Subnet Mask
[Default Gateway] Cancel OK
4. Touch the [OK] button.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 BS
Cancel OK
#1
Touch [OK].
5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-9
MU-10
3.3.4 Subnet Mask 3. Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be
Used to set the mask address of the subnet. modified, and touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits.
n Function 255 255 000 000
#1
Touch the [BS] key to delete digits.
1 2 3
1 2 3
Set the mask address of the subnet into the flash memory on the CPU39A board of
4 5 6
7 8 9
255 255 000 000
the RU. 0 BS 4 5 6
Cancel OK
7 8 9
REFERENCES 0 BS
1 2 3
- Upon touching the [OK] button, the setting that has been made becomes effective. Cancel OK
4 5 6
- By factory default for the CPU39A board, the subnet mask address is set to 1
7 2
8 3
9
"255.255.000.000". 4 5 6
0 BS
- If the subnet mask is not used, its address should be set to "255.255.000.000". 172 128 000 000
#2
7 8 9
Sequentially touch
1 2 3
4 5 6 1 2 3 Cancel OK
7 8 9
"1", 0"7", "2", "0",
BS "2", "8",
n Procedures: Example where the subnet mask address is set to 0 BS 4 5 6
Cancel OK
7 8 9
"0", "0", "0", "0", "0", "0" on the ten-key
"172.128.000.000" 0 BS
padCancel
to enter aOKvalue.
1. Start the Machine Maintenance. Cancel OK
1 2 3
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance} 172 128 000 000
4 5 6
2. Touch the [Subnet Mask] button. REFERENCES 1
7 2
8 3
9
Maintenance
- The Machine Maintenance 4
0
is 5not capable
BS6
of changing inputtable items. To
correct the setting, erase7 it with the9[BS] key and then enter a new one.
1/2
RU IP Address 8
Cancel OK
#1 - To set the IP address to 0“172.128.0.0”, enter all the digits in the form of
FTP Server
BS
Default Gateway
Subnet Mask
[Subnet Mask] “172.128.000.000”.
Cancel OK
4. Touch the [OK] button.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 BS
Cancel OK
#1
Touch [OK].
5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-10
MU-11
3.3.5 Secure Host 3. Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be
Used to set the IP address when you want to restrict the IP address that can be modified, and touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits.
connected to the RU via telnet.
If it is set to 0.0.0.0, connection can be established regardless of the IP address.
000 000 000 000
#1
Touch the [BS] key to delete digits.
1 2 3
1 2 3
u NOTE u
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 BS 4 5 6 000 000 000 000
Either Secure Host or Secure Net can be set. The latest setting value will be effective. Cancel OK
7 8 9
1 2 3
- If Secure Host is set, Secure Net will return to "0.0.0.0". 0 BS
- If Secure Net is set, Secure Host will return to "0.0.0.0". Cancel OK
4 5 6
1
7 2
8 3
9
4
0 5 6
BS
n Function 172 016 001 100
#2
7 8 9
Sequentially touch
1 2 3
1 2 3 Cancel OK
By restricting the IP address, connection can be established with the RU via telnet
4 5 6
7 8 9
"1", 0"7", "2", "0",
BS "1", "6",
only from a specific PC; thus, a certain level of security can be achieved. 0 BS 4 5 6
Cancel OK "0", "0", "1", "1", "0", "0" on the ten-key
By default, it is set to 0.0.0.0. 7 8 9
padCancel
to enter aOKvalue.
0 BS
n Procedures: Example where the address of Secure Host is set to Cancel OK
1 2 3
"172.16.1.100" 172 016 001 100
4 5 6
1. Start the Machine Maintenance. REFERENCES 1
7 2
8 3
9
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance} - The Machine Maintenance 4
0
is 5not capable
BS6
of changing inputtable items. To
correct the setting, erase7 it with
8 the9[BS] key and then enter a new one.
2. Touch the [Secure Host] button. Cancel OK
- To set the IP address to 0“172.16.1.100”,
BS
enter all the digits in the form of
Maintenance
“172.016.001.100”.
2/2
Cancel OK
Secure Host
Secure Net
#1
[Secure Host] 4. Touch the [OK] button.
Network Check
HV ON/OFF
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 BS
Cancel OK
#1
Touch [OK].
5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-11
MU-12
3.3.6 Secure Net 3. Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be
Used to set the network address when you want to restrict the network address that modified, and touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits.
can be connected to the RU via telnet.
If it is set to 0.0.0.0, connection can be established from any network.
000 000 000 000
#1
Touch the [BS] key to delete digits.
1 2 3
1 2 3
u NOTE u
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 BS 4 5 6 000 000 000 000
Either Secure Host or Secure Net can be set. The latest setting value will be effective. Cancel OK
7 8 9
1 2 3
- If Secure Host is set, Secure Net will return to "0.0.0.0". 0 BS
- If Secure Net is set, Secure Host will return to "0.0.0.0". Cancel OK
4 5 6
1
7 2
8 3
9
4
0 5 6
BS
n Function 172 016 000 000
#2
7 8 9
Sequentially touch
1 2 3
1 2 3 Cancel OK
By restricting the network address, connection cannot be established with the RU via
4 5 6
7 8 9
"1", 0"7", "2", "0",
BS "1", "6",
telnet beyond the scope of the network address; thus, a certain level of security can 0 BS 4 5 6
"0", "0", "0", "0", "0", "0" on the ten-key
be achieved.
Cancel OK
7 8 9
padCancel
to enter aOKvalue.
If it is set to "172.16.0.0", connection can be established with the RU via telnet from IP 0 BS
addresses 172.16.0.0 through 172.16.255.255. Cancel OK
1 2 3
n Procedures: Example where the address of Secure Host is set to 172
4
016
5
000 000
6
"172.016.000.000" REFERENCES 1
7 2
8 3
9
1. - The Machine Maintenance is 5not capable of changing inputtable items. To
4
0 BS6
Start the Machine Maintenance.
correct the setting, erase7 it with
8 the9[BS] key and then enter a new one.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance} Cancel
- To set the IP address to 0“172.16.0.0”,
OK
enter all the digits in the form of
BS
“172.016.000.000”.
2. Touch the [Secure Net] button. - When setting Secure Net, any value
Cancel OK entered in the last column will be
Maintenance considered as "0". For example, when entering "255.255.255.10", the address
Secure Host
2/2
will become "255.255.255.0" after reopening the Secure Net window.
Secure Net
Network Check
#1
HV ON/OFF
[Secure Net]
4. Touch the [OK] button.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 BS
Cancel OK
#1
Touch [OK].
5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-12
MU-13
3.3.7 Network Check 3. Touch the [Check] button.
Used to check, from the RU, the network connection with the FTP server and gateway. Network Check
#1
FTP Server
Default Gateway
n Function [Check]
Issue PING command from the RU to the PC that is used as the FTP server and to Check
the gateway to check the network connection.
n Procedures: Example where the settings are such that the FTP #2
server is connected and the gateway is not used
Network Check
[Check]
FTP Server
Default Gateway
1. Start the Machine Maintenance. ● GOOD indication
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance} FTP Server OK
Check
Default Gateway OK or Not in Use
2. Touch the [Network Check] button.
● NO GOOD indication
FTP Server Error
Maintenance
2/2
Secure Host
Secure Net
Default Gateway Error
Network Check
HV ON/OFF
#1
[Network Check] u INSTRUCTION u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, remedy the error with reference to the
Troubleshooting Volume.
{Troubleshooting}
4. Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-13
MU-14
3.3.8 HV ON/OFF
n Function
Turn ON or OFF the HV switch (software switch).
REFERENCE
If the high-voltage switch of the CPU39A is set to OFF, the HV switch (software switch)
cannot be set to ON (although its button is selectable).
n Procedures: Example where the HV switch (software switch) is
turned OFF
1. Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
2. Touch the [HV ON/OFF] button.
Maintenance
2/2
Secure Host
Secure Net HV ON/OFF
#1
Network Check
HV ON/OFF
[HV ON/OFF]
3. Touch
OFF the button to select "OFF".
HV ON/OFF
OFF
Cancel OK
Cancel OK
4. Touch the [OK] button.
HV ON/OFF
OFF
Cancel OK
#1
[OK]
5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-14
MU-15
4. RU PC-TOOL n Tree of RU PC-TOOL
RU PC-TOOL
EACH RU SETTING
4.1 Functions of RU PC-TOOL
CONNECTION TEST
RU PC-TOOL offers a maintenance tool designed exclusively for the service engineer.
Operations, such as installing the RU software and checking connection from the CL {MU:4.3.1_RU NAME/RU IP ADDR}
to RU, are performed on the CL connected to the RU via the network. {MU:4.3.9_INSTALL}
{MU:4.3.2_LIST OF EXISTING RU}
4.1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Screen and Tree {MU:4.3.10_VERSION UP}
{MU:4.3.3_NEW}
n RU PC-TOOL Main Screen and RU PC-TOOL Version {MU:4.3.11_EDIT HISTORY}
{MU:4.3.4_DELETE }
Confirmation
{MU:4.3.12_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
{MU:4.3.5_MUTL}
RU PC-TOOLのバージョン
RU PC-TOOL Ver.7.4 {MU:4.3.13_EDIT CL NAME}
Configuration(C) Operation(O)
{MU:4.3.6_PING}
EACH RU SETTING {MU:4.3.14_BACKUP}
CONNECTION TEST {MU:4.3.7_MON}
RU NAME ru0 LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION NEW {MU:4.3.15_RESTORE}
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10 ru0 172.16.1.10 PROFECT V1.0 {MU:4.3.8_FTP}
MUTL PING MON FTP DELETE {MU:4.3.16_I/O TRACE EXPERT}
INSTALL VERSION UP EDIT HISTORY EDIT CONFIGURATION {MU:4.3.17_ERROR DB}
EDIT CL NAME
BACKUP RESTORE
Configuration
ERROR LOG
{MU:4.4.1_CDPath}
EXECUTE EXECUTE
I/O TRACE EXPERT ERROR DB
Operation
{MU:4.5.1_Initialize APL}
License
{MU:4.6.1_Key Regist.}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-15
MU-16
4.1.2 “Maintenance is in progress” Message Display by the n Resetting the Message “Maintenance is in progress”
LCD Panel
The blinking message “Maintenance is in progress” disappears from the top of the
“Maintenance is in progress” is displayed on the LCD and the LED blinks to indicate LCD panel and the LED blinks when you turn the RU power OFF and then back ON.
that a maintenance is being performed. Normal operation including reading can be
perform under this condition.
n Conditions Under Which the Message “Maintenance is in
progress” Appears
When a command for changing the contents of the flash memory is executed.
n Notes on the Message “Maintenance is in progress”
When you execute a command from the RU PC-TOOL to change the contents of the
flash memory, the blinking message “Maintenance is in progress” appears at the top
of the LCD panel.
RU PC-TOOL
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU IP ADDR
A command for changing
BACKUP RESTORE
the contents of the flash memory
is executed
RU’s LCD panel
Message “Maintenance is in progress”
appears.
The following commands are used to change the contents of the flash memory:
- MUTL - INSTALL
- VERSION UP - EDIT CONFIGURATION
- EDIT CL NAME - RESTORE
REFERENCE
If the Machine Maintenance is started at the time of initialization and a command is
executed to change the contents of the flash memory, the message “Maintenance is in
progress” does not appear.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-16
MU-17
4.1.3 RU PC-TOOL Error Screen Display
n Conditions Under Which the Error Screen Opens
A command for changing the contents of the flash memory is executed while the RU is
running.
REFERENCE
The RU is running in the following states:
- The RU is being initialized.
- The RU is performing a “read”, “primary erasure”, or “secondary erasure” process.
- The User Utility is started by the RU.
Notes on the Error Screen Display
n
If you attempt to execute a command for changing the contents of the flash memory
while the RU is running, the Error screen appears on the CL.
In the above instance, the command for changing the contents of the flash memory
will not be executed.
CAUTION
If you execute a command for changing the contents of the flash memory while
the RU is running, the program stored in the flash memory becomes damaged
so that the RU cannot restart.
The following commands are used to access the flash memory:
- MUTL - INSTALL
- VERSION UP - EDIT CONFIGURATION
- EDIT CL NAME - RESTORE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-17
MU-18
4.2 Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL 4.2.2 Exiting RU PC-TOOL
1. Click on located in the upper right corner of the Main Screen of RU
4.2.1 Starting RU PC-TOOL PC-TOOL.
1. Power ON the RU and CL.
2. Press the [Windows] key to open the Start menu of Windows.
3. Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows.When the dialog
opens, type [“C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\
RuPCTool.exe”] and click on the [OK] button.
2. Power OFF the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-18
MU-19
4.3 Details of RU PC-TOOL 4.3.2 LIST OF EXISTING RU
4.3.1 RU NAME/RU IP ADDR
n Function
Display the list of RU's that have their folders in the FTP server.
n Function Note that if nothing is displayed in the "RU TYPE" field, it means that its corresponding
RU has not been installed normally.
Display the RU name for the RU selected in "LIST OF EXISTING RU" and the IP
address of the RU. u INSTRUCTION u
To register a RU in "LIST OF EXISTING RU", enter the RU name and IP address of For the RU where nothing is displayed in its "RU TYPE", uninstall it and then install it
the RU. all over again.
n Procedures: Example where settings are made to set the RU
name as "ru7" and IP address as "172.16.1.11"
1. Click on the [NEW] button.
REFERENCE
"VERSION" may appear in red.
This indicates that the RU software has not been version updated.
Perform a version update as needed.
2. Enter the RU name and IP address of the RU.
REFERENCE
Pressing the Tab key causes the input cursor to move to the next item.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-19
MU-20
4.3.3 NEW 4.3.5 MUTL
Used to start MUTL of the RU.
n Function
Cancel the selected state of "LIST OF EXISTING RU" and clear the values for "RU n Function
NAME" and "RU IP ADDR" to enable them to be registered anew. Start MUTL for the RU selected in "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
MUTL offers functions for diagnosing and adjusting the RU, such as adjustments of
4.3.4 DELETE the reading start position and reading width, as well as board and mechanical checks.
n Function n Procedures: Example where MUTL is started on the RU with
For the RU selected in "LIST OF EXISTING RU", delete its folder in the FTP server,
"ru7" and "172.16.1.110"
and delete it from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU.
2. Click on the [MUTL] button.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-20
MU-21
4.3.6 PING 3. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window.
Used to execute the "PING" command from the CL to the RU to check whether the
network is connected.
n Function
Execute PING to the device having the IP address displayed in "RU IP ADDR".
REFERENCES
- If a network device of the IP address specified is found over the network to which
the CL is connected, the result of execution is OK.
- Machine Maintenance provides the capability of executing PING from the RU to the
FTP server and gateway. REFERENCE
"Lost = (0% loss)" means that there is no problem as a result of executing the
n Procedures: Example where PING is executed to the RU with PING command. If other than "(0% loss)", it is a sign that there was some
problem.
"ru7" and "172.16.1.110"
1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU.
l [GOOD indication]
If the following message appears, the result is normal.
| Ping statistics for 172.16.1.110: |
| Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
l [NO GOOD indication]
Other than above (the IP address is the IP address of the RU selected).
2. Click on the [PING] button. u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{Troubleshooting}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-21
MU-22
4.3.7 MON l I/O name
Used to display the status when the sensor of the RU changes its status. The I/O name is displayed.
Symbol Name
n Function SA1, 7, 13, 19 Cassette ejection sensor
Display the status when the I/O of the RU changes its status. SA2, 8, 14, 20 Cassette IN sensor
In addition to "OPEN" and "CLOSE", the barcode, if read, is also displayed. SA3, 9, 15, 21 Cassette hold sensor
The status changes for the sensors, switches, and BCRs are displayed, although ON SA4, 10, 16, 22 Suction cup HP sensor
or OFF is not displayed for the motors.
SA5, 11, 17, 23 Suction sensor
SA6, 12, 18, 24 Inch/metric sensor
SB1, 2, 3, 4 IP feed/load sensor (cassette side)
SB5 Pre-BCR IP sensor
SB6 Pre-convergence IP sensor
SB7 8, 9 Path changeover shelf sensor
SB10 Convergence path changeover sensor
SB11 Path changeover HP sensor
SC1 Side-positioning mechanism HP sensor
SC2 Grip release HP sensor
SC3 Side-positioning IP sensor
SC4 Cleaning guide HP sensor
SZ2 Driving-side grip release HP sensor
SZ3 Driven-side grip release HP sensor
SZ4 Dust-removal HP sensor
SZ5 IP stopper HP sensor
SD1 Grip release HP sensor
SD2 Post-reading conveyance IP sensor
SE1 Post-reading conveyance standby IP sensor
SE2 Switchback standby IP sensor
SE4 Erasure side-positioning mechanism HP sensor
SE5 Grip release HP sensor
SG1 Side-positioning entrance IP sensor
SG2 "11x14 IP" determination sensor
LDSN1, LDSN2, LDSN3,
Unlit sensor
LDSN4, LDSN5
24TSW Safety thermostat (lamp)
FOPN1 INV fuse 1
FOPN2 INV fuse 2
BCR0 Conveyance path barcode
BCRA1, 2, 3, 4 Barcode reader
BCR1, BCR2, BCR3, BCR4 Barcode per shelf
* The SZ1 (IP leading edge sensor) status changes will not be displayed.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-22
MU-23
l Status n Procedures
Either of OPEN, CLOSE, ON, OFF, or READ is displayed.
1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU.
l Other information
Barcode information is displayed when the barcode is read.
l Status changed time
The time when the I/O status has changed is displayed.
n Operation of Monitor Window
The text displayed on the Monitor window is selectable by dragging the mouse. 2. Click on the [MON] button.
The text selected may be copied, cut, pasted, or deleted.
If the display is too crowded to see well, you may delete unnecessary portions of text.
3. Click on the [START] button.
→ When the RU is operated under this condition, display items are added whenever
I/O has changed.
REFERENCE
When the power of the RU is turned OFF, the monitor function is disabled.
However, the items displayed within the Monitor window are left unchanged.
To enable the monitor function, close the Monitor window and open it again, and
click on the [START] button.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-23
MU-24
4.3.8 FTP
Used to access the FTP server from the CL and RU, respectively, to verify that the
FTP server is operating.
n Function
On the CL, execute the command to access the FTP server to check whether the
service of the FTP server is running.
Additionally, execute the RU software in a remote fashion to access the FTP server
from the RU and check whether the service of the FTP server is running.
n Procedures: Example where the FTP is checked for the RU with
"ru10" and "172.16.1.10"
1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU to check the FTP server,
and click on the [FTP] button.
l [GOOD indication]
The screen display where the FTP server is accessed on the CL is presented below.
OK value=0=0x0
The screen display where the FTP server is accessed from the RU is presented
below.
l [NO GOOD indication]
Other than above.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-24
MU-25
4.3.9 INSTALL u NOTES u
Used to install the RU software to the RU selected from "LIST OF EXISTING RU" or - Never turn OFF the RU power during installation. If you turn OFF the RU power
to the RU with "RU NAME" and "RU IP ADDR" entered. during installation, the RU fails to start up because the contents of the flash ROM
Also used to create, in the FTP server, a folder for the RU to be installed. become damaged.
- When install is performed for the RU where its board(s) has been replaced, check to
n Function see whether the settings on the CPU board are correct. When install is performed,
RU PC-TOOL reads the DIP SW settings on the CPU board to determine the device
l Recognize the device type to be installed type of the RU. If the settings are incorrect, improper software will be installed,
resulting in failure to boot.
In order to enable selection of software corresponding to the device type during install,
the RU with the IP address of "RU IP ADDR" is accessed, before starting the install
procedure, to recognize the device type of the RU. n Procedures
RU PC-TOOL reads the DIP SW setting on the CPU board of the RU accessed to
identify its device type. For more detail on the procedures, see the Installation volume.
{IN:8_Installing the RU Software}
l Select the software version
After recognizing the device type to be installed, a list of installable ones of the
software packages contained in the CD-ROM is displayed.
l Select software display language
The language displayed on the LCD panel of the RU can be set.
l Select "BRAND TYPE"
Because "BRAND TYPE" of the machine differs depending upon its destination,
"BRAND TYPE" to be displayed on the LCD panel of the RU is selected by choosing
the destination during install.
l Set configuration information
Some of the RU configuration information is set, such as "HOST IP ADDRESS" and
identification code (one alphabetic character, from A through Z, is displayed on output
film).
l Register the master CL
The CL (master CL) that controls the RU is written into the flash ROM on the IMG
board of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-25
MU-26
4.3.10 VERSION UP u NOTES u
Used to execute RU software version updates to the RU selected in "LIST OF - Never turn OFF the RU power during a version update. If any other operation is
EXISTING RU". performed during version update, the contents of the flash ROM will be corrupted,
so that the RU will no longer boot up.
n Function - When version update is performed for the RU where its board(s) has been replaced,
check to see whether the settings on the CPU board are correct. When version
l Recognize the device type to be version updated update is performed, RU PC-TOOL reads the DIP SW settings on the CPU board to
In order to enable selection of software corresponding to the device type during determine the device type of the RU. If the settings are incorrect, improper software
version update, the RU with the IP address of "RU IP ADDR" is accessed, before will be version updated, resulting in failure to boot.
starting the version update procedure, to recognize the device type of the RU.
RU PC-TOOL reads the DIP SW setting on the CPU board of the RU accessed to REFERENCE
identify its device type. "VERSION" may appear in red.
l Select the software version This indicates that the RU software has not been version updated.
Perform a version update as needed.
After recognizing the device type to be version updated, a list of version-updatable
ones of the software packages contained in the CD-ROM is displayed.
n Procedures
For more detail on the procedures, see the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
Parts volume.
{MC:14._Updating Software Versions}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-26
MU-27
4.3.11 EDIT HISTORY n Detail on TOTAL PROCESSING COUNTER
Used to view the HISTORY information of the RU and clear its value.
Information, such as the number of IPs processed by the RU and lighting time of the
erasure lamp, is displayed.
When units are replaced, their information may be reset.
n Function
The following three types of information are displayed, and they may be edited.
l “All Profect History” tab screen
PROCESSING COUNTER
The number of IPs processed by the RU, according to the IP size.
Image reading, secondary erasure, and primary erasure are all subject to
counting.
LASER
Lighting time and lighting count for the laser of the scanner unit.
Image reading, secondary erasure, and primary erasure, as well as lighting
activated in MUTL, are subject to counting.
ERASURE LAMP
Lighting time and lighting count for the erasure lamp.
Image reading, secondary erasure, and primary erasure, as well as lighting
activated in MUTL, are subject to counting.
Lighting time and lighting count for preheating are also subject to counting.
l “Minor Change History” tab screen
PUMP
l “RESET”
Number of times pump on each shelf has been used.
Image reading, secondary erasure, and primary erasure, as well as lighting Each item in "PROCESSING COUNTER" is cleared.
activated in MUTL, are subject to counting. l “SINCE”
THE ERASUER LAMP CLEANING When the "RESET" button is clicked, the system date is entered.
Number of times erase lamp was lit for IP erasing after cleaning was performed A specific date may be entered manually.
for erase lamp. l “TOTAL PROCESSING COUNTER”
u NOTES u The number of image reading, secondary erasure, and primary erasure executed
- Information marked by * in the illustration is reflected in the Equipment is counted according to the IP size, and the resulting total is displayed in "ALL IP
Information that can be checked via the User Utility of the RU. SIZES".
- When the data is updated by EDIT HISTORY and then the "SET" or "RESET"
button is clicked, it is reflected in the Equipment Information of the RU.
The LCD panel display is updated at the time when the User Utility screen is
switched to another or when the RU power is turned OFF and back ON.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-27
MU-28
n Detail on LASER n Detail on ERASURE LAMP
l “RESET”
Each item in "LASER" is cleared.
l “SINCE”
When the "RESET" button is clicked, the system date is entered.
A specific date may be entered manually.
l “RESET”
l “TOTAL TIME FOR THE LASER ON”
Each item in "ERASURE LAMP" is cleared.
Lighting time for the erasure lamp.
l “SINCE”
l “TOTAL COUNT FOR THE LASER ON”
When the "RESET" button is clicked, the system date is entered.
Lighting count for the erasure lamp. A specific date may be entered manually.
l “TOTAL TIME FOR THE ERASURE LAMP LIGHTING”
Lighting time for the erasure lamp.
l “TOTAL COUNT FOR THE ERASURE LAMP LIGHTING”
Lighting count for the erasure lamp.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-28
MU-29
n Detail on PUMP n Detail on THE ERASURE LAMP CLEANING
l “SHELF” (1-4)
When it si clicked, the value of "SHELF"(1-4) is cleared. l “RESET”
Each item in "THE ERASUER LAMP CLEANING" is cleared.
l “RESET”
The value of the corresponding shelf is cleared. l “SINCE”
When the "RESET" button is clicked, the system date is entered.
A specific date may be entered manually.
l “TOTAL COUNT FOR THE IP ERASING”
Total count for the IP erasing.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-29
MU-30
4.3.12 EDIT CONFIGURATION n Function
Used to edit the configuration information for the RU.
However, the configuration information (such as IP address of the RU) that is set in l Identification code of the RU
Machine Maintenance cannot be set with EDIT CONFIGURATION. When multiple units of the RU are used, an identification code (one alphanumeric
Some of the RU configuration information is written into the FTP server, as well as into digit) is set to allow the user to confirm, on the film, the RU that has performed image
the flash ROM of the RU. reading.
n EDIT CONFIGURATION Screen l Erasure mode
u NOTE u An erasure mode that is selectable by the erasure mode SW of the RU is set.
While the flash ROM of the RU is being updated, the panel of the RU lights up. During Example) When “ERASE1, ERASE2” is set:
that time, do not power OFF the RU. By selecting the erasure mode SW, either secondary erasure or primary
If it is powered OFF, the contents of the flash ROM will be corrupted, so that the RU erasure may be selected.
will no longer boot up.
l Erasure mode unsetting time
RU PC-TOOL / CONFIG
RU Configuration Setting
Set the time, in seconds, from when the erasure mode setting is changed to when it
EQUIPMENT CODE (A-Z) A
RU identification code reverts back to the "reading" mode.
RANGE OF ERASE MODE ERASE1,ERASE2 Erasure mode When "0" is set, it remains changed.
ERASE MODE TIME OUT (0-999 [s]) 20 Erasure mode unsetting time
l Alarm setting for cassette setting
ALARM (CASSETTE SET) ON
Alarm setting when the cassette is set
WARNING OF OVERXRAY LOG & MESSAGE A setting is made to determine whether or not to sound an alarm when a cassette is
Alarm setting for overexposed IP set.
WARMING OF LAMP LIFE LOG ONLY
CONDITION OF FRASE LAMP NO DISP
- “ON” (default): An alarm is sounded.
CLEANING
- “OFF”: An alarm is not sounded.
CANCEL SET
RU PC-TOOL / CONFIG l Alarm setting for overexposed IP
ALARM (CASSETTE SET) ON Alarm setting for lamp life - LOG&MESSAGE: Written into the log file with an error message displayed.
WARNING OF OVERXRAY LOG & MESSAGE
Alarm setting for erase lamp cleaning - LOG ONLY: Only written into the log file.
WARMING OF LAMP LIFE LOG ONLY
- NONE: Nothing is done.
CONDITION OF ERASE LAMP 10000
NO DISP
CLEANING Alarm setting for erase lamp cleaning
CONDITION OF ERASE LAMP
CLEANING(FREE INPUT)
10000
270,000
(free input) l Alarm setting for lamp life
CONDITION OF PUMP LIFE 10000
270,000
Alarm setting for pump life - LOG&MESSAGE: Written into the log file with an error message displayed.
CONDITION OF PUMP 10000
- LOG ONLY(default): Only written into the log file.
CLEANING (FREE INPUT)
WARNING OF S VALUE 10000& MESSAGE
LOG
Alarm setting for pump cleaning (free input)
Warning of abnormal S value
WARNING OF LD LIFE 10000& MESSAGE
LOG
Warning of laser life
CANCEL SET
When it is clicked, the setting When it is clicked, the setting
that has been changed is lost. that has been made becomes effective.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-30
MU-31
l Alarm setting for erase lamp cleaning l Warning of laser life
Set the timing to display the alarm for cleaning the erase lamp. Set what to do about laser life warning.
- “NO DISP” (default): The alarm will not be displayed. - “LOG ONLY (default)” : Write into the error log only.
- “LOG & MESSAGE” : Write into the error log, and display error message.
- “90,000”: The alarm is displayed after the erase lamp is lighted up
90,000 times.
- “45,000”: The alarm is displayed after the erase lamp is lighted up
45,000 times.
- “180,000”: The alarm is displayed after the erase lamp is lighted up
180,000 times.
- “FREE INPUT”: Enter a value for “CONDITION OF ERASE LAMP
CLEANING (FREE INPUT)”
l Alarm setting for erase lamp cleaning (free input)
Enter a value for the timing to clean the erasure lamp (only when “FREE INPUT” is
selected at “CONDITION OF ERASE LAMP CLEANING”).
l Alarm setting for pump life
Set the timing to display alarm for pump life.
- “NO DISP” (default): The alarm will not be displayed.
- “90,000”: The alarm is displayed after the pump works 90,000 times.
- “180,000”: The alarm is displayed after the pump works 180,000 times.
- “270,000”: The alarm is displayed after the pump works 270,000 times.
- “FREE INPUT”: Enter a value for “CONDITION OF PUMP CLEANING
(FREE INPUT)”.
l Alarm setting for pump cleaning (free input)
Enter a value for the timing to display the alarm for lamp cleaning (only when “FREE
INPUT” is selected at “CONDITION OF PUMP LIFE”).
l Warning of abnormal S value
Set what to do about S value warning.
- “LOG ONLY (default)” : Write into the error log only.
- “LOG & MESSAGE” : Write into the error log, and display error message.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-31
MU-32
4.3.13 EDIT CL NAME l Procedures for editing/adding the CL as image transfer destination
Used to edit/add the CL as an image transfer destination, and edit the list of master
CL's. 1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the list of CL's as
image transfer destinations is to be edited or added, and click on the
n Editing/Adding the CL as Image Transfer Destination [EDIT CL NAME] button.
l Overview
Edit and/or add the CL as an image transfer destination of the RU. Up to 32 CL's may
be registered as image transfer destinations. When the Information button is pressed,
"CL NAME" of the CL registered is displayed on the LCD screen during image reading.
2. To edit, click on the [MODIFY] button; to add, click on the [NEW]
button.
Up to 32 CL's may be registered
as image transfer destinations.
CL-A
CL-B CL-C CL-D CL-E
3. Enter "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME", and click on the [SET] button.
(master CL)
u INSTRUCTION u
Enter IP ADDRESS of the CL to be connected with the RU.
RU-A Transfer destination of image read
CL0
The image transfer destination is
displayed on the LCD screen
during reading.
RU-A
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-32
MU-33
n Editing the List of Master CL's l Procedures for editing the list of master CL's
l Overview 1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the list of master
CL's is to be edited, and click on the [EDIT CL NAME] button.
Edit the list of master CL's. Of the CL's registered as image transfer destinations, the
CL registered in the "MASTER CL" field is switchable as the master CL. Up to four
CL's may be registered in the "MASTER CL" field.
When switched to the master CL, "CL NAME" of the CL registered is displayed on the
LCD screen.
2. Select a CL to be added, and add it to the list of master CL's.
n Switching the Master CL
Switch the master CL.
u NOTE u
Do not switch the master CL, except in case of emergency or machine trouble. If the
master CL is switched, data that is necessary for the user, such as "ERROR LOG"
and "HISTORY LOG", will be lost.
For the procedures for switching the master CL, see "Appendix 2. Setting the Master
CL" of the Installation volume.
{IN: Appendix 2._Setting the Master CL}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-33
MU-34
4.3.14 BACKUP n Overview
This function copies the configuration information and error log data from the RU to You can select a backup location (by specifying the drive and directory) after an item
the FTP server, and from the FTP server to any folder. for backup is chosen. Note that drives and directories recognized by the CL are
selectable.
n Backup Items
l “LOG ALL”
All data including error log, trace log (design analysis information), history data
(processing counter, erase lamp lighting time), configuration data and IOT data are
backed up.
l “SCN ALL DATA”
All scanner data is backed up.
l “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA”
Of the scanner data, light-collecting data is backed up.
l “SCN OPTICAL DATA”
Of the scanner data, optical data is backed up.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-34
MU-35
n Procedures for BACKUP 4.3.15 RESTORE
For details on the backup procedure, see under “22. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure” This function installs the configuration information and machine-specific data from
in the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment volume. the folder into the RU-specific data area of the FTP server and copies it from the FTP
{MC:22._BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure} server to the flash ROM of the RU.
REFERENCE
n Errors That May Occur during BACKUP and Their Probable The contents copied into the flash ROM become effective when the RU is reset.
Causes
n Restore Items
l RU is not connected
If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established l “CONFIGURATION”
with the RU, the following error message appears.
Configuration data is restored.
In that case, check the network connection, and then power ON the RU.
l “HISTORY LOG”
History data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time) is restored.
l “SCN ALL DATA”
All scanner data is restored.
l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA (FRONT ONLY)":
The scanner data for only the upper light-collecting system is restored.
l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA (REAR ONLY)":
The scanner data for only the lower light-collecting system is restored.
l “SCN OPTICAL DATA”
Of the scanner data, optical data is restored.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-35
MU-36
n Overview n Procedures for RESTORE
You can select a location in which the data to be restored exists (by specifying For details on the restore procedure, see under “23. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure”
the drive and directory) after an item for restore is chosen. Note that drives and in the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment volume.
directories recognized by the CL are selectable. {MC:22._BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure}
n Errors That May Occur during RESTORE and Their Probable
Causes
l RU is not connected
If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established
with the RU, the following error message appears.
In that case, check the network connection, and then power ON the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-36
MU-37
4.3.16 I/O TRACE EXPERT l 4 I/O name display text box
This function displays the I/O trace data in the form of phase chart or timing chart. The I/O name is displayed.
Note, however, that only I/O trace data may be displayed but communication-related
trace data cannot be displayed. l 5 Chart display area
The timing chart is displayed. With the scroll bar available, the display range may be
n Timing Chart Screen moved by manipulating the scroll bar.
l 6 "Measure Point (Unit: msec)" area
By placing the mouse pointer in the chart area and pressing the left or right button of
the mouse, the following values are displayed in the A, B, and A-B fields.
- A: Time elapsed from power ON to the position pointed by the left mouse button.
- B: Time elapsed from power ON to the position pointed by the right mouse button.
- A-B: Time difference between positions A and B.
When the "CLEAR" button is clicked, the values in the A, B, and A-B fields are cleared.
l 1 "FILE OPEN" button
The file that has been set in the "Path" text box is displayed on the Timing Chart
screen.
l 2 "Path" text box
The path of IOT.LOG to be displayed as the timing chart is entered.
l 3 "Scale" button
The display scale for the time base (horizontal axis) is changed.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-37
MU-38
4.3.17 ERROR DB Item name Function
Used to check the error names and occurrence conditions by referring to the error log 1 “SELECT” button A error log file to be viewed is selected.
data of the RU. Memos may be appended to error messages, or detailed information
or analysis flows may be viewed. 2 “FATAL" button
Of the error log files, only FATAL errors are
displayed.
n ERROR-DB Window Of the error log files, only WARNING errors are
3 “WARNING” button
displayed.
Both “FATAL and “WARNING” errors windows are
4 “BOTH” button
displayed.
Function of this button is disabled for this device.
5 “CLEAR” Use MULT to clear logs.
{MU:5.3[3-3]_ERROR LOG CLEAR}
The latest error log data is copied from the
6 “UPDATE”
CPU39A board of the RU to the FTP server of the CL.
The contents of the error log file selected are
7 Error message list box
displayed.
The error code selected (highlighted) in the error
8 “Error Code” text box
message list box is displayed.
The error name selected (highlighted) in the error
9 “Error Name” text box
message list box is displayed.
The occurrence condition of the error message
10 “Meaning” text box selected (highlighted) in the error message list box
is displayed.
The detail information selected (highlighted) in the
11 “Details Info.” Button
error message list box is displayed.
u NOTE u The analysis flow for the error message selected
12 “Analysis Flow” button (highlighted) in the error message list box is
For this device, the error logs are saved in RU main unit. The “CLEAR” button in displayed.
ERROR-DB window only can clear the error logs in FTP server for each RU data
region. For this reason, use MUTL function “ERROR LOG CLEAR” to clear the error A memo may be attached to the error message
logs with this device. 13 “Memo.” text box (highlighted) in the error message list box.
Up to seven memos may be entered.
{MU:5.3[3-3]_ERROR LOG CLEAR}
The name of the person (author) who entered text
14 “Author” text box
in the “Memo.” text box is entered.
The contents of “Memo.” and “Author” are saved.
15 “SAVE” button To delete them, erase them by use of the Delete
key and press the “SAVE” button again.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-38
MU-39
n Procedures: Example where the latest error log is displayed 5. Click on the [ERROR DB] button.
1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU.
2. Click on the [ERROR DB] button.
3. Click on the [UPDATE] button.
4. Click on the button.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-39
MU-40
4.4 Configuration 4. Click on the [...] button.
4.4.1 CDPath
The RU software should normally be installed from its Install CD.
If a folder that completely copies the Install CD data resides in the hard disk, you may
install the RU software from that hard disk without using the Install CD by specifying
its complete path of that folder.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- To copy the Install CD data, its entire data should be completely copied to a single
folder. If it is partially copied, install cannot be executed.
- "CDPath" setting should be made only when necessary. If "CDPath" is set, install
from the Install CD cannot be executed.
5. Click on the folder where the Install CD data has been completely
n Procedures for Setting "CDPath" copied, and leave that folder open.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
2. From the RU PC-TOOL menus, select [Configuration] - [CDPath].
3. Enter the complete path of the folder where the Install CD data has
been completely copied.
6. Click on the [OK] button.
The complete path is displayed in the text box.
Once the complete path has been entered in the text box, proceed to step 7.
To enter the complete path in a GUI manner just like the Explorer, proceed to the
next step. 7. Click on the [SET] button.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-40
MU-41
n Procedures for Canceling "CDPath"
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
2. From the RU PC-TOOL menus, select [Configuration] - [CDPath].
3. Click on the [CLEAR] button.
→ The complete path in the text box is cleared.
4. Click on the [SET] button.
→ The "CDPath" setting is canceled.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-41
MU-42
4.5 Operation
4.5.1 Initialize APL
Effects RU application initialization.
u NOTE u
Effect RU application initialization only when no error code is detectable and
processing freezes during troubleshooting.
For the procedure for RU application initialization, see “MT:Appendix 1. Procedures for
Restoring (Initializing) the Application” in the Troubleshooting volume.
{MT:Appendix 1._Procedures for Restoring (Initializing) the Application}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-42
MU-43
4.6 License
4.6.1 Key Regist.
Register the license key.
For the procedural details, see "8.5 Installing the RU Software".
{IN:8.5_Installing the RU Software}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-43
MU-44
5. MUTL (Maintenance Utility)
Functions A1
The MUTL, which offers a utility used by service engineers, is operated from the RU 0{MU:5.3 [3]_Software Check}
PC-TOOL on the CL.
Conventional CI (Character Interface) has been changed to GUI (Graphical User
0{MU:5.3 [3-1]_Ver. Display}
Interface), thereby providing substantially improved usability.
0{MU:5.3 [3-2]_MAC Address Display}
CAUTION
0{MU:5.3 [3-3]_ERROR LOG CLEAR}
After the MUTL is used, be sure to turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU at
the end.
5.1 Tree of MUTL
MUTL
0{MU:5.3 [1]_Conveyance Check}
0{MU:5.3 [4]_Virtual Image Check}
0{MU:5.3 [1-1]_Conveyance Setting}
0{MU:5.3 [4-1]_CORRECTION ST/HR}
0{MU:5.3 [1-2]_Processing Mode Setting}
0{MU:5.3 [4-2]_Virtual Image Test}
0{MU:5.3 [1-3]_Number of Conveyance Setting}
0{MU:5.3 [4-2-1]_LED Virtual Read}
0{MU:5.3 [4-2-2]_PMT Virtual Read}
0{MU:5.3 [2]_Board Check}
0{MU:5.3 [2-1]_All Board}
0{MU:5.3 [2-2]_CPU Board}
0{MU:5.3 [2-3]_SND Board}
0{MU:5.3 [2-4]_CPU Board Setting Display}
A1 A2
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-44
MU-45
A2 A3 B1
0{MU:5.3[5-6]_S-Value}
0{MU:5.3 [5]_Scanner Check}
0{MU:5.3[5-6-1]_S-Value variation display (front)}
0{MU:5.3 [5-1]_Polygon Motor}
0{MU:5.3[5-6-2]_S-Value variation display (rear)}
0{MU:5.3 [5-2]_Laser}
0{MU:5.3[5-6-3]_S-Value calculator}
0{MU:5.3 [5-3]_HV Diagnostic}
0{MU:5.3[5-6-4]_Light collecting parts replacement}
0{MU:5.3 [5-4]_Format Adjustment}
0{MU:5.3[5-6-4-1]_LED data initialization (front)}
0{MU:5.3 [5-4-1]_Manual Adjustment (FREQ)} 0{MU:5.3[5-6-4-2]_LED data initialization (rear)}
0{MU:5.3 [5-4-2]_Manual Adjustment (Pixel)}
0{MU:5.3 [5-4-3]_Default Setting (FREQ)}
0{MU:5.3 [5-4-4]_Default Setting (Pixel)}
0{MU:5.3 [5-4-5]_Optic Setting (FREQ)}
0{MU:5.3 [5-4-6]_Optic Setting (Pixel)}
0{MU:5.3 [5-4-7]_Manual Adjustment (Sub Scan Length)}
0{MU:5.3 [5-4-8]_IP Leading-Edge Adjustment (Sub-scanning)}
0{MU:5.3 [5-5]_Correction}
0{MU:5.3 [5-5-1]_Shading/Sensitivity Correction}
0{MU:5.3 [5-5-2]_Shading Speed Correction}
0{MU:5.3 [5-5-3]_Sensitivity Correction}
0{MU:5.3 [5-5-4]_Special Sensitivity Adjustment}
0{MU:5.3 [5-5-5]_Sensitivity S-Value Correction}
0{MU:5.3 [5-5-6]_Trouble shooting}
0{MU:5.3 [5-5-7]_HV ON/OFF}
A4
A3 B1
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-45
MU-46
A4 A5 B2
0{MU:5.3 [6]_Mechanical 1 Check} 0{MU:5.3 [6-4]_Side-Positioning Conveyor 2}
0{MU:5.3 [6-1]_IP Removal Unit} 0{MU:5.3 [6-4-1]_Cleaning Guide HP (MC4)}
0{MU:5.3 [6-4-2]_Cleaning Guide Position Movement (MC4)}
0{MU:5.3 [6-1-1]_Suction Cup Arm HP}
0{MU:5.3 [6-4-3]_Cleaning Guide Diagnostic}
0{MU:5.3 [6-1-2]_IP Removal (F/L)}
0{MU:5.3 [6-1-3]_Clutch}
0{MU:5.3 [6-1-4]_Pump}
0{MU:5.3 [6-5]_Sub Scanning 1}
0{MU:5.3 [6-1-5]_Valve}
0{MU:5.3 [6-1-6]_Solenoid}
0{MU:5.3 [6-5-1]_Sub-Scanning Grip HP (MZ2)}
0{MU:5.3 [6-5-2]_Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic Speed Selection}
0{MU:5.3 [6-2]_Feed/Load Unit} 0{MU:5.3 [6-5-3]_Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic (MZ2)}
0{MU:5.3 [6-5-4]_Stopper HP}
0{MU:5.3 [6-2-1]_Feed Path Change Guide} 0{MU:5.3 [6-5-5]_Stopper Movement}
0{MU:5.3 [6-2-2]_Join Path Change Guide} 0{MU:5.3 [6-5-6]_Stopper Diagnostic}
0{MU:5.3 [6-2-3]_Feed Conveyance (MB1/MB2/MC3)}
0{MU:5.3 [6-2-4]_Post-Erasure Conveyance (ME1/MB1/MB2)}
0{MU:5.3 [6-6]_Sub Scanning 2}
0{MU:5.3 [6-3]_Side-Positioning Conveyor 1}
0{MU:5.3 [6-6-1]_Dust Removal HP}
0{MU:5.3 [6-6-2]_Dust Removal Operation}
0{MU:5.3 [6-3-1]_Side-Positioning Grip HP (MC2)}
0{MU:5.3 [6-6-3]_Conveyance Motor Direction Selection}
0{MU:5.3 [6-3-2]_Side-Positioning Grip Movement (MC2)}
0{MU:5.3 [6-6-4]_Conveyance Motor Speed Selection}
0{MU:5.3 [6-3-3]_Side-Positioning Grip Diagnostic (MC2)}
0{MU:5.3 [6-6-5]_Conveyance Motor Stop/Drive}
0{MU:5.3 [6-3-4]_Side-Positioning HP (MC1)}
0{MU:5.3 [6-3-5]_Side-Positioning Size Selection}
0{MU:5.3 [6-3-6]_Side-Positioning (MC1/MC2)}
0{MU:5.3[6-7]_Conveyance Path Sensor Check}
A5 B2
A6
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-46
MU-47
A5 B3
0{MU:5.3 [7]_Mechanical 2 Check} 0{MU:5.3 [7-3]_Erasure Conveyor 2}
0{MU:5.3 [7-1]_Post-Reading Conveyor} 0{MU:5.3 [7-3-1]_Path Change Guide (SOLF1)}
0{MU:5.3 [7-3-2]_Erasure Conveyor (ME1)}
0{MU:5.3 [7-1-1]_Grip Release HP (MD1)}
0{MU:5.3 [7-1-2]_Grip Position Movement (MD2)} 0{MU:5.3 [7-4]_Control Unit}
0{MU:5.3 [7-1-3]_Post-Conveyance Grip Diagnostic}
0{MU:5.3 [7-1-4]_Post-Conveyance (MD2/ME1)} 0{MU:5.3 [7-4-1]_FAN}
0{MU:5.3 [7-2]_Erasure Conveyor 1}
0{MU:5.3 [7-2-1]_Erasure Grip HP (ME3)}
0{MU:5.3 [7-2-2]_Erasure Grip Movement (ME3)}
0{MU:5.3 [7-2-3]_Erasure Grip Diagnostic (ME3)}
0{MU:5.3 [7-2-4]_Erasure Side-positioning HP (ME2)}
0{MU:5.3 [7-2-5]_Erasure Side-positioning Size Selection}
0{MU:5.3 [7-2-6]_Erasure Side-positioning (ME2/ME3)}
B3
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-47
MU-48
5.2 Starting and Exiting the MUTL 5.2.2 Exiting the MUTL
u NOTE u
5.2.1 Starting the MUTL Before exiting the MUTL, check to ensure that the operation that was performed in
MUTL has been completed.
CAUTION If the operation that was performed in MUTL is under way, the operation running on
Do not start multiple MUTL's for a single RU. the RU remains intact even when the MUTL is exited.
If multiple MUTL's are started, the RU software becomes out of control.
1. Click on in the upper right corner of the MUTL window.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
2. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where "MUTL" is to be
started.
3. Click on the [MUTL] button.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-48
MU-49
5.3 Details of MUTL [1-2] Processing Mode Setting
l READ: Read
[1] Conveyance Check
Performs a normal read operation.
This menu should not be used for servicing purposes.
[1-1] Conveyance Setting
l 1-ERASE: Primary Erasure
l AUTO MODE IP reading is performed to detect the dose of the IP, and IP erasure is performed
The conveyance is repeated with the processing mode and number of IP conveyance according to the detected dose.
that have been set. Because IP reading is intended to detect the dose, image output is not generated.
It is used for checking the conveyance.
l 2-ERASE: Secondary Erasure
l ROUTINE Conveyance is performed on the same conveyance path as for IP reading, but image
The conveyance is performed with the processing mode that has been set. reading is not done.
When the number of IP conveyance is set to greater than 1, the conveyance is This menu should be used when you only want to make mechanical checks on the IP
performed again as the cassette is set again once the IP returns to the cassette. conveyance.
It should be noted that when the mode is changed to "ROUTINE" while the
conveyance is repeated in "AUTO MODE", "AUTO MODE" may be canceled.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-49
MU-50
[1-3] Number of Conveyance Setting 4. Insert the cassette with the barcode entered.
The number of conveyance may be set in a range from 1 to 99999. Erasure conveyance starts, and the result is displayed on the MUTL.
To halt the conveyance while the IP is conveyed with the number of conveyance set to
greater than 1, set "0 (zero)" to the number of conveyance. l GOOD indication
When the number of conveyance is set, "number set" and "number conveyed" are
displayed on the LCD panel of the RU.
n Procedures for Performing Auto Conveyance: Example where
conveyance is performed three times with 1-ERASE
1. Start the MUTL.
l NO GOOD indication
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
"RESULT: XXXX (XXXX: error code)" is displayed.
2. Click the Conveyance Check.
u NOTE u
A four-digit number is displayed as an error code.
Perform the troubleshooting procedure with “1” added to the head of the
displayed error code.
---Example---
3. Perform Conveyance Setting. When the displayed error code is “0293”:
→ Perform the troubleshooting procedures for the error of “10293”.
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication:
{Troubleshooting}
CAUTION
Once Conveyance Check is completed, be sure to set "Conveyance Setting"
back to "ROUTINE" again.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-50
MU-51
Procedures for Halting in the Middle of Conveyance
n
1. Set to half the conveyance.
2. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
n Procedures for Exiting Conveyance Check
1. Select [ROUTINE] for Conveyance Setting.
2. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-51
MU-52
[2] Board Check [2-4] CPU Board Setting Display
u NOTE u Displays the DipSW4 setting for the CPU39A board.
The display content and setup meaning are presented below.
Once the board check is initiated, the ongoing process cannot be interrupted. Even
when the MUTL is exited, the board check running on the RU remains intact. CPU39A board CPU39A DipSW Setting (1234-5678)
To interrupt the board check, turn OFF the power of the RU. setting display 0000-0000
n Function
Perform self-diagnostics on each board, and display the result of the diagnostics.
OFF ON
The board check provides diagnostic checkout of the following 1 item:
1
- CPU Board Setting Display
2
Functions of the following 3 items are disabled. 3
- All Board 4
- CPU Board 5
- SND Board 6
7
8
DipSW4
[2-1] All Board
This item is disabled.
CPU39A board
[2-2] CPU Board
This item is disabled.
[2-3] SND Board
This item is disabled.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-52
MU-53
[3] Software Check
[3-1] Ver. Display
Displays firmware versions of CPU board SND board, etc.
[3-2] MAC Address Display
Displays the CL’s MAC address.
[3-3] ERROR LOG CLEAR
For this device, the error logs are saved in RU main unit. The "CLEAR" button in
ERROR-DB window only can clear the error logs in FTP server for each RU data
region. Therefore, use MUTL function "ERROR LOG CLEAR" to clear the error logs
with this device.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-53
MU-54
[4] Virtual Image Check
Image reading is performed virtually, thereby enabling a cause of image abnormality
to be located.
[4-1] CORRECTION ST/HR
n Function
By clicking the [CORRECTION ST/HR] button, the recording image for the virtual
image test can be switched to the front side (FRONT), rear side (REAR), or both sides
(BOTH).
Note that this setting is effective in the following 2 items of the virtual image test.
- LED Virtual Read
- PMT Virtual Read
n Procedures: Example where the front side (FRONT) is selected
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Set the recording side to the front side (FRONT).
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-54
MU-55
[4-2] Virtual Image Test n Procedures: Example of LED Virtual Read
n Function 1. Perform "Secondary Erasure" on the spontaneous radiation and
image accumulated on the IP to be used.
Generate and output test images with each of the components comprising the scanner
unit, by, for example, generating and outputting image data with the boards, or turning {Instruction Manual}
ON the LED of the PMT board and inputting the resulting light; accordingly, a location
that caused a functional failure can be identified. 2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
[4-2-1] LED Virtual Read
3. On the examination reception screen of the CL, click on the [Add
Exposure Menu] button.
n Function
Cause the blue LED of the PMT board to illuminate, and input the resulting light from
the light-collecting guide to generate image output.
If there is no problem with the output image, it can be decided that the failure of the
scanning optics unit is responsible for the image abnormality.
4. Select [Sensitivity] from the [TEST] menu, and click on the [OK]
button.
5. Click on [Start Examination].
u NOTE u
Must use an erased IP.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-55
MU-56
6. Click on [IP#]. 10. Click on the [LED Virtual Read] button and move [ ] to "ON (0.1mR)".
The following appears on the MUTL.
>>>LED Virtual Read
7. Type in the barcode of the cassette to be used. FRONT IMAGE LEVEL = 0.1 MR
REAR IMAGE LEVEL = 23/100 MR
*PLEASE READ BY ERASED IP.
11. Insert the cassette with the barcode entered.
The IP reading starts, and the image is displayed on the CL.
8. Press the [ENTER] key.
The examination reservation is completed, and the following screen appears.
12. Turn OFF the power of the RU and back ON.
13. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
9. Select Virtual Image Test.
u INSTRUCTION u
Set the recording side as needed.
{MU:5.3 [4-1]_CORRECTION ST/HR}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-56
MU-57
[4-2-2] PMT Virtual Read n Procedures: Example of PMT Virtual Read
n Function 1. Start the MUTL.
Generate and output image data with the LOG AMP of the PMT board. {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
The result of "PMT Virtual Read" permits a decision to be made whether the failure of
the scanning optics unit is responsible for the image abnormality. 2. On the examination reception screen of the CL, click on the [Add
Exposure Menu] button.
3. Select [Sensitivity] from the [TEST] menu, and click on the [OK]
button.
4. Click on [Start Examination].
5. Click on [IP#].
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-57
MU-58
6. Type in the barcode of the cassette to be used. 10. Insert the cassette with the barcode entered.
The IP reading starts, and the image is displayed on the CL.
7. Press the [ENTER] key. 11. Turn OFF the power of the RU and back ON.
The examination reservation is completed, and the following screen appears.
12. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
8. Select Virtual Image Test.
u INSTRUCTION u
Set the recording side as needed.
{MU:5.3 [4-1]_CORRECTION ST/HR}
9. Click on the [PMT Virtual Read] button and move [ ] to "ON".
The following appears on the MUTL.
FRONT IMAGE LEVEL = 1 MR
REAR IMAGE LEVEL = 1 MR
*PLEASE READ BY ERASED IP.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-58
MU-59
[5] Scanner Check
[5-1] Polygon Motor
n Function
Turn ON or OFF the polygon.
When it is turned ON, it is checked to see whether the polygon is operating normally a
predetermined time after the polygon is activated.
n Procedures: Example where the polygon is turned ON for the
single side
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Turn ON the polygon.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "THE POLYGON IS TURNED
ON.", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
3. Turn OFF the polygon.
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-59
MU-60
[5-2] Laser 3. Turn OFF the laser.
#1 "Scanner Check"
n Function #2 "Laser"
Turn ON or OFF the laser. [OFF]/ON
When the laser is turned ON, the polygon is turned ON, and the polygon and laser are
diagnosed.
Either of the following values is displayed on the MUTL. 4. Exit the MUTL.
- LDIFINT: Factory-default LD current value {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
- LDIFNOW: Current value at present
- LDIFNOW/LDIFINT: Value to indicate how much the current has dropped, from the
factory default until at present.
n Procedures: Example where the laser is turned ON for the single
side
CAUTION
While the laser is being turned ON, do not turn OFF the polygon.
If the polygon is turned OFF, the laser is irradiated to a single spot, possibly
result in a machine failure or fire.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Turn ON the laser
#1 "Scanner Check"
#2 "Laser"
OFF/[ON]
Check the display on the MUTL.
TURNNING ON THE LASER IS IN PROGRESS..
LDIFINT : 300
LDIFNOW : 132
LDIFNOW/LDIFINT : 44
THE LASER IS TURNED ON.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "THE LASER IS TURNED
ON.", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-60
MU-61
[5-3] HV Diagnostic [5-4] Format Adjustment
When the image is output under condition where the machine shipment control
n Function data is installed, a while blank portion may appear on the film or there may be some
When the HV voltage is input over a range from 250 to 999, the command value non-output portion (image loss). In that case, format adjustment is used for fine
output from the CPU board is detected to check that the difference from the input adjustment.
value is held within +/- 10%. Format adjustment is also used when it is necessary to make adjustments between
Checks can be performed on the front side and back side, respectively. units, as in cases where the subscanning unit and side-positioning conveyor unit are
replaced at the same time.
n Procedures: Example where HV voltage is checked on the front
u NOTES u
and back sides.
- Before making format adjustment, be sure to turn ON the HV switch. With the HV
1. Start the MUTL. switch in the OFF position, format adjustment cannot be done.
- When the setting is changed, the result associated with that change is immediately
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
reflected.
2. Select HV Diagnostic. - The result associated with the change becomes ineffective after reboot. Thus, in
order to make the saved setup values effective after reboot, it is necessary to back
up the configuration data.
{MU:4.3.14_BACKUP}
REFERENCE
3. Type in the respective HV values for the front and back sides. When both Manual Adjustment (FREQ) and Manual Adjustment (Pixel) are to be
made, Manual Adjustment (FREQ) should be performed first. If Manual Adjustment
(Pixel) is done first, it may be necessary to perform Manual Adjustment (Pixel) once
again, as a result of Manual Adjustment (FREQ).
REFERENCE
Even though different values are entered for the front and back sides, diagnostics
can be done.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-61
MU-62
[5-4-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ) [5-4-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel)
Make fine adjustment when the output image is offset in the horizontal direction (main
n Function scan direction) (i.e., a white blank portion appears horizontally, or a portion of the
Make fine adjustment when the output image is enlarged or reduced in the horizontal image is not output).
direction (main scan direction). Its adjustable range is from -999 to 999 pixels. When a negative-quantity (-) value is
Its adjustable range is from -5% to +5%. When a negative-quantity (-) value is entered, the white blank portion is expanded, while the white blank portion is narrowed
entered, the image is enlarged, while it is reduced when a positive-quantity (+) value when a positive-quantity (+) value is entered.
is entered. The calculation formula for the adjustment value is as follows.
The calculation formula for the adjustment value is as follows.
n Procedures
{MC:15._Format Adjustment}
[5-4-3] Default Setting (FREQ)
Set the value of the main scan length (FREQ) to its default value.
[5-4-4] Default Setting (Pixel)
Set the value of the main scan position (Pixel) to its default value.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-62
MU-63
[5-4-5] Optic Setting (FREQ) [5-4-7] Manual Adjustment (Sub Scan Length)
Input the adjustment value for the main scan length (FREQ) that is written on the top
label of the scanning optics unit when it is replaced. n Function
When the adjustment value is entered, the machine shipment control data is Adjust the read speed by changing the subscan speed.
overwritten.
n Procedures
[5-4-6] Optic Setting (Pixel)
Input the adjustment value for the main scan position (Pixel) that is written on the top 1. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
label of the scanning optics unit when it is replaced. Start the User Utility.
When the adjustment value is entered, the machine shipment control data is {MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}
overwritten.
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
3. Select Sub-Scanning Unit.
4. Enter a value to adjust the read speed.
REFERENCE
A value from -18 to 18 can be entered. The subscan speed increases or
decreases by 0.1% for each whole integer.
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-63
MU-64
[5-4-8] IP Leading-Edge Adjustment (Sub-scanning)
Make fine adjustment when the output image is offset in the vertical direction
(subscanning direction) (i.e., a white black portion appears above, or a portion of the
image is not output).
Its adjustable range is from -50 to 50. When a negative-quality (-) value is entered,
the white blank portion is expanded, while the white blank portion is narrowed when a
positive-quantity (+) value is entered.
n Procedures
{MC:15.2_IP Leading-Edge Adjustment (Sub-scanning)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-64
MU-65
[5-5] Correction
Correction items differ depending on the IP type used. Perform relevant correction items in accordance with the table presented below.
u NOTE u
The result associated with the change becomes ineffective after reboot. Thus, in order to make the saved setup values effective after reboot, it is necessary to back up the configuration data.
■ Relationships among IP types and corrections to be performed
Correction procedures described in "Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)" are classified by IP types and corrections in the table below.
● For IP type ST *1
Correction procedures described Center S Relations to data
Correction to be Reading Dose Tube
in “Checks, Replacement and Description value after attached to the
performed mode (mR) voltage
Adjustment of Parts (MC)” correction replacement part*2
For IP type ST (SR mode), shading correction and sensitivity Data attached to light-
16.1_Shading/Sensitivity
SR correction can be performed once. 1 80 200 collecting guide and
Correction for IP Type ST (SR)
* Be sure to initialize the LED data after the correction. scanning optics unit
Shading correction For IP type ST (FR mode), shading correction and sensitivity
and sensitivity 16.2_Shading Correction for the correction must be performed respectively.
correction IP Type of ST (FR) * If “16.1 Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST (SR)” has
FR 1 80 200
16.3_Sensitivity Correction for IP been performed previously, it is not necessary to perform “16.3
Type ST Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST”.
* Be sure to initialize the LED data after the correction.
Only shading correction can be performed.
Shading correction 16.2_Shading Correction for the
* This is procedures for FR, but SR can also be performed by changing 1 80 -
only IP Type of ST (FR)
SR/FR the options selected in the procedures from [ST(FR)] to [ST(SR)].
Sensitivity correction 16.3_Sensitivity Correction for IP Only sensitivity correction can be performed. Data attached to light-
1 80 200
only Type ST * Be sure to initialize the LED data after the correction. collecting guide
*1: In case of IP type ST, X-ray tube is fixed to Tungsten.
*2: After parts are replaced, correction procedures become unnecessary if restoring the attached data.
● For IP type HR-BD
Correction procedures described Center S
Correction to be Reading Dose Tube Relations to data attached to
in “Checks, Replacement and Description value after
performed mode (mR) voltage the replacement part*2
Adjustment of Parts (MC)” correction
17.2_Shading Correction for IP Only perform shading correction. Data attached to light-collecting
Shading correction only Tungsten 15 80 -
Type HR-BD guide and scanning optics unit
Sensitivity correction Only perform sensitivity correction. Data attached to light-
17.1_Sensitivity Correction for IP
(default) with Molybdenum Molybdenum * Be sure to initialize the LED data after the correction. 20 25 120 collecting guide
Type HR-BD (Both Side)
X-ray tube only
Sensitivity correction Select X-ray tube (Tungsten), and perform sensitivity
17.3_Special Sensitivity
with Tungsten X-ray Tungsten correction only. 3.6 80 120
Correction for IP Type HR-BD
tube only * Be sure to initialize the LED data after the correction.
*2: After parts are replaced, correction procedures become unnecessary if restoring the attached data.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-65
MU-66
[5-5-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction [5-5-2] Shading Correction
n Function n Function
Used when concurrently performing shading correction and sensitivity correction. As the subscanning motor speed differs depending on the reading mode, shading
Shading correction and sensitivity correction can be done only for IP types ST. correction can be performed for each of the speeds.
The machine automatically distinguishes the inserted cassette and the IP for
processing. u NOTE u
u NOTE u - The image (uniformly gray image) output in CL in correction procedures is a false
image generated by RU, it is not an actual read image. This image cannot be used on
- Correction can be performed with IPs irradiated by the tungsten X-ray tube. If checking correction results.
irradiated by the molybdenum X-ray tube, correction will not end normally because it
- Correction should be performed with the IP irradiated by the tungsten X-ray tube.
suffers from tube-to-tube variability.
- The image (uniformly gray image) output in CL in correction procedures is a false
image generated by RU, it is not a real read image. This image cannot be used on
checking correction results. n Procedures
- Be sure to initialize the LED data after the correction. {MC:16.2_Shading Correction for the IP Type of ST (FR)}
{MC:17.2_Shading Correction for IP Type HR-BD}
u INSTRUCTION u
IP reading should be done for a one-minute period from 10 to 11 minutes after the
X-ray irradiation.
REFERENCE
The indications for the S value are as follows according to the irradiation output.
(S value = 200 / dose (mR))
For 0.1 mR : The S value is 2000.
For 1 mR : The S value is 200.
1For 10 mR : The S value is 20.
n Procedures
{MC:16.1_Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST (SR)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-66
MU-67
[5-5-3] Sensitivity Correction [5-5-4] Special Sensitivity Adjustment
n Function n Function
When only sensitivity correction is to be done without shading correction, take the Only when the following conditions are met, special sensitivity adjustment can be
following procedures. The sensitivity correction for the IP type ST and IP type HR-BD achieved.
can be done. - When the IP type HR-BD (both side) is exposed with the tungsten X-ray tube
u NOTE u u NOTE u
- For IP type ST, correction can be performed only with the IP irradiated by the - If sensitivity adjustment is to be made for the IP of IP type HR-BD with the tungsten
tungsten X-ray tube. X-ray tube, it is necessary to manually set the X-ray tube to tungsten.
- Be sure to initialize the LED data after the correction. - Be sure to initialize the LED data after the correction.
u INSTRUCTION u REFERENCE
The X-ray dose required during exposure differs depending on the X-ray tube. AUTO SELECT: The IP of IP type HR-BD is automatically recognized as one
Expose the IP according to the following conditions. irradiated by the molybdenum X-ray tube.
Tungsten X-ray tube: About 1 mR TUNGSTEN FIX: Correction is performed with the preset X-ray tube, without
Molybdenum X-ray tube: About 20 mR recognizing the IP type.
REFERENCES
n Procedures
- The indications for the S value are as follows according to the irradiation output with
the tungsten X-ray tube. {MC:17.3_Special Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR-BD}
For 0.1 mR: The S value is 2000. {MC:17.3.1_Special Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR-BD Using Tungsten
For 1 mR: The S value is 200. X-ray Tube}
For 10 mR: The S value is 20.
- For IP type HR-BD, correction can be performed only with the IP irradiated by the
molybdenum X-ray tube.
The indications for the S value are as follows according to the irradiation output with
the molybdenum X-ray tube.
For 2 mR: The S value is 1200.
For 20 mR: The S value is 120.
For 200 mR: The S value is 12.
n Procedures
The procedures for sensitivity correction differ depending on the IP type.
- For IP type ST
{MC:16.3_Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST}
- For IP type HR-BD
{MC:17.1_Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR-BD (Both Side)}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-67
MU-68
[5-5-5] Sensitivity S-Value Correction n Procedures: Example where the indication of 195 is corrected to
200
n Function
Correct the S value indicated on the film. 1. Start the MUTL.
For example, if the S value is indicated as 195 on the film when the IP exposed at 1 {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
mR is read, then correction is performed to indicate the S value as 200.
FUJI HOSPITAL 04001676 A0000 A020
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5
2. Select Sensitivity S-Value Correction.
Head Overview
L
S value
3. Enter the existing S-value and expected S-value.
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5 R->L G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
Head Overview
L 0000000001 Hanako Fuji [F] 23
Date of exposure 1992. 11. 27 [17:43] Reduction 50% RT-04
factor
FR9H45A5.EPS
4. Initialize the LED data.
{MU:5.3 [5-6-4]_Light collecting parts replacement}
5. Back up the adjusted data into HDD, CD-R, etc.
{MC:18.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}
u NOTE u
The result associated with the change becomes ineffective after reboot. Thus,
in order to make the saved setup values effective after reboot, it is necessary to
back up the configuration data.
6. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-68
MU-69
[5-5-6] Trouble shooting [5-6] S-Value
For troubleshooting, set to determine whether to generate image output by use of the
shading correction data or without use of the shading correction data. [5-6-1] S-Value variation display (front)
- ON: Generate image output by using the shading correction data.
- OFF: Generate image output without using the shading correction data. n Function
Display initial and current value of S value.
CAUTION Confirm the result, and perform the procedures to check the S value as needed.
Normally, be sure to set it to "ON".
If "OFF" setting is used, the resulting image suffers unusual nonuniformity. n Procedures
REFERENCE
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
The "OFF" setting is canceled when the power of the RU is turned OFF and back ON,
or when IP reading operation is performed once or more.
2. [S-Value variation display (front)]
→ Values of A and B are displayed.
S (now) = 196(98%)
S (start) = 200
3. Confirm the result.
[5-6-7] HV ON/OFF 4. Check the S value as needed.
Turn ON or OFF the HV switch (software switch). {IN:10._Confirming the S Value}
The setting changed becomes effective immediately; however, the result updated does
not appear immediately on the LCD panel of the RU.
When the mode of the RU is changed (from the Maintenance Mode to Routine Mode, for
example), the result is displayed on the LCD panel.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-69
MU-70
[5-6-2] S-Value variation display (rear) [5-6-3] S-Value calculator
n Function n Function
Display initial and current value of S value. This function calculates S value based on the value of X-ray dose.
Confirm the result, and perform the procedures to check the S value as needed.
n Procedures
n Procedures 1. Start the MUTL.
1. Start the MUTL. {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Enter the X-ray dose.
2. [S-Value variation display (rear)]
→ Values of A and B are displayed.
3. [Set]
→ The S value calculated based on the X-ray dose is displayed.
S (now) = 196(98%)
S (start) = 200 REFERENCE
3. Confirm the result. When "1" is entered as X-ray dose, the following message is displayed in MUTL.
4. Check the S value as needed.
{IN:10._Confirming the S Value}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-70
MU-71
[5-6-4] Light collecting parts replacement [5-6-4-2] LED data initialization (rear)
[5-6-4-1] LED data initialization (front) n Function
In cases below, initialize the LED data to set the initial value which is for S-value error
n Function detection.
In cases below, initialize the LED data to set the initial value which is for S-value error - After Light-Collecting Unit (Lower Light-Collecting Guide) is replaced
detection. - After sensitivity correction is performed
- After Light-Collecting Unit (Upper Light-Collecting Guide) is replaced - After S value correction is performed
- After sensitivity correction is performed
- After S value correction is performed
n Procedures
n Procedures 1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} 2. [LED data initialization]
→ The confirmation window opens.
2. [LED data initialization]
→ The confirmation window opens. 3. [OK]
3. [OK] 4. Confirm that "THE FLASH MEMORY WAS UPDATED" is displayed at
the message column in MUTL.
4. Confirm that "THE FLASH MEMORY WAS UPDATED" is displayed at
the message column in MUTL. 5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL} 6. Take a backup of "SCN ALL DATA".
6. Take a backup of "SCN ALL DATA".
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-71
MU-72
[6] Mechanical 1 Check n Procedures: Example where MA3 (Shelf 3) is operated
CAUTIONS 1. Start the MUTL.
When the function of Mechanical Check is to be used, be sure to perform the {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
procedures as in the example. Otherwise, correct operation cannot be made.
2. Select IP Removal Unit.
[6-1] IP Removal Unit
[6-1-1] Suction Cup Arm HP
n Function 3. Select Suction Cup Arm HP.
Drive the suction drive motor (MA1, MA2, MA3, MA4) for each shelf of the IP removal
unit to move the IP suction cup arm to its home position, and perform its operation
check.
- When MA1 is operated: Shelf 1
- When MA2 is operated: Shelf 2
- When MA3 is operated: Shelf 3
- When MA4 is operated: Shelf 4 4. Perform suction cup arm HP for the third shelf.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-72
MU-73
[6-1-2] IP Removal (F/L) n Procedures: Example where the IP is fed/loaded for MA3 (Shelf 3)
n Function 1. Start the MUTL.
Drive the suction drive motor (MA1, MA2, MA3, MA4) for each shelf of the IP removal {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
unit to lead/load the IP, and perform its operation check.
- When MA1 is operated: Shelf 1 2. Select IP Removal Unit.
- When MA2 is operated: Shelf 2
- When MA3 is operated: Shelf 3
- When MA4 is operated: Shelf 4
3. Select IP Removal (F/L).
4. Select IP Removal (F/L) for the third shelf.
5. Set the cassette in the third shelf.
IP removal (F/L) for the third shelf is initiated.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
6. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
7. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-73
MU-74
[6-1-3] Clutch [6-1-4] Pump
n Function n Function
Drive the clutch (CLA1, CLA2, CLA3, CLA4) for each shelf of the IP removal unit, or Drive the pump (PA1, PA2, PA3, PA4) for each shelf of the IP removal unit, or release
release its drive, to perform its operation check. its drive, to perform its operation check.
n Procedures: Example where the third pump is operated
n Procedures: Example where the third clutch is operated
1. Start the MUTL.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Select IP Removal Unit.
2. Select IP Removal Unit.
3. Select Clutch.
3. Select Pump.
4. Turn ON or OFF the clutch. 4. Turn ON the pump.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
5. Exit the MUTL. 5. Turn OFF the pump.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
6. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
7. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-74
MU-75
[6-1-5] Valve n Procedures: Example where the third valve is operated
n Function 1. Start the MUTL.
Drive the valve (SVA1, SVA2, SVA3, SVA4) for each shelf of the IP removal unit, or {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
release its drive, to perform its operation check.
2. Select IP Removal Unit.
3. Select Valve.
4. Turn ON the valve.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
5. Turn OFF the valve.
6. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
7. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-75
MU-76
[6-1-6] Solenoid
n Function
Drive the solenoid (SOLA1, SOLA2, SOLA3, SOLA4) for each shelf of the IP removal
unit, or release its drive, to perform its operation check.
When the solenoid is turned ON, the hold is released, and the cassette hold sensor
(SA3, SA9, SA15, SA21) changes its status from CLOSE to OPEN.
n Procedures: Example where the third solenoid is operated
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Select IP Removal Unit.
3. Select Solenoid.
4. Turn ON or OFF the solenoid.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-76
MU-77
[6-2] Feed/Load Unit n Procedures: Example where the feed path change guide is
moved to its home position
[6-2-1] Feed Path Change Guide
1. Start the MUTL.
n Function {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
Drive the join path change guide drive motor (MB3) to move the feed path to its home
position, change the feed path, and perform the diagnosis of the feed path change. 2. Select Feed/Load Unit.
l Feed Path Change Guide HP (MB3)
The feed path change guide is moved to its home position.
l Feed Path Change Movement (Shelf1/Shelf2/Shelf3/Shelf4)
The feed path is changed to each shelf.
3. Select Feed Path Change Guide.
l Feed Path Change Diagnostic
#1 "Feed Path Change Guide"
The feed path change guide is driven to perform its operation check.
4. Select Feed Path Change Guide HP (MB3).
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-77
MU-78
[6-2-2] Join Path Change Guide n Procedures: Example where the join path change guide is
moved to its home position
n Function
Drive the join path change guide drive motor (MB3) to perform home positioning, path 1. Start the MUTL.
change operation, and join path change diagnostics. {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
l Join Path Change Guide HP (MB3)
2. Select Feed/Load Unit.
The join path change guide is moved to its home position.
l Join Path Change Guide Movement
The join path is changed to the "Side Positioning" or "Erasure" position.
l Join Path Change Diagnostic
The join path change guide is driven to perform its operation check. 3. Select Join Path Change Guide.
#1 "Join Path Change Guide"
4. Select Join Path Change Guide HP (MB3).
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-78
MU-79
[6-2-3] Feed Conveyance (MB1/MB2/MC3) [6-2-4] Post-Erasure Conveyance (ME1/MB1/MB2)
n Function n Function
Drive the IP conveyance motor (MB1/MB2/MC3) to operate in the same direction Drive the IP conveyance motor (ME1/MB1/MB2) to operate in the erasure conveyance
(reading direction) as the feed conveyance and check the feed conveyance. direction (IP eject direction) and check the erasure conveyor unit.
n Procedures n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL. 1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Select Feed/Load Unit. 2. Select Feed/Load Unit.
3. Select Feed Conveyance (MB1/MB2/MC3). 3. Select Post-Erasure Conveyance (ME1/MB1/MB2).
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate. error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
4. Exit the MUTL. 4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL} {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU. 5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-79
MU-80
[6-3] Side-Positioning Conveyor 1 [6-3-2] Side-Positioning Grip Movement (MC2)
[6-3-1] Side-Positioning Grip HP (MC2) n Function
Drive the grip release motor (MC2) so that the grip mechanism can be placed in its
n Function gripped condition or grip released condition.
Drive the grip release motor (MC2) to move the grip mechanism to its home position, - Grip: Grip
and perform its operation check. - Grip release: UN Grip
In the home position, it is in the grip released condition.
n Procedures
n Procedures 1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} 2. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.
2. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.
3. Select Side-Positioning Grip Movement (MC2).
3. Select Side-Positioning Grip HP (MC2).
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate. 4. Select Grip Position Movement (MC2).
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-80
MU-81
[6-3-3] Side-Positioning Grip Diagnostic (MC2) [6-3-4] Side-Positioning HP (MC1)
n Function n Function
Drive the grip release motor (MC2) to activate the grip mechanism, and perform its Drive the side-positioning motor (MC1) to move the side-positioning unit to its home
operation check. position, and perform its operation check.
n Procedures n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.
2. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.
u INSTRUCTION u
3. Select Side-Positioning HP (MC1).
Select the following IP sizes as needed.
1417, 1414, 1012, 0810, 1824, 2430, 2430HR
3. Select Side-Positioning Grip Diagnostic (MC2).
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-81
MU-82
[6-3-5] Side-Positioning Size Selection [6-3-6] Side-Positioning (MC1/MC2)
n Function n Function
Select Side-Positioning Size. Drive the side-positioning motor (MC1) and grip release motor (MC2) to perform side-
positioning operation.
n Procedures
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} 1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.
2. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.
3. Select Side-Positioning Size Selection.
3. Select Side-Positioning Operation IP Size.
{MU:5.3 [6-3-5]_Side-Positioning Size Selection}
4. Select Side-Positioning Operation (MC1/MC2).
u INSTRUCTION u
Select the following IP sizes as needed.
1417, 1414, 1012, 0810, 1824, 2430, 2430HR
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL} 5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-82
MU-83
[6-4] Side-Positioning Conveyor 2 [6-4-2] Cleaning Guide Position Movement (MC4)
[6-4-1] Cleaning Guide HP (MC4) n Function
Drive the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) so that the cleaning guide can be placed
n Function in its gripped condition or grip released condition.
Drive the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) to move the cleaning guide to its home - Grip: Grip
position. - Grip release: UN Grip
In the home position, the cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4) is CLOSE.
n Procedures
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
1. Start the MUTL. {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 2.
2. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 2.
3. Select Cleaning Guide Position Movement (MC4).
3. Select Cleaning Guide HP (MC4).
#1 "Cleaning Guide Position Movement (MC4)"
Grip/[UN Grip]
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
4. Select Cleaning Guide Position Movement (MC4).
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL} #1 "Cleaning Guide Position Movement (MC4)"
[Grip]/UN Grip
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-83
MU-84
[6-4-3] Cleaning Guide Diagnostic [6-5] Sub Scanning 1
n Function [6-5-1] Sub-Scanning Grip HP (MZ2)
Drive the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) to move the cleaning guide to its home
position, and perform its operation check. n Function
In the home position, the cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4) is CLOSE. Drive the grip drive motor (MZ2) to move the grip mechanism to its home position, and
perform its operation check.
n Procedures In the home position, the driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) and driven-side
grip release HP sensor (SZ3) are both CLOSE.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
n Procedures
2. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 2.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Select Sub Scanning 1.
3. Select Cleaning Guide Diagnostic.
3. Select Sub-Scanning Grip HP (MZ2).
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
4. Exit the MUTL. If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-84
MU-85
[6-5-2] Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic Speed Selection [6-5-3] Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic (MZ2)
n Function n Function
Select Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic Speed. Drive the grip drive motor (MZ2) to activate the grip mechanism, and perform its
operation check.
n Procedures
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} 1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Select Sub Scanning 1.
2. Select Sub Scanning 1.
3. Select Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic Speed Selection.
3. Select Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic Speed.
{MU:5.3 [6-5-2]_Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic Speed Selection}
4. Select Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic (MZ2).
u INSTRUCTION u
Select the following speed as needed.
FR, SR, BD
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-85
MU-86
[6-5-4] Stopper HP [6-5-5] Stopper Movement
n Function n Function
Drive the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) to move the IP stopper to its home position, Drive the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) to activate the IP stopper, and move it to its
and perform its operation check. "RETREATED" or "PROTRUDED" position.
n Procedures n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL. 1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Select Sub Scanning 1. 2. Select Sub Scanning 1.
3. Select Stopper HP. 3. Select Stopper Movement.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate. error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
4. Exit the MUTL. 4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL} {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU. 5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-86
MU-87
[6-5-6] Stopper Diagnostic [6-6] Sub Scanning 2
n Function [6-6-1] Dust Removal HP
Drive the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) to perform home-positioning for the IP stopper
twice, and perform its operation check. n Function
Drive the dust removal motor (MZ3) to move the dust removal mechanism to its home
n Procedures position.
In the home position, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ2) is CLOSE.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} n Procedures
2. Select Sub Scanning 1. 1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Select Sub Scanning 2.
3. Select Stopper Diagnostic.
3. Select Dust Removal HP.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
4. Exit the MUTL. If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL} error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU. 4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-87
MU-88
[6-6-2] Dust Removal Operation [6-6-3] Conveyance Motor Direction Selection
n Function n Function
Drive the dust removal motor (MZ3) to perform dust removal operation. Set the drive direction for the subscanning motor (MZ1), as follows.
- CW: Conveyance direction during reading (side-positioning → subscanning →
n Procedures post-conveyance)
- CCW: Conveyance direction that is opposite during reading (post-conveyance →
1. Start the MUTL. subscanning → side-positioning)
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
[6-6-4] Conveyance Motor Speed Selection
2. Select Sub Scanning 2.
n Function
Set the drive speed for the subscanning motor (MZ1), as follows.
Indication Reading mode IP type Subscanning motor speed
HI For IP ejection ST/HR-BD High speed
3. Select Dust Removal Operation.
FR FR mode ST one side
SR SR mode ST one side
BD HR-BD mode HR-BD both side Low speed
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-88
MU-89
[6-6-5] Conveyance Motor Stop/Drive 4. Set the conveyance speed to SR.
n Function #1 "Conveyance Motor Speed Selection"
FR/[SR]/BD
Drive or stop the subscanning motor (MZ1).
CAUTION
When executing "Conveyance Motor Direction Selection" or "Conveyance Motor
Speed Selection", be sure to stop the subscanning motor (MZ1).
5. Drive the subscanning motor (MZ1).
If such setting is done with the subscanning motor (MZ1) in its driven condition,
correct operation will not result.
n Procedures: Example where conveyance is performed in CW
direction at speed of SR. If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
6. Stop the subscanning motor (MZ1).
2. Select Sub Scanning 2.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
3. Set the conveyance direction to CW. 7. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
8. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-89
MU-90
[6-7] Conveyance Path Sensor Check
n Function
Perform self diagnosis of the IP sensor attached to the IP conveyor unit, and display
the diagnosis results.
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Select Conveyance Path Sensor Check.
3. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
4. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-90
MU-91
[7] Mechanical 2 Check [7-1-2] Grip Position Movement (MD2)
[7-1] Post-Reading Conveyor n Function
Drive the grip release motor (MD1) so that the grip mechanism can be placed in its
[7-1-1] Grip Release HP (MD1) gripped condition or grip released condition.
- Grip: Grip
n Function - Grip release: UN Grip
Drive the grip release motor (MD1) to move the grip mechanism to its home position, n Procedures
and perform its operation check.
In the home position, it is in the grip released condition. 1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
n Procedures
2. Select Post-Reading Conveyor.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Select Post-Reading Conveyor.
3. Select Grip Position Movement (MD2).
3. Select Grip Release HP (MD1).
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
4. Select Grip Position Movement (MD2).
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL} If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-91
MU-92
[7-1-3] Post-Conveyance Grip Diagnostic [7-1-4] Post-Conveyance (MD2/ME1)
n Function n Function
Drive the grip release motor (MD1) to perform grip mechanism home positioning, grip Drive the IP conveyance motor (MD2 and ME1) in the conveyance direction during
releasing, and gripping. reading.
n Procedures n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL. 1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Select Post-Reading Conveyor. 2. Select Post-Reading Conveyor.
3. Select Post-Conveyance Grip Diagnostic. 3. Select Post-Conveyance (MD2/ME1).
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate. error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
4. Exit the MUTL.
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-92
MU-93
[7-2] Erasure Conveyor 1 [7-2-2] Erasure Grip Movement (ME3)
[7-2-1] Erasure Grip HP (ME3) n Function
Drive the grip release motor (ME3) so that the grip mechanism can be placed in its
n Function gripped condition or grip released condition.
Drive the grip release motor (ME3) to move the erasure grip mechanism to its home - Grip: Grip
position, and perform its operation check. - Grip release: UN Grip
In the home position, it is in the grip released condition.
n Procedures
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
1. Start the MUTL. {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Select Erasure Conveyor 1.
2. Select Erasure Conveyor 1.
3. Select Erasure Grip Movement (ME3).
3. Execute Erasure Grip HP (ME3).
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
4. Select Erasure Grip Movement (ME3).
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-93
MU-94
[7-2-3] Erasure Grip Diagnostic (ME3) [7-2-4] Erasure Side-positioning HP (ME2)
n Function n Function
Drive the grip release motor (ME3) to perform home positioning, grip releasing, and Drive the side-positioning motor (ME2) to move the erasure unit side-positioning
gripping operation. mechanism to its home position.
During that time, the grip release motor (ME3) is driven to perform grip releasing as
n Procedures during routine operation.
1. Start the MUTL. n Procedures
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
1. Start the MUTL.
2. Select Erasure Conveyor 1. {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Select Erasure Conveyor 1.
3. Execute Erasure Grip Diagnostic (ME3).
3. Select Erasure Side-positioning HP (ME2).
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
4. Exit the MUTL. error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
4. Exit the MUTL.
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU. {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-94
MU-95
[7-2-5] Erasure Side-positioning Size Selection [7-2-6] Erasure Side-positioning (ME2/ME3)
n Function n Function
Select Erasure Side-positioning Operation IP Size. Drive the side-positioning motor (ME2) to perform side-positioning operation
corresponding to the IP size.
n Procedures As during routine operation, the grip release motor (ME3) is driven to perform grip
releasing, and perform side-positioning operation twice.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} n Procedures: Example where 18" x 24" size side-positioning
operation is performed
2. Select Erasure Conveyor 1.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
2. Select Erasure Conveyor 1.
3. Select Erasure Side-positioning Size Selection.
3. Select Erasure Side-positioning Operation IP Size.
{MU:5.3 [7-2-5]_Erasure Side-positioning Size Selection}
u INSTRUCTION u
4. Select the IP size "1824", and select Erasure Side-positioning (ME2/
Select the following IP sizes as needed. ME3).
1417, 1414, 1012, 0810, 1824, 2430, 2430HR
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-95
MU-96
[7-3] Erasure Conveyor 2 [7-3-2] Erasure Conveyor (ME1)
[7-3-1] Path Change Guide (SOLF1) n Function
Drive the IP conveyance motor (ME1) to rotate the erasure conveyor unit in the eject
n Function direction.
Turn ON the branch path changeover guide drive solenoid (SOLF1) to move the
branch path changeover guide to the switchback side.
n Procedures
n Procedures 1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} 2. Select Erasure Conveyor 2.
2. Select Erasure Conveyor 2.
3. Drive the IP conveyance motor (ME1).
3. Turn ON the path change guide (SOLF1).
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate. 5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
4. Turn OFF the path change guide (SOLF1).
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-96
MU-97
[7-4] Control Unit
[7-4-1] FAN
This item is disabled.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-97
MU-98
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-98
MU-99
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-99
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
12.06.2019 01 New release All pages
02.28.2020 02 Revision All pages
CR-IR 363 Service Manual
Service Parts List (SP)
● Target devices of this Service Manual
The target device of this Service Manual (011-211-xxE) is CR-IR 363 with serial numbers
#xxx72001 or later.
For CR-IR 363 with serial number #xxx71999 or earlier, please use Service Manual
(011-202-xxE).
● Software to be used in this device
Software V10.1 or later is used in this device.
The software version must be confirmed before performing the software installation and
upgrade.
011-211-02E CR-IR 363 Service Manual
02.28.2020
SP-1
How to Use Service Character Significance
Consumable parts or parts
○ For software
The alphabet denotes a difference in the
■ Recommended quantities of spare
parts
Parts List A that will be replaced at short
intervals.
specifications. Parts differing in the suffix
are not compatible with each other. Version
It is recommended as a rough guide to hold
in stock a certain quantity of parts according
Parts that may become faulty number is omitted in the list.
to the rank (A, B, C, D, E) assigned to the
■ RANK B accidentally and have a relatively
high failure rate. ■ PART NAME parts, as follows. For periodically replaced
Parts that have a sufficiently long parts, hold them in stock separately. Adjust
● Handling RANK characters (parts PART NAME represents a general name of
C MTBF, but are expected to have the stock quantity of service parts depending
that are handled in a special manner a part.
a relatively high failure rate. on the number of working units (N).
during parts operation, such as Parts that have a sufficiently Quantity used in a single system : Q
■ QTY.
management) D long MTBF, but are expected to
○ QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used ○N=1
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty become faulty.
Parts that are necessary for fault in each unit. Rank A ＝ １ ＋ Ｑ × 0.3
Must be
R Repairable analysis, or parts that may be Rank C ＝ １ ＋ Ｑ × 0.05
returned. ○ A part whose quantity is suffixed with -S
E needed in case of unexpected Rank D ＝ １ ＋ Ｑ × 0.02
Must be represents a small part that is shipped in
returned. accidents such as man-induced
Q Not repairable packs of 50. (Even if such a part is ordered ○ 2 ≦ N ≦ 10
(We use for damage.
in quantity of 1, a pack containing 50 pieces Rank A ＝ ２ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.3
analysis.) <The RANK guide> Rank C ＝ ２ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.05
of that part is supplied.)
Must Not be Rank D ＝ １ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.02
The Fault RANK characters, Handling RANK
returned. ■ REMARKS
characters, and Export regulation-applicable
(Consumable ○ 11 ≦ N ≦ 300
character are assigned in that order. The REMARKS column indicates a unique
T part. Not Not repairable Rank A ＝ ３ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.3
applicable to Thus, at least one character or up to three name of a part or relevant information of Rank C ＝ ３ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.05
free-of-charge characters are assigned in the RANK each part. Rank D ＝ ２ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.02
warranty.) column.
without Must Not be ■ SERIAL NUMBER ■ Precautions to be Observed When
R, Q, T returned.
Not repairable ■ REF.NO. Returning Parts for Repair
The units may contain different parts
REF. NO. is a part number indicated in the depending on their shipment control number. When returning a component for repair,
● Export regulation-applicable Service Parts Exploded Views. For parts SERIAL NUMBER indicates the shipment pack it in the same manner as for the
character(Parts with the following having different functions, they are clearly control number to which the relevant parts supplied substitute, using the substitute
character are controlled by Export distinguished in the REMARKS and SERIAL are applicable. If the SERIAL NUMBER packing materials.
regulation.) NUMBER columns. column is blank, the parts are applicable to The use of different packing materials or
all the relevant units. The shipment control packing methods may incur damage to
Character Significance ■ PART NUMBER number is represented by lower five digits
Parts applicable to export packed component during transit.
＋ PART NUMBER is a code number that is of eight-digit number indicated on the rating
regulations.
unique to each part. An alphabetic letter at indication label.
the rightmost position of the code number
● Fault RANK characters (which provide ■ REFER TO
has the following meaning.
reference for determining the recom-
mended stock quantity) ○ For hardware The "REFER TO" column shows reference
The alphabet denotes the version number sections concerning the part. Clicking the
All parts are assigned with one of characters reference section in the "REFER TO" column
A through E. of a part. If parts have different version
numbers, they are upward-compatible. jumps to the top page of the reference
section where the related information is in.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-1
SP-2
INDEX
INDEX 01 INDEX 02 INDEX 03 INDEX 10 INDEX 11 INDEX 12
● カバー ● フレーム ● カセッテセット部 ● 副走査部 ● 制御部 ●ケーブル
COVER FRAME CASSETTE SET UNIT SUB SCANNING UNIT CONTROLLER CABLE
INDEX 04 INDEX 05 INDEX 06 INDEX 13 INDEX 14 INDEX 15
● フィードロード搬送部 ● 幅寄搬送部 ● 後搬送部 ● 回路図 ● ネジ・座金類の表示 ● 消耗品一覧表
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 記号一覧表 LIST OF QUICK
TABLE OF SCREWS / WEARING PARTS
WASHERS INDICATION
SYMBOLS
INDEX 07 INDEX 08 INDEX 09 INDEX 16 INDEX 17
● 消去搬送部 ● 光学部 ● 集光部 ● オプション ● 治具
ERASURE CONVEYOR SCANNING OPTICS UNIT LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT OPTION JIG
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-2
SP-3
01A
01A 01A
カバー 1 カバー 1
COVER 1 COVER 1
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
1 ***
E 2 350Y200490 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
E 3 350Y102250 前下カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
E 4 350Y102257 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
D 5 376N100047 メカニカルフィルタ Mechanical Filter 2 {MC:3.2}
D 6 345N101184A ルーバ Louver 2 {MC:3.2}
E 7 350Y102262 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
E 8 350Y102251 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
D 9 113Y1702D ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 LED4 {MC:5.9}
E 10 356N9255C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.9}
E 11 357N200348A 台 Base 1 {MC:3.3}
A 12 603Y0090 フィルタ Filter 1 NO4 {MC:5.9}
E 13 356N9256B ブラケット Bracket 2
D 14 394S0036 永久磁石 Magnet 3
15 ***
D 16 332N0625 キャップ Cap 3
E 17 345Y100140 遮板 Light Protect Plate 1 {MC:3.1}
E 18 345Y100141 遮板 Light Protect Plate 1 {MC:3.1}
19 ***
20 ***
E 21 356Y0299 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:3.1}
D 22 382N1636A テープ Tape 3
23 ***
E 24 405N202183C 銘板 Label 1
E 25 405N202173B 銘板 Label 1
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-3
SP-4
01B
01B 01B
カバー 2 カバー 2
COVER 2 COVER 2
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 350Y102264 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
E 2 350Y102255 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
3 ***
E 4 350Y102261 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
5 ***
6 ***
7 ***
E 8 350N102575A カバー Cover 1
D 9 376N100047 メカニカルフィルタ Mechanical Filter 2 {MC:3.2}
10 ***
D 11 345N101184A ルーバ Louver 2 {MC:3.2}
E 12 350Y102259 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
E 13 350Y102263 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
E 14 350Y102253 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-4
SP-5
02A
02A 02A
フレーム 1 フレーム 1
FRAME 1 FRAME 1
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 367N1006 キャスタ Caster 4 *1 －
D 2 367S2059 脚 Adjuster Assembly 4 －
E 3 356N9404C ブラケット Bracket 1 －
E 4 356N104008B ブラケット Bracket 2 －
D 5 382N100359 テープ Tape 2 －
D 6 382N100358 テープ Tape 2 －
D 7 363Y0478A ガイド板 Guide plate 2 －
D 8 387N200028A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 2 －
D 9 387N200027 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 2 －
E 10 350N101459A カバー Cover 1 －
11 ***
12 ***
13 ***
14 ***
E 15 356N9202A ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:5.2}
D 16 345Y200037B 遮光シート Protect sheet 1 －
D 17 382N200113A 面ファスナ Sheet fastener －
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-5
SP-6
02B
02B 02B
フレーム 2 フレーム 2
FRAME 2 FRAME 2
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
Compression Coil
D 1 388N1211A 圧縮コイルバネ 1 L ≒ 25mm {MC:4.7}
Spring
E 2 319N101426 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:4.7}
D 3 363Y0477 ガイド板 Guide plate 2 －
E 4 356N9294B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.6}
E 5 322SY322 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:4.7}
D 6 146N0016B フォトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SG1 {MC:4.5}
E 7 356N9295C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.5}
D 8 146N0016B フォトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SG2 {MC:4.6}
D 9 387N200028A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 4 －
D 10 387N200027 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 4 －
11 ***
D 12 128S1171 ブレーカ Breaker 1 {MC:4.1}
C 13 352N200086B パネル Panel 1 {MC:4.1}
C 14 352N0602B パネル Panel 2 －
E 15 352N100274 ブラケット Bracket 1 －
16 ***
D 17 120N100014 レセプタクル 1 {MC:4.2}
18 ***
E 19 319N3999B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:4.7}
C 20 352N100272 パネル Panel 1 {MC:4.2}
D 21 119Y100049 電動ファン Fan 1
Power Supply Unit
C 22 813Y200016 電源ユニットアセンブリ 1 {MC:4.8}
Assembly
C 23 125N120025A 電源アセンブリ Power Supply Assembly 1 {MC:4.8}
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
C 24 113Y200416 1 {MC:4.9}
(PSU39A) (PSU39A)
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-6
SP-7
02C
02C 02C
フレーム 3 フレーム 3
FRAME 3 FRAME 3
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 375N0099 シール Seal 38 －
E 2 347N1841C スペーサ Spacer 2 －
E 3 ***
E 4 356N9187A ブラケット Bracket 1 －
E 5 350Y101191A カバー Cover 1 －
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-7
SP-8
03A
03A 03A
カセッテセット部 1 カセッテセット部 1
CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 CASSETTE SET UNIT 1
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 4 SA6, 12, 18, 24 {MC:5.27}
D 2 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 4 SA1, 7, 13, 19 {MC:5.17}
E 3 341N1104 アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.14}
E 4 345N1668E 遮板 Light Protect Plate 3 {MC:5.7}
E 5 345N1669C 遮板 Light Protect Plate 1 {MC:5.5}
E 6 350N2706C カバー Cover 4 {MC:5.13}
E 7 356N9445 ブラケット Bracket 4 －
E 8 356N9233 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.14}
E 9 356N110135 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.12}
E 10 356N103848A ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.12}
D 11 363N2499 ガイド Guide 2 {MC:5.14}
D 12 387N200027 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 8 {MC:5.10}
D 13 388N2447B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 33mm {MC:5.14}
D 14 388N3081B ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 4 {MC:5.7}
D 15 398N200004 シャッタ Shutter 4 {MC:5.7}
E 16 405N0186 銘板 Label 3 {MC:5.1}
D 17 318S1164 ブッシュ Clump 4 －
D 18 113Y1702D ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 3 LED1, 2, 3 {MC:5.8}
E 19 350N200657 カバー Cover 3 {MC:5.8}
E 20 356N9161E ブラケット Bracket 3 {MC:5.8}
E 21 356N9255C ブラケット Bracket 3 {MC:5.8}
E 22 356N9368C ブラケット Bracket 3 {MC:5.8}
E 23 357N200346 台 Base 3 {MC:5.8}
E 24 357N200347 台 Base 3 {MC:5.8}
E 25 357N200344 台 Base 3 {MC:5.8}
E 26 357N200345 台 Base 3 {MC:5.8}
27 ***
28 ***
29 ***
E 30 405N202173B 銘板 Label 3 －
31 ***
D 32 898Y200819 読取部 Barcode Reader 4 BCRA1, 2, 3, 4 {MC:5.12}
E 33 356N103848A ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.12}
A 34 603Y0090 フィルタ Filter 4 {MC:5.8}
E 35 356N110136B ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.12}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-8
SP-9
03B
03B 03B
カセッテセット部 2 カセッテセット部 2
CASSETTE SET UNIT 2 CASSETTE SET UNIT 2
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 128Y0331A スイッチ Switch 4 SA5, 11, 17, 23 {MC:5.20}
A 2 133Y100043 電動ポンプ Pump 4 PA1, 2, 3, 4 {MC:5.36}
D 3 134Y200012 電磁バルブ Solenoid Valve 4 SVA1, 2, 3, 4 {MC:5.35}
D 4 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 4 SA4, 10, 16, 22 {MC:5.19}
E 5 346N200803 補助板 Plate Support 4 {MC:5.31}
6 ***
E 7 356N103836A ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.20}
E 8 356N9150A ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.15}
D 9 370N200410C ホース Hose 4 {MC:5.15}
D 10 372S0049A 管継手 Joint 4 {MC:5.15}
D 11 372S0050A 管継手 Joint 4 {MC:5.15}
D 12 372S0053A 管継手 Joint 4 {MC:5.15}
13 ***
E 14 356N9569 ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:5.43}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-9
SP-10
03C
03C 03C
カセッテセット部 3 カセッテセット部 3
CASSETTE SET UNIT 3 CASSETTE SET UNIT 3
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 315N0011 止め輪 Snap Ring 8 {MC:5.22}
E 2 316S0146 止め具 Clamp 4 {MC:5.21}
E 3 319N3918 軸 Shaft 4 {MC:5.33}
D 4 322N0037D すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 8 {MC:5.32}
D 5 322SF149 軸受 Bearing 8 {MC:5.33}
D 6 322SF178 軸受 Bearing 16 {MC:5.32}
D 7 327N1103610D 平歯車 Spur Gear 8 {MC:5.33}
E 8 341N0937B アーム Arm 8 {MC:5.6}
E 9 341N1060N アーム Arm 4 {MC:5.32}
E 10 356N9464 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.22}
E 11 356N9151E ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.22}
D 12 370N0255B ホース Hose 4 {MC:5.22}
D 13 898Y200059 吸着盤アセンブリ Suction CupAssy 8 {MC:5.22}
D 14 372S0050/A 管継手 Joint 8 {MC:5.22}
15 ***
16 ***
E 17 356Y200200 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.41}
D 18 384N0081A テープ Tape 4 {MC:5.40}
D 19 384N0082 テープ Tape 4 {MC:5.40}
D 20 384N0083 テープ Tape 4 {MC:5.40}
E 21 356N103901 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.41}
E 22 356N103902 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.41}
E 23 341N1117 アーム Arm 4 {MC:5.42}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-10
SP-11
03D
03D 03D
カセッテセット部 4 カセッテセット部 4
CASSETTE SET UNIT 4 CASSETTE SET UNIT 4
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 106Y0005B/C 電磁クラッチ Electromagnetic Clutch 4 CLA1, 2, 3, 4 {MC:5.16}
D 2 118N200019 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 4 MA1, 2, 3, 4 {MC:5.11}
D 3 322N0038A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 8 {MC:5.24}
D 4 322SY065 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 {MC:5.24}
D 5 327N0144A 平歯車 Spur Gear 4 {MC:5.24}
D 6 327N0173A 平歯車 Spur Gear 4 {MC:5.24}
D 7 327N0193A 平歯車 Spur Gear 4 {MC:5.24}
D 8 327N0194 平歯車 Spur Gear 4 {MC:5.24}
D 9 327N1101904 平歯車 Spur Gear 4 {MC:5.24}
D 10 327N1103802 平歯車 Spur Gear 4 {MC:5.24}
D 11 334N0063A ローラ Roller 4 {MC:5.24}
E 12 356N6831D ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.24}
E 13 356N9142B ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.24}
E 14 356N9248 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.24}
D 15 388N2485A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 8 L ≒ 106mm {MC:5.24}
D 16 360N0360A ハウジング Housing 8 {MC:5.24}
D 17 360N0363 ハウジング Housing 8 {MC:5.24}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-11
SP-12
03E
03E 03E
カセッテセット部 5 カセッテセット部 5
CASSETTE SET UNIT 5 CASSETTE SET UNIT 5
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 319N3962 軸 Shaft 4 {MC:5.39}
D 2 322SY066 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 24 {MC:5.39}
D 3 332N0521C ストッパ Stopper 8 {MC:5.39}
D 4 332N0522E ストッパ Stopper 4 {MC:5.26}
D 5 332N0523E ストッパ Stopper 4 {MC:5.26}
D 6 332N0613A ストッパ Stopper 4 {MC:5.39}
E 7 346Y200148 補助板 Plate Support 4 {MC:5.25}
E 8 356N9143B ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.39}
E 9 356N9144 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.39}
E 10 356N9145A ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.39}
E 11 356N9146 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.39}
E 12 356N9147B ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.39}
D 13 363N2076C ガイド Guide 8 {MC:5.39}
D 14 363N2477 ガイド Guide 4 {MC:5.39}
D 15 363N2478B ガイド板 Guide plate 4 {MC:5.28}
D 16 363N2479 ガイド板 Guide plate 4 {MC:5.28}
Compression Coil
D 17 388N1224A 圧縮コイルバネ 12 L ≒ 64mm {MC:5.39}
Spring
D 18 107Y0183A ソレノイド Solenoid 4 SOLA1, 2, 3, 4 {MC:5.34}
D 19 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 4 SA2, 8, 14, 20 {MC:5.29}
D 20 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 4 SA3, 9, 15, 21 {MC:5.18}
E 21 319Y1161A 軸 Shaft 4 {MC:5.37}
E 22 319N3602B 軸 Shaft 4 {MC:5.30}
D 23 322SY066 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 8 {MC:5.37}
D 24 322SY066 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 8 {MC:5.30}
D 25 334N3604 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 24 {MC:5.23}
E 26 341N1103A アーム Arm 4 {MC:5.37}
E 27 356N6825D ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.30}
E 28 356N6826C ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.30}
E 29 356N6829D ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.37}
E 30 356N9471 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.34}
E 31 356N9387 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.18}
D 32 363N1788C ガイド Guide 4 {MC:5.30}
D 33 363N2065D ガイド板 Guide plate 12 {MC:5.23}
E 34 366N200005A アクチュエータ Actuator 4 {MC:5.29}
Compression Coil
D 35 388N1158A 圧縮コイルバネ 4 {MC:5.30}
Spring
D 36 388N2449 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 4 L ≒ 34mm {MC:5.37}
D 37 388N3098A ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 4 {MC:5.29}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-12
SP-13
04A
04A 04A
フィードロード搬送部 1 フィードロード搬送部 1
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 1 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 1
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 356N8928B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.12}
E 2 356N8929B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.11}
D 3 327N1123601B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:6.6}
E 4 339N0022B ハンドル Handle 1 {MC:6.6}
E 5 356N8931A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.6}
D 6 322SY232 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:6.6}
E 7 319N3662A 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:6.6}
D 8 327N1122416B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.6}
D 9 388N1213A 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Coil Spring 1 L ≒ 20mm {MC:6.6}
E 10 356N8930A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.6}
E 11 356N9134 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.28}
E 12 309S0008 スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:6.6}
D 13 388N1215 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Coil Spring 2 L ≒ 13mm {MC:6.6}
D 14 322SY060 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:6.6}
D 15 327N1123203 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.12}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-13
SP-14
04B
04B 04B
フィードロード搬送部 2 フィードロード搬送部 2
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 2 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 2
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N1123601B 平歯車 Spur Gear 5 {MC:6.13}
D 2 327N1122421 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.13}
D 3 327N1127201A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:6.13}
D 4 327N0188A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:6.13}
D 5 118N200019 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MB1 {MC:6.16}
D 6 327N1121610A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.16}
D 7 118N200019 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MB2 {MC:6.17}
D 8 327N1121610A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.17}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-14
SP-15
04C
04C 04C
フィードロード搬送部 3 フィードロード搬送部 3
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 3 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 3
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 356N9133A ブラケット Bracket 3
E 2 356N9135 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 3 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 3 SB7, 8, 9 {MC:6.3}
E 4 356N9188 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.10}
E 5 356N9138C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.10}
D 6 329N0156B カム Cam 2 {MC:6.9}
D 7 327N0188A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.18}
D 8 327Y0176D 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.36}
E 9 356N9186A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.1}
D 10 146N0016B フォトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 4 SB1, 2, 3, 4 {MC:6.2}
E 11 346N1251D 補助板 Plate Support 1 {MC:6.9}
D 12 328N0045A 爪 Claw 3 {MC:6.9}
D 13 327N0190B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:6.9}
D 14 118N200019 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MB3 {MC:6.18}
D 15 327N1121610A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.18}
D 16 329N0165A カム Cam 1 {MC:6.10}
D 17 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SB10 {MC:6.4}
D 18 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SB11 {MC:6.5}
D 19 146N0016B フォトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SB5 {MC:6.14}
D 20 146N0016B フォトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SB6 {MC:6.15}
D 21 327Y0176D 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.10}
D 22 328N0045A 爪 Claw 1 {MC:6.10}
E 23 356N9133A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.10}
D 24 329N0156B カム Cam 1 {MC:6.36}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-15
SP-16
04D
04D 04D
フィードロード搬送部 4 フィードロード搬送部 4
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 4 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 4
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 12 {MC:6.23}
D 2 388N2517 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 8 L ≒ 90mm {MC:6.23}
3 ***
D 4 334N3580B 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 18 {MC:6.19}
E 5 356N9136B ブラケット Bracket 3 {MC:6.19}
D 6 388N5269A 板バネ Leaf Spring 3 {MC:6.22}
D 7 334N200082B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 4 {MC:6.23}
D 8 334N200078B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 4 {MC:6.23}
D 9 334Y2244B 樹脂ローラアセンブリ Resin Roller Assembly 3 {MC:6.22}
D 10 387N0168 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 3 {MC:6.19}
D 11 334N3580B 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 6 {MC:6.20}
E 12 356N9136B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.20}
D 13 387N0168 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 {MC:6.20}
D 14 334N3580B 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 3 {MC:6.22}
E 15 347N100073 スペーサ Spacer 3
D 16 360N0475A ハウジング Housing 16 {MC:6.23}
D 17 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 16 {MC:6.23}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-16
SP-17
04E
04E 04E
フィードロード搬送部 5 フィードロード搬送部 5
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 5 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 5
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N2518 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 3 L ≒ 42mm {MC:6.25}
E 2 341N1049 アーム Arm 3 {MC:6.25}
D 3 322N0032 軸受 Bearing 3 {MC:6.25}
D 4 322N2001A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 3 {MC:6.25}
E 5 363Y100440B ガイド Guide 4 {MC:6.27}
D 6 363Y0433 ガイド Guide 3 {MC:6.26}
D 7 363Y100437A ガイド Guide 1 {MC:6.28}
D 8 363Y0470 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:6.26}
D 9 388N2518 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 42mm {MC:6.24}
E 10 341N1049 アーム Arm 1 {MC:6.24}
D 11 322N0032 軸受 Bearing 1 {MC:6.24}
D 12 322N2001A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:6.24}
D 13 334N2387A 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 1 {MC:6.24}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-17
SP-18
04F
04F 04F
フィードロード搬送部 6 フィードロード搬送部 6
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 6 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 6
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 363Y100455 ガイド Guide 4
D 2 334N200078B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2 {MC:6.29}
D 3 334N200083B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2 {MC:6.29}
4 ***
D 5 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 6 {MC:6.29}
D 6 388N2517 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 4 L ≒ 90mm {MC:6.29}
D 7 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:6.30}
D 8 388N2517 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 90mm {MC:6.30}
9 ***
D 10 334N200083B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.30}
D 11 334N200078B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.30}
D 12 334N200078B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.31}
D 13 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:6.31}
D 14 388N2517 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 90mm {MC:6.31}
15 ***
D 16 334N200083B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.31}
{MC:6.29}
D 17 360N0475A ハウジング Housing 16 {MC:6.30}
{MC:6.31}
{MC:6.29}
D 18 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 16 {MC:6.30}
{MC:6.31}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-18
SP-19
04G
04G 04G
フィードロード搬送部 7 フィードロード搬送部 7
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 7 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 7
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:6.32}
D 2 388N2517 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 90mm {MC:6.32}
3 ***
D 4 322SF229 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:6.7}
E 5 362N0720A 受 Box 2 {MC:6.7}
D 6 334N5015B ブラシローラ Brush Roller 2 {MC:6.7}
E 7 356N9137 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 8 334N200078B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.32}
D 9 334N200083B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.32}
D 10 363Y100454A ガイド Guide 1
D 11 363Y100453 ガイド Guide 1
D 12 322SP203 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:6.7}
D 13 332N0620 ストッパ Stopper 1 {MC:6.7}
D 14 327N0208 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.7}
D 15 334Y5007 ブラシローラ アセンブリ Brush Roller Assembly 1 {MC:6.7}
D 16 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:6.34}
D 17 388N2517 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 90mm {MC:6.34}
18 ***
D 19 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:6.7}
D 20 334N200078B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.34}
D 21 334N200083B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.34}
{MC:6.32}
D 22 360N0475A ハウジング Housing 8
{MC:6.34}
{MC:6.32}
D 23 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 8
{MC:6.34}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-19
SP-20
04H
04H 04H
フィードロード搬送部 8 フィードロード搬送部 8
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 8 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 8
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N2520 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 80mm {MC:6.33}
E 2 341N1050B アーム Arm 1 {MC:6.33}
D 3 322N2002 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:6.33}
D 4 363Y0455C ガイド Guide 1 {MC:6.35}
D 5 322SY054 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:6.33}
D 6 363Y100434A ガイド Guide 1 {MC:6.33}
E 7 405N0186 銘板 Label 2
E 8 356N9184B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 9 356N9185B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 10 356N9190 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 11 334N2387A 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 1 {MC:6.33}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-20
SP-21
05A
05A 05A
幅寄搬送部 1 幅寄搬送部 1
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1 SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 334Y2244B 樹脂ローラアセンブリ Resin Roller Assembly 9 {MC:7.22}
E 2 356N8932B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.22}
E 3 356N9166D ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.22}
E 4 356N9230A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.22}
D 5 334N3580B 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 9 {MC:7.22}
D 6 388N5269A 板バネ Leaf Spring 9 {MC:7.22}
D 7 118N200018 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MC4 {MC:7.11}
D 8 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC4 {MC:7.6}
E 9 319N3963A 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:7.29}
D 10 322N100294 滑り軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:7.29}
D 11 329N0162A カム Cam 2 {MC:7.30}
E 12 356N9155A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.29}
E 13 356N201979 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.11}
E 14 356N9159B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.6}
D 15 363Y0460A ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.30}
D 16 388N2523 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 22mm {MC:7.30}
D 17 363N2558 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.22}
E 18 356N9422A ブラケット Bracket 1
D 19 387N200029A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
D 20 387N200025A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
D 21 334N100237 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 4 {MC:7.29}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-21
SP-22
05B
05B 05B
幅寄搬送部 2 幅寄搬送部 2
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2 SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 146N0016B フォトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC3 {MC:7.5}
D 2 118N200019 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MC2 {MC:7.9}
D 3 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC2 {MC:7.4}
E 4 319N3940B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:7.21}
D 5 322SP214 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:7.19}
D 6 327N0143C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.3}
D 7 327N0189A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.9}
D 8 327N0194 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.3}
D 9 327N1103802 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.3}
D 10 329N0145A カム Cam 1 {MC:7.19}
D 11 329N0148B カム Cam 1 {MC:7.19}
D 12 329N0149A カム Cam 1 {MC:7.19}
D 13 329N0157 カム Cam 1 {MC:7.19}
E 14 342N0110A レバー Lever 1 {MC:7.19}
E 15 342N0111A レバー Lever 1 {MC:7.19}
E 16 347N1625A スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.19}
E 17 347N1848 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.19}
E 18 356N9157A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.3}
E 19 356N9167A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.14}
D 20 328Y0007 爪 Claw 2 {MC:7.14}
D 21 388N2448A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 36mm {MC:7.14}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-22
SP-23
05C
05C 05C
幅寄搬送部 3 幅寄搬送部 3
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3 SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 118N200019 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MC3 {MC:7.10}
E 2 347N1848 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.20}
D 3 388N2474A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 58mm {MC:7.7}
D 4 322SP203 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.15}
D 5 322SP203 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.7}
D 6 322SP214 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:7.20}
D 7 322SY059 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:7.16}
D 8 322SY063 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:7.15}
D 9 322SY122 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:7.16}
D 10 323S3069 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 {MC:7.7}
D 11 324N1026A 平ベルト車 Flat Belt Wheel 1 {MC:7.15}
D 12 324N1032A 平ベルト車 Flat Belt Wheel 1 {MC:7.7}
D 13 324N3164A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 2 {MC:7.7}
D 14 324N3165A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 1 {MC:7.10}
D 15 327N0198 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.16}
D 16 327N0199 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.16}
D 17 327N1123601B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.16}
D 18 327N1124802 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.17}
D 19 329N0145A カム Cam 1 {MC:7.20}
D 20 329N0148B カム Cam 1 {MC:7.20}
D 21 329N0149A カム Cam 1 {MC:7.20}
D 22 329N0157 カム Cam 1 {MC:7.20}
E 23 341N0944D アーム Arm 1 {MC:7.15}
E 24 342N0109 レバー Lever 1 {MC:7.16}
E 25 342N0111A レバー Lever 1 {MC:7.20}
E 26 342N0129A レバー Lever 1 {MC:7.20}
E 27 347N1625A スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.20}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-23
SP-24
05D
05D 05D
幅寄搬送部 4 幅寄搬送部 4
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4 SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N2458A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 62mm {MC:7.23}
D 2 388N2524A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 80mm {MC:7.23}
D 3 388N2546 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 138mm {MC:7.25}
D 4 322SF230 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:7.25}
D 5 322SF230 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.26}
D 6 322SF230 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.27}
D 7 322SP205 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 6 {MC:7.25}
D 8 322SP205 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:7.26}
D 9 322SP205 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.27}
D 10 322SP206 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.25}
D 11 322SP206 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.27}
D 12 334N200080B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2 {MC:7.25}
D 13 334N200081A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:7.26}
D 14 334N200081A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:7.27}
E 15 347N1624A スペーサ Spacer 4 {MC:7.25}
E 16 347N1624A スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:7.26}
E 17 347N1624A スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:7.27}
E 18 347N1846 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.27}
D 19 360N0476 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:7.25}
D 20 360N0476 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:7.27}
D 21 360N0479 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:7.25}
D 22 360N0479 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:7.26}
D 23 363Y0488A/B ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.28}
D 24 388N2536A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 117mm {MC:7.26}
D 25 388N2537A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 159mm {MC:7.25}
26 ***
27 ***
D 28 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:7.23}
D 29 334N200078B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:7.23}
D 30 334N200079B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:7.24}
D 31 363Y0453 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.24}
D 32 363Y0462 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.23}
E 33 405N0186 銘板 Label 1
D 34 388N2472B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 162mm {MC:7.26}
D 35 388N2521 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 145mm {MC:7.26}
D 36 384N200004 テープ Tape 1 {MC:7.31}
D 37 360N0475A ハウジング Housing 4 {MC:7.23}
D 38 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:7.23}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-24
SP-25
05E
05E 05E
幅寄搬送部 5 幅寄搬送部 5
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5 SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 118N200019 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MC1 {MC:7.8}
D 2 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC1 {MC:7.2}
E 3 319N3623D 軸 Shaft 2 {MC:7.13}
E 4 319N3939B 軸 Shaft 2 {MC:7.13}
D 5 322N0050 軸受 Bearing 1 {MC:7.13}
D 6 322N0051 軸受 Bearing 1 {MC:7.13}
D 7 322N0052 軸受 Bearing 2 {MC:7.13}
D 8 322SY063 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 {MC:7.13}
D 9 322SY093 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 {MC:7.13}
D 10 322SY232 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:7.13}
D 11 327N0139B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.12}
D 12 327N0140A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.12}
D 13 327N0173A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.8}
D 14 328N0050C 爪 Claw 1 {MC:7.13}
D 15 328N0051C 爪 Claw 1 {MC:7.13}
D 16 334N0041A ローラ Roller 2 {MC:7.13}
E 17 341N1065B アーム Arm 1 {MC:7.12}
E 18 353N200044 シャーシ Chassis 1 {MC:7.12}
E 19 356N8926B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.13}
E 20 356N9164B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.2}
D 21 363N2073B ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.13}
D 22 363N2115 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.13}
D 23 388N1223 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Coil Spring 2 L ≒ 57mm {MC:7.13}
D 24 388N2447B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 33mm {MC:7.13}
25 ***
26 ***
D 27 363Y0461 ガイド Guide 1
E 28 405N0186 銘板 Label 2
29 ***
E 30 315S0013 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:7.13}
D 31 347N0706 スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:7.13}
E 32 328N0053B 爪 Claw 2 {MC:7.13}
D 33 898Y200820 読取り部 Bar Code Reader 1 BCRC1
34 ***
E 35 356N103879A ブラケット Bracket 1
D 36 384N100125 スペーサ Spacer
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-25
SP-26
06A
06A 06A
後搬送部 1 後搬送部 1
AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 1 AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 1
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 118N200020 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MD2 {MC:8.13}
D 2 327N1121610A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.13}
D 3 327N1127201A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.12}
D 4 327N0197 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.12}
D 5 327N1123601B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:8.7}
E 6 356N9118 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:8.12}
D 7 327N0199 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.7}
D 8 327N0198 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.7}
D 9 324N3164A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 2 {MC:8.3}
D 10 324N1026A 平ベルト車 Flat Belt Wheel 1 {MC:8.3}
D 11 322SP203 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:8.3}
D 12 324N3098B タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 1 {MC:8.3}
D 13 322SY063 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:8.2}
E 14 341N1061 アーム Arm 1 {MC:8.2}
D 15 388N2525 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 40mm {MC:8.2}
E 16 356N9162 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:8.7}
E 17 342N0109 レバー Lever 1 {MC:8.7}
D 18 322SY059 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:8.7}
D 19 322SY122 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:8.7}
D 20 323S3271 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 {MC:8.3}
D 21 324N1032A 平ベルト車 Flat Belt Wheel 1 {MC:8.3}
D 22 327N1123601B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.12}
D 23 322SP203 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:8.2}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-26
SP-27
06B
06B 06B
後搬送部 2 後搬送部 2
AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 2 AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 2
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 319N3969B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:8.21}
D 2 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SD1 {MC:8.5}
D 3 327N0143C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.4}
D 4 327N0195A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.21}
D 5 356N9165 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:8.21}
D 6 322SP214 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:8.21}
D 7 327S1103002A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.4}
D 8 329N0158A カム Cam 1 {MC:8.21}
D 9 327N0196B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.21}
D 10 327N0189A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.9}
D 11 118N200019 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MD1 {MC:8.9}
E 12 356N9117B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:8.4}
E 13 347N1834 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:8.6}
E 14 342N0130 レバー Lever 1 {MC:8.6}
D 15 329N0148B カム Cam 2 {MC:8.6}
D 16 146N0016B フォトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SD2 {MC:8.10}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-27
SP-28
06C
06C 06C
後搬送部 3 後搬送部 3
AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 3 AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 3
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N0195A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.21}
D 2 356N9165 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:8.21}
D 3 322SP214 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:8.21}
D 4 329N0158A カム Cam 1 {MC:8.21}
D 5 327N0196B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.21}
E 6 347N1834 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:8.8}
E 7 356N9111 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:8.11}
D 8 388N5269A 板バネ Leaf Spring 3 {MC:8.11}
D 9 334N3580B 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 3 {MC:8.11}
E 10 342N0131 レバー Lever 1 {MC:8.8}
D 11 329N0149A カム Cam 2 {MC:8.8}
D 12 334Y2244B 樹脂ローラアセンブリ Resin Roller Assembly 3 {MC:8.11}
D 13 363N2535C ガイド板 Guide Plate 1 {MC:8.17}
D 14 363Y0494 ガイド板 Guide Plate 1 {MC:8.14}
E 15 319N4059C 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:8.14}
D 16 322SY298 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:8.14}
E 17 341N1116B アーム Arm 2 {MC:8.14}
Antistatic Brush
D 18 356Y0426 帯電防止材アセンブリ 3 {MC:8.11}
Assembly
E 19 356N10306 ブラケット Bracket 3 {MC:8.11}
D 20 387N200028A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 3 {MC:8.11}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-28
SP-29
06D
06D 06D
後搬送部 4 後搬送部 4
AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 4 AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 4
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N2472B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 3 L ≒ 162mm {MC:8.15}
D 2 322SP205 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 6 {MC:8.15}
E 3 347N1624A スペーサ Spacer 4 {MC:8.15}
D 4 322SF230 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:8.15}
D 5 360N0476 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:8.15}
D 6 360N0479 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:8.15}
D 7 322SP206 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:8.15}
E 8 347N1846 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:8.15}
D 9 388N2473B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 117mm {MC:8.15}
D 10 334N200080B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:8.15}
D 11 334N200081A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:8.15}
D 12 363Y200034 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:8.19}
D 13 334N200080B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:8.16}
D 14 334N200081A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:8.16}
D 15 388N2472B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 4 L ≒ 162mm {MC:8.16}
D 16 322SP205 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 6 {MC:8.16}
E 17 347N1624A スペーサ Spacer 4 {MC:8.16}
D 18 322SF230 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:8.16}
D 19 360N0476 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:8.16}
D 20 360N0479 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:8.16}
D 21 322SP206 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:8.16}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-29
SP-30
06E
06E 06E
後搬送部 5 後搬送部 5
AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 5 AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 5
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:8.17}
D 2 388N2524A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 80mm {MC:8.17}
3 ***
D 4 363N200114A ガイド Guide 1 {MC:8.20}
D 5 334N200079B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:8.17}
D 6 334N200078B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:8.17}
D 7 388N2458A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 62mm {MC:8.17}
E 8 405N0186 銘板 Label 3
D 9 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:8.18}
D 10 388N2524A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 80mm {MC:8.18}
11 ***
D 12 334N200079B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:8.18}
D 13 334N200078B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:8.18}
D 14 388N2458A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 62mm {MC:8.18}
15 ***
16 ***
D 17 360N0475A ハウジング Housing 4 {MC:8.17}
D 18 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:8.17}
D 19 360N0475A ハウジング Housing 4 {MC:8.18}
D 20 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:8.18}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-30
SP-31
07A
07A 07A
消去搬送部 1 消去搬送部 1
ERASURE CONVEYOR 1 ERASURE CONVEYOR 1
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 118N200020 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 ME1 {MC:9.25}
D 2 322SP203 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 6 {MC:9.19}
D 3 322SY059 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:9.18}
D 4 324N3098B タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 2 {MC:9.19}
D 5 324N3038C タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 2 {MC:9.15}
D 6 327N0198 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.16}
D 7 327N0199 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.16}
D 8 327N1121610A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.25}
D 9 327N1123601B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.16}
E 10 356N9281 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.25}
E 11 356N201980 ブラケット Bracket 1
E 12 356N9346B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.18}
D 13 363N2476B ガイド Guide 4 {MC:9.12}
D 14 407N200002 反射板ガイド Reflective Plate 1 {MC:9.12}
D 15 323S3097 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 {MC:9.15}
D 16 323S3223 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 {MC:9.14}
D 17 322SY122 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:9.16}
D 18 388N2545 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 61mm {MC:9.14}
D 19 363Y0468A ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.21}
D 20 363Y0467A ガイド Guide 1
E 21 356N9235D ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.10}
D 22 388N5269A 板バネ Leaf Spring 3 {MC:9.10}
D 23 334N3580B 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 3 {MC:9.10}
D 24 334Y2244A 樹脂ローラアセンブリ Resin Roller Assembly 3 {MC:9.10}
D 25 363Y0480 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.22}
E 26 356N9348A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.19}
D 27 324N1026A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 1 {MC:9.19}
D 28 324N3038C タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 1 {MC:9.16}
D 29 324N3164A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 1 {MC:9.14}
D 30 324N3164A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 1 {MC:9.29}
E 31 356N9260B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 32 356N9442 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 33 382N1634 テープ Tape 1
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-31
SP-32
07B
07B 07B
消去搬送部 2 消去搬送部 2
ERASURE CONVEYOR 2 ERASURE CONVEYOR 2
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SE5 {MC:9.9}
D 2 324N3164A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 2 {MC:9.13}
D 3 327N0143C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.17}
D 4 327N0194 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:9.17}
E 5 356N9291B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.8}
D 6 322N2003A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:9.18}
E 7 347N1834 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:9.18}
E 8 319N3969B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:9.33}
D 9 322N2003A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:9.17}
D 10 322SP214 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:9.33}
D 11 327N0195A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:9.33}
D 12 327N0196B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:9.33}
D 13 329N0159A カム Cam 3 {MC:9.17}
D 14 329N0160B カム Cam 2 {MC:9.18}
D 15 329N0161B カム Cam 2 {MC:9.33}
D 16 329N0170 カム Cam 1 {MC:9.18}
E 17 342Y0023A レバー Lever 1 {MC:9.17}
E 18 342Y0024A レバー Lever 1 {MC:9.18}
E 19 347N1834 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:9.17}
E 20 356N9165 ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:9.33}
E 21 350N2835A カバー Cover 1 {MC:9.8}
D 22 323S3097 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 {MC:9.13}
D 23 322SY065 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:9.1}
D 24 327N1103802 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.17}
D 25 898Y200919 ローラーアセンブリ Roller Assembly 1
D 26 898Y200920 ローラーアセンブリ Roller Assembly 1
D 27 898Y200921 ローラーアセンブリ Roller Assembly 1
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-32
SP-33
07C
07C 07C
消去搬送部 3 消去搬送部 3
ERASURE CONVEYOR 3 ERASURE CONVEYOR 3
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 118N200019 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 ME3 {MC:9.27}
D 2 118N200019 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 ME2 {MC:9.26}
D 3 327N0173A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.26}
D 4 327N0189A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.27}
E 5 356N9261C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.26}
D 6 363Y0482A ガイド Guide 2 {MC:9.24}
D 7 388N2448A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 36mm {MC:9.24}
D 8 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SE4 {MC:9.7}
E 9 319N3623D 軸 Shaft 2 {MC:9.23}
E 10 319N3939B 軸 Shaft 2 {MC:9.23}
D 11 322N0050 軸受 Bearing 1 {MC:9.23}
D 12 322N0051 軸受 Bearing 1 {MC:9.23}
D 13 322N0052 軸受 Bearing 2 {MC:9.23}
D 14 322SY063 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 {MC:9.23}
D 15 322SY093 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 {MC:9.23}
D 16 322SY232 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:9.23}
D 17 327N0140A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:9.23}
D 18 327N0194 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.23}
D 19 328N0041D 爪 Claw 1 {MC:9.23}
D 20 328N0052 爪 Claw 1 {MC:9.23}
D 21 334N0041A ローラ Roller 2 {MC:9.23}
E 22 341Y0324A アーム Arm 1 {MC:9.23}
E 23 353N0090B シャーシ Chassis 1 {MC:9.23}
E 24 356N8926B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.23}
D 25 363N2073B ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.23}
D 26 363N2115 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.23}
D 27 388N1223 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Coil Spring 2 L ≒ 57mm {MC:9.23}
D 28 388N2447B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 33mm {MC:9.23}
D 29 315S0013 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:9.23}
D 30 384N0077 こすり部材 Tape 1 {MC:9.23}
D 31 384N0076A こすり部材 Tape 1 {MC:9.23}
D 32 346N1146A スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:9.23}
E 33 356N9596 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.36}
E 34 356N9597 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.36}
E 35 386N1172 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 2 {MC:9.36}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-33
SP-34
07D
07D 07D
消去搬送部 4 消去搬送部 4
ERASURE CONVEYOR 4 ERASURE CONVEYOR 4
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 346N1210 補助板 Plate Support 1
D 2 322SF229 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 12 {MC:9.28}
D 3 388N2549 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 71mm {MC:9.29}
D 4 322SP205 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 24 {MC:9.28}
D 5 334N200084B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:9.28}
D 6 334N200085A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 3 {MC:9.28}
D 7 334N200088B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:9.28}
D 8 334N200090B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:9.28}
E 9 347N1624A スペーサ Spacer 14 {MC:9.28}
E 10 347N1846 スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:9.15}
D 11 360N0484A ハウジング Housing 6 {MC:9.28}
D 12 360N0485A ハウジング Housing 6 {MC:9.28}
D 13 363Y0466C ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.34}
D 14 363Y0483C ガイド板 Guide Plate 1 {MC:9.31}
D 15 363Y0484A ガイド板 Guide Plate 1 {MC:9.32}
D 16 388N2531A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 4 L ≒ 78mm {MC:9.28}
D 17 388N2532A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 50mm {MC:9.28}
D 18 388N100164A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 100mm {MC:9.29}
19 ***
D 20 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:9.29}
D 21 334N200078B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:9.29}
D 22 334N200089B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:9.29}
D 23 388N2551 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 66mm {MC:9.28}
D 24 388N2552 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 62mm {MC:9.28}
D 25 388N2552 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 62mm {MC:9.39}
D 26 360N0475A ハウジング Housing 4 {MC:9.29}
D 27 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:9.29}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-34
SP-35
07E
07E 07E
消去搬送部 5 消去搬送部 5
ERASURE CONVEYOR 5 ERASURE CONVEYOR 5
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 107Y0169B ソレノイド Solenoid 1 SOLE1 {MC:9.11}
D 2 146N0016B フォトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SE1 {MC:9.5}
D 3 146N0016B フォトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SE2 {MC:9.6}
E 4 356N9204C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.11}
E 5 356N9205B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.11}
D 6 388N2540 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 32mm {MC:9.11}
E 7 319N4023C 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:9.35}
E 8 319N4024B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:9.35}
E 9 319N4025C 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:9.35}
D 10 322N2003A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:9.35}
D 11 322N2006B すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:9.35}
D 12 322N2007 軸受 Bearing 2 {MC:9.35}
D 13 322SY054 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:9.35}
E 14 341N1090D アーム Arm 1 {MC:9.37}
E 15 341N1091B アーム Arm 1 {MC:9.38}
D 16 363Y100481 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.35}
D 17 388N2540 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 32mm {MC:9.35}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-35
SP-36
07F
07F 07F
消去搬送部 6 消去搬送部 6
ERASURE CONVEYOR 6 ERASURE CONVEYOR 6
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N2458A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 62mm {MC:9.30}
2 ***
D 3 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:9.30}
D 4 334N200086B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:9.30}
D 5 334N200087B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:9.30}
D 6 388N2524A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 80mm {MC:9.30}
D 7 360N0475A ハウジング Housing 4 {MC:9.30}
D 8 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:9.30}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-36
SP-37
07G
07G 07G
消去搬送部 7 消去搬送部 7
ERASURE CONVEYOR 7 ERASURE CONVEYOR 7
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 308S0012 特殊ネジ Screw 2 {MC:9.4}
D 2 316S3012A キャッチ Catch 1 {MC:9.4}
D 3 334Y2244B 樹脂ローラアセンブリ Resin Roller Assembly 3 {MC:9.4}
4 ***
E 5 347N1730B スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:9.4}
E 6 356N9293D ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.4}
D 7 363Y100436 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.4}
D 8 363Y0434A ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.4}
D 9 363Y0457 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.4}
D 10 388N5269A 板バネ Leaf Spring 3 {MC:9.4}
D 11 334N3580B 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 3 {MC:9.4}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-37
SP-38
07H
07H 07H
消去搬送部 8 消去搬送部 8
ERASURE CONVEYOR 8 ERASURE CONVEYOR 8
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 603Y120008 フィルタ Filter 1 {MC:9.3}
D 2 898Y120227B ランプケース Lamp Case 1 {MC:9.2}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-38
SP-39
08
08 08
光学部 光学部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT SCANNING OPTICS UNIT
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
DR 1 839Y100086B 光学部 Scanning Optics Unit 1 {MC:10.}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-39
SP-40
09A
09A 09A
集光部 1 集光部 1
LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT 1 LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT 1
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 113Y100484C PMT27B PMT27B 1 {MC:11.3}
D 2 345N1664C シールド材 Shielding Tape 1 {MC:11.3}
D 3 606Y100065 集光ガイド Light-collecting Guide 1 {MC:11.1}
D 4 345Y200036 遮光シート Protect sheet 1
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-40
SP-41
09B
09B 09B
集光部 2 集光部 2
LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT 2 LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT 2
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 113Y100854B PMR27B PMR27B 1 For CR-IR363 {MC:11.4}
D 2 345N1664C シールド材 Shielding Tape 1 For CR-IR363 {MC:11.4}
D 3 606Y100062 集光ガイド Light-collecting Guide 1 For CR-IR363 {MC:11.2}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-41
SP-42
10A
10A 10A
副走査部 1 副走査部 1
SUB SCANNING UNIT 1 SUB SCANNING UNIT 1
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 319N3967 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:12.33}
E 2 319N3972B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:12.33}
D 3 322SF149 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.6}
D 4 322SY055 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.6}
D 5 322SY055 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.33}
D 6 322SY116 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.33}
E 7 323N1221A ベルト Belt 1 {MC:12.4}
D 8 334N100237 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 2 {MC:12.33}
D 9 337N0043 ホイール Flywheel 1 {MC:12.6}
E 10 341N1062A アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.6}
E 11 341N1063A アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.33}
E 12 342D738596A レバー Lever 1 {MC:12.33}
E 13 347N0636 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:12.6}
E 14 350N2721E カバー Cover 1 {MC:12.2}
E 15 356N9199A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.33}
D 16 388N1073A 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Coil Spring 1 L ≒ 8mm {MC:12.6}
D 17 388N2227A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 42mm {MC:12.4}
D 18 318S3060 グロメット Grommet 1
E 19 319N3966A 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:12.6}
E 20 356N9193B ブラケット Bracket 1
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-42
SP-43
10B
10B 10B
副走査部 2 副走査部 2
SUB SCANNING UNIT 2 SUB SCANNING UNIT 2
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 118N100079 5PM Pulse Motor 1 MZ1 {MC:12.9}
D 2 305N0070 ナット Nut 1 {MC:12.8}
D 3 322SY055 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.7}
D 4 322SF149 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.7}
E 5 323N100076B ベルト Belt 1 {MC:12.5}
D 6 337N0044 ホイール Flywheel 1 {MC:12.7}
D 7 337N0059C ホイール Flywheel 1 {MC:12.8}
E 8 341N1056B アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.7}
E 9 324N100163 ベルト車 Pulley 1 {MC:12.9}
D 10 388N1073A 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Coil Spring 1 L ≒ 8mm {MC:12.7}
D 11 388N2434A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 76mm {MC:12.5}
D 12 387N200026A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 {MC:12.10}
D 13 387N0138C 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
E 14 356N6813D ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.10}
E 15 356N106819D ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.9}
D 16 113Y100861A CRD5107P CRD5107P 1 {MC:12.9}
E 17 136Y103833 ケーブル Cable 1 {MC:12.9}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-43
SP-44
10C
10C 10C
副走査部 3 副走査部 3
SUB SCANNING UNIT 3 SUB SCANNING UNIT 3
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 319N3600B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:12.16}
D 2 322SF154 軸受 Bearing 1 {MC:12.16}
D 3 322SF149 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.16}
E 4 341N0934D アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.16}
E 5 341N0941B アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.16}
E 6 344N0002C フォーク Fork 2 {MC:12.16}
E 7 347N1700B スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:12.16}
E 8 356N6836B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.16}
D 9 388N2477 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 22mm {MC:12.16}
E 10 356N9194 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 11 118N200018 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MZ4 {MC:12.15}
D 12 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SZ5 {MC:12.12}
E 13 316N0465B アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.17}
E 14 319N3600B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:12.17}
D 15 322SF154 軸受 Bearing 1 {MC:12.17}
D 16 322SF210 軸受 Bearing 1 {MC:12.15}
E 17 322SF149 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.17}
E 18 341N0935E アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.17}
E 19 341N0942B アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.17}
E 20 344N0002C フォーク Fork 2 {MC:12.17}
E 21 347N1844A スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:12.17}
E 22 347N1845A スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:12.17}
E 23 356N9099A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.15}
E 24 356N9183C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.12}
D 25 388N2477 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 22mm {MC:12.17}
E 26 341N1057C アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.15}
D 27 322SY060 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.17}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-44
SP-45
10D
10D 10D
副走査部 4 副走査部 4
SUB SCANNING UNIT 4 SUB SCANNING UNIT 4
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 118YX216E モータ Motor 1 MZ2 {MC:12.13}
D 2 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 2 SZ2,SZ3 {MC:12.11}
E 3 319N3616B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:12.13}
D 4 322SF149 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:12.11}
D 5 329N0166 カム Cam 1 {MC:12.13}
E 6 356N6819D ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.11}
E 7 356N6820F ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.13}
D 8 338N0520C リングカラー Ring Collar 1 {MC:12.13}
E 9 350N2534A カバー Cover 1 {MC:12.13}
E 10 386N130063 衝撃緩衝材 Shock Absorber 1
E 11 382N200126 テープ Tape 3
E 12 382N200068 テープ Tape 1
＊参考：（3B）はゆるみ止め接着剤を使用する箇所である。
＊ REMARKS：（3B）indicates to use screw locking adhesive.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-45
SP-46
10E
10E 10E
副走査部 5 副走査部 5
SUB SCANNING UNIT 5 SUB SCANNING UNIT 5
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 356N9181C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.23}
D 2 334Y3217 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:12.20}
D 3 334Y3217 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:12.21}
D 4 343N0055B フック Hook 1 {MC:12.20}
D 5 343N0055B フック Hook 1 {MC:12.21}
D 6 343N0056B フック Hook 1 {MC:12.20}
D 7 343N0056B フック Hook 1 {MC:12.21}
D 8 388N2526 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 54mm {MC:12.21}
D 9 388N2527A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 41mm {MC:12.21}
D 10 388N2526 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 54mm {MC:12.20}
D 11 388N2527A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 41mm {MC:12.20}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-46
SP-47
10F
10F 10F
副走査部 6 副走査部 6
SUB SCANNING UNIT 6 SUB SCANNING UNIT 6
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 319N3619 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:12.18}
E 2 356N9182A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.23}
D 3 387N200030 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 {MC:12.22}
D 4 118YX217E モータ Motor 1 MZ3 {MC:12.14}
D 5 146S0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SZ4 {MC:12.19}
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
D 6 113Y1738D 1 SZ1 {MC:12.23}
(SED23A) (SED23A)
E 7 319N3957C 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:12.25}
D 8 322SF155 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:12.25}
D 9 322SF155 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:12.25}
D 10 327N0135E 歯車 Gear 1 {MC:12.18}
D 11 327N0136B 歯車 Gear 1 {MC:12.18}
E 12 327S4051R01 ウオーム Warm Gear 1 {MC:12.14}
E 13 356N6871B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.25}
E 14 356N9237 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.14}
D 15 360N0362E ハウジング Housing 1 {MC:12.19}
D 16 363N2060C ガイド Guide 1 {MC:12.25}
D 17 388N2435 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 41mm {MC:12.22}
D 18 602Y200003A ミラーアセンブリ Mirror Assembly 1 {MC:12.24}
＊参考：（3B）はゆるみ止め接着剤を使用する箇所である。
＊ REMARKS：（3B）indicates to use screw locking adhesive.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-47
SP-48
10G
10G 10G
副走査部 7 副走査部 7
SUB SCANNING UNIT 7 SUB SCANNING UNIT 7
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 387N0138C 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
E 2 401N0848C 押え板 Counter Plate 1 {MC:12.28}
D 3 334Y3219B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:12.28}
4 ***
E 5 356N9198A ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:12.26}
D 6 363N2156A ガイド板 Guide plate 1 {MC:12.26}
D 7 363Y0495E ガイド Guide 1 {MC:12.27}
D 8 308S0320 特殊ネジ Screw 10 {MC:12.26}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-48
SP-49
10H
10H 10H
副走査部 8 副走査部 8
SUB SCANNING UNIT 8 SUB SCANNING UNIT 8
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
Vibration Proof Rubber
E 1 386Y0048 防振ゴムアセンブリ 1 {MC:12.32}
Assembly
E 2 356N9239B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 3 356N9240B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 4 356N9415B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 5 356N9414B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 6 357N1460F 台 Base 1
E 7 347N1851B スペーサ Spacer 5
E 8 356N9484A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.30}
E 9 356N9485A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.30}
2 ヶ組／ A set
E 10 386Y0049 防振ゴム Rubber Vibration Isolator 1 {MC:12.30}
of two
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-49
SP-50
11
11 11
制御部 制御部
CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
C 1 113Y200415B SND39A SND39A 2
E 2 356N201809B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 3 356N201808B ブラケット Bracket 1
C 4 113Y200414B CPU39A CPU39A 1
ディスプレイ アセ Display Assembly
C 5 898Y200918 1 {MC:4.11}
ンブリ（PNL38C） (PNL38C)
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-50
SP-51
12
12
ケーブル
CABLE
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. CONNECTION DIAGRAM RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
E 1 136Y102173C ケーブル Cable 1 2/15 E 50 136Y8754D ケーブル Cable 1 7/15
E 2 136Y102179A ケーブル Cable 2 5/15, 6/15 E 51 136Y8755E ケーブル Cable 1 7/15
E 3 136Y102192C ケーブル Cable 1 5/15 E 52 136Y8757D ケーブル Cable 1 8/15
E 4 136Y102193C ケーブル Cable 1 5/15 E 53 136Y8759E ケーブル Cable 1 8/15
E 5 136Y102194C ケーブル Cable 1 6/15 E 54 136Y8761D ケーブル Cable 1 8/15
E 6 136Y102195C ケーブル Cable 1 6/15 E 55 136Y8764C ケーブル Cable 1 12/15
E 7 136Y103833 ケーブル Cable 1 9/15 E 56 136Y8770B ケーブル Cable 1 12/15
E 8 136Y201113A ケーブル Cable 5 3/15 E 57 136Y8921D ケーブル Cable 7 14/15
E 9 136Y201622B ケーブル Cable 2 3/15
E 10 136Y201627A ケーブル Cable 1 8/15
E 11 136Y201634A ケーブル Cable 1 2/15
E 12 136Y201635F ケーブル Cable 1 2/15
E 13 136Y201637A ケーブル Cable 1 5/15
E 14 136Y201639B ケーブル Cable 2 6/15
E 15 136Y201643C ケーブル Cable 6 4/15
E 16 136Y201645 ケーブル Cable 1 7/15
E 17 136Y201646B ケーブル Cable 3 3/15, 8/15, 9/15
E 18 136Y201647B ケーブル Cable 3 10/15, 11/15
E 19 136Y201649D ケーブル Cable 5 11/15, 12/15, 13/15
E 20 136Y201650C ケーブル Cable 1 14/15, 15/15
E 21 136Y201651B ケーブル Cable 1 2/15
E 22 136Y201652F ケーブル Cable 1 2/15
E 23 136Y201659A ケーブル Cable 1 10/15
E 24 136Y201660B ケーブル Cable 1 10/15
E 25 136Y201661A ケーブル Cable 1 10/15
E 26 136Y201662B ケーブル Cable 1 10/15
E 27 136Y201663A ケーブル Cable 1 10/15
E 28 136Y201664B ケーブル Cable 1 11/15
E 29 136Y201665A ケーブル Cable 1 10/15
E 30 136Y201666B ケーブル Cable 1 11/15
E 31 136Y201667B ケーブル Cable 1 11/15
E 32 136Y201668A ケーブル Cable 1 12/15
E 33 136Y201669A ケーブル Cable 1 13/15
E 34 136Y201670C ケーブル Cable 1 12/15
E 35 136Y201671B ケーブル Cable 1 9/15
E 36 136Y201672C ケーブル Cable 1 2/15
E 37 136Y201673A ケーブル Cable 2 12/15, 13/15
E 38 136Y201818A ケーブル Cable 1 11/15
E 39 136Y201819B ケーブル Cable 1 11/15
E 40 136Y201823A ケーブル Cable 1 13/15
E 41 136Y201829 ケーブル Cable 1 2/15
E 42 136Y201830B ケーブル Cable 1 4/15
E 43 136Y201883 ケーブル Cable 1 12/15
E 44 136Y201886 ケーブル Cable 1 4/15
E 45 136Y8738D ケーブル Cable 1 5/15
E 46 136Y8740C ケーブル Cable 1 5/15
E 47 136Y8742C ケーブル Cable 1 6/15
E 48 136Y8744B ケーブル Cable 1 6/15
E 49 136Y8745C ケーブル Cable 1 6/15
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-51
SP-52
13A
13A
回路図 1
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
mOZP-350-24-JSER-K
125N200023 136Y201634 PSU5 PSU5 CPU-FAN
CN11 CN11 PSU3 PSU3
1 UL1061-AWG26赤 1
1 UL1007-AWG24灰 1 DC24V(+)
RS AC_Fail(+)_OC 2 2
2 UL1007-AWG24黒 2 N.C
CB AC_Fail(-) 3 UL1061-AWG26白 3
3 Lock
A OVP 4 UL1061-AWG26黒 4 A
DC24V(-)
4
XAP-02V-1 B02B-XASK-1
AC_Fail(+)_OC 5
SXA-001T-P0.6 292161-4 179228-4 179228-4
AC_Fail(-)
179518-1 179518-1
XH-5 XHP-5
BXH-001T-P0.6 PNL9 CN9
136Y201651 136Y201652
CN-J7 D GND
PNL38A
1
CN-LINE LINE LOAD CN-LOAD_1 CNPS1_R CNPS1_P CN1 CN1 CN10 CN10 136Y2001634
128S1173
2
+5V
1
L L UL1015-AWG18黒 1 1 UL1015-AWG18黒 1
AC(L) DC24V(+)
1 UL1007-AWG18赤
PSU39A
2
N ブレーカ 42232-3 UL1015-AWG18白
CN-LOAD_2
2 2 UL1015-AWG18白 2
3
N.C DC24V
AC(N) （+）
DC24V(+)
DC24V(+)
2
3
UL1007-AWG18赤
UL1007-AWG18赤
PAP-02V-S BM02B-PASS-1-TFT
SPHD-002T-P0.5
PE_LINE
DS-250PU Circuit breaker N
42232-3
XLP-02V XLR-02V
SXF-41T-P0.7 SYM-41T-P0.7
4
5
10A/AWG16
N.C 7A/AWG18
FG
DC24V(+)
DC24V(+)
4
5
UL1007-AWG18赤
UL1007-AWG18赤
113Y100415 PSU6 PSU6 136Y201635
5A/AWG20 1
CPU1 CPU1
3120-F521-P7T1-W01K-10A(ETA) DF-250U DC24V(+)
6
8
PE_CN1 VHR-5N B3P5-VH 1
STBY+5V_GND
DC-15V_GND 2 UL1007-AWG20黒
B SVH-41T-P1.1 B6P-VH(JST) VHR-6N 6
STBY_5V(+)
B
FV2-4 ｱｵ K
UL1015-AWG18緑/黄スパイラル DC-15V(-) 9 UL1007-AWG20青
(ﾌﾞﾚｰｶ近傍筐体) SVH-21T-P1.1 UL1007-AWG20黒
2
DC+5V_GND
DC+15V_GND 3
（Housing near the breaker)
UL1007-AWG20赤
7
DC+5V
DC+15V 10
FN1.25-4 PSU1 PSU1 UL1007-AWG20黒
3
DC+15V_GND
DC+5V_GND 4
1 UL1007-AWG20赤
8
DC+15V
DC24V(+) DC+5V 11
2 UL1007-AWG24黒
4
DC-15V_GND
GND_DC24V(-) DC+5V_GND 5
CN8 CN8 136Y201634 3 UL1007-AWG24赤
9
DC-15V(-)
DC24V(+) DC+5V 12
1 UL1007-AWG18黒 4 UL1007-AWG20黒
5
DC+24V_GND
DC24V(-) GND_DC24V(-) STBY+5V_GND 6
2 UL1007-AWG18黒 5 UL1007-AWG20赤
10
DC24V(+)
DC24V DC24V(-) DC24V(+) STBY_5V(+) 13
（-） DC24V(-)
3 UL1007-AWG18黒 6
GND_DC24V(-) DC+24V_GND 7 UL1007-AWG20黒
10A/AWG16 UL1007-AWG18黒 5557-10R 5569-10A
4 UL1007-AWG20赤
7A/AWG18 DC24V(-) DC24V(+) 14
UL1007-AWG18黒 5556PBTL
CPU39A
5
5A/AWG20 DC24V(-) DF5A-6DS-5C DF5A-6DP-5DSA
6 5559-14A 5557-14R
[国内] 136N0416 (患者環境外)
[Japan] (Outside patient environment) DC24V(-) DF5-1822SC
5556PBTL
[国内] 136N0417 (患者環境内)
7
[Japan] (within patient environment) DC24V(-)
C CN6 AWG24∼18 C
[米国] 136N0427
[USA] 1.3∼3.1mm
[英国] 136N0376
[UK] RC(+) B7P-VH(JST) VHR-7N PSU4 PSU4 CPU19 CPU19
[欧州] 136N0377
[Europe] RC(-) SVH-21T-P1.1
UL1061-AWG26黄
[中国] 136N0418
[China] 136Y102173 PSU2 PSU2
+24V Power On 1 1
+24V Power On
GND 2 UL1061-AWG26黒 2
GND
1 1 1 黒 BLK B2B-XH-A UL1061-AWG26赤
1
DC24V(+) System Power On 3 3
System Power On
2 2 2 白 WHT 2
GND_DC24V(-) GND 4 UL1061-AWG26黒 4
GND
3 3 3 UL1015-AWG緑/黄ｽﾊﾟｲﾗﾙ 3
DC24V(+) FanLock 5 UL1061-AWG26白 5
FanLock
UL1015-AWG緑/黄ｽﾊﾟｲﾗﾙ CN13 UL1061-AWG26灰
4
GND_DC24V(-) AC_Fail 6 6
AC_Fail
DS-250PU
VB
CB DF5A-4DS-5C DF5A-4DP-DSA B06B-XASK-1 XAP-06V-1 GHR-06V-S BM06B-GHS-TBT
PE1 PE2 DF5-1822SC SXA-001T-P0.6 SSHL-002T-P0.2
PSU8 PSU8 CPU13 CPU13
FV2-4 ｱｵ K FV2-4 ｱｵ K
B2B-PH-K-S
(ｲﾝﾚｯﾄ近傍筐体) CN14 (+5V) 1 UL1061-AWG26赤 1
(予備ポート）
D （Housing near the inlet)
GND 2 UL1061-AWG26黒 2
GND D
VB UL1061-AWG26青
LED_ON1 3 3
LED_ON1
CB UL1061-AWG26橙
LED_ALM1 4 4
LED_ALM1
(+5V) 5 UL1061-AWG26赤 5
(予備ポート）
B2B-PH-K-S GND 6 UL1061-AWG26黒 6
GND
LED_ON2 7 UL1061-AWG26青 7
LED_ON2
136Y201829 CN15 LED_ALM2 8 UL1061-AWG26橙 8
LED_ALM2
(左後側ﾌﾚｰﾑ) (1F天井) UL1007-AWG22青
LED_ON1 9
（Rear left-hand side frame) （Base plate (First-floor) ceiling)
LED(+) UL1007-AWG22橙 GHR-08V-S BM08B-GHS-TBT
LED_ALM1 10
LED(-) UL1007-AWG22青 SSHL-002T-P0.2
LED_ON2 11
LED_ALM2 12 UL1007-AWG22橙
53261-0271
PE3 PE4 B12B-XADSS-N XADRP-12V CNE41_PCNE41_R 136Y201672 ERS37-1
FV2-5AｱｵK FN2-5 CN3 SXA-001T-P0.6
PSU9 PSU9 1 1 UL1007-AWG22灰 1
DC24V
E
(保護接地端子) (ｲﾝﾚｯﾄ近傍筐体) 380V(Pri) UL1007-AWG22灰 E
1 UL1007-AWG22黒
2 2 2
DC24VGND
DC5V （-） ERS37-1
（PROTECTIVE EARTH TERMINAL) （Housing near the inlet)
3 3 UL1007-AWG22灰 3
DC5V
5 UL1007-AWG22黒
- DC5V （+）
追加保護接地線 2 UL1007-AWG22黒
4 4 UL1007-AWG22灰 4
DC5VGND 113Y1756
DC5V （-） UL1007-AWG22灰
6 UL1007-AWG22黒
5 5 5
ON/OFF1 (LED1)
Additional protecting ground wire
DC5V （+） UL1007-AWG22灰
0V(Pri) 3 UL1007-AWG22黒
6 6 6
ALM1
(オプション) DC24V（-） 7 7 UL1007-AWG22灰
7 UL1007-AWG22黒
（Option)
B3PS5-VH DC24V（+） 8 8 UL1007-AWG22灰 XHP-6
4 UL1007-AWG22黒
DC24V（-） 9 9 UL1007-AWG22灰 SXH-001T-P0.6
8 UL1007-AWG22黒
DC24V（+） 10 10 UL1007-AWG22灰
11 11 UL1007-AWG22灰 ERS37-2
5557-08R
5556-08A 12 12 UL1007-AWG22灰
5556PBTL 1
DC24V
→ ←
機外 機内 DC24VGND
2
XADRP-12V XADR-12V
External cable Internal cable harness
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6
3
DC5V ERS37-2
4
DC5VGND 113Y1756
F 5
ON/OFF2 (LED2) F
6
ALM2
XHP-6
SXH-001T-P0.6
SNDA1 SNDA1 +5V & +24V電源入力
PSU7 PSU7 UL1007-AWG20赤 1
VCC
DGND 1 UL1007-AWG20黒 2
DGND
UL1007-AWG20赤
VCC VCC+24V
SND39A
7 3
DGND 2 UL1007-AWG20黒 4
PGND
VCC 8 UL1007-AWG20赤 5
VCC+24V
PGND 3 UL1007-AWG20黒 6
PGND
VCC+24V 9
G PGND 4 DF5A-6DS-5C DF5A-6DP-DSA G
VCC+24V 10 DF5-1822SC
PGND 5
SNDB1 SNDB1 +5V & +24V電源入力
VCC+24V 11
PGND 6 UL1007-AWG20赤 1
VCC
VCC+24V 12 UL1007-AWG20黒 2
DGND
UL1007-AWG20赤 3
VCC+24V
5556-12A 5557-12R UL1007-AWG20黒
UL1007-AWG20赤
4
PGND SND39B
5556PBTL 5
VCC+24V
UL1007-AWG20黒 6
PGND
DF5A-6DS-5C DF5A-6DP-DSA
DF5-1822SC
H H
機種 5118 ユニット -
名称 回路図 補助名称 ***
コード Z22N100034 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 2 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-52
SP-53
13B
13B
回路図 2
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
CPU39A 136Y201622 136Y201113
A CPU17 CPU17 BCRA1_R BCRA1_P BCRA1P BCRA1R A
UL1061-AWG26灰 1 1 UL1061-AWG30灰 1 1 852N20010
CTS1 1
1 ： CTS1
GND 2 UL1061-AWG26灰 2 2 UL1061-AWG30灰 2 2
2 ： GND BCRA1
5VBCR 3 UL1061-AWG26灰 3 3 UL1061-AWG30灰 3 3
3 ： 5VBCR
RXD1 4 UL1061-AWG26灰 4 4 UL1061-AWG30灰 4 4
4 ： TXD1
UL1061-AWG26灰 5 5 UL1061-AWG30灰 5 5 852N20010
RTS1 5
5 ： RTS1
TXD1 6 UL1061-AWG26灰 6 6 UL1061-AWG30灰 6 6
6 ： RXD1
SIO1/2 UL1061-AWG26灰 7 7 UL1061-AWG30灰 7 7
CTS2 7
7 ： Trigger
GND 8 UL1061-AWG26灰 8 8 8 8
8 ： NC
5VBCR 9 UL1061-AWG26灰 9 9
RXD2 10 UL1061-AWG26灰 DF1B-8ES-2.5RC DF1B-8EP-2.5RC
RTS2 11 UL1061-AWG26灰 DF1B-2428SCA DF1B-30PCFB ZMR-9 ZHR-9
UL1061-AWG26灰 SMM-003T-P0.5 SZH-002T-P0.5
TXD2 12
136Y201113
BCRA2_R BCRA2_P BCRA2P BCRA2R
B 503154-1290 503149-1200 B
1 1 UL1061-AWG30灰 1 1
1 ： CTS2
502579-0000
2 2 UL1061-AWG30灰 2 2
2 ： GND
3 3 UL1061-AWG30灰 3 3
3 ： 5VBCR BCRA2
4 4 UL1061-AWG30灰 4 4
4 ： TXD2
5 5 UL1061-AWG30灰 5 5
5 ： RTS2 852N20010
6 6 UL1061-AWG30灰 6 6
6 ： RXD2
7 7 UL1061-AWG30灰 7 7
7 ： Trigger
8 8
8 8
8 ： NC
9 9
DF1B-8ES-2.5RC DF1B-8EP-2.5RC
DF1B-2428SCA DF1B-30PCFB ZMR-9 ZHR-9
SMM-003T-P0.5 SZH-002T-P0.5
C C
136Y201622 136Y201113
CPU39A>> CPU15 CPU15
1 UL1061-AWG26灰
BCRA3_R
1
BCRA3_P
1 UL1061-AWG30灰
BCRA3P
1
BCRA3R
1
4,11,18,19
CTS3 1 ： CTS3
GND
2 UL1061-AWG26灰 2 2 UL1061-AWG30灰 2 2
2 ： GND BCRA3
5VBCR
3 UL1061-AWG26灰 3 3 UL1061-AWG30灰 3 3
3 ： 5VBCR
113Y******
D D
RXD3
4 UL1061-AWG26灰 4 4 UL1061-AWG30灰 4 4
4 ： TXD3
5 UL1061-AWG26灰 5 5 UL1061-AWG30灰 5 5 852N20010
RTS3 5 ： RTS3
TXD3
6 UL1061-AWG26灰 6 6 UL1061-AWG30灰 6 6
6 ： RXD3
CTS4
7 UL1061-AWG26灰 7 7 UL1061-AWG30灰 7 7
7 ： Trigger
SIO3/4 8 UL1061-AWG26灰 8 8 8 8
GND 8 ： NC
5VBCR
9 UL1061-AWG26灰 9 9
RXD4
10 UL1061-AWG26灰 DF1B-8ES-2.5RC DF1B-8EP-2.5RC
RTS4
11 UL1061-AWG26灰 DF1B-2428SCA DF1B-30PCFB ZMR-9 ZHR-9
TXD4
12 UL1061-AWG26灰 SMM-003T-P0.5 SZH-002T-P0.5
13
N.C
14
136Y201113
N.C BCRA4_R BCRA4_P BCRA4P BCRA4R
1 1 UL1061-AWG30灰 1 1
1 ： CTS4
503154-1490 503149-1400
2 2 UL1061-AWG30灰 2 2
2 ： GND BCRA4
502579-0000
3 3 UL1061-AWG30灰 3 3
3 ： 5VBCR
E E
4 4 UL1061-AWG30灰 4 4
4 ： TXD4
5 5 UL1061-AWG30灰 5 5 852N20010
5 ： RTS4
6 6 UL1061-AWG30灰 6 6
6 ： RXD4
7 7 UL1061-AWG30灰 7 7
7 ： Trigger
8 8 8 8
8 ： NC
9 9
DF1B-8ES-2.5RC DF1B-8EP-2.5RC
DF1B-2428SCA DF1B-30PCFB ZMR-9 ZHR-9
SMM-003T-P0.5 SZH-002T-P0.5
F F
136Y201646
CPU20 CPU20 136Y201113
1 UL1061-AWG26灰 BCRC1_R BCRC1_P BCRACP1 BCRC1R1
CTS5
GND
2 UL1061-AWG26灰 1 1 UL1061-AWG30灰 1 1
CTS(CS)
N.C
3 2 2 UL1061-AWG30灰 2 2
GND(S.DNG)
SIO5 5V
4 UL1061-AWG26灰 3 3 UL1061-AWG30灰 3 3
Vcc BCRC1
RXD5
5 UL1061-AWG26灰 4 4 UL1061-AWG30灰 4 4
TXD(SD)
6 5 5 UL1061-AWG30灰 5 5 852N20010
N.C RTS(RS)
RTS5
7 UL1061-AWG26灰 6 6 UL1061-AWG30灰 6 6
RXD(RD)
G G
TXD5 8 UL1061-AWG26灰 7 7 UL1061-AWG30灰 7 7
Trigger
8 8 8 8
503149-0800 9 9
503154-0890
502579-0000 DF1B-8ES-2.5RC DF1B-8EP-2.5RC
DF1B-2428SCA DF1B-30PCFB ZMR-9 ZHR-9
SMM-003T-P0.5 SZH-002T-P0.5
機種 ユニット
H H
5118 -
名称 回路図 補助名称 ***
コード Z22N100034 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 3 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-53
SP-54
13C
13C
回路図 3
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
CPU39A
A
136Y201830 A
CPU8 CPU8 LAN
白（緑） WHT(GRN)
TXRXP_A I/O 1 1
緑 GRN
TXRXM_A I/O 2 2
白（橙） WHT(ORN)
TXRXP_B I/O 3 3
青 BLU
TXRXP_C I/O 4 4
(LAN) 白（青） WHT(BLU)
TXRXM_C I/O 5 5
橙 ORN
TXRXM_B I/O 6 6
白（茶） WHT(BRN)
TXRXP_D I/O 7 7
CPU39A-TP1 茶 BRN
TXRXM_D I/O 8 8
1
3 UL20276-C5E（H）/8 LF 24AWG×4P UW CJS5E88TGY
TM21R-5C-88(50) MP588
2
4
CPU9 CPU9 136Y201643 LED2 LED2
B B
5566-04A UL1061-AWG26灰
LED39A
1 1
+5VS +5VS
GND1
2 UL1061-AWG26灰 2
GND1
(電圧チェック)
（voltage check)
CPU39A>> PWBN
3
4
UL1061-AWG26灰
UL1061-AWG26灰
3
4
PWBN 113Y200186
3,18,19
GND2 GND2
5 5
NC NC
6
NC
113Y****** BM05B-GHS-TBT GHR-05V-S
NC
136Y201643 LED1 LED1
SSHL-002T-P0.2 GHR-06V-S
SSHL-002T-P0.2
GHR-03V-S
SSHL-002T-P0.2
UL1061-AWG26灰 1
2
UL1061-AWG26灰 3
C
電源SW C
LED H
SSHL-002T-P0.2
GHR-05V-S
PNL10 PNL10
1
5
NC
NC
NC
D D
CPU12 CPU12 PNL6 PNL6
1
136Y201643 1
N.C N.C
D GND
CANH
2
3
UL1061-AWG26灰
UL1061-AWG26灰
2
3
D GND
CANH
PNL38A PNL7
CANL
4 UL1061-AWG26灰 4
CANL FPC
113Y200184 45pin
FH12-45S
GHR-04V-S GHR-04V-S BM04B-GHS-TBT -0.5SH(55)
BM04B-GHS-TBT
SSHL-002T-P0.2 SSHL-002T-P0.2
CPU10 CPU10 PNL8
LCD
USB
FPC
VBUS 4pin
D- 136Y201886 PNL2 PNL2
E E
D+ USB A/M TO A/M CABLE 750mm FH12-10(4)
USB CPU USB SA -1SH(55)
GND
UBA-4R-D14T-4D(LF)(SN) TYPE-A TYPE-A
CPU18 CPU18
1
TX
2
CPU SIO GND
3
RX SND39A-1 SND39A-2
DF1EC-3P-2.5DSA(01) DF1E-3S-2.5C SND39A>> SND39A>>
F
DF1B-2428SCA
5,7,8,9,10,,12, 5,7,8,9,10,,12, F
136Y201643 13,14,15,16 SNDA7 136Y201643
13,14,15,16 SNDB7 SNDB7 136Y201643
CPU11 CPU11 SNDA8 SNDA8 SNDA7 SNDB8 SNDB8
CANH 1 UL1061-AWG26灰 1
CANH 113Y****** CANH
1 UL1061-AWG26灰 1
CANH
113Y****** CANH
1
2 UL1061-AWG26灰
UL1061-AWG26灰 2 UL1061-AWG26灰 CANL
CPU CAN0 CANL 2 2
CANL CANL 2
CANL 3
UL1061-AWG26灰 3 UL1061-AWG26灰 GND
DGND 3 3
DGND GND 3
DGND 4 UL1061-AWG26灰
4 Loop［0］
5
Loop［1］
BM03B-GHS-TBT GHR-03V-S GHR-03V-S BM03B-GHS-TBT (LF)(SN) 5
GHR-03V-S BM03B-GHS-TBT (LF)(SN) 6
SSHL-002T-P0.2 SSHL-002T-P0.2 6 N・C
SSHL-002T-P0.2 7 UL1061-AWG26灰
7 GND
BM07B-GHS-TBT (LF)(SN) GHR-07V-S
BM07B-GHS-TBT (LF)(SN) GHR-07V-S
SSHL-002T-P0.2
SSHL-002T-P0.2
G G
SNDA2 SNDA2 136Y201643 SNDB2 SNDB2
SDO 1 UL1061-AWG26灰 1
SDO
SDI 2 UL1061-AWG26灰 2
SDI
SCK 3 UL1061-AWG26灰 3
SCK
IO 4 UL1061-AWG26灰 4
IO
DGND 5 UL1061-AWG26灰 5
DGND
GHR-05V-S GHR-05V-S
BM05B-GHS-TBT (LF)(SN) BM05B-GHS-TBT (LF)(SN)
SSHL-002T-P0.2 SSHL-002T-P0.2
機種 ユニット
H H
5118 -
名称 回路図 補助名称 ***
コード Z22N100034 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 4 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-54
SP-55
13D
13D
回路図 4
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Internal cable harness 機内 → ← ﾕﾆｯﾄ Unit
SND39A-1枚目
センサ入力 SNDA3 SNDA3 136Y201637
A
カセッテセット部（A1） VCC_SENS0
1 UL1061-AWG26灰 A
2 UL1061-AWG26灰
SiNO
CNA1_R CNA1_P 136Y102192 SA2
DGND 3 UL1061-AWG26灰 SA2
4 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰
VCC_SENS1 1 1 1
VCC_SENS1
5 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰
SiN1 2 2 2
SiN1
6 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰
DGND 3 3 3
DGND 146S0125
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰
ｶｾｯﾃIN検出
7
VCC_SENS2 4 4 Cassette IN
sensor
8 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 179228-3
SiN2 5 5
9 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 179610-1
DGND 6 6
10 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰
VCC_SENS3 7 7
11 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 SA3
SiN3 8 8
SA3
12 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰
DGND 9 9 1
VCC_SENS2
13 UL1007-AWG28灰
VCC_SENS4 10 10 2
SiN2
14 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰
SiN4 11 11 3
DGND 146S0125
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰
ｶｾｯﾃﾎｰﾙﾄﾞ検出
15
B DGND 12 12 Cassette hold
sensor
B
16 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 179228-3
VCC_SENS5 13 13
17 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 179610-1
SiN5 14 14
DGND
18 UL1061-AWG26灰 SA4
DF1B-14DES-2.5RC DF1B-14DEP-2.5RC SA4
DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB
1
VCC_SENS3
GHDR-18V-S-1(F)
BM18B-GHDS-TF(LF)(SN)
SGHD-002T-C0.2A CNA3_R CNA3_P 136Y8738 2
SiN3
SA1 SA1
3
DGND 146S0125
1 1 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
VCC_SENS0 吸盤HP検出 Suction cup
HP sensor
2 2 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
SiNO
179228-3
3 3 UL1007-AWG28灰 3
DGND 146S0125
179610-1
CPU39A 4
5
4
5
UL1007-AWG28灰
UL1007-AWG28灰 179228-3
ｶｾｯﾃ排出検出
Cassette ejection
sensor
SA5_R SA5_P 136Y102179
SA5 SA5
6 6 UL1007-AWG28灰 179610-1 1 1 UL1007-AWG24赤 1
SiN4
CPU16 CPU16 136Y201637 7 7 UL1007-AWG28灰 LED17A_0 LED17A_0
2 2 UL1007-AWG24黒 2
DGND
C
170048-4 128Y0331 C
吸着検出
1
GND DF1B-7ES-2.5RC DF1B-7EP-2.5RC
1
+5VLED DF1B-2ES-2.5RC DF1B-2EP-2.5RC Suction sensor
5V
2 UL1061-AWG26灰 2
LEDT1L DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB
DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB
LEDT1L
3 UL1061-AWG26灰 3
LEDT2L SA6
SND39A>>
Cassette ejection
LEDT2L
4 UL1061-AWG26灰 4
LEDT3L 113Y1702 sensor SA6
5 UL1061-AWG26灰 (LEDA1)
1
VCC_SENS5
5,8,9,10,11,12,
LEDT3L
6 DF1E-4S-2.5C
2
SiN5
LED17A_0/1 GND 3
DGND 146S0125
13,14,15,16 UL1061-AWG26灰 DF1B-2428SCA
7
5V
ｲﾝﾁ/ﾒﾄﾘｯｸ検出
Inch/metric
LEDT4L
8 UL1061-AWG26灰 179228-3
sensor
LEDT5L
9 UL1061-AWG26灰 SA7 179610-1
SA7
UL1061-AWG26灰
113Y******
10
LEDT6L 1
VCC_SENS6
2
SiN6
BM10B-GHDS-TF GHDR-10V-S-1(F) 3
DGND 146S0125
SGHD-002T-C0.2A 136Y8740 ｶｾｯﾃ排出検出
Cassette ejection
sensor
CNA6_R CNA6_P 179228-3
D 1 1 UL1007-AWG28灰 179610-1 D
2 2 UL1007-AWG28灰
3 3 UL1007-AWG28灰 LED17A_1 LED17A_1
4 4 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
+5VLED
5 5 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
LEDT4L
6 6 UL1007-AWG28灰 3
LEDT5L
7 7 UL1007-AWG28灰 4
LEDT6L Cassette ejection
sensor
113Y1702
DF1B-7ES-2.5RC DF1B-7EP-2.5RC DF1E-4S-2.5C (LEDA2)
Old部番：136Y8790 DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB DF1B-2428SCA
136Y201637
センサ入力 SNDA4 SNDA4
カセッテセット部（A2）
VCC_SENS6 1 UL1061-AWG26灰
E E
SiN6 2 UL1061-AWG26灰 136Y102193
UL1061-AWG26灰 CNA4_R CNA4_P SA8
DGND 3
SA8
VCC_SENS7 4 UL1061-AWG26灰 1 1 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
VCC_SENS7
SiN7 5 UL1061-AWG26灰 2 2 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
SiN7
DGND 6 UL1061-AWG26灰 3 3 UL1007-AWG28灰 3
DGND146S0125
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰
VCC_SENS8 7 4 4
ｶｾｯﾃIN検出
Cassette IN
sensor
SiN8 8 UL1061-AWG26灰 5 5 UL1007-AWG28灰 179228-3
DGND 9 UL1061-AWG26灰 6 6 UL1007-AWG28灰 179610-1
SNS B/C-CN4 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰
VCC_SENS9 10 7 7
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 SA9
SiN9 11 8 8
SA9
DGND 12 UL1061-AWG26灰 9 9 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
VCC_SENS8
VCC_SENS10
13 10 10 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
SiN8
SiN10 14 UL1061-AWG26灰 11 11 UL1007-AWG28灰 3
DGND 146S0125
DGND
15 UL1061-AWG26灰 12 12 UL1007-AWG28灰 ｶｾｯﾃﾎｰﾙﾄﾞ検出 Cassette hold
sensor
F
VCC_SENS11
16 UL1061-AWG26灰 13 13 UL1007-AWG28灰 179228-3 F
SiN11
17 UL1061-AWG26灰 14 14 UL1007-AWG28灰 179610-1
DGND
18 UL1061-AWG26灰
SA10
19 SA10
- DF1B-14DES-2.5RC DF1B-14DEP-2.5RC
20
1
VCC_SENS9
- DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB 2
SiN9
BM20B-GHDS-TF(LF)(SN) GHDR-20V-S-1(F)
3
DGND 146S0125
吸盤HP検出
Suction cup
SGHD-002T-C0.2A 179228-3
HP sensor
179610-1
SA11_R SA11_P 136Y102179
SA11 SA11
1 1 UL1007-AWG24赤 1
SiN10
2 2 UL1007-AWG24黒 2
DGND
128Y0331
DF1B-2ES-2.5RC DF1B-2EP-2.5RC 170048-4 吸着検出
Suction sensor
G G
DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB
SA12 SA12
1
VCC_SENS11
2
SiN11
3
DGND 146S0125
ｲﾝﾁ/ﾒﾄﾘｯｸ検出
Inch/metric
sensor
179228-3
179610-1
機種 ユニット
H H
5118 -
名称 回路図 補助名称 ***
コード Z22N100034 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 5 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-55
SP-56
13E
13E
回路図 5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Internal cable harness 機内
→ ← ﾕﾆｯﾄ Unit
SND39A-2枚目 SNDB3 SNDB3 136Y201639
カセッテセット部（A1） UL1061-AWG26灰
A A
VCC_SENS0 1
SiNO UL1061-AWG26灰
2
CNA7_R CNA7_P 136Y102194 SA14
DGND 3 UL1061-AWG26灰 SA14
VCC_SENS1 4 UL1061-AWG26灰 1 1 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
VCC_SENS1
SiN1 5 UL1061-AWG26灰 2 2 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
SiN1
DGND 6 UL1061-AWG26灰 3 3 UL1007-AWG28灰 3
DGND 146S0125
VCC_SENS2 7 UL1061-AWG26灰 4 4 UL1007-AWG28灰 ｶｾｯﾃIN検出
Cassette IN
sensor
SiN2 8 UL1061-AWG26灰 5 5 UL1007-AWG28灰 179228-3
DGND 9 UL1061-AWG26灰 6 6 UL1007-AWG28灰 179610-1
センサ入力 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰
VCC_SENS3 10 7 7
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 SA15
SiN3 11 8 8
SA15
DGND 12 UL1061-AWG26灰 9 9 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
VCC_SENS2
VCC_SENS4
13 10 10 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
SiN2
SiN4 14 UL1061-AWG26灰 11 11 UL1007-AWG28灰 3
DGND 146S0125
B DGND 15 UL1061-AWG26灰 12 12 UL1007-AWG28灰 ｶｾｯﾃﾎｰﾙﾄﾞ検出
Cassette hold B
sensor
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 179228-3
VCC_SENS5 16 13 13
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 179610-1
SiN5 17 14 14
DGND 18 UL1061-AWG26灰 SA16
DF1B-14DES-2.5RC DF1B-14DEP-2.5RC SA16
DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB
1
VCC_SENS3
GHDR-18V-S-1(F)
BM18B-GHDS-TF(LF)(SN) 136Y8742
2
SiN3
SGHD-002T-C0.2A CNA9_R CNA9_P SA13
SA13
3
DGND 146S0125
1 1 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
VCC_SENS0 吸盤HP検出
Suction cup
HP sensor
UL1007-AWG28灰 179228-3
2 2 2
SiNO
UL1007-AWG28灰 179610-1
CPU39A DGND 146S0125
3 3 3
UL1061-AWG26灰 4 4 UL1007-AWG28灰 ｶｾｯﾃ排出検出
Cassette ejection
SA17_R SA17_P 136Y102179 SA17 SA17
sensor
UL1061-AWG26灰 5 5 UL1007-AWG28灰 179228-3
CPU14 CPU14 179610-1 1 1 UL1007-AWG24赤 1
SiN4
UL1061-AWG26灰 6 6 UL1007-AWG28灰
2 2 UL1007-AWG24黒 2
DGND
GND
1 UL1061-AWG26灰 7 7 UL1007-AWG28灰 LED17A-2 LED17A_2 128Y0331
5V 2
170048-4 吸着検出
C Suction sensor C
DF1B-2ES-2.5RC DF1B-2EP-2.5RC
SND39A>> +5VLED
1
LEDT7L 3 DF1B-7ES-2.5RC DF1B-7EP-2.5RC DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB
DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB
2
LEDT7L
5,7,9,10,11,12,
LEDT8L 4
3
LEDT8L SA18
LEDT9L 5
SA18
4
LEDT9L
13,14,15,16
6
LED17A_2/3 GND 113Y1702
1
VCC_SENS5
5V 7
DF1E-4S-2.5C (LEDA3) Cassette ejection
sensor
2
SiN5
LEDT10L 8
DF1B-2428SCA
3
DGND 146S0125
113Y****** LEDT11L 9
ｲﾝﾁ/ﾒﾄﾘｯｸ検出
Inch/metric
sensor
LEDT12L 10
CNA13_R CNA13_P 136Y8745 LED17A-3 179228-3
N.C
11 LED17A_3 179610-1
12
UL1061-AWG26灰 1 1 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
+5VLED
N.C UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰
2 2 2
LEDT10L
UL1061-AWG26灰 3 3 UL1007-AWG28灰 3
LEDT11L
BM12B-GHDS-TF GHDR-12V-S-1(F)
UL1061-AWG26灰 4 4 UL1007-AWG28灰 4
LEDT12L Cassette ejection
SGHD-002T-C0.2A sensor
DF1E-4S-2.5C 113Y1702
D DF1B-4ES-2.5RC DF1B-4EP-2.5RC (LEDA2) D
DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB DF1B-2428SCA
136Y8744
CNA12_R CNA12_P SA19 SA19
1 1 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
VCC_SENS6
2 2 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
SiN6
3 3 UL1007-AWG28灰 3
DGND 146S0125
ｶｾｯﾃ排出検出
Cassette ejection
sensor
DF1B-3ES-2.5RC DF1B-3EP-2.5RC 179228-3
DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB 179610-1
136Y201639
センサ入力 SNDB4 SNDB4
E E
カセッテセット部（A2） VCC_SENS6 1 UL1061-AWG26灰
UL1061-AWG26灰
SiN6 2
CNA10_R CNA10_P 136Y102195 SA20
DGND 3 UL1061-AWG26灰 SA20
VCC_SENS7 4 UL1061-AWG26灰 1 1 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
VCC_SENS7
SiN7 5 UL1061-AWG26灰 2 2 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
SiN7
DGND 6 UL1061-AWG26灰 3 3 UL1007-AWG28灰 3
DGND 146S0125
VCC_SENS8 7 UL1061-AWG26灰 4 4 UL1007-AWG28灰 ｶｾｯﾃIN検出
Cassette IN
sensor
SiN8 8 UL1061-AWG26灰 5 5 UL1007-AWG28灰 179228-3
DGND 9 UL1061-AWG26灰 6 6 UL1007-AWG28灰 179610-1
VCC_SENS9 10 UL1061-AWG26灰 7 7 UL1007-AWG28灰
SNS B/C-CN4 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 SA21
SiN9 11 8 8
SA21
DGND 12 UL1061-AWG26灰 9 9 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
VCC_SENS8
VCC_SENS10
13 10 10 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
SiN8
SiN10 14 UL1061-AWG26灰 11 11 UL1007-AWG28灰 3
DGND 146S0125
F
DGND 15 UL1061-AWG26灰 12 12 UL1007-AWG28灰 ｶｾｯﾃﾎｰﾙﾄﾞ検出 Cassette hold F
sensor
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 179228-3
VCC_SENS11 16 13 13
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 179610-1
SiN11 17 14 14
DGND 18 UL1061-AWG26灰 SA22
19 SA22
- DF1B-14DES-2.5RC DF1B-14DEP-2.5RC
20
1
VCC_SENS9
- DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB 2
SiN9
3
DGND 146S0029
BM20B-GHDS-TF(LF)(SN) GHDR-20V-S-1(F)
吸盤HP検出
Suction cup
HP sensor
SGHD-002T-C0.2A 179228-3
179610-1
SA23_R SA23_P 136Y102179 SA23 SA23
1 1 UL1007-AWG24赤 1
SiN10
2 2 UL1007-AWG24黒 2
DGND
128Y0331
G
DF1B-2ES-2.5RC DF1B-2EP-2.5RC 170048-4 吸着検出
Suction sensor G
DF1B-2428SCA DF1-PD2428SCB
SA24
SA24
1
VCC_SENS11
2
SiN11
3
DGND 146S0125
ｲﾝﾁ/ﾒﾄﾘｯｸ検出 Inch/metric
sensor
179228-3
179610-1
機種 ユニット
H H
5118 -
名称 回路図 補助名称 ***
コード Z22N100034 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 6 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-56
SP-57
13F
13F
回路図 6
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Internal cable harness 機内 → ← ﾕﾆｯﾄ Unit
SND39A-1枚目
A A
136Y8754
CNB1_R CNB1_P SB1
UL1007-AWG26灰
1 1 1
VCC_SENS12
UL1007-AWG26灰
2 2 2
SiN12
UL1007-AWG26灰
3 3 3
DGND
UL1007-AWG26灰 146N0016 IP feed/load sensor
ｶｾｯﾃ口ＩＰ検出
4 4 (Cassette side)
5 5 UL1007-AWG26灰 179228-3
179518-1
UL1007-AWG26灰
6 6
SB2
7 7 UL1007-AWG26灰
8 8 UL1007-AWG26灰 1
VCC_SENS13
9 9 UL1007-AWG26灰 2
SiN13
10 10 UL1007-AWG26灰 3
DGND 146N0016 IP feed/load sensor
ｶｾｯﾃ口ＩＰ検出
(Cassette side)
11 11 UL1007-AWG26灰
B 179228-3 B
12 12 UL1007-AWG26灰 179518-1
13 13 UL1007-AWG26灰 SB3
センサ入力 136Y201645 14 14 UL1007-AWG26灰 1
VCC_SENS14
SNDA5 SNDA5 UL1007-AWG26灰
15 15 2
SiN14
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG26灰
ﾌｨｰﾄﾞﾛｰﾄﾞ搬送部 VCC_SENS12 1
UL1061-AWG26灰
16 16
UL1007-AWG26灰
3
DGND 146N0016 IP feed/load sensor
ｶｾｯﾃ口ＩＰ検出
(Cassette side)
SiN12 2 17 17
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG26灰 179228-3
Feed load conveyor unit DGND 3 18 18
179518-1
UL1061-AWG26灰
VCC_SENS13 4
SB4
UL1061-AWG26灰 DF1B-18DEP-2.5RC DF1B-18DES-2.5RC
SiN13 5
UL1061-AWG26灰 DF1-PD2428SCB DF1B-2428SCA
1
VCC_SENS15
DGND 6
UL1061-AWG26灰 2
SiN15
VCC_SENS14 7
UL1061-AWG26灰 3
DGND
SiN14 8 146N0016 IP feed/load sensor
ｶｾｯﾃ口ＩＰ検出
(Cassette side)
UL1061-AWG26灰
DGND 9
179228-3
UL1061-AWG26灰 179518-1
VCC_SENS15 10
C UL1061-AWG26灰 SB5 C
SiN15 11
UL1061-AWG26灰
DGND 12 1
VCC_SENS16
UL1061-AWG26灰
VCC_SENS16 13 2
SiN16
UL1061-AWG26灰
SiN16 14 3
DGND 146N0016
UL1061-AWG26灰 Pre-BCR IP sensor
DGND 15
ＢＣＲ前ＩＰ検出
UL1061-AWG26灰 179228-3
VCC_SENS17 16
179518-1
UL1061-AWG26灰
SiN17 17
SB6
UL1061-AWG26灰
DGND 18
UL1061-AWG26灰 1
VCC_SENS17
VCC_SENS18 19
UL1061-AWG26灰 2
SiN17
SiN18 20
UL1061-AWG26灰 3
DGND
DGND 21 146N0016 Pre-convergence
合流前ＩＰ検出
IP sensor
UL1061-AWG26灰
VCC_SENS19 22
179228-3
UL1061-AWG26灰 179518-1
SiN19 23
UL1061-AWG26灰
DGND 24
UL1061-AWG26灰
D VCC_SENS20 25 D
UL1061-AWG26灰
SiN20 26
UL1061-AWG26灰
DGND 27
UL1061-AWG26灰
VCC_SENS21 28
UL1061-AWG26灰
SiN21 29
UL1061-AWG26灰
DGND 30
UL1061-AWG26灰
VCC_SENS22 31
UL1061-AWG26灰
SiN22 32
UL1061-AWG26灰 CNB2_R CNB2_P 136Y8755 SB7
DGND 33
N.C
34 1 1 UL1007-AWG26灰 1
VCC_SENS18
2 2 UL1007-AWG26灰 2
SiN18
GHDR-34V-S-1(F) 3 3 UL1007-AWG26灰 3
DGND
BM34B-GHDS-TF(LF)(SN) 146S0125 Path changeover
SGHD-002T-C0.2A 4 4 UL1007-AWG26灰 ﾊﾟｽ切換ＨＰ検出
HP sensor
5 5 UL1007-AWG26灰 179228-3
179518-1
6 6 UL1007-AWG26灰 SB8
E E
7 7 UL1007-AWG26灰
UL1007-AWG26灰
1
VCC_SENS19
SND39A>>
8 8
9 9 UL1007-AWG26灰
2
SiN19
5,7,8,10,11,12, 10 10 UL1007-AWG26灰
3
DGND 146S0125 Path changeover
ﾊﾟｽ切換棚検出
shelf sonsor
11 11 UL1007-AWG26灰
13,14,15,16
179228-3
12 12 UL1007-AWG26灰 179518-1
13 13 UL1007-AWG26灰 SB9
UL1007-AWG26灰
113Y****** VCC_SENS20
14 14 1
15 15 UL1007-AWG26灰 2
SiN20
16 16 3
DGND 146S0125 Path changeover
ﾊﾟｽ切換棚検出
shelf sonsor
DF1B-16DEP-2.5RC DF1B-16DES-2.5RC 179228-3
179518-1
DF1-PD2428SCB DF1B-2428SCA SB10
F
1
VCC_SENS21 F
2
SiN21
3
DGND 146S0125
Convergence path
changeover
合流ﾊﾟｽ切換検出
sensor
179228-3
179518-1
SB11
1
VCC_SENS22
2
SiN22
3
DGND 146S0125 Path changeover
ﾊﾟｽ切換棚検出
shelf sonsor
179228-3
179518-1
G G
機種 ユニット
H H
5118 -
名称 回路図 補助名称 ***
コード Z22N100034 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 7 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-57
SP-58
13G
13G
回路図 7
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Internal cable harness 機内
→ ← ﾕﾆｯﾄ Unit
SND39A-2枚目
センサ入力 SNDB5 SNDB5 136Y201646 CNC1_R CNC1_P 136Y8757 SC1
幅寄搬送部（C）
A
VCC_SENS12 1 UL1061-AWG26灰 1 1 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
VCC_SENS19
A
SiN12 2 UL1061-AWG26灰 2 2 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
SiN19
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 146S0125 Side-positioning
DGND DGND 幅寄機構
3 3 3 3 mechanism HP
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 sensor
VCC_SENS13 4 4 4 HP検出
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 179228-3
SiN13 5 5 5
179610-1
DGND 6 UL1061-AWG26灰 6 6 UL1007-AWG28灰
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 SC2
VCC_SENS14 7 7 7
SiN14 8 UL1061-AWG26灰 8 8 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
VCC_SENS20
DGND 9 UL1061-AWG26灰 9 9 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
SiN20
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 146S0125 Grip release HP
VCC_SENS15 DGND ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除
10 10 10 3 sensor
SiN15 11 UL1061-AWG26灰 11 11 UL1007-AWG28灰 HP検出
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 179228-3
DGND 12 12 12
179610-1
後搬送部（D） VCC_SENS16 13 UL1061-AWG26灰
SiN16 14 UL1061-AWG26灰 DF1B-12DEP-2.5RC DF1B-12DES-2.5RC SC3
B DGND 15 UL1061-AWG26灰 DF1-PD2428SCB DF1B-2428SCA B
UL1061-AWG26灰
1
VCC_SENS14
VCC_SENS17 16
UL1061-AWG26灰
2
SiN14
SiN17 17
UL1061-AWG26灰
3
DGND 146N0016 Side-positioning
DGND 幅寄IP検出
18 IP sensor
副搬送部（Z） VCC_SENS18 19 UL1061-AWG26灰 179228-3
UL1061-AWG26灰 179610-1
SiN18 20
DGND 21 UL1061-AWG26灰 SC4
VCC_SENS19 22 UL1061-AWG26灰
UL1061-AWG26灰
1
VCC_SENS21
SiN19 23
UL1061-AWG26灰
2
SiN21
DGND 24
146S0125
DGND ｸﾘｰﾆﾝｸﾞｶﾞｲﾄﾞ
3 Cleaning guide
VCC_SENS20 25 UL1061-AWG26灰 HP sensor
UL1061-AWG26灰 HP
SiN20 26
179228-3
UL1061-AWG26灰 179610-1
DGND 27
VCC_SENS21 28 UL1061-AWG26灰
UL1061-AWG26灰
C
SiN21 29
CND1_R CND1_P 136Y8759 SD1 C
DGND 30 UL1061-AWG26灰
VCC_SENS22
31 1 1 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
VCC_SENS18 Grip release HP
sensor
SiN22
32 2 2 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
SiN18 146S0125
DGND
33 3 3 UL1007-AWG28灰 3
DGND ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除
N.C
34 4 4 UL1007-AWG28灰 HP検出
5 5 UL1007-AWG28灰 179228-3
179610-1
GHDR-34V-S-1(F) 6 6 UL1007-AWG28灰
BM34B-GHDS-TF(LF)(SN) SD2
SGHD-002T-C0.2A
DF1B-6EP-2.5RC DF1B-6ES-2.5RC 1
VCC_SENS17 Post-reading conveyor
DF1-PD2428SCB DF1B-2428SCA 2
SiN17 IP sensor
3
DGND 146N0016
後搬送IP検出
179228-3
DF1B-6EP-2.5RC
6
1
179610-1
SNDB5_R1
D SND39A>> DF1-PD2428SCB
D
5,7,8,9,11,12,
SNDB5_P1 DF1B-6ES-2.5RC SG1
DF1B-2428SCA
6
1
VCC_SENS12
13,14,15,16 2
SiN12
3
DGND 146N0016
Side-positioning
entrance sensor
幅寄せ入り口IP検出
113Y****** 179228-3
179610-1
SG2
1
VCC_SENS13
2
SiN13
3
DGND 146N0016 11"x14"size
11"x14"IP判別 determination sensor
179228-3
179610-1
E E
136Y201627
CNE1_R CNE1_P 136Y8761 SE1
UL1061-AWG26灰 1 1 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
VCC_SENS15 SE1
UL1061-AWG26灰 2 2 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
SiN15 146N0016
センサ入力 SNDB6 SNDB6 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 後搬送待機
3 3 3
DGND IP検出
VCC_SENS23 1 UL1061-AWG26灰 4 4 UL1007-AWG28灰
消去搬送部（E） SiN23 2 UL1061-AWG26灰 5 5 UL1007-AWG28灰 179228-3
179610-1
DGND 3 UL1061-AWG26灰 6 6 UL1007-AWG28灰
VCC_SENS24 4 UL1061-AWG26灰 7 7 UL1007-AWG28灰
SiN24 5 UL1061-AWG26灰 8 8 UL1007-AWG28灰
F UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 SE2 F
DGND 6 9 9
VCC_SENS25
7 UL1061-AWG26灰 10 10 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
VCC_SENS16 SE2
SiN25
8 UL1061-AWG26灰 11 11 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
SiN16 146N0016
9 UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG28灰 ｽｲｯﾁﾊﾞｯｸ待機
DGND 12 12 3
DGND IP検出
10
VCC_SENS26
SiN26
11 DF1B-12DEP-2.5RC DF1B-12DES-2.5RC 179228-3
179610-1
DGND
12 DF1-PD2428SCB DF1B-2428SCA
BM12B-GHDS-TF(LF)(SN) GHDR-12V-S(F) SE4
SGHD-002GA-P0.2 1
VCC_SENS24 SE4
2
SiN24 146S0125
3
DGND 消去幅寄機構
HP検出
179228-3
179610-1
G G
SE5
1
VCC_SENS23
2
SiN23 SE5
3
DGND 146S0125
ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除HP検出
179228-3
179610-1
機種 ユニット
H H
5118 -
名称 回路図 補助名称 ***
コード Z22N100034 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 8 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-58
SP-59
13H
13H
回路図 8
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Internal cable harness 機内
→ ← ﾕﾆｯﾄ Unit
SND39A-1枚目
136Y201646 136Y201671
センサ入力
A A
SNDA6 SNDA6 CNZ1_R CNZ1_P SZ2
筺体部（G） VCC_SENS23 1 UL1061-AWG26灰 1 1 UL1007-AWG26灰 1
VCC_SENS23
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG26灰 Driving-side grip
SiN23 2 2 2 2
SiN23 146N0125 release HP sensor
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG26灰
DGND 3 3 3 3
DGND 駆動側ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除
VCC_SENS24 4 UL1061-AWG26灰 4 4 UL1007-AWG26灰 HP検出
SiN24 5 UL1061-AWG26灰 5 5 UL1007-AWG26灰 179228-3
DGND 6 UL1061-AWG26灰 6 6 UL1007-AWG26灰 179518-1
消去搬送部（E） VCC_SENS25 7 UL1061-AWG26灰 7 7 UL1007-AWG26灰
SiN25 8 UL1061-AWG26灰 8 8 UL1007-AWG26灰
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG26灰 SZ3
DGND 9 9 9
VCC_SENS26 10 UL1061-AWG26灰 10 10 UL1007-AWG26灰 1
VCC_SENS24
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG26灰 146N0125 Driven-side grip
SiN26 11 11 11 2
SiN24
UL1061-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG26灰 従動側ﾆｯﾌﾟ release HP sensor
DGND DGND 解除待機
12 12 12 3
13 13 UL1007-AWG26灰 HP検出
B
GHDR-12V-S(F) 14 14 UL1007-AWG26灰 179228-3 B
BM12B-GHDS-TF(LF)(SN) 179518-1
SGHD-002GA-P0.2 15 15 UL1007-AWG26灰
16 16 UL1007-AWG26灰
UL1007-AWG26灰
SND39A>>
17 17 SZ4
18 18 UL1007-AWG26灰
5,7,8,,9,10,11, UL1007-AWG26灰
1
VCC_SENS25
19 19
Dust removal
20 20 UL1007-AWG26灰
2
SiN25 146N0125 HP sensor
13,14,15,16 UL1007-AWG26灰
UL1007-AWG26灰
DG
VCC
21 21 UL1007-AWG26灰
3
DGND ほこり除去
HP検出
22 22 UL1007-AWG26灰
179228-3
UL1007-AWG26灰 SED1L UL1007-AWG26灰
113Y******
23 23
179518-1
UL1007-AWG26灰 SED2L 24 24 UL1007-AWG26灰
DF1B-24DEP-2.5RC DF1B-24DES-2.5RC SZ5
SND16 SNDA16 DF1-PD2428SCB DF1B-2428SCA
UL1007-AWG26灰
1
VCC_SENS26
C VCC+24V 1 C
UL1007-AWG26灰
2
SiN26 IP stopper
5相パルスモータ PGND 2
HP sensor
UL1007-AWG26灰
3
DGND 146N0125
VCC_S5M 3
UL1007-AWG26灰 IPストッパHP検出
S5M_CLK 4
179228-3
VCC_S5M 5 UL1007-AWG26灰 179518-1
S5M_CWb 6 UL1007-AWG26灰
VCC_S5M 7 UL1007-AWG26灰
副搬送部（5相） S5M_EN 8 UL1007-AWG26灰
DF1BZ-8DP-2.5DSA DF1B-8DS-2.5RC
DF1B-2428SC
CRD2
D
1
+5VLED D
2
PLS
3
+5VLED
4
C/S
5
+5VLED
6
A.W.OFF
CPU39A
7
136Y201646 9 136Y103833
10
CPU22 CPU22 CRD3 MZ1
11
DG 1 UL1007-AWG26灰 1 UL1007-AWG24青 1
12
VCC 2 UL1007-AWG26灰 2 UL1007-AWG24青 2
SED23A UL1007-AWG26灰 UL1007-AWG24青
SED1L 3
51103-1200
3 3
SED2L 4 UL1007-AWG26灰 4 UL1007-AWG24青 4
50351-8100
5 UL1007-AWG24青 5
E E
DF1EC-4P-2.5DSA(01) DF1E-4S-2.5C MZ1
DF1B-2428SCA 51103-0500 51103-0500
CRD 副走査ﾓｰﾀ
113Y100861 50351-8100 50351-8100 118N100079
副走査ﾓｰﾀｰﾄﾞﾗｲﾌﾞ
24V
CRD1
24V(CH4)-3 1
PGND(ch4) 2
51103-0200
50351-8100
F F
SZ1
DG
1
SZ1
2 VCC SED23A
G G
3 SED1L 113Y1756
4 SED2L IP先端検出
DF1E-4S-2.5C
DF1B-2428SCA
機種 ユニット
H H
5118 -
名称 回路図 補助名称 ***
コード Z22N100034 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 9 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-59
SP-60
13I
13I
回路図 9
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Internal cable harness 機内
→ ← ﾕﾆｯﾄ Unit
SND39A-1枚目 136Y201647 ※5557 接触子選択
136Y201659 5556PBTL AWG 24-18
2相パルスモータ駆動 SNDA12 SNDA12 CNA21_R CNA21_P MA1 5556PBT2L AWG 22-28
A ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A1） PM1A 1 UL1007-AWG22青 1 1 UL1007-AWG22青 6
A A
VCC+24V 2 UL1007-AWG22青 4 4 UL1007-AWG22青 5
A COM
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 118SX167相当
PM1AB 3 2 2 4
A/
PM1B 4 UL1007-AWG22青 5 5 UL1007-AWG22青 3
B MA1 吸盤駆動ﾓｰﾀ
VCC+24V 5 UL1007-AWG22青 3 3 UL1007-AWG22青 2
B COM Suction cip driving motor
PM1BB 6 UL1007-AWG22青 6 6 UL1007-AWG22青 1
B/
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A2） PM2A 7 UL1007-AWG22青
VCC+24V 8 UL1007-AWG22青 5557-06R 5559-06P XAP-06V-1
S06B-XASK-1(LF)
PM2AB 9 UL1007-AWG22青 5556PBTL 5558PBTL SXA-001T-P0.6
PM2B 10 UL1007-AWG22青 136Y201661
UL1007-AWG22青 CNA23_R CNA23_P MA2
VCC+24V 11
PM2BB 12 UL1007-AWG22青 1 1 UL1007-AWG22青 6
A
ﾌｨｰﾄﾞﾛｰﾄﾞ搬送部 PM3A 13 4 4 UL1007-AWG22青 5
A COM
UL1007-AWG22青 118SX167相当
VCC+24V 14 2 2 4
A/
PM3AB 15 5 5 UL1007-AWG22青 3
B MA2 吸盤駆動ﾓｰﾀ
B UL1007-AWG22青 B
PM3B 16 3 3 2
B COM Suction cip driving motor
VCC+24V 17 6 6 UL1007-AWG22青 1
B/
PM3BB 18
PM4A 19 5557-06R 5559-06P XAP-06V-1 S06B-XASK-1(LF)
VCC+24V 20 5556PBTL 5558PBTL SXA-001T-P0.6
PM4AB 21
CNA25_R CNA25_P 136Y201663 MA3
PM4B 22
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青
1 1 6
A
VCC+24V 23
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青
4 4 5
A COM 118SX167相当
PM4BB 24
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青
2 2 4
A/
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 MA3 吸盤駆動ﾓｰﾀ
5 5 3
B Suction cip driving motor
DF1BZ-24DP-2.5DSA DF1B-24DS-2.5RC UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青
3 3 2
B COM
DF1B-2022SC UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青
6 6 1
B/
5557-06R 5559-06P XAP-06V-1 S06B-XASK-1(LF)
C 5556PBTL 5558PBTL SXA-001T-P0.6 C
CNA27_R CNA27_P 136Y201665 MA4
SND39A>> UL1007-AWG22青 1 1 UL1007-AWG22青 6
A
5,7,8,,9,10,11, UL1007-AWG22青
UL1007-AWG22青
4
2
4
2
UL1007-AWG22青
UL1007-AWG22青
5
4
A COM
A/
118SX167相当
12,14,15,16 UL1007-AWG22青
UL1007-AWG22青
5 5 UL1007-AWG22青
UL1007-AWG22青
3
B MA4 吸盤駆動ﾓｰﾀ
3 3 2
B COM Suction cip driving motor
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青
113Y****** B/
6 6 1
5557-06R 5559-06P XAP-06V-1 S06B-XASK-1(LF)
5556PBTL 5558PBTL SXA-001T-P0.6
電磁スイッチ 136Y201647
SNDA11 SNDA11
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A1） CL1DRV 1 UL1007-AWG22青
UL1007-AWG22青
D PGND 2
136Y201660 D
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A2） CL2DRV 3
CNA22_R CNA22_P SOLA1
PGND 4
UL1007-AWG22青 RED 赤 FUSE5_SOLA1
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A1） SV1DRV 5 1 1 1
UL1007-AWG22青 YEL 黄 SOLA1DRV 107Y0183
PGND ｶｾｯﾃﾎｰﾙﾄﾞ
6 6 6 3
SOLA1
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A2）
2 2 2
SV2DRV 7
Cassettr hold solenoid
UL1007-AWG22青 BLK 黒 SOLA1PD
PGND 8 7 7 4
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A1） P01DRV 9 UL1007-AWG22青 3 3 UL1007-AWG22青
PGND 10 UL1007-AWG22青 8 8 UL1007-AWG22青 5557-04R
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 5556PBT2L
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A2） P02DRV 11 4 4
PGND 12 UL1007-AWG22青 9 9 UL1007-AWG22青 PA1 J-PA1
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 1 RED 赤 PA1DRV 133Y100031
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A1） VCC+24V 13 5 5 1
IP吸着
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 2 2 PA1
SOL1DRV 14 10 10
IP suction pump
UL1007-AWG22青 BLK 黒 PGND
SOL1DRV_PD 15 3 3
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A2） VCC+24V 16 5557-10R 5559-10P
E E
5556PBTL 5558PBTL XARR-03V XAP-03V-1
SOL2DRV 17
SXAM-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6
SOL2DRV_PD 18
19
SVA1 P-SVA1
1 RED 赤 SVA1DRV
20
1 134N120001A
IPリーク
2 2 BLK 黒 PGND SVA1
IP leak valve
DF1B-20DS-2.5RC
DF1BZ-20DP-2.5DSA
DF1B-2022SC XAP-02V-1 XARR-02V
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6
CLA1
RED 赤 CLA1DRV 106Y0005
ｶｾｯﾃ排出ｸﾗｯﾁ
1
2 BLK 黒 PGND CLA1
Cassette ejection clutch
5557-02R
F 136Y201647 136Y201662 5556PBT2L F
CNA24_R CNA24_P SOLA2
UL1007-AWG22青 1 1 UL1007-AWG22青 1 RED 赤 FUSE6_SOLA2
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 YEL 黄 SOLA2DRV 107Y0183
ｶｾｯﾃﾎｰﾙﾄﾞ
6 6 3
2 2 2 SOLA2
Cassettr hold solenoid
UL1007-AWG22青 7 7 UL1007-AWG22青 4 BLK 黒 SOLA2PD
UL1007-AWG22青 3 3 UL1007-AWG22青
UL1007-AWG22青 8 8 UL1007-AWG22青 5557-04R
UL1007-AWG22青 4 4 UL1007-AWG22青 5556PBT2L
UL1007-AWG22青 9 9 UL1007-AWG22青 PA2 J-PA2
UL1007-AWG22青 5 5 UL1007-AWG22青 RED 赤 PA2DRV 133Y100031
1 1
UL1007-AWG22青 10 10 UL1007-AWG22青 PA2 IP吸着
2 2
IP suction pump
3 3 BLK 黒 PGND
5557-10R 5559-10P
5556PBTL 5558PBTL
G XARR-03V XAP-03V-1 G
SXAM-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6
SVA2 P-SVA2
1 1 RED 赤 SVA2DRV 134N120001A
IPリーク
2 2 BLK 黒 PGND SVA2
IP leak valve
XAP-02V-1 XARR-02V
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6
CLA2
RED 赤 CLA2DRV 106Y0005
ｶｾｯﾃ排出ｸﾗｯﾁ
1
2 BLK 黒 PGND CLA2
Cassette ejection clutch
5557-02R
5556PBT2L
機種 ユニット
H H
5118 -
名称 回路図 補助名称 ***
コード Z22N100034 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 10 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-60
SP-61
13J
13J
回路図 10
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Internal cable harness 機内
→ ← ﾕﾆｯﾄ Unit
118SX167相当
吸盤駆動ﾓｰﾀ
Suction cip driving motor
SND39A-2枚目
A
136Y201649 136Y201818 A
2相パルスモータ駆動 SNDB12 SNDB12 MC3_R MC3_P MC3
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A3） PM1A 1 UL1007-AWG22青 1 1 UL1007-AWG22青 6
A
VCC+24V 2 UL1007-AWG22青 4 4 UL1007-AWG22青 5
A COM
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 118SX167相当
PM1AB 3 2 2 4
A/
PM1B 4 UL1007-AWG22青 5 5 UL1007-AWG22青 3
B MC3 118SX210
VCC+24V 5 UL1007-AWG22青 3 3 UL1007-AWG22青 2
B COM STP-59D3002-01/ｼﾅﾉｹﾝｼ
PM1BB 6 UL1007-AWG22青 6 6 UL1007-AWG22青 1
B/
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A4） PM2A 7 UL1007-AWG22青
VCC+24V 8 UL1007-AWG22青 5557-06R 5559-06P XAP-06V-1 S06B-XASK-1(LF)
UL1007-AWG22青 5556PBTL 5558PBTL SXA-001T-P0.6
PM2AB 9
136Y201819
PM2B 10 UL1007-AWG22青 MB2_R MB2_P MB2
VCC+24V 11 UL1007-AWG22青
1 1 UL1007-AWG22青 6
A
PM2BB 12 UL1007-AWG22青
4 4 UL1007-AWG22青 5
A COM
ﾌｨｰﾄﾞﾛｰﾄﾞ搬送部 PM3A 13
UL1007-AWG22青 118SX167相当
B 2 2 4
A/ B
VCC+24V MB2
14
5 5 UL1007-AWG22青 3
B IP搬送ﾓｰﾀ（合流部）
PM3AB 15
UL1007-AWG22青 IP transport motor(convergence unit)
3 3 2
B COM
PM3B 16
UL1007-AWG22青
6 6 1
B/
VCC+24V 17
PM3BB 18
5557-06R 5559-06P XAP-06V-1 S06B-XASK-1(LF)
PM4A 19
5556PBTL 5558PBTL SXA-001T-P0.6
VCC+24V 20
MB1
PM4AB 21
PM4B 22 6
A
VCC+24V 23
136Y201667 5
A COM 118SX167相当
PM4BB 24 4
A/
CNB21_R CNB21_P 3
B MB1 IP搬送ﾓｰﾀ（枚葉ﾀｰﾝ部）
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 IP transport motor(IP removal turn unit)
DF1BZ-24DP-2.5DSA DF1B-24DS-2.5RC 1 1 2
B COM
DF1B-2022SC UL1007-AWG22青 7 7 UL1007-AWG22青 1
B/
C UL1007-AWG22青 2 2 UL1007-AWG22青 C
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 XAP-06V-1
8 8
SXA-001T-P0.6 S06B-XASK-1(LF)
SND39A>> UL1007-AWG22青
UL1007-AWG22青
3 3 UL1007-AWG22青
UL1007-AWG22青 MB3
5,7,8,,9,10,11,
9 9
UL1007-AWG22青 4 4 UL1007-AWG22青 6
A
12,13,15,16 UL1007-AWG22青
UL1007-AWG22青
10
5
10
5
UL1007-AWG22青
UL1007-AWG22青
5
4
A COM
A/
118SX167相当
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 MB3 合流ﾊﾟｽ切替ｶﾞｲﾄﾞ駆動
11 11 3
B Convergence path changeover guide
113Y****** UL1007-AWG22青 6 6 UL1007-AWG22青 2
B COM driving motor
UL1007-AWG22青 12 12 UL1007-AWG22青 1
B/
電磁スイッチ SNDB11 SNDB11 136Y201647 5557-12R 5559-12P XAP-06V-1 S06B-XASK-1(LF)
5556PBTL 5558PBTL SXA-001T-P0.6
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A3） CL1DRV 1 UL1007-AWG22青
PGND 2 UL1007-AWG22青
D
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A4） CL2DRV 3 136Y201664 D
CNA26_R CNA26_P SOLA3
PGND 4
UL1007-AWG22青 RED 赤 FUSE7_SOLA3
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A3） SV1DRV 5 1 1 1
UL1007-AWG22青 YEL 黄 SOLA3DRV 107Y0183
PGND ｶｾｯﾃﾎｰﾙﾄﾞ
6 6 6 3
SOLA3
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A4） SV2DRV 7 2 2 2
Cassettr hold solenoid
PGND 8 7 7 UL1007-AWG22青 4 BLK 黒 SOLA3PD
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A3） P01DRV 9 UL1007-AWG22青 3 3 UL1007-AWG22青
PGND 10 UL1007-AWG22青 8 8 UL1007-AWG22青 5557-04R
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 5556PBT2L
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A4） P02DRV 11 4 4
PGND 12 UL1007-AWG22青 9 9 UL1007-AWG22青 PA3 J-PA3
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A3） VCC+24V UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青
1 RED 赤 PA3DRV 133Y100031
13 5 5
1
SOL1DRV 14 UL1007-AWG22青 10 10 UL1007-AWG22青 IP吸着
2 2 PA3
UL1007-AWG22青 IP suction pump
SOL1DRV_PD BLK 黒 PGND
15
3 3
ｶｾｯﾃｾｯﾄ部（A4） VCC+24V 16 5557-10R 5559-10P
E
SOL2DRV 17 5556PBTL 5558PBTL XARR-03V XAP-03V-1
E
SOL2DRV_PD 18
SXAM-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6
19
SVA3 P-SVA3
1 RED 赤 SVA3DRV
20
1 134N120001A
IPリーク
2 2 BLK 黒 PGND SVA3
DF1BZ-20DP-2.5DSA DF1B-20DS-2.5RC IP leak valve
DF1B-2022SC XAP-02V-1 XARR-02V
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6
CLA3
RED 赤 CLA3DRV 106Y0005
ｶｾｯﾃ排出ｸﾗｯﾁ
1
2 BLK 黒 PGND CLA3
Cassette ejection clutch
5557-02R
136Y201647 5556PBT2L
F
136Y201666 F
CNA28_R CNA28_P SOLA4
UL1007-AWG22青 1 1 UL1007-AWG22青 1 RED 赤 FUSE8_SOLA4
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 YEL 黄 SOLA4DRV 107Y0183
ｶｾｯﾃﾎｰﾙﾄﾞ
6 6 3
2 2 2
SOLA4
Cassettr hold solenoid
UL1007-AWG22青 7 7 UL1007-AWG22青 4 BLK 黒 SOLA4PD
UL1007-AWG22青 3 3 UL1007-AWG22青
UL1007-AWG22青 8 8 UL1007-AWG22青 5557-04R
4 4 UL1007-AWG22青 5556PBT2L
UL1007-AWG22青 9 9 UL1007-AWG22青 PA4 J-PA4
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青
1 RED 赤 PA4DRV 133Y100031
5 5
1
UL1007-AWG22青 10 10 UL1007-AWG22青 IP吸着
2 2 PA4
IP suction pump
3 3 BLK 黒 PGND
5557-10R 5559-10P
5556PBTL 5558PBTL
XARR-03V XAP-03V-1
G G
SXAM-001T-P0.6 SXA-001T-P0.6
SVA4 P-SVA4
1 1 RED 赤 SVA4DRV 134N120001A
IPリーク
2 2 BLK 黒 PGND SVA4
IP leak valve
XAP-02V-1 XARR-02V
SXA-001T-P0.6 SXAM-001T-P0.6
CLA4
RED 赤 CLA4DRV 106Y0005
ｶｾｯﾃ排出ｸﾗｯﾁ
1
2 BLK 黒 PGND CLA4
Cassette ejection clutch
5557-02R
5556PBT2L
機種 ユニット
H H
5118 -
名称 回路図 補助名称 ***
コード Z22N100034 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 11 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-61
SP-62
13K
13K
回路図 11
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Internal cable harness 機内 → ← ﾕﾆｯﾄ Unit
SND39A-1枚目
A A
136Y201649
2相パルスモータ駆動 SNDA13 SNDA13 MC4
PM5A 1 UL1007-AWG24青 1
A
VCC+24V 2 UL1007-AWG24青 2
A COM 118SX171相当
幅寄搬送部 PM5B 3 UL1007-AWG24青 3
A/
PM5AB 4 UL1007-AWG24青 4
B MC4 ｸﾘｰﾆﾝｸﾞｶﾞｲﾄﾞ駆動ﾓｰﾀ
VCC+24V 5 UL1007-AWG24青 5
B COM Cleaning guide driving motor
PM5BB 6 UL1007-AWG24青 6
B/
PM6A 7
B VCC+24V 8 PHR-6 S6B-PH-K-S B
SPH-002T-P0.5S
幅寄搬送部 PM6AB 9
PM6B 10
CNC21_R CNC21_P 136Y201668 MC1
VCC+24V 11
PM6BB 12 UL1007-AWG22青 1 1 UL1007-AWG22青 6
A
UL1007-AWG22青 7 7 UL1007-AWG22青 5
A COM
DF1BZ-12DP-2.5DSA DF1B-12DS-2.5RC UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 118SX167相当
2 2 4
A/
DF1B-2022SC UL1007-AWG22青 8 8 UL1007-AWG22青 3
B MC1 幅寄ﾓｰﾀ
UL1007-AWG22青 3 3 UL1007-AWG22青 2
B COM Side-positioning motor
SNDA13の1-6pin UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青
DF1B-2428SC B/
9 9 1
CNC21_R_4pin
UL1007-AWG24青 4 4 UL1007-AWG22青
UL1007-AWG24青 10 10 UL1007-AWG22青 XAP-06V-1
CNC21_R_10pin
SXA-001T-P0.6 S06B-XASK-1(LF)
CNC21_R_5pin
UL1007-AWG24青 5 5 UL1007-AWG22青
P14 UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG22青
CNC21_R_11pin
11 11
MC2
SNDB13から UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG22青
SND39A>>
6 6
CNC21_R_6pin
C
UL1007-AWG24青 12 12 UL1007-AWG22青
6
A C
CNC21_R_12pin
5,7,8,,9,10,11,
5
A COM 118SX167相当
5557-12R 5559-12P
4
A/
MC2 ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除ﾓｰﾀ
12,13,14,16 5556PBTL 5558PBTL 3
2
B
B COM
Grip release motor
1
B/
113Y****** XAP-06V-1 S06B-XASK-1(LF)
SXA-001T-P0.6
ME1
6
A
5
A COM
136Y201649 136Y201670 4
A/
118SX167相当
2相パルスモータ駆動 SNDA14 SNDA14 CNE22_R CNE22_P 3
B ME1 IP搬送ﾓｰﾀ
D 消去搬送部 PM7A 1 UL1007-AWG22青 1 1 UL1007-AWG22青 2
B COM IP transport motor D
VCC+24V 2 UL1007-AWG22青 7 7 UL1007-AWG22青 1
B/
PM7AB 3 UL1007-AWG22青 2 2 UL1007-AWG22青
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 XAP-06V-1
PM7B 4 8 8
SXA-001T-P0.6 S06B-XASK-1(LF)
VCC+24V 5 UL1007-AWG22青 3 3 UL1007-AWG22青
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 ME3
PM7BB 6 9 9
消去搬送部 PM8A 7 UL1007-AWG22青 4 4 UL1007-AWG22青 6
A
VCC+24V 8 UL1007-AWG22青 10 10 UL1007-AWG22青 5
A COM
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 118SX167相当
PM8AB 9 5 5 4
A/
PM8B 10 UL1007-AWG22青 11 11 UL1007-AWG22青 3
B ME3 ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除ﾓｰﾀ
VCC+24V 11 UL1007-AWG22青 6 6 UL1007-AWG22青 2
B COM Grip release motor
PM8BB 12 UL1007-AWG22青 12 12 UL1007-AWG22青 1
B/
消去搬送部 PM9A 13
VCC+24V 14 5557-12R 5559-12P XAP-06V-1
5556PBTL SXA-001T-P0.6 S06B-XASK-1(LF)
5558PBTL
E PM9AB 15
E
PM9B 16
136Y201670 136Y201883
VCC+24V 17
136Y201649 CNE21_R CNE21_P CNE21_R2 CNE21_P2 ME2
PM9BB 18
UL1007-AWG22青 1 1 UL1007-AWG22青 1 1 UL1007-AWG22青 6
A
DF1BZ-18DP-2.5DSA UL1007-AWG22青 4 4 UL1007-AWG22青 4 4 UL1007-AWG22青 5
A COM 118SX167相当
DF1B-18DS-2.5RC
UL1007-AWG22青 2 2 UL1007-AWG22青 2 2 UL1007-AWG22青 4
A/
DF1B-2022SC
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 5 UL1007-AWG22青 ME2 幅寄ﾓｰﾀ
5 5 5 3
B Side-positioning motor
UL1007-AWG22青 3 3 UL1007-AWG22青 3 3 UL1007-AWG22青 2
B COM
UL1007-AWG22青 6 6 UL1007-AWG22青 6 6 UL1007-AWG22青 1
B/
5557-06R 5559-06P 5557-06R 5559-06P XAP-06V-1 S06B-XASK-1(LF)
5556PBTL 5558PBTL 5556PBTL 5558PBTL SXA-001T-P0.6
電磁スイッチ 136Y201649
SNDA15 SNDA15 CNE23_R CNE23_P 136Y8764 SOLE1
F
消去搬送部 VCC+24V 1 UL1007-AWG22青 1 1 UL1007-AWG22青 1 RED 赤 FUSE11_SOLE1 107Y0169 F
SOL3DRV 2 UL1007-AWG22青 3 3 UL1007-AWG22青 3 YEL 黄 SOLE1DRV 分岐ﾊﾟｽ切替ｶﾞｲﾄﾞ駆動
2 2 2 SOLE1 Branch path changeover guide
SOL3DRV_PD 3
UL1007-AWG22青 4 4 UL1007-AWG22青 4 BLK 黒 SOLE1PD driving motor
DF1EC-3P-2.5DSA DF1E-3S-2.5C
DF1B-2022SC 5557-04R 5559-04P 5557-04R
5556PBTL 5558PBTL 5556PBTL
136Y201649
DCモータ駆動 136Y8770
SNDA9 SNDA9 CNZ22_R CNZ22_P MZ2
118YX216
副走査部 DCM1DRV 1 UL1007-AWG22青 1 1 UL1007-AWG22青 1 RED 赤 MZ2DRV ﾆｯﾌﾟ駆動ﾓｰﾀ
PGND 2 UL1007-AWG22青 3 3 UL1007-AWG22青 2 BLK 黒 PGND MZ2 Grip driving motor
G G
DCM2DRV1 3 UL1007-AWG22青 2 2 UL1007-AWG22青
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 5557-02R
DCM2DRV2 4 4 4
5556PBTL
5
5557-04R 5559-04P
DF1EC-5P-2.5DSA DF1E-5S-2.5C 5556PBT2L 5558PBTL MZ3
118YX217
DF1B-2022SC 1 BLK 黒 MZ3DRV1 ほこり除去ﾓｰﾀ
RED 赤 MZ3DRV2 MZ3 Dust removal motor
136Y201673 2
DCファンモータ SNDA10 SNDA10 FANG4
5557-02R
筺体部 FAN1DRV 1 UL1007-AWG26赤 1 RED 赤 119S0095 5556PBT2L
UL1007-AWG26黒 BLK 黒 FANG4 基板冷却
PGND 2 2
Board cooling fan
3
FAN2DRV
PGND
4 DF3-2S-2C
DF3-2428SC
DF1EC-4P-2.5DSA DF1E-4S-2.5C
機種 ユニット
H H
DF1B-2428SC 5118 -
名称 回路図 補助名称 ***
コード Z22N100034 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 12 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-62
SP-63
13L
13L
回路図 12
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Internal cable harness 機内 → ← ﾕﾆｯﾄ Unit
MD1
6
A
SND39A-2枚目 A COM
5
136Y201669 4
A/
118SX167相当
A
CND21_R CND21_P 3
B MD1 ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除ﾓｰﾀ
A
UL1007-AWG22青
2
B COM Grip release motor
1 1
7 7 UL1007-AWG22青
1
B/
UL1007-AWG22青
136Y201649 2 2
XAP-06V-1 S06B-XASK-1(LF)
8 8 UL1007-AWG22青
SXA-001T-P0.6
2相パルスモータ駆動 3 3 UL1007-AWG22青
SNDB14 SNDB14 9 9 UL1007-AWG22青 MD2
後搬送部 PM7A 1 UL1007-AWG22青 4 4 UL1007-AWG22青 6
A
VCC+24V 2 UL1007-AWG22青 10 10 UL1007-AWG22青 5
A COM
UL1007-AWG22青 UL1007-AWG22青 118SX167相当
PM7AB 3 5 5 4
A/
PM7B 4 UL1007-AWG22青 11 11 UL1007-AWG22青 3
B MD2 IP搬送ﾓｰﾀ
VCC+24V 5 UL1007-AWG22青 6 6 UL1007-AWG22青 2
B COM IP transport motor
PM7BB 6 UL1007-AWG22青 12 12 UL1007-AWG22青 1
B/
後搬送部 PM8A 7 UL1007-AWG22青
B UL1007-AWG22青 B
VCC+24V 8 5557-12R 5559-12P XAP-06V-1 S06B-XASK-1(LF)
UL1007-AWG22青 5556PBTL 5558PBTL SXA-001T-P0.6
PM8AB 9
PM8B 10 UL1007-AWG22青
VCC+24V 11 UL1007-AWG22青
PM8BB 12 UL1007-AWG22青
幅寄搬送部
13
PM9A
14
VCC+24V
15
PM9AB
16
PM9B
17
VCC+24V
18
PM9BB
DF1BZ-18DP-2.5DSA DF1B-18DS-2.5RC
DF1B-2022SC
SND39A>>
C C
5,7,8,,9,10,11,
12,13,14,15,
113Y******
136Y201823
136Y201649
2相パルスモータ駆動 SNDB13 SNDB13 MZ4_R MZ4_P MZ4
副走査部 PM5A 1 UL1007-AWG24青 1 1 UL1007-AWG26青 1
A
VCC+24V 2 UL1007-AWG24青 2 2 UL1007-AWG26青 2
A COM
UL1007-AWG24青 UL1007-AWG26青 118SX171相当
PM5B 3 3 3 3
A/
PM5AB 4 UL1007-AWG24青 4 4 UL1007-AWG26青 4
B MZ4 ｽﾄｯﾊﾟ駆動ﾓｰﾀ
VCC+24V 5 UL1007-AWG24青 5 5 UL1007-AWG26青 5
B COM Stopper driving motor
D D
PM5BB 6 UL1007-AWG24青 6 6 UL1007-AWG26青 6
B/
幅寄搬送部 PM6A 7 UL1007-AWG24青 CNC21_R_4pin
VCC+24V 8 UL1007-AWG24青 CNC21_R_10pin
DF11-6DS-2C DF11-6DEP-2C PHR-6 S6B-PH-K-S
PM6B 9 UL1007-AWG24青 CNC21_R_5pin
DF11-2428SC DF11-EP2428PC SPH-002T-P0.5S
UL1007-AWG24青 P.13
PM6AB 10
CNC21_R_11pin
UL1007-AWG24青 CNC21へ
VCC+24V 11
CNC21_R_6pin
PM6BB 12 UL1007-AWG24青 CNC21_R_12pin
DF1BZ-12DP-2.5DSA DF1B-12DS-2.5RC
DF1B-2428SC
参考
DF1B-2022SCA は AWG22-20
DF1B-2428SCA は AWG24-28
E E
DCファンモータ SNDB10 SNDB10 136Y201673
FANG3
筺体部 UL1007-AWG26赤 RED 赤 119S0095
FAN1DRV 基板冷却
1 1
PGND 2 UL1007-AWG26黒 2 BLK 黒 FANG3
Board cooling fan
FAN2DRV 3 UL1007-AWG26赤
PGND 4 UL1007-AWG26黒 DF3-2S-2C
DF3-2428SCC
DF1EC-4P-2.5DSA DF1E-4S-2.5C
DF1B-2428SC FANG2
RED 赤 119S0095
基板冷却
1
2 BLK 黒 FANG2
Board cooling fan
DF3-2S-2C
DF3-2428SCC
F F
G G
機種 ユニット
H H
5118 -
名称 回路図 補助名称 ***
コード Z22N100034 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 13 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-63
SP-64
13M
13M
回路図 13
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Internal cable harness 機内 → ← ﾕﾆｯﾄ Unit
※ タグ表示は「SCT17B-CN3」
CPU39A
光学部
* Display "SCT17B-CN3" in tag display
A A
CPU3 CPU3 136Y201650 CNZ31_R CNZ31_P LDD12A CN1 LDD12A CN1 Scanning optics unit
1
部品番号不明
V5_D 1 1 1
+15AS
GND
V5_D
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
AG
+15AS
839Y100086
LDD12A
4 4
GND 4 4
AG
LDONH 5 UL1007-AWG28灰 5 5 5
+15AS
UL1007-AWG28灰
113Y1455
6
LDONL 6 6 6
AG
LDOKH 7 UL1007-AWG28灰 7 7 7
+15AS
LDOKL 8 UL1007-AWG28灰 8 8 8
AG
LD_IDLEH 9 UL1007-AWG28灰 9 9 9
-15AS
LD_IDLEL 10 UL1007-AWG28灰 10 10 10
AG
11
GND 11 11 11
-15AS
LDD39A2
部品番号不明
12 12
N.C 12 12
AG LDA12A1
LDIFH 13 UL1007-AWG28灰 13 13 13
LD1IDH 1 1
B
LDIFL 14 UL1007-AWG28灰 14 14 14
LD1IDL 2 2
B
15
VREF_DA LD1ONH
LDA12A
15 15 15 3 3
'+15AS 16 UL1007-AWG28灰 16 16 16
LD1ONL 4 4
UL1007-AWG28灰
GND_A LD1OKH
113Y1458
17 17 17 17 5 5
'+15AS 18 UL1007-AWG28灰 18 18 18
LD1OKL 6 6
GND_A 19 UL1007-AWG28灰 19 19 19
LDIFL 7 7
'-15AS 20 UL1007-AWG28灰 20 20 20
LDIFH(AG) 8 8
GND_A 21 UL1007-AWG28灰
データなし データなし
'-15AS 22 UL1007-AWG28灰 HIF3BA-20D-2.54C 型番不明
型番不明
503149-2000 503154-2090
データなし データなし
HIF3-2428SCA 502579-0000
GND_A データなし、8ピンの データなし、8ピンの
23
他ｺﾈｸﾀで代用しています。 他ｺﾈｸﾀで代用しています。
24
N.C
DF3-8P-2DSA(1) DF3-8P-2DSA(1)
503149-2400
503154-2490
502579-0000 SYN12A_CN1 SYN12A_CN1
C C
10
+15VAS
9
AG
8
+5VAS
7
AG
UL1007-AWG28灰
6
5
-15VAS
AG
SYN12A
UL1007-AWG28灰
UL1007-AWG28灰
4
3
+5VDS
DG
113Y1454
CPU21 CPU21 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
SSH
SSH 1 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
SSL
SSL 2
136Y8921
DG 3 DF1B-2428SCA 136Y8921
+5VDS 4 DF1B-10S-2.5R
5
N.C
CPU39A>>
6
D N.C D
（副走査基準側前） （1F台基準側前） （副走査基準側後） （1F台基準側後）
3,4,19 DF1B-6DP-2.5DSA DF1B-6DS-2.5RC （Front reference side （Front reference side （Rear reference side （Rear reference side
of Subscanning unit） of base plate） of Subscanning unit） of base plate）
DF1B-2428SC
113Y******
136Y8921 136Y8921
E
（副走査中央前） （1F台中央前） （副走査中央後） （1F台中央後） E
（Front center of Subscanning unit） （Front center of base plate） （Rear center of Subscanning unit） （Rear center of base plate）
TBC3.5SQ(0.12)
136Y8921
136Y8921
F （副走査反基準側前） （1F台反基準側前） （副走査反基準側後） （1F台反基準側後） F
（Front opposite-reference （Rear opposite-reference （Rear opposite-reference
（Front opposite-reference side of base plate） side of Subscanning unit） side of base unit）
side of Subscanning unit）
136Y201650 POL17C1
CPU2 CPU2
UL1007-AWG24灰
136Y8921
+24PS 8 1
+24PS
PG 7 UL1007-AWG24灰 2
PG
POKL 6 UL1007-AWG24灰 3
POKL
PONL 5 UL1007-AWG24灰 4
PONL
（幅寄せ基準側） （筺体1F基準側後）
G PG
PIDXL
4
3
UL1007-AWG24灰
UL1007-AWG24灰
5
6
PG
PIDXL
POL17C （Reference side of Side-positioning （Lower rear reference
G
2 7
conveyor unit） side of frame）
× ×
POFH 1 UL1007-AWG24灰 8
POFH
DF1B-8DP-2.5DSA(01) DF1B-8DS-2.5RC XADRP-08V
DF1B-2428SCA SXA-001T-P0.6
機種 ユニット
H H
5118 -
名称 回路図 補助名称 ***
コード Z22N100034 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 14
15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-64
SP-65
13N
13N
回路図 14
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Internal cable harness 機内 → ← ﾕﾆｯﾄ Unit
集光部
A
CPU39A Light-collecting unit
A
CPU5 CPU5 136Y201650
PMT27B1 PMT27B1 PMT27B
HVMONH 1 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
HVMONH 113Y100484
HVMONL 2 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
HVMONL
+15VOKH 3 UL1007-AWG28灰 3
+15VOKH
+15VOKL 4 UL1007-AWG28灰 4
+15VOKL
HVSH 5 UL1007-AWG28灰 5
HVSH
HVSL 6 UL1007-AWG28灰 6
HVSL
+15AS 7 UL1007-AWG28灰 7
+15AS
AG 8 UL1007-AWG28灰 8
AG
+15AS 9 UL1007-AWG28灰 9
+15AS
AG 10 UL1007-AWG28灰 10
AG
+15AS 11 UL1007-AWG28灰 11
+15AS
B AG 12 UL1007-AWG28灰 12
AG B
+15AS 13 UL1007-AWG28灰 13
+15AS
AG 14 UL1007-AWG28灰 14
AG
CPU39A>> +15AS
AG
15
16
UL1007-AWG28灰
UL1007-AWG28灰
15
16
+15AS
AG
3,4,18 +15AS 17 UL1007-AWG28灰
UL1007-AWG28灰
17
+15AS
AG 18 18
AG
UL1007-AWG28灰
113Y****** +15AS +15AS
19 19
AG 20 UL1007-AWG28灰 20
AG
-15AS 21 UL1007-AWG28灰 21
-15AS
AG 22 UL1007-AWG28灰 22
AG
-15AS 23 UL1007-AWG28灰 23
-15AS
AG 24 UL1007-AWG28灰 24
AG
-15AS 25 UL1007-AWG28灰 25
-15AS
AG 26 UL1007-AWG28灰 26
AG
C C
ERSH 27 UL1007-AWG28灰 27
ERSH
ERSL 28 UL1007-AWG28灰 28
ERSL
LEDSIGH 29 UL1007-AWG28灰 29
LEDSIGH
LEDSIGL 30 UL1007-AWG28灰 30
LEDSIGL
LEDONH 31 UL1007-AWG28灰 31
LEDONH
LEDONL 32 UL1007-AWG28灰 32
LEDONL
VIONH 33 UL1007-AWG28灰 33
VIONH
VIONL 34 UL1007-AWG28灰 34
VIONL
503154-3490 503149-3400 HIF3BA-34D-2.54C
502579-0000 HIF3-2428SCA
D
CPU7 136Y201650 PMT27B2
D
PMTH 1.5DS-EXBV / UL1553-1.5D-2V
UM-QLP-1.5-6（40） UM-QP-1.5VCR3A(40)
PMTL
CPU4 CPU4 136Y201650 PMR27B1 PMR27B1 PMR27B
R-HVMONH 1 UL1007-AWG28灰 1
R-HVMONH 113Y100854
R-HVMONL 2 UL1007-AWG28灰 2
R-HVMONL
R-+15VOKH 3 UL1007-AWG28灰 3
R-+15VOKH
R-+15VOKL 4 UL1007-AWG28灰 4
R-+15VOKL
R-HVSH 5 UL1007-AWG28灰 5
R-HVSH
R-HVSL 6 UL1007-AWG28灰 6
R-HVSL
E
+15AS 7 UL1007-AWG28灰 7
+15AS E
GND_A 8 UL1007-AWG28灰 8
GND_A
+15AS 9 UL1007-AWG28灰 9
+15AS
GND_A 10 UL1007-AWG28灰 10
GND_A
+15AS 11 UL1007-AWG28灰 11
+15AS
GND_A 12 UL1007-AWG28灰 12
GND_A
+15AS 13 UL1007-AWG28灰 13
+15AS
GND_A 14 UL1007-AWG28灰 14
GND_A
+15AS 15 UL1007-AWG28灰 15
+15AS
GND_A 16 UL1007-AWG28灰 16
GND_A
+15AS 17 UL1007-AWG28灰 17
+15AS
GND_A 18 UL1007-AWG28灰 18
GND_A
+15AS 19 UL1007-AWG28灰 19
+15AS
GND_A 20 UL1007-AWG28灰 20
GND_A
-15AS 21 UL1007-AWG28灰 21
-15AS
F F
GND_A 22 UL1007-AWG28灰 22
GND_A
-15AS 23 UL1007-AWG28灰 23
-15AS
GND_A 24 UL1007-AWG28灰 24
GND_A
25
R-ERSH 25
-15AS
26
R-ERSL 26
GND_A
UL1007-AWG28灰
R-LEDSIGH 27 27
R-ERSH
UL1007-AWG28灰
R-LEDSIGL 28 28
R-ERSL
UL1007-AWG28灰
R-LEDONH 29 29
R-LEDSIGH
UL1007-AWG28灰
R-LEDONL 30 30
R-LEDSIGL
UL1007-AWG28灰
R-VIONH 31 31
R-LEDONH
UL1007-AWG28灰
R-VIONL 32 32
R-LEDONL
UL1007-AWG28灰 33
R-VIONH
503154-3290 503149-3200 UL1007-AWG28灰 34
R-VIONL
502579-0000 N.C
G G
HIF3BA-34D-2.54C N.C
HIF3-2428SCA N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
CPU6 136Y201650 PMR27B2
PMTH 1.5DS-EXBV / UL1553-1.5D-2V
UM-QLP-1.5-6（40） PMTL UM-QP-1.5VCR3A(40)
機種 ユニット
H H
5118 -
名称 回路図 補助名称 ***
コード Z22N100034 Rev.
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 15
15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-65
SP-66
14 15
14 15
ネジ・座金類の表示記号一覧表 消耗品一覧表
TABLE OF SCREWS / WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS
Table of Screws/Washers Indication Symbols List Of Quick Wearing Parts
Symbol in the
Indication No. Part name Shape
No. Part name dissassembly Size Shape
Symbols chart (example)
Cross-recessed flat-head
1 S S3×10 M3×10 1 Fixing plug
screw
Cross-recessed truss- M4×8
2 T **T4×8
head screw M4×10 2 Binding band
Cross-recessed pan-
3 head screw with spring A M2.6×16 M2.6×16
washer 3 N.K. clamp
Cross-recessed pan- M3×6
4 head screw with spring B B3×6 M3×30
and plain washers M3×35 4 Edging
BR3×10 M3×10
Cross-recessed （308S9420310）
M3×12 5 Edge saddle
hexagonheaded screw BR3×12
5 BR M4×8
with spring and plain （308S9420312）
M4×12
washers BR4×8
M8×30
（308S9410408）
6 Hexagon-headed bolt Q Q3×20 M3×20
Hexagon-Headed bolt
7 with spring and plain BQ BQ4×10 M4×10
washer
*DT3×6 M3×6
8 Deltight screw* DT
（308S0254） M4×8
Nominal
9 Plax** Ps **Ps3×6 diameter
3×6
M3×5
Hexagon-headed
10 WP WP4×6 M4×6
setscrew (double-point)
M4×8
TP3×6 M3×6
11 TPscrew TP
（308S0311） M4×8
M16
12 Hexagon nut Na Na20
M20
13 Plain washer W W4 M4
14 Spring washer SW SW3 M3
Nominal
diameter 4
15 E ring E E6
Nominal
diameter 6
KL4（315N0009） M4
16 K-CL ring KL
KL6（315N0010） M6
M8×30
17 Hexagon bolt **M12×24 M12×24
M12×30
18 Special screw Special screw
* ： Self-tapping screw with a noncircular end
** ： Stainless-made
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-66
SP-67
16
16 16
オプション オプション
OPTION OPTION
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 350N2873A カバー Cover 1 Front cover
E 2 356N9407 ブラケット Bracket 1 Front
E 3 356N9406A ブラケット Bracket 2
E 4 356N9534 ブラケット Bracket 1 Rear
E 5 350N2874B カバー Cover 1 Rear cover
E 6 347N1930 スペーサ Spacer 12 2mm
E 7 347N1929 スペーサ Spacer 2 1mm
E 8 347N1928 スペーサ Spacer 12 2mm
D 9 304S1001225 ボルト Bolt 8 12x20
D 10 309S0220012 バネ座金 Spring washer 8 SW12
D 11 309S0120012 平座金 Plain washer 8 W12
D 12 305S0061B アンカーナット Anchor nut 8 Na12
D 13 301S3000408 トラスネジ Truss screw 4 T3x6
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-67
SP-68
17
17 17
治具 治具
JIG JIG
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 Y22S0114 特殊ビット Special bit 1 {MC:20.}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-68
SP-69
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-69
SP-70
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-70
SP-71
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-71
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
12.06.2019 01 New release All pages
02.28.2020 02 Revision All pages
CR-IR 363 Service Manual
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
011-211-02E CR-IR 363 Service Manual
02.28.2020
PM-1
1. Preventive Maintenance Program 1.2 Notations of Intervals
In this volume, either of the following symbols is indicated for each maintenance
program.
1.1 How To Use the Preventive Maintenance Before initiating any maintenance operation, you should become familiar with the
following symbols.
Volume
: Indicates a preventive maintenance program that must be performed
- Perform the relevant procedures in accordance with the interval notations every year of machine use or whenever a process count of about 60,000
( ). is reached.
- "Preventive Maintenance Program List" is comprised of programs classified
: Indicates a preventive maintenance program that must be performed
by intervals of one year (1Y), two years (2Y), and three years (3Y). Since the every two years of machine use or whenever a process count of about
maintenance programs differ depending upon the respective intervals, they should 120,000 is reached.
be performed according to the Program List.
: Indicates a preventive maintenance program that must be performed
- When performing any preventive maintenance program, proceed to the next every three years of machine use or whenever a process count of about
program in accordance with the "Reference section" described for each maintenance 180,000 is reached.
program.
- Example - u NOTE u
After performing the procedures described in "6. Turning OFF the High-Voltage
Switch", the maintenance programs to be done next differ depending upon the If you want to use the IP ADAPTER for 15x30 IP (IR ADAPTER FOR IP 15x30CM
respective intervals, as follows: E), replace the IP ADAPTER for 15x30 IP every two years or whenever a process
count of 600 is reached.
1 year intervals: {PM:8.4.1}
2 year intervals: {PM:7.1} REFERENCE
3 year intervals: {PM:8.4.1}
The above process counts are based on a maximum daily process count of 300.
REFERENCE
{PM:6._Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-1
PM-2
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List l Preventive maintenance programs to be performed every year of
machine use or whenever a process count of about 60,000 is reached
u INSTRUCTION u ( )
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and Periodic
additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining Reference Time
Maintenance program replacement Remarks
screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for section requirements
parts
servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and
2.1 Checking the Error Log 1
retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set
forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to 3
Checking the Image/
15
properly secure the parts. Conveyance
4 Pulling Out the Machine 1
Removing the Covers
Perform the specified preventive maintenance programs at the predefined intervals or 5.2
(1 Year Intervals)
4
when the predefined process count is reached.
The preventive maintenance programs to be performed at various intervals are listed Checking the Feed/Load
8 4
Conveyor Unit
below.
8.4.1 Cleaning the Brush Roller -
Checking the Side-
9 2
Positioning Conveyor Unit
Cleaning the Cleaning
9.3.1 Guide Assembly -
(1 Year Intervals)
13.1 Removing the Lamp Case 10
- Checking Lamp Case -
13.12 Cleaning the Filter -
Replace the lamp
case when the
- Replacing the Lamp Case - Lamp case
lighting time is over
1600 hours.
Cleaning/Reinstalling the
16 2
Covers and Louvers
17 Securing the Machine 1
Checking the Image/
18 15
Conveyance
Checking the Laser
19
Performance/Sensitivity
20 Checking the Error Log 1
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-2
PM-3
l Preventive maintenance programs to be performed every two years 12 Checking the Light-Collecting 10
Guide
of machine use or whenever a process count of about 120,000 is
Reinstalling the Post-Reading
reached 12.2 Conveyor Unit 2
( ) Checking the Erasure Conveyor
13 40
Unit
Periodic
Reference Time 13.1 Removing the Lamp Case -
Maintenance program replacement Remarks
section requirements
parts
Cleaning the IP Switchback
13.3 -
2.1 Checking Error Log 1 Assembly
Checking the Image/ 13.4 Cleaning the Reflection Plate
3 15 -
Conveyance Guide and Rubber Rollers
4 Pulling Out the Machine 1 Cleaning the Shock-Absorbing
13.5 -
Roller and Guide
Removing the Covers (2 Year
5.3 7 Cleaning the Rubber Roller and
Intervals) 13.7 -
Guide
Turning OFF the High-Voltage
6 1 - Checking Lamp Case 10
Switch
Cleaning the rubber 13.12 Cleaning the Filter -
7 Checking the Cassette Set Unit 15 rollers and suction
cups Replace the lamp case
- Replacing the Lamp Case - Lamp case when the lighting time
Checking the Feed/Load is over 1600 hours.
8 45
Conveyor Unit
14 Cleaning Inside the Machine 3
8.1, Cleaning the Shock Absorbing
8.2, Rollers, Guides, and Rubber - Turning ON the High-Voltage
8.3 Rollers 15 1
Switch
Cleaning/Replacing the Brush Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers
8.4.2 4 Brush rollers (x2) 16 10
Roller and Louvers
Checking the Side-Positioning 17 Securing the Machine 1
9 10
Conveyor Unit
18 Checking the Image/Conveyance 15
9.2 Cleaning the Guide -
Checking the Laser
19
Cleaning the Cleaning Guide Performance/Sensitivity
9.3.2 -
Assembly (2 Year Intervals)
20 Checking Error Log 1
Checking the Post-Reading
10 8 Resetting the Erasure Lamp
Conveyor Unit 21 1
Lighting Time
Removing the Post-Reading
10.2 2
Conveyor Unit
Cleaning the Guides, Shock l Parts to be replaced every two years of machine use or whenever a
10.3 Absorbing Rollers, and Rubber - process count of about 120,000 is reached
Rollers
Cleaning the Movable Guide Reference section Parts Name Parts No. Qty. Remarks
10.4 -
Assembly 8.4.2 Cleaning roller 334N5015B 2
11 Checking the Subscanning Unit 30
Cleaning the Antistatic Brush
11.2 -
Assembly
11.5 Cleaning the Glass Guide 30
Cleaning the Flywheel and
11.8 -
Kapton® Belt
11.9 Cleaning the SUS Belt -
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-3
PM-4
l Preventive maintenance programs to be performed every three years *1: Replace the IP suction pumps when either one of the following conditions is met.
of machine use or whenever a process count of about 180,000 is - Every three years
- When process count reaches the number set in CONDITION OF PUMP LIFE
reached ( ) under EDIT CONFIGURATION.
Reference Time
Periodic When CONDITION OF PUMP LIFE is set to "NO DISP", 180,000 process
Maintenance program replacement Remarks counts is the condition. In other cases, the set number of the process count is
section requirements
parts
the condition.
2.1 Checking Error Log 1
Checking the Image/
3 15
Conveyance
l Parts to be replaced every three years of machine use or whenever a
4 Pulling Out the Machine 1 process count of about 180,000 is reached
Removing the Covers
5.4 2 Reference Parts Name Parts No. Qty. Remarks
(3 Year Intervals)
section
Turning OFF the High-Voltage
6 1 7.3 Pump 133Y100043 4 Pump
Switch
Replacing the IP Suction 9.3.3 Guide 363Y0460A 1 Side-positioning conveyor unit (surface side)
7.3 15 Pump (x4) *1
Pumps 363Y0461 1 Side-positioning conveyor unit (back side)
Checking the Feed/Load 13.12 Filter 603Y120008 1 Erasure filter
8 4
Conveyor Unit
- Lamp Case 840Y200032 1 Lamp Case
8.4.1 Cleaning the Brush Roller -
Checking the Side-Positioning
9
Conveyor Unit
9.3.3 Replacing the Cleaning Guide 10 Guide (x2)
Reinstalling the Side-
11.10 2
Positioning Conveyor Unit
13.1 Removing the Lamp Case -
- Checking Lamp Case 10
Replace the lamp case
- Replacing the Lamp Case - Lamp case when the lighting time is
over 1600 hours.
13.13 Reinstalling the Lamp Case -
Turning ON the High-Voltage
15 1
Switch
Cleaning/Reinstalling the
16 4
Covers and Louvers
17 Securing the Machine 1
Checking the Image/
18 15
Conveyance
Checking the Laser
19
Performance/ Sensitivity
20 Checking Error Log 1
22 Reset the number that the
1
pumps are used
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-4
PM-5
1.4 Preventive Maintenance Flow
START A
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures 16. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance 17. Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers and Louvers
4. Pulling Out the Machine 18. Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filter
5. Removing the Covers 19. Securing the Machine
6. Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch 20. Checking the Image/Conveyance
7. Cassette Set Unit 21. Checking the Laser Performance/Sensitivity
8. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit 22. Checking Error Log
9. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit 23. Resetting the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time
10. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit END
11. Subscanning Unit
12. Light-Collecting Guide
13. Erasure Conveyor Unit
14. Lamp Case
15. Cleaning Inside the Machine
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-5
PM-6
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures 6. Select the log to check the error log.
2.1 Checking the Error Log
1. Power ON the CL.
2. Power ON the RU.
3. Start RU PC-TOOL.
4. Open the ERROR-DB.
{PM:2.2}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-6
PM-7
2.2 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time
{PM:3.1}
1. Open the MAINTENANCE UTILITY window.
2. Open the EDIT HISTORY window.
3. Check the erasure lamp lighting time.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-7
PM-8
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance 3. Perform IP exposures.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
The following checks are made in this section. - Expose two IPs of maximum sizes for each of the IP types (ST type and HR-
- Conveyance checks BD type) used at the institution, with the following doses.
- Image checks - With the X-ray tube, the first IP should be exposed in a normal orientation, and
- Check for output characters the second in a 180-degree upside-down orientation.
3.1 Check Before Procedures l For "ST" IP
- X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube
{PM:3.2} - Exposure X-ray dose: 1 mR
- Maximum size: IP of 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14"x17" (35cm x 43cm)
u NOTES u size
- If a cassette with a wrong IP type is inserted, appropriate image cannot be obtained. - Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m
When inserting an IP into a cassette, be sure to perform servicing after confirming Voltage 80 Kv
the IP type. Amperage 50 mA
- For the IP used for image/conveyance checks, an IP of the maximum size used in Time 0.013 sec
the hospital should be employed. l For "HR-BD" IP
- Make sure that the IP to be used does not contain any important image data
- X-ray tube: Molybdenum X-ray tube
exposed.
- Exposure X-ray dose: 20 mR
- Maximum size: IP of 18"x24" HR-BD or 24"x30" HR-BD size
1. Check to ensure that the "READY" screen appears. - Reference conditions: Distance 0.55 m
Voltage 25 Kv
Amperage 100 mA
Time 0.053 sec
2. Perform "Secondary Erasure" on the spontaneous radiation and
image accumulated on the IP to be used.
{Instruction Manual}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-8
PM-9
3.2 Image/Conveyance Checks If there is any uneven density difference, compare the films outputted from the
two IPs of the same size, and determine whether such nonuniformity is caused
by the machine or X-ray tube.
u NOTE u l If there is uneven density difference in the same direction on two films
Because the "MENU" and so forth differ depending on the IP type, image checks
should be performed with the "MENU" specified below.
1. Record the IP, which was exposed as instructed in "3.1 Check Before
Procedures," under the following film output conditions, and output it.
l "ST" IP
Film output conditions: “TEST”, “Image Format” or “Image Format - 2”, “SINGLE”
l "HR-BD" IP
Film output conditions: “TEST”, “Image Format” or “Image Format - 2”, “SINGLE”
2 Verify that there is no "unusual nonuniformity" found on the output
film or on the image displayed on the image monitor. → The machine may be the cause of such nonuniformity.
{Troubleshooting}
u CHECK u
- There should be no uneven density difference in the main scan direction. l If positions of uneven density difference are different
- If images are output like the following (periodic nonuniformity in main scan
direction), the polygon mirror in the scanning optics unit may be dirty. Since
opening the scanning optics unit is prohibited, replace the entire scanning
optics unit.
→ The X-ray tube may be the cause of such nonuniformity.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-9
PM-10
3 Check the image format. 3.3 Checking the Output Characters
Make sure that the white blank portion is 2 mm or less, as actually measured on
{PM:4.1}
the IP, from the outermost edge of the image frame of the film outputted.
u CHECK u Make sure that the film character format information that was set in “Outputting the
The white blank portion should be 2 mm or less. Film for Image Check” is displayed on the output film. Also verify that none of the
characters look blurred or broken.
If anything abnormal is found:
」」
{Troubleshooting} 1. Check the output characters.
u INSTRUCTION u
Check the following.
- The character format information that has been set is correct.
- There is nothing abnormal,such as blurred or broken characters.
If anything abnormal is found;
{MT:Troubleshooting}
REFERENCE
The details of output characters and the character display locations are as
follows.
u NOTE u
The distance measured on the film may differ from the actual size on the IP,
depending on the reading size and film size. The actual size on the IP should be
calculated using the distance measured on the film and the reduction factor for
the film. Compute the actual size on the IP according to the following equation.
{PM:3.3}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-10
PM-11
4. Pulling Out the Machine 4.2 Disconnecting the Cables
{PM:5.2} {PM:5.3} {PM:5.4}
4.1 Unlocking the Retainers 1. Disconnect the power cable and I/F cable.
{PM:4.2}
1. Power OFF the CL.
2. Power OFF the RU.
3. Unlock the adjustable feet.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-11
PM-12
5. Removing the Covers 5.2 Removing the Covers (1 Year Intervals)
{PM:8.4.1}
5.1 Nothing 1. Remove the covers.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-12
PM-13
5.3 Removing the Covers (2 Year Intervals)
{PM:6.}
1. Remove the covers.
u INSTRUCTION u
When removing the upper left-hand side cover, take off the louvers first.
The screw is hidden behind the louvers.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-13
PM-14
5.4 Removing the Covers (3 Year Intervals)
{PM:6.}
1. Remove the covers.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-14
PM-15
6. Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch
{PM:7.1} {PM:8.4.1}
1. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the CPU39A board.
SW5
HV ON
HV OFF
CPU39A board
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-15
PM-16
7. Cassette Set Unit 1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
7.1 Removing the Feed/Load Conveyor Unit
{PM:7.3}
u NOTE u
Because the feed/load conveyor unit is heavy, pay attention to the following points
when removing, installing, and moving it.
- Before proceeding with the procedures,secure sufficient working space around the
machine.
- Get hold of the portions indicated by the "Hold Here" labels.
- While assuming a comfortable posture, lift or hold up the unit.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-16
PM-17
7.2 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers and Suction 3. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.
Cups
1. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.
2. Wipe the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-17
PM-18
4. Remove the suction cup assembly for the first shelf. 5. Clean the suction cups (suction surfaces) with a moistened cloth.
6. Reinstall the suction cup assembly in reverse order of removal.
7. For the rubber rollers and suction cup assemblies for the second,
third, and fourth shelves, repeat steps 1 through 6 to clean them.
l CHECK 1
- To attach the hose, push it all the way.
- Make sure that the route of the hose is stress-free and normal.
{PM:8.1}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-18
PM-19
7.3 Replacing the IP Suction Pumps l CHECK 1
Make sure that the hose is attached in a proper position as illustrated below.
{PM:8.4.2}
1. Replacing the PA1.
l CHECK 2
To attach the hose, push it all the way.
2. Reinstall the PA1 in reverse order of removal.
3. For the IP suction pumps for the second, third, and fourth shelves,
repeat steps 1 and 2 to replace them.
u NOTE u
After the restoration, perform "22. Reset the number that pumps are used".
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-19
PM-20
8. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit 2. Remove the motor (MB1).
8.1 Cleaning the Shock Absorbing Rollers,
Guides, and Rubber Rollers
u INSTRUCTION u
During the procedures, put down the feed/load conveyor unit in such an orientation as
illustrated below. Otherwise, the feed/load conveyor unit might topple down, so that it
might be damaged.
3. Remove the shock absorbing roller assembly for the first shelf.
1. Remove the spur gears.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-20
PM-21
4. Clean the shock absorbing roller assembly by use of a vacuum 7. Reinstall the shock-absorbing roller assembly in reverse order of
cleaner. removal.
8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 to clean the shock-absorbing roller, rubber
roller, and guide located on the second, third, and fourth shelves.
9. Reinstall the motor (MB1).
5. Clean the shock absorbing rollers and guides by use of a vacuum
cleaner.
6. Wipe the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-21
PM-22
10. Attach the spur gears and brackets.
l CHECK1
Make sure that the spur gears are attached in such an orientation as illustrated
below.
{PM:8.2}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-22
PM-23
8.2 Cleaning the Guides and Rubber Rollers 2. Clean the guides and shock absorbing rollers by use of a vacuum
cleaner.
{PM:8.3}
u NOTES u
- Use care not to exert undue force onto the guide. If undue force is applied to it, the
guide may be deformed.
- Do not place the guide with its IP contacting face down. The contacting face may be
scratched or soiled.
1. Remove the guide for the first shelf, and clean it by use of a vacuum
cleaner. 3. Wipe the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.
4. Reinstall the guides in reverse order of removal.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 to clean the shock-absorbing roller, rubber
roller, and guide located on the second, third, and fourth shelves.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-23
PM-24
8.3 Cleaning the Guides and Rubber Rollers 2. Remove another bracket.
u NOTES u
- Use care not to exert undue force onto the guide. If undue force is applied to it, the
guide may be deformed.
- Do not place the guide with its IP contacting face down. The contacting face may be
scratched or soiled.
1. Remove the bracket.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-24
PM-25
3. Remove the cam and half-clutch spur gear. CHECK 1
l
u NOTE u When attaching the half-clutch spur gear retaining bracket, align the positions of
the half-clutch spur gear, bracket holes, and the bracket shafts.
The inner member of the half-clutch spur gear may pop out. If the inner member
pops out, push it back where it was. If the inner member is removed, it may
cause trouble or failure.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-25
PM-26
4. Remove the guides and clean them by use of a vacuum cleaner. 5. Remove the spacer.
l Without spacer
CHECK 1
l
Make sure that the spacer is attached properly.
l With spacer
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-26
PM-27
6. Remove the guides and clean them by use of a vacuum cleaner. 7. Clean the guide by use of a vacuum cleaner.
8. Clean the guides by use of a vacuum cleaner.
l CHECK 1
When attaching the guide, do so in such an orientation as illustrated below.
Unless this guide is attached properly, other guides could not be attached.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-27
PM-28
9. Wipe the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.
10. Reinstall the guides in reverse order of removal.
{PM:8.4.2}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-28
PM-29
8.4 Brush Roller 2. Clean the brush rollers and brackets by use of a vacuum cleaner.
8.4.1 Cleaning the Brush Roller
{PM:9.3.1} {PM:9.1}
1. Remove the brush roller assembly.
3. Reinstall the brush roller assembly in reverse order of removal.
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the brush roller assembly and brush rollers are attached in their
correct orientations.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-29
PM-30
8.4.2 Cleaning/Replacing the Brush Roller 2. Clean the brush rollers and brackets by use of a vacuum cleaner.
{PM:8.6}
1. Remove the brush roller assembly.
3. Reinstall the brush roller assembly in reverse order of removal.
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the brush roller assembly and brush rollers are attached in their
correct orientations.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-30
PM-31
8.5 Cleaning the Antistatic Members 8.6 Reinstalling the Feed/Load Conveyor Unit
{PM:8.6}
1. Clean the antistatic members by use of a vacuum cleaner. u NOTE u
Because the feed/load conveyor unit is heavy, pay attention to the following points
when moving and installing it.
- Before proceeding with the procedures,secure sufficient working space around the
machine.
- Get hold of the portions indicated by the "Hold Here" labels.
- While assuming a comfortable posture,lift or hold up the unit.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-31
PM-32
1. Mount the feed/load conveyor unit onto the housing. 2. Secure the feed/load conveyor unit in place.
u NOTE u
Use care so that the side plate bottom portions of the feed/load conveyor unit do
not ride onto the brackets of the housing.
3. Check to ensure that the screws once removed are snugly retained.
{PM:9.1}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-32
PM-33
9. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit 3. Remove the screws.
9.1 Removing the Side-Positioning Conveyor
Unit
1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 and 3 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
4. Carry out the operations in the steps 5 to 7 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
2. Disconnect the connector.
5. Disconnect the connector.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-33
PM-34
6. Disconnect the connectors. 8. Carry out the operations in the step 9 from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure below.
9. Disconnect the connector.
7. Remove the screws.
10. Carry out the operations in the steps 11 and 12 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-34
PM-35
11. Slightly lift the side-positioning conveyor unit and flip it down forward. 9.2 Cleaning the Guide
u NOTE u {PM:9.3.2}
Exercise care not to bring the upper portion of the side-positioning conveyor unit
into contact with the ceiling of the housing (shadowed portion in the figure) when 1. Lay down the side-positioning conveyor unit in such an orientation as
slightly lifting the side-positioning conveyor unit and flipping it down forward. illustrated below.
The guide of the side-positioning conveyor unit might possibly deform or get
damaged.
2. Remove the guide.
12. Pull out and remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
3. Clean the guide by use of a vacuum cleaner.
{PM:9.2} {PM:9.3.3}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-35
PM-36
9.3 Cleaning Guide Assembly 9.3.2 Cleaning the Cleaning Guide Assembly
9.3.1 Cleaning the Cleaning Guide Assembly
{PM:13.1} u INSTRUCTION u
If the processed IP count is about 18,000, do not perform the procedures described
1. Remove the guide. below; instead, proceed to "9.3.3 Replacing the Cleaning Guide."
{PM:9.3.3_Replacing the Cleaning Guide}
1. Remove the cleaning guide assembly.
2. Clean the guide and cleaning guide by use of a vacuum cleaner.
3. Reinstall the guide in reverse order of removal.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-36
PM-37
2. Clean the cleaning guide by use of a vacuum cleaner. 4. Wipe the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.
3. Clean the guides by use of a vacuum cleaner.
{PM:9.4}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-37
PM-38
9.3.3 Replacing the Cleaning Guide 2. Replace the cleaning guide.
1. Remove the cleaning guide assembly.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-38
PM-39
l CHECK 1 3. Lay down the side-positioning conveyor unit in such an orientation as
Make sure that the tension coil springs are attached properly. illustrated below.
4. Replace the guide.
5. Reinstall the guide in reverse order of removal.
{PM:9.5}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-39
PM-40
9.4 Cleaning the Shock-Absorbing Roller, 3. Clean the guide and antistatic member by use of a vacuum cleaner.
Guide, and Rubber Roller
{PM:9.5}
1. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assemblies.
4. Wipe the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.
2. Clean the shock absorbing rollers and antistatic member by use of a
vacuum cleaner.
5. Reinstall the shock-absorbing roller assemblies in reverse order of
removal.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-40
PM-41
9.5 Reinstalling the Cleaning Guide Assembly 2. Secure the cleaning guide assembly and guide in place.
and Guide
{PM:10.1} {PM:11.10}
1. Mount the cleaning guide assembly onto the side-positioning
conveyor unit.
3. Connect the connector.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-41
PM-42
10. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit
10.1 Removing the Retaining Member
{PM:10.2}
1. Carry out the operations in the step 2 from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure below.
2. Remove the retaining member.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-42
PM-43
10.2 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Unit 1. Disconnect the connectors.
u NOTE u
Hold the part shown below and keep the connector vertical to the board when
CAUTION removing the connector (CN2).
If holding other places, the cable may be damaged.
Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you
are wearing gloves.
u INSTRUCTION u
Wear gloves when servicing the light-collecting guide.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-43
PM-44
2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the lower light-collecting guide.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-44
PM-45
4. Carry out the operations in the steps 5 and 6 from the direction 7. Carry out the operations in the steps 8 and 9 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below. indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
5. Disconnect the connector. 8. Disconnect the connector.
6. Remove the screws. 9. Remove the screws.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-45
PM-46
10. Carry out the operations in the steps 11 and 12 from the direction 12. Slightly pull out the post-reading conveyer unit for removal.
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
u NOTE u
Pull out the post-reading conveyer unit carefully not to allow the retaining pin at
the tip of the unit to come off from the rail in the subscanning unit. Otherwise, the
sensor around the tip might get damaged.
11. Slightly lift the post-reading conveyor unit and flip it down forward.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to bring the upper portion of the post-reading conveyor unit
into contact with the ceiling of the housing (shadowed portion in the figure) when
slightly lifting the post-reading conveyor unit and flipping it down forward. The
guide of the post-reading conveyor unit might possibly deform or get damaged.
{PM:10.3}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-46
PM-47
10.3 Cleaning the Guides, Shock Absorbing 3. Wipe the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.
Rollers, and Rubber Rollers
1. Remove the guides.
4. Reinstall the guides in reverse order of removal.
2. Clean the guides and shock absorbing rollers by use of a vacuum
cleaner.
{PM:10.4}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-47
PM-48
10.4 Cleaning the Movable Guide Assembly 2. Clean the movable guide assembly by use of a vacuum cleaner.
1. Remove the movable guide assembly.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-48
PM-49
3. Reinstall the movable guide assembly.
{PM:11.1}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-49
PM-50
11. Subscanning Unit 1. Disconnect the connectors.
u NOTE u
Hold the part shown below and keep the connector vertical to the board when
11.1 Removing the Upper Light-Collecting Guide removing the connector (CN2).
If holding other places, the cable may be damaged.
CAUTION
Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you
are wearing gloves.
u INSTRUCTION u
When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-50
PM-51
2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the upper light-collecting guide.
{PM:11.2}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-51
PM-52
11.2 Cleaning the Antistatic Brush Assembly 2. Remove the transparent cover.
1. Clean the antistatic brush assembly.
3. Remove the shock-absorbing rubber assemblies.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-52
PM-53
4. Remove the SUS belt.
5. Remove the driven-shaft grip roller (upper).
{PM:11.3}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-53
PM-54
11.3 Removing the Driving-Shaft Grip Roller 11.4 Removing the Kapton® Belt
{PM:11.4} {PM:11.5}
1. Remove the driving-shaft grip roller (upper). 1. Remove the Kapton® belt.
u NOTE u
After removing the tension coil spring, support the tensioner by hand. Otherwise,
the tensioner might incline by its own weight, thereby damaging the Kapton® belt.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-54
PM-55
11.5 Cleaning the Glass Guide 2. Remove the antistatic member.
1. Remove the scanning optics unit.
WARNING
The scanning optics unit should not be removed or installed by other than a
service engineer who has been trained to do so.
CAUTION
When servicing the scanning optics unit, be sure to wear an anti-static
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
u INSTRUCTION u
Do not remove the top cover of the scanning optics unit.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-55
PM-56
3. Remove the sensor (SZ1). 4. Remove the light-collecting mirror.
CAUTION
Wear gloves when handling the light-collecting mirror.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-56
PM-57
5. Loosen the special screws. 6. Shift the operation direction from the back of the machine to the front
of the machine.
u INSTRUCTION u
The glass guide retaining bracket is secured by special screws. To attach or 7. Move the bracket.
remove them, use the special tool designed for them.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-57
PM-58
8. Remove the glass guide. 10. Reinstall the glass guide.
CAUTIONS CAUTIONS
- Wear gloves when handling the glass guide. - Wear gloves when handling the glass guide.
- Carefully handle the glass guide so that it is not damaged by hitting it against - Carefully handle the glass guide so that it is not damaged by hitting it against
surrounding objects. surrounding objects.
9. Clean the glass guide by use of ethanol.
CAUTION
Wear gloves when cleaning the glass guide.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-58
PM-59
11. Secure the bracket. 12. Shift the operation direction from the back of the machine to the front
of the machine.
u INSTRUCTION u
The glass guide retaining bracket is secured by special screws. To attach or 13. Secure the special screw.
remove them, use the special tool designed for them.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-59
PM-60
14. Install the light-collecting mirror and clean it by use of ethanol. 15. Install the sensor (SZ1).
CAUTION
Wear gloves when handling the light-collecting mirror.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-60
PM-61
16. Reinstall the antistatic member. 17. Mount the scanning optics unit on the subscanning unit.
WARNING
The scanning optics unit should not be removed or installed by other than a
service engineer who has been trained to do so.
CAUTION
When servicing the scanning optics unit, be sure to wear an anti-static
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
u INSTRUCTION u
Do not remove the top cover of the scanning optics unit.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-61
PM-62
18. While pressing the scanning optics unit in the direction indicated by 19. Connect the connectors.
the arrow in the figure, retain the subscanning unit.
20. Check to ensure that the screws once removed are snugly retained.
REFERENCE
By pressing the two positioning brackets and the knob of the scanning optics
unit against the frame of the subscanning unit, the scanning optics unit can be
installed in place.
{PM:11.6}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-62
PM-63
11.6 Cleaning the Driving Shaft Grip Rollers 3. Attach the driving shaft grip roller.
{PM:11.7}
1. Clean the center guide by use of a vacuum cleaner.
2. Clean the driving shaft grip rollers (upper and lower) with a moistened l CHECK 1
cloth.
When attaching the hook, securely fit it into the slit of the side plate.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-63
PM-64
11.7 Cleaning the Driven Shaft Grip Rollers 3. Attach the driven shaft grip roller.
{PM:11.8}
1. Clean the center guide by use of a vacuum cleaner.
l CHECK 1
When attaching the hook, securely fit it into the slit of the side plate.
2. Clean the driven shaft grip rollers (upper and lower) with a moistened
cloth.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-64
PM-65
11.8 Cleaning the Flywheel and Kapton® Belt 3. Reinstall the Kapton® belt.
{PM:11.9}
1. Clean the flywheel by use of ethanol.
u INSTRUCTION u
Use care not to damage the surface in contact with the Kapton® belt.
l CHECK 1
- The Kapton® belt should be mounted with its date indicating side up, so that
2. Wipe the Kapton® belt with a moistened cloth. the arrow mark faces the side plate.
- After mounting the Kapton® belt, manually rotate the flywheel to verify that the
u INSTRUCTION u Kapton® belt does not come off.
When cleaning the Kapton® belt, ethanol should not be used. If ethanol is used,
the date and other markings on the Kapton® belt will be wiped out.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-65
PM-66
11.9 Cleaning the SUS Belt 2. Reinstall the SUS belt.
u INSTRUCTION u
After installing the SUS belt, rotate the driving shaft by hand to verify that the
1. Clean the SUS belt by use of ethanol. SUS belt does not come off.
REFERENCE
The SUS belt and the tension coil spring are attached in the positional relation
shown below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-66
PM-67
3. Reinstall the shock-absorbing rubber assemblies.
4. Reinstall the transparent cover.
{PM:11.10}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-67
PM-68
11.10 Reinstalling the Side-Positioning Conveyor 3. Mount the side-positioning conveyor unit onto the housing.
Unit u NOTE u
Exercise care not to bring the upper portion of the side-positioning conveyor unit
into contact with the ceiling of the housing (shadowed portion in the figure) when
mounting the side-positioning conveyor unit onto the housing. The guide of the
1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 5 from the direction side-positioning conveyor unit might possibly deform or get damaged.
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
2. Reinstall the antistatic brush assembly.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-68
PM-69
4. Push in the lower portion of the side-positioning conveyor unit 5. Push in the upper portion of the side-positioning conveyor unit
horizontally. horizontally.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Push the side-positioning conveyor unit horizontally without lifting it. Otherwise, Push the side-positioning conveyor unit horizontally without lifting it. Otherwise,
the upper portion of the side-positioning conveyor unit might come into contact the upper portion of the side-positioning conveyor unit might come into contact
with the ceiling of the housing, resulting in deformation or damage of the guide of with the ceiling of the housing, resulting in deformation or damage of the guide of
the side-positioning conveyor unit. the side-positioning conveyor unit.
REFERENCE REFERENCE
When the lower portion of the side-positioning conveyor unit is pushed in, the pin When the upper portion of the side-positioning conveyor unit is pushed in, the pin
(lower) for retaining with the subscanning unit is inserted into its retained position. (upper) for retaining with the subscanning unit gets caught with the guide inside
the subscanning unit, to have the side-positioning conveyor unit retained.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-69
PM-70
6. Carry out the operations in the step 7 from the direction indicated by 9. Connect the connector.
the arrow in the figure below.
10. Attach the screw.
7. Connect the connector.
8. Carry out the operations in the steps 9 to 11 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
11. Connect the connector.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-70
PM-71
12. Carry out the operations in the steps 13 and 14 from the direction 15. Check to ensure that the grounding cable and the screws once
indicated by the arrow in the figure below. removed are snugly fastened.
13. Attach the screws.
14. Connect the connector.
{PM:12.1} {PM:13.1}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-71
PM-72
12. Light-Collecting Guide 2. Reinstall the upper light-collecting guide.
12.1 Cleaning the Upper Light-Collecting Guide
CAUTIONS
- Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you
are wearing gloves.
- Do not wipe the light-collecting guide with a dry cloth. If so, the light-
collecting guide may be scratched or otherwise damaged.
- If the lens cleaning paper becomes soiled, replace it with a new one.
- Wipe the light-collecting surface of the light-collecting guide until the lens
cleaning paper becomes no longer soiled.
- Wipe the light-collecting guide assembly in one direction at a constant speed.
- Do not wipe the photomultiplier attachment face.
u INSTRUCTION u
Wear gloves when servicing the light-collecting unit.
1. Clean the light-collecting face of the upper light-collecting guide by
use of ethanol.
REFERENCE
To clean the light-collecting guide, two sheets of lens cleaning paper should be
folded in four and then moistened with ethanol.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-72
PM-73
3. Secure the upper light-collecting guide in place. 4. Connect the connectors.
u NOTE u
The CN2 should be connected at right angles to the board. If not, the connector
of the board might be damaged.
5. Check to ensure that the screws once removed are snugly retained.
{PM:12.2}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-73
PM-74
12.2 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyor 3. Raise up the upper portion of the post-reading conveyor unit, and
push it into the subscanning unit.
Unit u NOTES u
- Exercise care not to bring the upper portion of the post-reading conveyor unit
into contact with the ceiling of the housing (shadowed portion in the figure)
1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 and 3 from the direction when raising up the pos-treading conveyor unit. The guide of the post-reading
indicated by the arrow in the figure below. conveyor unit might possibly deform or get damaged.
- Push in the post-reading conveyor unit without lifting it. Otherwise, the upper
portion of the post-reading conveyor unit might come into contact with the
ceiling of the housing, resulting in the deformation or damage of the guide of
the post-reading conveyor unit.
2. Mount the pin for retaining the post-reading conveyor unit on the rail
inside the subscanning unit, and then push it horizontally.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to allow the retaining pin for the post-reading conveyor unit to
come off from the rail in the subscanning unit when pushing in the post-reading
conveyor unit. REFERENCE
When the upper portion of the post-reading conveyor unit is pushed in, the pin
for retaining with the subscanning unit gets caught with the guide inside the
subscanning unit, to have the post-reading conveyor unit retained.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-74
PM-75
4. Carry out the operations in the steps 5 and 6 from the direction 7. Carry out the operations in the steps 8 and 9 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below. indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
5. Secure the screws. 8. Secure the screws.
6. Connect the connector. 9. Connect the connector.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-75
PM-76
10. Clean the light-collecting face of the lower light-collecting guide by 11. Reinstall the lower light-collecting guide.
use of ethanol.
CAUTIONS
- Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you
are wearing gloves.
- Do not wipe the light-collecting guide with a dry cloth. If so, the light-
collecting guide may be scratched or otherwise damaged.
- If the lens cleaning paper becomes soiled, replace it with a new one.
- Wipe the light-collecting surface of the light-collecting guide until the lens
cleaning paper becomes no longer soiled.
- Wipe the light-collecting guide assembly in one direction at a constant speed.
- Do not wipe the photomultiplier attachment face.
u INSTRUCTION u
Wear gloves when servicing the light-collecting unit.
REFERENCE
To clean the light-collecting guide, two sheets of lens cleaning paper should be
folded in four and then moistened with ethanol.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-76
PM-77
12. Secure the lower light-collecting guide in place. 13. Connect the connectors.
u NOTE u
The CN2 should be connected at right angles to the board. If not, the connector
of the board might be damaged.
14. Reinstall the retaining member.
15. Check to ensure that the screws once removed are snugly retained.
{PM:13.1}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-77
PM-78
13. Erasure Conveyor Unit u INSTRUCTION u
When handling the lamp case, hold the lamp case at the parts shown below.
13.1 Removing the Lamp Case
CAUTION
Do not touch the surface of lamp case (filter side) right after operation stopped.
The high temperature may cause you burned.
1. Remove the Lamp Case.
u NOTES u
- When handling the Lamp Case, wear gloves so that the filter located on the
bottom face of the Lamp Case is not soiled.
- Do not grasp the filter face when holding the Lamp Case. Otherwise, the
shock absorbing member might be peeled off.
- Place the Lamp Case with the filter face up. If the Lamp Case is placed with
the filter face down, the filter may be damaged.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-78
PM-79
13.2 Removing the Erasure Conveyor Unit 2. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{PM:13.3} u NOTE u
When puling out and transporting the erasure conveyor unit, take hold of the
1. Open the guide. designated portions to perform the procedures. If you grasp the rollers, guides, or
other portions, they may be deformed.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-79
PM-80
13.3 Cleaning the IP Switchback Assembly 3. Clean the guides and shock absorbing rollers by use of a vacuum
cleaner.
{PM:13.4}
u NOTE u
1. Close the guide. When disassembling the IP switchback assembly, do not apply excessive force
onto the guides. Otherwise, they might be deformed.
2. Remove the IP switchback assembly.
4. Reinstall the IP switchback assembly in reverse order of removal.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-80
PM-81
13.4 Cleaning the Reflection Plate Guide and 2. Clean the reflection face and guides with a moistened cloth.
Rubber Rollers
{PM:13.5}
1. Remove the reflection plate guide.
3. Clean the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.
l CHECK 1
When attaching the reflection plate guide, make sure that there is no gap 4. Reinstall the reflection guide and guides in reverse order of removal.
between the reflection plate guide and the guides.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-81
PM-82
13.5 Cleaning the Shock-Absorbing Roller and 3. Remove the guide.
Guide
1. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly and guide.
2. Clean the shock absorbing rollers and guide by use of a vacuum
cleaner.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-82
PM-83
4. Clean the guides by use of a vacuum cleaner.
5. Reinstall the shock absorbing roller assembly and guides in reverse
order of removal.
{PM:13.6}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-83
PM-84
13.6 Removing the Latch Drive Unit 3. Remove the E-ring, and remove the timing belt and the timing belt
wheels.
1. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 7 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
2. Remove the bracket. 4. Remove the spacers and bearings.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-84
PM-85
5. Remove the bracket. 7. Remove the grip arm (reference side).
8. Carry out the operations in the steps 9 to 11 from the direction
6. Remove the spur gears. indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
9. Remove the screw.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-85
PM-86
10. Remove the tension coil spring. 12. Carry out the operations in the steps 13 to 17 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
13. Remove the E-ring, and remove the timing belt and the timing belt
wheels.
11. Remove the timing belt.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-86
PM-87
14. Remove the spacers and bearings. 16. Remove the bracket.
15. Remove the spur gears. 17. Remove the grip arm (opposite reference side).
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-87
PM-88
18. Carry out the operations in the steps 19 to 21 from the direction 21. Rotate the spur gear of the latch drive unit to the position indicated by
indicated by the arrow in the figure below. the arrow.
19. Remove the brackets.
u NOTE u
When the spur gear is rotated, the latch assembly moves inward. Unless the
spur gear has moved to a specified position, the latch of the latch assembly might
get damaged when the latch drive unit is removed.
20. Release the clamp, and disconnect the connector and the screw.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-88
PM-89
22. Carry out the operations in the steps 23 and 24 from the direction 25. Carry out the operations in the step 26 from the direction indicated by
indicated by the arrow in the figure below. the arrow in the figure below.
26. Remove the latch drive unit.
23. Remove the screws.
24. Remove the screws.
{PM:13.7}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-89
PM-90
13.7 Cleaning the Rubber Roller and Guide 2. Remove the latch assembly (reference side).
1. Remove the motors.
3. Carry out the operations in the steps 4 and 5 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
4. Remove the screw.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-90
PM-91
5. Remove the screws. 7. Raise the rear of the guide.
6. Carry out the operations in the steps 7 and 8 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
8. Remove the guide while keeping clear of the half punches inside the
side plate.
u NOTE u
Remove the guide carefully not to allow the guide to tilt laterally. If the guide is
tilted, it might get caught with the side plate and cannot be removed.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-91
PM-92
9. Carry out the operations in the steps 10 and 11 from the direction 12. Carry out the operations in the steps 13 to 16 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below. indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
13. Raise the rear of the guide and move it backward.
u NOTE u
10. Remove the screws. Move the guide backward carefully not to allow the guide to tilt laterally. If the
guide is tilted, it might get caught with the side plate and cannot be removed.
11. Remove the screws.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-92
PM-93
14. Remove the guide while keeping clear of the half punches inside the 15. Clean the guides by use of a vacuum cleaner.
side plate.
u NOTE u
Remove the guide carefully not to allow the guide to tilt laterally. If the guide is
tilted, it might get caught with the side plate and cannot be removed.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-93
PM-94
16. Clean the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.
{PM:13.8}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-94
PM-95
13.8 Reinstalling the Guides 2. Insert the tip of the guide between the rods of the rubber rollers and
lower the rear of the guide.
u NOTE u
1. Insert the guide while keeping clear of the half punches, and lead the Move the guide carefully not to allow the guide to tilt laterally. If the guide is tilted,
tip of the guide onto the half punch in the side plate. it might get caught with the side plate and cannot be installed.
u NOTE u
Insert the guide carefully not to allow the guide to tilt laterally. If the guide is tilted,
it might get caught with the side plate and cannot be installed.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-95
PM-96
3. Carry out the operations in the steps 4 and 5 from the direction 6. Carry out the operations in the steps 7 and 8 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below. indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
7. Insert the guide while keeping clear of the half punches in the side
plate.
4. Attach the screws.
u NOTE u
Insert the guide carefully not to allow the guide to tilt laterally. If the guide is tilted,
it might get caught with the side plate and cannot be installed.
5. Attach the screws.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-96
PM-97
8. Insert the tip of the guide between the rods of the rubber rollers, and 9. Carry out the operations in the step 10 from the direction indicated by
lead the tip of the guide onto the half punch in the side plate. the arrow in the figure below.
10. Check to ensure that the tip of the guide is mounted on the half punch.
u NOTE u
If the tip of the guide is not mounted on the half punch in the side plate, it might
cause the IP to get jammed.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-97
PM-98
11. Carry out the operations in the steps 12 and 13 from the direction 14. Reinstall the motors.
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
12. Attach the screw.
13. Attach the screws.
{PM:13.9}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-98
PM-99
13.9 Reinstalling the Latch Drive Unit 2. Rotate the spur gear of the latch drive unit to the position indicated by
the arrow.
1. Reinstall the latch assembly (reference side).
u NOTE u
When the spur gear is rotated, the latch assembly moves inward. Unless the
spur gear has moved to a specified position, the latch of the latch assembly might
get damaged when the latch drive unit is removed.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-99
PM-100
3. Carry out the operations in the steps 4 to 6 from the direction 5. Rotate the spur gear of the latch drive unit fully counterclockwise.
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
4. Reinstall the latch drive unit.
6. Push in the latch drive unit to its retained position.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-100
PM-101
7. Carry out the operations in the steps 8 and 9 from the direction 10. Carry out the operations in the steps 11 and 12 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below. indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
11. Connect the connector and the screw, and secure the clamp.
8. Attach the screws.
12. Reinstall the bracket.
9. Attach the screws.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-101
PM-102
13. Carry out the operations in the steps 14 to 22 from the direction 16. Reinstall the E-ring, spacer, and KL clip.
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
14. Verify the attachment locations of the cam and the spur gear.
17. Reinstall the bracket.
15. Reinstall the grip arm (opposite reference side).
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-102
PM-103
18. Attach the spur gear. 20. Check to ensure that the latch of the spur gear gets caught in the
groove of the rod and does not come off.
u NOTE u
Attach the spur gear in the orientation where the engraving “B” is visible.
21. Reinstall the spacers and bearings.
19. Attach the bearing and the spur gear.
u NOTE u
Pay attention to the orientation of attaching the bearing.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-103
PM-104
22. Use the E-ring to reinstall the timing belt and the timing belt wheels. 23. Carry out the operations in the steps 24 to 26 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
24. Reinstall the timing belt.
REFERENCE
The timing belt (B) is mounted in the passage indicated in the figure below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-104
PM-105
25. Reinstall the tension coil spring. 27. Carry out the operations in the steps 28 to 36 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
28. Verify the attachment locations of the cam and the spur gear.
26. Attach the screw.
u NOTE u
Tension of the timing belt is defined by the tension coil spring. When attaching
the retaining screw of the tensioner, do not apply excessive force to the tensioner
by holding it or by other means.
29. Reinstall the grip arm (reference side).
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-105
PM-106
30. Attach the spur gear. 32. Reinstall the spacers and bearings.
REFERENCE
All of four spacers to be installed are of the same size.
31. Reinstall the bracket.
u NOTE u
Before attaching the brackets, make sure that the actuator and sensor are in
such a position that they do not interfere with each other
33. Put the erasure conveyor unit in such an orientation as illustrated
below.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-106
PM-107
34. Use the E-ring to reinstall the timing belt and the timing belt wheels. 35. Verify the attachment of the housing and the bearing from the bottom
of the erasure conveyor unit.
u NOTE u
Check to ensure that the portions indicated by the dotted lines in the figure below
have not come off from the side plate of the erasure conveyor unit.
36. Reinstall the bracket.
{PM:13.10}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-107
PM-108
13.10 Cleaning the Antistatic Members 13.11 Reinstalling the Erasure Conveyor Unit
{PM:13.11}
1. Clean the antistatic members by use of a vacuum cleaner. 1. Open the guide.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-108
PM-109
2. Reinstall the erasure conveyor unit. 3. Close the guide.
u NOTE u
When installing the erasure conveyor unit, take hold of the designated portions to
perform the procedures. If you grasp the rollers, guides, or other portions, they
may be deformed.
4. Check to ensure that the screws once removed are snugly retained.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-109
PM-110
13.12 Cleaning the Filter
1. Clean the filter with anhydrous ethanol.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-110
PM-111
13.13 Reinstalling the Lamp Case
1. Reinstall the Lamp Case.
u INSTRUCTION u
When handling the lamp case, take hold of the portions to perform the
procedures.
2. Check that all screws once removed are firmly fastened.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-111
PM-112
14. Cleaning Inside the Machine 15. Turning ON the High-Voltage
{PM:15.} Switch
1. Using a vacuum cleaner, remove dust deposited inside the machine. {PM:16.}
1. Turn ON the high-voltage switch.
SW5
HV ON
HV OFF
CPU39A board
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-112
PM-113
16. Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers
and Louvers
{PM:17.}
CAUTION
Before reinstalling the covers, make sure that the high-voltage switch is in the
ON position.
1. Clean the covers and louvers.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- The louvers should be cleaned at intervals of one year.
- Clean all of the eight louvers attached on the machine.
2. Reinstall the covers by reversing their removal procedures.
{PM:5.2} {PM:5.3} {PM:5.4}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-113
PM-114
17. Securing the Machine 2. Measure the resistance value of the power cable.
(Reference value)
Terminal L-N L-E N-E
17.1 Connecting the Cables Resistance value 100k Ω - ∞ ∞
CAUTIONS
- Before measuring the resistance value, make sure that the power plug is
unplugged from the outlet.
- If the machine is to be installed in the patient environment, see "APPENDIX 1.
ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING."
{IN: Appendix 1_Additional Protective Grounding}
1. Connect the power cable to the machine, and place the breaker switch 3. Place the breaker switch in the OFF position.
in the ON position.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-114
PM-115
4. Connect the I/F cable to the I/F cable connector of the machine. 5. Plug the power cable into the outlet.
CAUTION
Do not tie or bundle the power cable in such a manner that it is overloaded.
{PM:17.2}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-115
PM-116
17.2 Securing the Machine
{PM:17.3}
1. Secure the machine by reversing the procedures for unlocking the
retainers.
{PM:4.1_Unlocking the Retainers}
17.3 Checking for Improper Protective
Grounding
{PM:18.}
1. Check that the power cable and additional protective ground wire
connections are established in the same manner as for installation.
2. Check that the parts and cables removed for servicing purposes are
connected in the same manner as for installation.
3. Check to ensure that the screws once removed are snugly retained.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-116
PM-117
18. Checking the Image/Conveyance 19. Checking the Laser Performance/
{PM:19.} Sensitivity
1. Check the image/conveyance.
{PM:3_Checking the Image/Conveyance}
19.1 Laser Performance
n Objective
To establish that the IP reader and printer do not exhibit scan or print jitter.
n Frequency
Semi-annually at routine PM or whenever the laser optics are serviced.
n Required Test Equipment
One pair of 6 inch steel rulers
The largest CR mammography cassette and imaging plate, which size are used
clinically at this facility.
n Procedure
1 . Using the CR mammography cassette selected above, erase the
enclosed IP using the “Secondary Erase” mode.
2. Position the cassette for non-grid exposure, centered so the x-ray
beam covers the entire cassette front.
3. Place the steel rulers on the cassette surface so the letter “T” is
formed. Place the top of the “T” approximately 1inch into the x-ray
field centered along the chest wall side of the cassette.
Expose and process the cassette under the same exposure conditions and image
processing menu used in the Sensitivity Conformation test.
n Precautions and Caveats
Adjust exposure so that the contrast of the rulers versus background density creates
a bright white “T” against the background density. Edges of the formed "T" must be
smooth, free from burrs or defects.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-117
PM-118
n Performance and Corrective Action 19.2 Sensitivity Confirmation (Mammography)
Upon inspection, the edges of the “T” should be smooth and sharp. After reviewing
the “T”, look at the white frame surrounding the image area of the film. Linear jagged n Objective
edges visible to the naked eye indicate scan or print errors of the IP reader or printer.
The workstation or positioning monitor can be of help in evaluating errors of the IP To assure that the amount of exposure reaching the imaging plate, assign a proper “S
reader. If images are well displayed on those devices, the film printer may be suspect. value”.
n Frequency
If the printer is found to generate excess jitter, images can be saved within the
workstation or network until the printer laser optics and transport are serviced. If the This test should be carried out semi-annually as part of routine service PM, or
IP Reader is judged as a suspect, no images should be produced until the unit is whenever CR reader PMT calibration is suspect.
inspected and corrected by a qualified service engineer. u NOTE u
This is a test of the CR Reader and needs to be conducted using only one exposure
unit per Reader.
n Required Test Equipment
Calibrated mammography mR meter
Watch/timer
The largest CR Mammography cassette and IP used clinically at the facility.
n Procedure
Using the CR Mammography cassette selected for this test, erase the enclosed IP
using the “Secondary Erase” mode.
1. Remove the paddle from the field and place the exposure meter on the
bucky surface as described in illustrations 1 and 2.
2. Select 25kVp and Mo target and filter (Mo 0.03mm) combination.
Adjust the mAs to have the dosimeter reading closest to, but not less
than 20 mR. Record the technique.
u NOTE u
If the mammography x-ray unit will not allow 20 mR exposure, you may use the
lowest mR exposure available which is greater than 20. Always use 25 kVp for
this test.
Do not use any additional filter except designated MO 0.03 filter. The use of
another filter may cause an error.
3. Once you have established the proper technique for your exposure
unit, make a series of at least three exposures prior to removing
the meter or placing the cassette in the field. Record the exposure
technique and measured mR for each exposure.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-118
PM-119
4. Verify that the mR readings are within 10% of each other. If they are n Measure the dose using a mammographic mR meter at the point shown below.
not, repeat the test on a more reproducible x-ray unit.
5. Average the mR readings from the three test exposures.
6. Remove the mR meter from the beam and place the erased CR
mammography cassette on the bucky surface centered in the x-ray
field. See a diagram on the next page for placement.
7. Expose the cassette at the predetermined settings. Wait 10 minutes
and process the IP under the menu Physics, Sensitivity. Repeat this
step two more times to create a total of three images.
8. Divide the averaged exposure results by 20(mR) where 20(mR) is a
fixed standard value. Multiply by the averaged S value to obtain the
corrected S value.
Example: 25 kVp
Averaged exposure = 30.0mR
Averaged S value = 83
Corrected S value = 30.0mR/20mR X 83=124.5
9. Record the “corrected S value” on the chart.
n Precautions and Caveats
The measurement of 20 mR requires a highly sensitive and accurate mR meter.
Contact your Fuji service engineer and confirm that he will be equipped with a
calibrated device for a use in this test. If other measuring devices are used, some
error in measurement may occur. See “Performance and Corrective Action”.
Determine the reproducibility of the exposure unit from the 3 test exposures. If
the variation of exposure measured in mR is greater than 10% do not proceed.
Investigate and correct the exposure equipment.
n Performanace and Corrective Action
“Corrected S value” shall be 120 plus/minus 50%.
S value testing and calibration are part of the semi-annual routine PM for CR readers.
If S value measurements are found “out of range”, service must be inspected and
corrective action must be taken within 30 days of this test.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-119
PM-120
LASER PERFORMANCE TEST SENSITIVITY CONFORMATION
Comments:
Comments:
{PM:22.}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-120
PM-121
20. Checking the Error Log
{PM:21.}
1. Check the error log.
{PM:2.1_Checking the Error Log}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-121
PM-122
21. Resetting the Erasure Lamp 22. Reset the number that pumps are
Lighting Time used
When the erasure lamps are replaced, be sure to reset the erasure lamp lighting time.
1. Open the EDIT HISTORY window.
1. Open the MAINTENANCE UTILITY window.
2. Open the EDIT HISTORY window. 2. Select the "Minor Change History" tab to reset the number that the
pumps are used.
3. Reset the erasure lamp lighting time.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-122
PM-123
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-123
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
12.06.2019 01 New release All pages
02.28.2020 02 Revision All pages
CR-IR 363 Service Manual
Installation (IN)
011-211-02E CR-IR 363 Service Manual
02.28.2020
IN-1
1. Specifications of Machine n Installation Space
l For fixing by adjustable feet
n Product Code
CR-IR 363
Dimensions
n
W655 × D740 × H1480 (mm)
l For fixing by machine retainers
n Weight
270 kg approx.
n Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine
Moving : Double-wheel caster (variable-direction/no-brake) x4
Fixing : - Adjustable foot x4
- Machine retainer x2
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-1
IN-2
2. Installation Work Flowchart
n Workflow for First-Time Installation
START A
3. Preparation for Installation 7. CL Installation Procedures
3.2 Unloading {DR-ID 300CL Service Manual/CR-IR 363AWS Service Manual}
3.3 Transfer 8. Installing the RU Software
3.4 Temporary Placement 8.1 Setting the IP Address of the RU
3.5 Checking the Items Supplied 8.2 Setting the CL and Checking Connection
4. Installation Procedures 8.3 Installing the Setup PC-TOOL
8.4 RU/CL Software Setup Checkpoints
4.1 Removing Tapes from the Machine
4.2 Removing the Light Protect Plates 8.5 Installing the RU Software
4.3 Repositioning the Retaining Members 9. Image/Conveyance Checks
4.4 Installing the Cover
9.1 Check Before Procedures
5. Connecting the Cables 9.2 Image/Conveyance Checks
5.1 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking
Resistance Value 10. Confirming the S Value
5.2 Connecting the Interface Cable 10.1 Confirming the S Value of IP Type ST
6. Final Placement 10.2 Confirming the S Value of IP Type HR
6.1 Securing the Cable 11. Powering OFF the CL/RU
6.2 Securing the Machine 12. Cleaning the CL/RU
A END
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-2
IN-3
3. Preparation for Installation 3.1.2 Precautions on Patient Environment
n Additional Protective Grounding
3.1 Precautions Regarding Installation If the RU is installed in the patient environment with the connected equipment in the
non-medically used room, the additional protective grounding will be required.
The place where the machine is to be installed needs to meet the criteria Definitions of "patient environment", "medically-used room", and "non-medically used
set forth in "Getting Started" and "3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements. room" are given below.
"Preinstallation procedures should be performed beforehand for necessary
construction work, electrical work, and air-conditioning system installation. l Patient Environment
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements tests, diagnosis, monitoring).It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and 2.5
Avoid the following installation sites: m in height from the area of the patient's body.
- Places where the temperature changes drastically. It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
- Places near heat sources such as heaters.
- Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur. l Medically-Used Room
- Places where corrosive gas may be generated. Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
- Dusty places. grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
- Places where the machine is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock. grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
- Places that are exposed to direct sunlight.
used room.
- Places that are exposed to X-rays while the machine is processing.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
Make sure that the machine will never be exposed to direct and scattered X-rays
while the machine is processing. l Non-Medically Used Room
The size and position of the X-ray shields should be such that the machine is
Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
completely shielded to avoid exposure of direct and scattered X-rays to the machine.
- Install this device in the place that a patient does not touch.
3.1.3 Handling Precautions for Printed Circuit Boards and
l When installed in the patient environment Optical Unit
In the room where the machine is to be installed, the hospital-grade grounding When servicing a board or optical unit, use a wristband to ground your body.
terminal and outlet should be provided.
If you body is not grounded, the electrostatic buildup on your body may damage the
The installation place should be within reach of the cable of the patient environment electronic parts.
support cable kit from the hospital-grade grounding terminal and outlet.
l When installed in other than the patient environment 3.1.4 Precautions for System Connection
Make sure that persons other than routine operators of the machine will not touch the "Accessory equipment connected to be the analog and digital interfaces must be
machine inadvertently. certified according to the respective IEC Standards. Furthermore all configurations
shall comply with the medical system standard, IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-
1:2005 Chapter 16. Everyone who connects additional equipment configures a
medical system, and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the
requirements of IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-1:2005 Chapter 16. If in doubt
consult with the your local technical service representative."
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-3
IN-4
3.2 Unloading 3.2.1 Unloading: For countries specifying the crate
CAUTIONS 1. Move down the machine together with the carrier pallet from the load-
carrying platform of the truck.
- When unloading the machine, two persons should always cooperate to do so.
REFERENCE
- Before unloading the machine, secure a proper machine transfer route.
- The following label is attached to the crate.
- In case of machines for China, a label in Chinese is attached.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-4
IN-5
2. Remove the front end of the crate. 3. Remove the screws from the crate.
u NOTE u
The removed crate should be moved away to an unobstructive place.
4. Incline the crate to take it out.
CAUTION
When removing the crate, incline the crate to take it out. If you try to move the
crate, it might hit the machine, thereby damaging the machine.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-5
IN-6
5. Remove the top plate from the crate. 6. Remove the accessories-containing bug.
CAUTION
The top plate should not be disassembled, because it will be used when
lowering the machine from the carrier pallet.
REFERENCES
- After the top plate is removed, break up the crate and put the resulting pieces
together for conveyance. 7. Remove the lower portion of the barrier bag that protects the machine.
- Because the crate is assembled with nails, hit it with a hammer or the like from
inside to break up the crate.
- Use care not to get injured by protruding nails when breaking up the crate.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-6
IN-7
8. Lower the adjustable feet bolts to lift up the machine. 9. Remove the machine retainers on the right-hand side.
When the four nuts are loosened, the machine retainers lower accordingly, so that
CAUTION the machine moves down onto the carrier pallet.
Unless the machine is lifted up by the adjustable feet, the machine retainers CAUTION
could not be removed.
When the nut is loosened, the machine may incline by its own weight. So, use
care not to get your finger pinched by the machine retainer or adjustable foot.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-7
IN-8
10. Remove the machine retainers on the left-hand side. 11. Secure the top plate removed at step 5 onto the carrier pallet.
When the four nuts are loosened, the machine retainers lower accordingly, so that
the machine moves down onto the carrier pallet. CAUTIONS
CAUTION - Use the insulock ties to fix the top plate onto the carrier pallet securely.
- Be sure to secure the top plate on the rear side of the machine. The carrier
When the nut is loosened, the machine may incline by its own weight. So, use pallet is designed so that the top plate cannot be secured on the front side of
care not to get your finger pinched by the machine retainer or adjustable foot. the machine.
12. Raise the adjustable feet up to their upper limit.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-8
IN-9
13. Remove the vinyl cover that protects the machine. 3.2.2 Unloading: Other than countries specifying the crate
1. Move down the machine together with the carrier pallet from the load-
carrying platform of the truck.
2. Cut the PP band, and remove the top plate.
u INSTRUCTION u
During the winter season, allow the machine to stand under its cover-attached
condition for sufficient time before unpacking it.
If the vinyl cover is removed immediately after the machine is carried into the
room, moisture condensation may occur on the machine.
14. Lower the machine from the carrier pallet.
CAUTION
When lowering the machine from the carrier pallet, one person should be
positioned on the right-hand side of the machine, and the other on its left-hand
side.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-9
IN-10
3. Clear the fixing nail, and remove the cardboard. 4. Remove the accessories-containing bug.
5. Remove the lower portion of the barrier bag that protects the machine.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-10
IN-11
6. Lower the adjustable feet bolts to lift up the machine. 7. Remove the machine retainers on the right-hand side.
When the four nuts are loosened, the machine retainers lower accordingly, so that
CAUTION the machine moves down onto the carrier pallet.
Unless the machine is lifted up by the adjustable feet, the machine retainers CAUTION
could not be removed.
When the nut is loosened, the machine may incline by its own weight. So, use
care not to get your finger pinched by the machine retainer or adjustable foot.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-11
IN-12
8. Remove the machine retainers on the left-hand side. 9. Secure the top plate removed at step 2 onto the carrier pallet.
When the four nuts are loosened, the machine retainers lower accordingly, so that
the machine moves down onto the carrier pallet. CAUTIONS
CAUTION - Use the insulock ties to fix the top plate onto the carrier pallet securely.
- Be sure to secure the top plate on the rear side of the machine. The carrier
When the nut is loosened, the machine may incline by its own weight. So, use pallet is designed so that the top plate cannot be secured on the front side of
care not to get your finger pinched by the machine retainer or adjustable foot. the machine.
10. Raise the adjustable feet up to their upper limit.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-12
IN-13
11. Remove the vinyl cover that protects the machine. 3.3 Transfer
CAUTIONS
- When unloading the machine, two persons should always cooperate to do so.
- When transferring the machine by use of its casters, raise the adjustable feet
of the machine all the way up to their upper limit.
- When bringing the machine into the installation place, support it so that it will
not topple down.
- When supporting the machine, grasp the sides and rear of the machine. If
the plastic portion of the machine's front is grasped, the machine may be
damaged.
- When the machine should be moved over some step or bump, move it as
slowly as possible to avoid shock to it. Note that the step over which the
machine may move is about 10 mm high at most.
1. Put the hand lifter underneath the machine.
u INSTRUCTION u
u INSTRUCTION u
During the winter season, allow the machine to stand under its cover-attached
condition for sufficient time before unpacking it. The hand lifter should be oriented aslant with respect to the machine.
If the vinyl cover is removed immediately after the machine is carried into the
room, moisture condensation may occur on the machine.
12. Lower the machine from the carrier pallet.
CAUTION
When lowering the machine from the carrier pallet, one person should be
positioned on the right-hand side of the machine, and the other on its left-hand
side.
2. Transfer the machine into the installation place.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-13
IN-14
3.4 Temporary Placement 3.5 Checking the Items Supplied
Check whether all the items are supplied in accordance with the PACKING LIST that
1. Secure space required for installation procedures and temporarily is contained in each carton.
place the machine.
n Machine Main Body
Check Item Qty. Remarks
Machine main body 1
Accessories
n
Check Item Qty. Remarks
Instruction Manual 1
1 Machine-specific data
CD-ROM
1 Software application
Ferrite core 1
Clamp 3
1 Cassette insert operation label
Label
1 Exposure markers precaution label
Spur gear 1 327N1121608
1 324N3164
2. Secure the machine with the adjustable feet in place.
Timing belt wheel 1 324N3165
1 324N3038C
5 TP3x6
Screw
3 T4x8
Performance check list 1
Installation check report 1
Optional Items
n
Check Item Qty. Remarks
Machine AC power cable for use in U.S. 1
Machine AC power cable for use in
1
Europe (excluding U.K.), TUV certified
Machine AC power cable for use in U.K.,
1
TUV certified
Anti-topple retainer kit 1 For retaining the machine
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-14
IN-15
4. Installation Procedures 4.2 Removing the Light Protect Plates
1. Remove the lower front cover.
4.1 Removing Tapes from the Machine
1. Remove the tapes.
2. Remove the lower light protect plate.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-15
IN-16
4.3 Repositioning the Retaining Members 2. Reposition the lower retaining members.
REFERENCE
The retaining members may be removed along the rope.
1. Remove the upper retaining member.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-16
IN-17
3. Reposition the lower retaining members. 4. Attach the screws and upper retaining member.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-17
IN-18
4.4 Installing the Cover
1. Install the lower light protect plate.
2. Install the front cover.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-18
IN-19
5. Connecting the Cables 1. Connect the power cable to the machine, and place the breaker switch
in the ON position.
5.1 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking
Resistance Value
CAUTIONS
- Before measuring the resistance value, make sure that the power plug is
unplugged from the outlet.
- If the machine is to be installed in the patient environment, see "APPENDIX 1.
ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING."
{IN:Appendix 1._Additional Protective Grounding}
- If the power cable is to be locally prepared, be sure to use a power cable
that complies with the requirements stated below. Using the cables not
corresponding to the conditions below may cause an electric shock or a fire.
<For the U.S. and Canada>
UL-listed detachable power cable
Hospital Grade plug 2. Measure the resistance value of the power cable.
Cable wire diameter : 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
(Reference value)
Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher
Terminal L-N L-E N-E
Cable type: SJT
Resistance value 100k Ω - ∞ ∞
Cable length: 3 m or shorter
<For Europe>
Cable certified by a country in which the machine is to be installed
Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
Cable type: H05VV-F
Cable length: 3 m or shorter
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-19
IN-20
3. Place the breaker switch in the OFF position.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-20
IN-21
5.2 Connecting the Interface Cable 2. Connect the I/F cable to the I/F cable connector of the machine.
CAUTION
A telephone cable should not be plugged into the I/F cable connector.
u NOTE u
For the I/F cable, only UTP type straight LAN cable of Category 5E or more should be
used.
1. Attach the ferrite core.
u NOTE u
At the point 50mm from the distal end of the I/F cable, attach the ferrite core by
wrapping the cable twice around the ferrite core.
3. Connect the I/F cable to the switching hub.
50mm
Attach ferrite core (138S0195) CAUTION
Only device evaluated to IEC/UL60905-1 can be used.
u NOTE u
If using Wake On LAN, refer to the service manual of CSL to configure the settings.
{DR-ID 300CL Service Manual/CR-IR 363AWS Service Manual}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-21
IN-22
6. Final Placement 6.2 Securing the Machine
For final placement of the machine, check the requests of the user, and observe the 1. Secure the four adjustable feet down onto the floor.
procedures described below to secure the machine and cables in place.
u NOTE u
When the machine is to be secured by use of the anchor nuts, see "Appendix 4.
Securing the Machine with the Anchor Nuts" When securing the adjustable feet, pay attention to the following points.
- The four adjustable feet should be evenly loaded.
6.1 Securing the Cable However, if there is too little space on the right and left sides in the machine
installation place to secure the adjustable feet on the rear side, the two
CAUTION adjustable feet on the front side should be secured in place. In this case, the
two adjustable feet and two casters should be evenly loaded.
If the machine is to be installed in the patient environment, see "APPENDIX 1. - When the adjustable feet are secured, the casters should be detached from the
ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING." floor.
{IN:Appendix 1._Additional Protective Grounding}
2. Secure the adjustable feet.
CAUTION
Do not tie or bundle the power cable in such a manner that it is overloaded.
1. Plug the power cable into the outlet.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-22
IN-23
7. CL Installation Procedures
l Compliant version
- DR-ID 300CL : V12.1.0003 or later
- CR-IR363AWS : V9.2 or later
l Installation procedures
1. Perform the CL installation procedures.
u NOTE u
Complete "7. CL Installation Procedures" before performing the procedures
described in "8. Installing RU Software."
{DR-ID 300CL Service Manual/CR-IR 363AWS Service Manual}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-23
IN-24
8. Installing the RU Software 3. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
After the main screen appears, sequentially touch the upper left and upper right
corners of the touch panel.
REFERENCE
u NOTE u
This chapter describes the procedures, by way of example, where settings are made
as follows: Because the IP address of the FTP server has not been set yet, it takes about
IP address of the RU : 172.16.1.11 three minutes until the READY screen appears.
IP address of the CL : 172.16.1.21
REFERENCE
If your touch is accepted by the panel, a "beep" alarm sound is generated.
8.1 Setting the IP Address of the RU
1. Turn ON the power of the CL. #1 #2
[Touch] [Touch]
2. Turn ON the power of the RU.
PROFECT
CS Plus
©2018 FUJIFILM Corporation
u INSTRUCTION u
If you cannot put the RU into the Maintenance Mode, turn OFF the power of the
RU and then reboot the RU all over again.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-24
IN-25
4. Set the IP address of the RU. 5. Set the IP address of the FTP server.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Enter the IP address of the RU that is set in the CL. Enter the IP address of the CL.
Maintenance Maintenance
1/2 1/2
RU IP Address
#1 RU IP Address
FTP Server
Default Gateway
Touch [RU IP Address].
FTP Server
Default Gateway #1
Subnet Mask Subnet Mask
Touch [FTP Server].
172 016 001 010
#2 172 016 001 020
#2
Touch the [BS] key to delete digits. Touch the [BS] key to delete digits.
1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
7 8 9 7 8 9
0 BS 4 5 6 172 016 001 010 0 BS 4 5 6 172 016 001 020
Cancel OK Cancel OK
7 8 9 7 8 9
1 2 3 1 2 3
0 BS 0 BS
4 5 6 4 5 6
Cancel OK Cancel OK
17 28 39 17 28 39
40 5 6
BS 40 5 6
BS
172 016 001 011
#3 172 016 001 021
#3
7 8 9 7 8 9
Sequentially touch Sequentially touch
1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 1 2 3 Cancel OK 4 5 6 1 2 3 Cancel OK
7
0
8
BS
9
4 5 6 "1",0"7", "2", "0",
BS "1", "6", "0", "0", 7
0
8
BS
9
4 5 6 "1",0"7", "2", "0",
BS "1", "6", "0", "0",
Cancel OK
7 8 9
, "1", "0", "1", "1" on the ten-key Cancel OK
7 8 9
, "1", "0", "2", "1" on the ten-key
0 BS
padCancel
to enter aOKvalue. 0 BS
padCancel
to enter aOKvalue.
Cancel OK Cancel OK
1 2 3 1 2 3
172 016 001 011 172 016 001 021
4 5 6 4 5 6
71 82 93 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
7 8 9
4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8 9 7 8 9
0 BS 04 5 6
BS 0 BS
4
0 5 6
BS
Cancel OK
#4 7 8 9
Cancel OK
#4 7 8 9
Touch [OK]. Cancel OK
Touch [OK]. Cancel OK
0 BS 0 BS
Cancel OK Cancel OK
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-25
IN-26
8.2 Setting the CL and Checking Connection
1. Execute "Network Check".
Maintenance
2/2
Secure Host
#1
Secure Net
Network Check
HV ON/OFF
Touch [Network Check].
Network Check
#2
FTP Server
Default Gateway
Touch [Check].
Check
Network Check
#3
FTP Server
Default Gateway [Check]
● GOOD indication
Check
FTP Server OK
Default Gateway OK or Not in Use
● NO GOOD indication
FTP Server Error
Default Gateway Error
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{Troubleshooting}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-26
IN-27
8.3 Installing Setup PC-TOOL 6. After the installation completes, click [Finish].
#1
1. Put the Install CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the CL. [Finish]
2. Click on [INSTALL].
#1
[Click]
7. As the window below opens, press the <Enter> key.
#1
[Press]
<Enter> key
3. Select [For FTP Server], and click [SET].
#1
[Select]
8. As the window below opens, press the <Enter> key.
#2
#1
[Click]
[Press]
<Enter> key
4. Click [NEXT].
#1
[Click]
u NOTE u
The step 9 is not required if the CL has been rebooted after changing CL’s IP address
during “7. CL Installation Procedures”.
Proceed to “8.4 RU/CL Software Setup Checkpoints”.
5. Click [Install]. 9. Reboot the CL.
#1
[Install]
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-27
IN-28
8.4 RU/CL Software Setup Checkpoints 8.4.1 Checking the CL Software Version
u NOTE u 1. Check the CL software version.
- DR-ID 300CL : V13.0 or later
If it is necessary to check the setup of the RU/CL software, perform the checking
procedures in accordance with the table below. - CR-IR363AWS : V9.2 or later
<Example: DR-ID 300CL>
Checkpoints Refer to
1 Checking the CL Software Version {IN:8.4.1}
2 Checking Configuration of the CL - 1 {IN:8.4.2}
3 Checking Configuration of the CL - 2 {IN:8.4.3} #1
[Check]
4 Checking Configuration of the CL - 3 {IN:8.4.4}
5 Checking Configuration of the CL - 4 {IN:8.4.5}
6 Checking FTP of the CL - 1 {IN:8.4.6}
7 Checking FTP of the CL - 2 {IN:8.4.7}
8 Checking Setup of the RU {IN:8.4.8}
REFERENCE
All the CL software settings to be checked must be for the master CL.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-28
IN-29
8.4.2 Checking Configuration of the CL - 1 8.4.4 Checking Configuration of the CL - 3
1. On the Setup Configuration Item screen, make sure that "CONFIG" 1. On the Setup Configuration Item screen, navigate "CONFIG" →
→ "1. IMAGE MODALITY" → "21. Connecting Between Reader and "CONNECTING EQUIPMENT", and make sure that the RU has been
Console" is "1:N-N". registered in the "READER" attribute.
u NOTE u
If the setting is “0:1-1”, the machine does not convey the IP and logs error code
“11510” because the setting is out of the machine specification.
#1
#1 [Check]
[Check]
8.4.5 Checking Configuration of the CL - 4
1. If multiple CL's are registered and image reading is performed
with a specific RU, make sure that the CL has been set to "IDT
8.4.3 Checking Configuration of the CL - 2
CONNECTING".
1. On the Setup Configuration Item screen, navigate "CONFIG" →
"NETWORK CONFIG" → "ALL OTHER NODES", and make sure that
the "FRUP Setup" settings of the RU installed are as follows.
#1 #1
[Check] [Check]
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-29
IN-30
8.4.6 Checking FTP of the CL - 1 8.4.7 Checking FTP of the CL - 2
1. Right-click the Windows "Start" button, click "Control Panel" → 1. Right-click the Windows "Start" button, click "Control Panel" → "User
"Administrative Tools", Double-click "Internet Information Services Accounts" → "Manage account", and make sure that user names and
(IIS) Manager", and click on "Default FTP Site" of "Internet Information passwords have been set to allow the RU to automatically access the
Services" to make sure that virtual directories have been created for FTP.
respective RU's.
#1
[Check]
8.4.8 Checking Setup of the RU
1. Check "IP Address of the RU" and "IP Address of the FTP Server" that
have been set in the RU.
#1 u NOTE u
[Check]
With reference to "8.1 Setting the IP Address of the RU", check the "IP Address of
the RU" and "IP Address of the FTP Server" that have been set in the RU.
{IN:8.1_Setting the IP Address of the RU}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-30
IN-31
8.5 Installing the RU Software 4. Click [New].
REFERENCE #1
[Click]
This section describes the procedures, by way of example, where settings are made
as follows:
INSTALL VERSION: 10.0
LANGUAGE: Japanese
BRAND TYPE: JAPAN (FMS) 5. Enter "RU IP ADDR" and "RU NAME" of the RU that is to be installed.
u NOTE u
1. Click on [START].
Enter the IP address of the RU that is set in the CL.
#1
[Click] REFERENCE
Procedure here takes setting RU IP address to 172.16.1.11 as an example.
2. Select [License] → [Key Regist.].
#1
[Enter]
#1
[Select]
6. Click [PING].
3. Select the key file,and click [Open]. #1
[Click]
#1
[Select]
#2
[Click]
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-31
IN-32
7. Confirm the result of PING, and click to close the window. 8. Click [INSTALL].
#1
u NOTE u
[Confirm]
Set "CDPath" when using copied file instead of install CD to install.
#2
[Click]
● [GOOD]
There is no problem when the following message is displayed. {MU:4.4.2_CDPath}
- When using copied file to install, check the software version in advance. (Make
sure not to install wrong version of software.)
- If CDPath is set, the path will be saved in RU PC-TOOL, and the installation
will be performed from the set path afterward. When it is required to use CD to
● [NO GOOD] install, be sure to remove the CDPath setting.
Other than above.
#1
u NOTE u
[Click]
In the case of "NO GOOD".
{Troubleshooting}
9. Click [OK].
#1
[Click]
10. Select for "INSTALL VERSION".
#1
[Select]
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-32
IN-33
11. Select for "LANGUAGE". 13. Click [SET].
#1
[Click]
REFERENCE
If, for instance, the institution wishes to use non-default CONFIGURATION
12. Select for "BRAND TYPE", and click [OK]. settings, edit the CONFIGURATION settings by performing the procedures set
forth under "4.3.12 EDIT CONFIGURATION" in the "Maintenance Utility".
#1
[Select] {MU:4.3.12_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
#2
[Click]
REFERENCE
"JAPAN" and "EU" can be selected for BRAND TYPE.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-33
IN-34
14. Set "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME". 15. Confirm the installation precautions.
u INSTRUCTION u CAUTION
Enter IP ADDRESS of the CL to be connected with the RU. While data is being written into the FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the power
of the RU. If the power of the RU is turned OFF, the program residing in the
REFERENCES memory is corrupted, so that the RU cannot be rebooted.
- For "CL NAME", any name (20 bytes: 20 alphanumeric characters, or 10 Kanji
characters) may be entered. 16. Click [SET].
- Up to 32 CLs may be registered as image transfer destinations. Among the
registered CLs, up to four CLs are switchable to master CLs.
Up to 32 CLs may be registered #1
as image transfer destinations. [Click]
Among the registered CLs, up to four
CLs are switchable to master CLs.
#2
For more detail about the function that may be set on the "EDIT CL NAME"
[Check]
screen, see "4.3.13 EDIT CL NAME" in "Maintenance Utility".
While the FLASH ROM is being written
{MU:4.3.13_EDIT CL NAME} into, the LED blinks.
(The LED keeps blinking after the
#1 writing ends)
[Click]
#2
[Enter]
#3
REFERENCES
[Enter]
The installation process screen appears on the CL display.
#4
[Enter]
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-34
IN-35
17. Verify that writing into the FLASH ROM has been completed, and 19. Check the version of the RU software, and close Setup PC-TOOL.
press the [Enter] key. #1
[Check]
u NOTE u
The following screen may fail to open due to an application error. If the following
screen does not appear on the display, wait about 10 minutes after the click of [OK]
in step 16, and then press the [Enter] key.
GOOD :
REFERENCE
Letter color is "black".
Writing into the FLASH ROM will take about four minutes. NO GOOD :
Letter color is "red".
#1 #2
[Check] [Click]
#2
[Press]
<Enter> key
18. Click [OK].
#1 #3
[Click] [Click]
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD", return to step 1 and perform install procedures all over
again.
20. Turn OFF the power of the RU.
21. Turn ON the power of the RU.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-35
IN-36
9. Image/Conveyance Checks 3. Perform IP exposures.
u NOTE u
In this section, the following checks are made as last-time verification for final
placement. Be sure to expose the IP under the following X-ray tube voltage condition.
- Conveyance checks Otherwise, the resulting image could not be checked properly.
- Image checks For the tungsten X-ray tube: 80 kV
For the molybdenum X-ray tube: 25 kV
9.1 Check Before Procedures
u INSTRUCTIONS u
u NOTES u - Expose two IPs of maximum sizes for each of the IP types (ST type and HR-
- If a cassette with a wrong IP type is inserted, appropriate image cannot be obtained. BD type) used at the institution, with the following doses.
When inserting an IP into a cassette, be sure to perform servicing after confirming - With the X-ray tube, the first IP should be exposed in a normal orientation, and
the IP type. the second in a 180-degree upside-down orientation.
- For the IP used for image/conveyance checks, an IP of the maximum size used in
the hospital should be employed.
- Make sure that the IP to be used does not contain any important image data l For "ST" IP
exposed. - X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube
- Exposure X-ray dose: 1 mR
1. Check to ensure that the "READY" screen appears. - Maximum size: IP of 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14"x17" (35cm x 43cm)
size
- Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m
Voltage 80 Kv
Amperage 50 mA
Time 0.013 sec
l For "HR-BD" IP
- X-ray tube: Molybdenum X-ray tube
- Exposure X-ray dose: 20 mR
- Maximum size: IP of 18"x24" HR-BD or 24"x30" HR-BD size
- Reference conditions: Distance 0.55 m
Voltage 25 Kv
2. Perform "Secondary Erasure" on the spontaneous radiation and Amperage 100 mA
image accumulated on the IP to be used. Time 0.053 sec
{Instruction Manual}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-36
IN-37
9.2 Image/Conveyance Checks 3 Verify that there is no "unusual nonuniformity" found on the output
film or on the image displayed on the image monitor.
u NOTE u
u CHECK u
Because the "MENU" and so forth differ depending on the IP type, image checks
should be performed with the "MENU" specified below. There should be no uneven density difference in the main scan direction.
If there is any uneven density difference, compare the films outputted from the
1. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format" or "Image Format-2", and two IPs of the same size, and determine whether such nonuniformity is caused
"SINGLE", record the IP exposed at "9.1 Check Before Procedures", by the machine or X-ray tube.
and generate an image output.
l If there is uneven density difference in the same direction on two films
u INSTRUCTION u
For IP type HR-BD, when the image menu is to be registered, the HQ flag should
be set in the "Exposure Parameter Detail Setting".
2. Check the S value.
REFERENCE
Reference values for S depending on the X-ray dose:
- For IP type ST (tungsten X-ray tube)
For 0.1 mR: The S value is 2000.
For 1 mR: The S value is 200.
For 10 mR: The S value is 20.
→ The machine may be the cause of such nonuniformity.
- For IP type HR-BD (molybdenum X-ray tube) {Troubleshooting}
For 2 mR: The S value is 1200.
For 20 mR: The S value is 120.
l If positions of uneven density difference are different
For 200 mR: The S value is 12.
→ The X-ray tube may be the cause of such nonuniformity.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-37
IN-38
4 Check the image format.
Make sure that the white blank portion is 2 mm or less, as actually measured on
the IP, from the outermost edge of the image frame of the film outputted.
u CHECK u
The white blank portion should be 2 mm or less.
If anything abnormal is found:
」」
{Troubleshooting}
u NOTE u
The distance measured on the film may differ from the actual size on the IP,
depending on the reading size and film size. The actual size on the IP should be
calculated using the distance measured on the film and the reduction factor for
the film. Compute the actual size on the IP according to the following equation.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-38
IN-39
10. Confirming the S Value 2. Set the tube voltage to 80 kVp. Confirm the exposure conditions under
which the radiation dose is 1 mR.
u NOTE u
10.1 Confirming the S Value of IP Type ST If the radiation dose measured by the dosimeter is not 1 mR, leave the tube
Read the IP exposed to 1 mR of radiation during a 1-minute period between 10 and voltage at 80 kVp and adjust the distance, tube current, and time to obtain a
11 minutes after an X-ray exposure. Check the displayed S value and the “S value radiation dose of 1 mR.
converted to exposure to 1 mR” obtained from the average dose value are within the Record the adjusted exposure conditions.
control limits. - Distance _________ cm
REFERENCE - Tube voltage _________ kVp
- Tube current _________ mA
The method for calculating the S value control limits is outlined below: - Time _________ sec
- S value control limits for user adjustments
Upper limit: : 200 x 1.5 = 300 REFERENCE
Lower limit : 200 / 1.5 = 133
- S value control limits for service technician adjustments If the exposure conditions are unknown, use the following values as the reference
Upper limit: : 200 x 1.3 = 260 values and make fine adjustments:
Lower limit : 200 / 1.3 = 154
To eliminate the necessity for adjusting the machine within a short period of time
after service technician inspection/adjustment, the S value control range for service
technician adjustments is narrower than that for user adjustments.
1. Position a cassette so that the cassette center coincides with the X-ray
radiation field center. Perform setup so that the X-ray radiation field outline
is approximately 3 cm outside the cassette outer frame. Temporarily remove
the cassette and then position a dosimeter at the radiation field center.
3. Under the exposure conditions confirmed at the step 2, measure the
radiation dose five times and average the measured values.
--- Example ---
First Second Third Forth Fifth Average
measurement measurement measurement measurement measurement value
0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.0 1.04
4. Enter the exposure conditions and the average radiation dose
determined at the step 3 in the "FCR S Value Control Table".
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-39
IN-40
5. Make sure that an IP to be used does not include important image 9. Determine the "S value for 1 mR of radiation" from the displayed S
data. value (the S value printed on the film or displayed on the Console
screen) and the average radiation dose value obtained a step 3.
u NOTE u
--- Example ---
Use an IP of 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm) or 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm). Displayed S value : 200
Average radiation dose value obtained at step 3 : 1.04
6. Erase the IP. Film output
7. Expose the IP to the X-ray radiation under the exposure conditions
confirmed at the step 2.
S value printed on film
8. Read the IP exposed at the step 7 during a 1-minute period between 10
and 11 minutes after the exposure.
u INSTRUCTION u
Use the Console menu of “QC/TEST” and “Image format”. Console screen
S value displayed on screen
PRTM010705007.ai
S value for 1 mR of radiation = Displayed S value x average radiation dose value
= 200 x 1.04
= 208
10. Check that the "S value for 1 mR of radiation," which was determined
at the step 9, is within the control limits.
--- Example ---
Lower control limit
Upper control limit value
value
154 < 208 < 260
Check that the "S value for 1 mR of radiation," which was
determined at the step 9, is between the upper and lower
control limit values.
u NOTE u
If the “S value converted to exposure to 1 mR” is not in a range from the lower
limit to the upper limit of the control limits, carry out the sensitivity correction and
again confirm the S value.
{MU:5.3 [5-6-3]_Sensitivity Correction}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-40
IN-41
10.2 Confirming the S Value of IP Type HR-BD 2. Set the tube voltage to 25 kVp. Set the target/filter to molybdenum/
molybdenum. Confirm the exposure conditions under which the IP
The procedure set forth below is used to read an IP, which has been exposed to 20 radiation dose of 20 mR is achieved.
mR of radiation with the molybdenum tube, during a 1-minute period between 10 and
11 minutes after an X-ray exposure, output the read image, and check that the S value ● Achieved IP radiation dose = Dosimeter reading x L2/L'2
for 20 mR of radiation, which is determined from the displayed S value and average
dose value, is within the control limits. L: Distance between the focus and the reference point of the dosimeter sensor
L': Distance between the focus and the cassette top frame
REFERENCE
The method for calculating the S value control limits is outlined below:
- S value control limits for user adjustments
Upper limit: 120 x 1.5 = 180
Lower limit: 120 / 1.5 = 80
- S value control limits for service technician adjustments
Upper limit: 120 x 1.3 = 156
Lower limit: 120 / 1.3 = 92
To eliminate the necessity for adjusting the machine within a short period of time
after service technician inspection/adjustment, the S value control range for service
technician adjustments is narrower than that for user adjustments.
1. Align the X-ray radiation field with the cassette size. Position the
reference point of the dosimeter sensor so that it coincides with the
size of the cassette to be used.
u NOTE u
If the radiation dose measured by the dosimeter is not 20 mR, leave the tube
voltage at 25 kVp and adjust the distance, tube current, and time to obtain a
radiation dose of 20 mR. Record the adjusted exposure conditions.
- Distance: _________ cm
- Tube voltage: _________ kVp
- Tube current: _________ mA
- Time: _________ sec
REFERENCE
If the exposure conditions are unknown, use the following values as the reference
values and make fine adjustments:
- Distance (L: Distance between the focus and the reference point of the
dosimeter sensor) 55 cm
- Distance (L': Distance between the focus and the reference point of the
dosimeter sensor) 60 cm
- Tube voltage 80kVp
- Tube current 100mA
- Time 0.053sec
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-41
IN-42
3. Under the exposure conditions confirmed at step 2, measure the 9. Determine the "S value for 20 mR of radiation" from the displayed
radiation dose five times and average the measured values. S value (the S value printed on the film or displayed on the Console
--- Example --- screen) and the average radiation dose value obtained at step 3.
--- Example ---
First Second Third Forth Fifth Average
measurement measurement measurement measurement measurement value Displayed S value : 120
Average radiation dose value obtained at step 3 : 19.8
19.6 20.0 20.2 20.4 18.8 19.8 Film Output
4. Enter the exposure conditions and the average radiation dose
determined at step 3 in the "FCR S Value Control Table".
5. Make sure that an IP to be used does not include important image S value printed on film
data.
u NOTE u
Use the largest size IP of all the IPs used at the institution. Console screen
6. Erase the IP.
7. Under the exposure conditions confirmed at step 2, expose a 18 cm x
24 cm or 24 cm x 30 cm IP to X-ray radiation.
S value displayed on screen
8. Read the IP exposed at step 7 during a 1-minute period between 10
PRTM010705008.ai
S value for 20 mR of Displayed S Average radiation
and 11 minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image radiation
=
value
x
dose value
/ 20(mR)
Format" and "SINGLE" Console menus, and then output the read
= 120 x 19.8 / 20
image.
= 118.8
10. Check that the "S value for 20 mR of radiation", which was determined
at step 9, is within the control limits.
--- Example ---
Lower control limit
Upper control limit value
value
92 < 118.8 < 156
Check that the "S value for 20 mR of radiation," which
was determined at step 9, is between the upper and lower
control limit values.
u NOTE u
If the "S value for 20 mR of radiation", which was determined at step 9, is not
between the upper and lower control limit values, make sensitivity correction and
then confirm the S value again.
{MU:5.3 [5-5-3]_Sensitivity Correction}
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-42
IN-43
11. Powering OFF the CL/RU 12. Cleaning the CL/RU
1. Shut down the system of the CL. 1. Clean the monitor and covers of the CL with a dry cloth.
2. Shut down the system of the RU. 2. Clean the covers of the RU with a moistened cloth.
3. Power OFF the RU. CAUTION
Ensure cloth is free of residual water and water does not enter the device.
3. Peel the seal off the touch panel.
4. Attach the Cassette Insert operation labels and the Exposure Markers
precaution label.
u NOTE u
Attach the Cassette Insert operation labels for the cassette sizes that are
employed by the user.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-43
Appx IN-1
Appendix 1. Additional Protective n Connection Locations of Cables for Additional Protective
Grounding of the Equipment and Clamp Locations
Grounding <INSTRUCTIONS>
Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the Please use power supply cord and clamp (which is required for keeping the additional
patient environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. protective ground cord in position) approved by the electrical standard of the country
Refer to Medical System Standard, IEC60601-1-1. to which the equipment is to be installed.
However, there may be cases where additional protective grounding is not possible.
(For example in cases like non-metallic faceplate screws as well as boxes and <Counter-measures for additional protective grounding>
isolated supply systems etc.) If this should happen, please refer to “Counter-measures 1. Engage the services of a professional to make the necessary preparations for the
for additional protective grounding” on the next page. connection of additional protective grounding.
This installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle 2. If the connected device possess a hospital grade earth terminal and is mobile,
electrical facility construction. move the connected device and replace with a power supply plug which has
Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used hospital grade earth terminal.
room” are given below. 3. Install a isolating transformer to the connected device. In this way, the power supply
from the connected device will be separated from the main power supply.
l Patient Environment
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
l Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other
medically-used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
l Non-Medically Used Room
Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-1
Appx IN-2
Appendix 2. Setting the Master CL 1. Additionally Registering the Master CL
This section describes the procedures for additionally register the CL2 (172.16.1.22)
(Procedures on the CL1)
into the system that consists of the RU (ru0: 172.16.1.11) and CL (master CL:
172.16.1.21), and for switching the master CL from CL1 to CL2.
1. Turn ON the power of the CL.
2. Turn ON the power of the RU.
3. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
After the main screen appears, sequentially touch the upper left and upper right
corners of the touch panel.
u NOTE u
Because the IP address of the FTP server has not been set yet, it takes about
three minutes until the READY screen appears.
REFERENCE
If your touch is accepted by the panel, a "beep" alarm sound is generated.
#1 #2
REFERENCE [Touch] [Touch]
- Up to 32 CLs may be registered as image transfer destinations. Among the
registered CLs, up to four CLs are switchable to master CLs.
Up to 32 CLs may be registered
as image transfer destinations. PROFECT
CS Plus
Among the registered CLs, up to four
CLs are switchable to master CLs.
©2018 FUJIFILM Corporation
For more detail about the function that may be set on the "EDIT CL NAME" screen,
see "4.3.13 EDIT CL NAME" of the Maintenance Utility volume.
u INSTRUCTION u
{MU:4.3.13_EDIT CL NAME}
If you cannot put the RU into the Maintenance Mode, turn OFF the power of the
- Since it will become unable to save the error logs, specify the FTP server CL as RU and then reboot the RU all over again.
master CL. Switch the master CL only in case of urgency such as breakdown of the
master CL.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-2
Appx IN-3
4. Start RU PC-TOOL. 6. Register the master CL (CL2) created at step 5 into the Master CL.
Double-click “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\RuPcTool.exe”.
5. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the master CL is to
#1
be added, and enter the "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME" of the master
[Select]
CL to be added.
#1
[Select] #2
[Click]
#3
#2
[Click]
[Click]
#4
#3 [Click]
[Click]
7. Close the RU PC-TOOL window.
#4
[Enter]
#5
[Enter]
#6
[Enter]
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-3
Appx IN-4
2. Registering the RU (Procedures on the CL2) 5. Enter the host name (ru0) of the RU in and its IP
1. Start the Service Utility. address (172.16.1.11) in .
{DR-ID 300CL/CR-IR 363AWS Service Manual/Maintenance Utility (MU)/1.
Starting and Exiting the Service Utility}
6. Select in the "Add Node" field, and click on .
2. Click on [Setup Configuration Item]. → The "FRUP Setup" screen appears.
3. Click on [ALL OTHER NODES] of [NETWORK CONFIG].
7. Check in the "Attribute" field ( → ).
8. Type "ru0" in .
REFERENCE
The name should not necessarily be the same as the host name.
9. Click on .
→ Registering the network information is now completed.
4. Click on .
→ The "New Node" dialog box appears.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-4
Appx IN-5
3. Registering the Machine Information 4. Saving Configuration and Exiting Service
(CONNECTING EQUIPMENT) Utility
1. Click on [CONNECTING EQUIPMENT] in the "Setup Configuration 1. From the "Config (F)" menu in the "Setup Configuration Item" window,
Item" window. select "Save (V)".
→ The save confirmation window appears.
2. Click on .
FR9H7110.EPS
→ The "Connecting Equipment" dialog box appears.
3. Register the machine information as shown below.
2. Click on .
→ The setup is saved.
I READER 3. From the "Config (F)" menu, select "Close (C)".
→ The "Service Utility" window appears back on screen.
II ru0
4. Exit the Service Utility.
FR9H7108.EPS
I. Select "Reader".
II. Select the host name (e.g., ru0).
III. If several RU's are connected, select the second and subsequent host
name(s) in "Equipment #2" and so on.
4. Click on .
→ Registering the machine information is now completed.
The "Setup Configuration Item" window appears back on screen.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-5
Appx IN-6
5. Verifying Switching of Master CL 5. Turn ON the power of the RU.
1. Turn OFF the power of the RU. 6. Perform reading, and make sure that the image is transferred to the
master CL.
2. Turn ON the power of the RU.
3. Touch the [Utility] button, and touch [Set the master Console].
Utility
2/2
Set sleep timer
Set backlight OFF timer
Set the master Console #2
[Touch]
#1
[Touch]
4. Touch the icon of CL1, and touch the [BACK] button.
Set the master Console Utility
2/2
CL1 Set sleep timer
CL2 Set backlight OFF timer
#1
[Touch] Set the master Console
#2
[Touch]
REFERENCE
The power of the RU automatically turns OFF about 1 minute after the master CL
is set.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-6
Appx IN-7
Appendix 3. Securing the Machine with
the Anti-Topple Retainers
The procedures described herein are applicable when the RU is secured down onto
the floor by use of the anti-topple retainers.
No. Name Qty. Remarks
1. Components of Anti-Topple Retainer Kit
1 Cover (front) 1 350N2873
2 Bracket (front) 1 356N9407
3 Bracket 2 356N9406A
4 Bracket (rear) 1 356N9534
5 Cover (rear) 1 350N2874A
6 Spacer (2 mm) 12 347N1930
7 Spacer (1 mm) 2 347N1929
8 Spacer (2 mm) 12 347N1928
9 Hex head socket bolt (12x20) 8 304S1001225
10 Spring washer (SW12) 8 309S0220012
11 Plain washer (W12) 8 309S0120012
12 Anchor nut (Na12) 8 305S0061
13 Truss screw (T3x6) 4 301S3000408
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-7
Appx IN-8
2. Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple 2. Drill holes for embedding the anchor nuts and then embed the anchor
nuts.
Retainers
u NOTE u
Before drilling holes for embedding the anchor nuts, wear protective goggles.
REFERENCE
When determining the locations for embedding the anchor nuts, temporarily install the
machine and retainers in place, and then mark the locations.
1. Determine the locations for embedding the anchor nuts.
<Reference values>
3. Attach the brackets to the machine.
REFERENCE
The brackets to be attached to the right and left sides of the machine are identical
in shape.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-8
Appx IN-9
4. Move the machine to the location where it is to be secured, and then
attach the bracket to the rear side of the machine and insert 2mm-
thick spacers.
u NOTE u
While pressing the bracket downward, insert 2mm-thick spacers.
u INSTRUCTION u
Insert 2mm-thick spacers until a 1mm-thick spacer is no longer inserted.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-9
Appx IN-10
5. Secure the brackets by bolts.
6. Attach the bracket to the front side of the machine, and insert 2mm-
thick spacers.
u NOTE u
While pressing the bracket downward, insert 2mm-thick spacers.
u INSTRUCTION u
Insert 2mm-thick spacers until a 2mm-thick spacer is no longer inserted.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-10
Appx IN-11
7. Secure the bracket by bolts. 8. Attach the cover brackets.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-11
Appx IN-12
Appendix 4. Operation Check for the n Confirming the usage environment of the 15x30 IP adapter
Insert the 15x30 IP into the 15x30 IP adapter after exposure, and then insert the IP
15x30 IP Adapter adapter into the special 14" x 17" (35 x 43 cm) size cassette.
For details, see the Instruction Manual of 15x30 IP adapter.
u NOTE u
u NOTE u
Listed below are the abbreviations adopted in this chapter.
- IP of 15cm x 30cm size : 15x30 IP Complete the above operation in 20 seconds.
- IP adapter for IP of 15cm x 30cm size : 15x30 IP adapter
The operation written above need to be operated in a low-lit room, confirm whether
the room is proper or not according to the following procedures.
n Preparation for 15x30 IP adapter
l With illuminometer
- Use the following serial numbers’ cassettes with 14" x 17" (35 x 43 cm) size for
Illuminance should be lower than 10lux.
15x30 IP adapter.
CCWSL17-400001 or later, or CCWSL17-500001 or later
- Paste the label supplied with 15x30 IP adapter on the cassette with 14" x 17" (35 x l Without illuminometer
43 cm) size for 15x30 IP adapter to prevent from wrong operation.
For details, see the Instruction Manual of 15x30 IP adapter.
1. Expose the 15x30 IP at 1mR.
2. Insert the exposed IP into the IP adapter, and then insert it into the
cassette with 14" x 17" (35 x 43 cm) size.
3. Confirm the image read from QC/TEST sensitivity menu. Confirm that
the S value is around 200, and there is no artifact which effects on the
diagnosis.
n Procedures for confirming the transport of IP adapter
1. Insert the 15x30 IP into the 15x30 IP adapter according to the
Instruction Manual of 15x30 IP adapter.
2. Insert the 15x30 IP adapter inserted with the 15x30 IP into the cassette
with 14" x 17" (35 x 43 cm) size.
3. Set the cassette inserted with 15x30 IP adapter onto the RU, and confirm
the reading performs normally.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-12
Appx IN-13
n Settings of Pantomography exposure menu for 15x30 IP 4. Set the following items by selecting “Trimming” tab or “Radiation
The 15x30 IP inserted into the 15x30 IP adapter reads the size of 10" x 12" from the field/Trimming settings” tab.
14" x 17" (35 x 43 cm). - “Trimming Size” : “10" x 12"”
Set the pantomography exposure menu for 15x30 IP with the following procedures. - “Direction of Image Extraction” or “Trimming Direction” : “Portrait Format”
- “Trimming Reference Position” : “5” or “Center Reference”
1. Start up the User Utility for CL and click on the [Menu Setting] button. - “Trimming method” : “Fixed Size and Position”
→ The “Menu Setting” window opens.
u NOTE u
2. Select the pantomography exposure menu and click on the [Edit] GUI varies depending on the versions or models of CL. Set the parameters by
button. reference to the following images.
→ The “Exposure Menu Setting” window opens.
l Console Advance
3. Select “Exposure Parameter 1” tab and set “Rotate Image” to “Rotate
90 degree”.
u NOTE u
GUI varies depending on the versions or models of CL. Set the parameters by
reference to the following images.
Console Advance
l
FR9H7822.ai
5. Click on the [OK] button.
→ The “Menu Setting” window appears back on screen.
6. Click on the [OK] button.
→ The “Main menu” window appears back on screen.
FR9H7820.ai 7. Click on the [Terminate] button.
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-13
Appx IN-14
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-14
Appx IN-15
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-15
Appx IN-16
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-16
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
12.06.2019 01 New release All pages
02.28.2020 02 Revision All pages
CR-IR 363 Service Manual
Performance Check (PC)
011-211-02E CR-IR 363 Service Manual
02.28.2020
PC-1
CR-IR 363 Performance Check List 6. Final Placement
6.1 Securing the Cable
The purpose of this performance check list is used at the time of CR-IR 363 installation
to record the steps performed, measured values, and settings, which are based on the 6.2 Securing the Machine
instructions set forth in the Service Manual. This checklist is not supposed to replace 7. CL Installation Procedures
the installation steps set forth in the CR-IR 363 Service Manual but is to be followed
concurrently. 8. Installing the RU Software
Verify the proper equipment operations at installation and after servicing by checking
8.1 Setting the IP Address of the RU
the system connection and output image quality (section 9), and then pass the
equipment over to the customer. 8.2 Setting the CL and Checking Connection
FTP Server OK NG
Installation Information
Default Gateway OK NG
Serial Number: ___________________ Software Ver.: ___________________ 8.3 Installing Setup PC-TOOL
Site Name: ___________________ Installed by: ___________________ 8.4 RU/CL Software Setup Checkpoints
Site Number: ___________________ Signature ___________________ 8.4.1 Checking the CL Software Version
Room Name: ___________________ 8.4.2 Checking Configuration of the CL - 1
Installation Date/Servicing Date: ______________ 8.4.3 Checking Configuration of the CL - 2
8.4.4 Checking Configuration of the CL - 3
Checklist
8.4.5 Checking Configuration of the CL - 4
3. Preparation for Installation
8.4.6 Checking FTP of the CL - 1
3.5 Checking the Items Supplied
8.4.7 Checking FTP of the CL - 2
4. Installation Procedures
8.4.8 Checking Setup of the RU
4.1 Removing Tapes from the Machine
8.5 Installing the RU Software
4.2 Removing the Light Protect Plates
Software Ver.: _____
4.3 Repositioning the Retaining Members
9. Image/Conveyance Checks
4.4 Installing the Cover
9.1 Check Before Procedures
5. Connecting the Cables
9.2 Image/Conveyance Checks
5.1 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking Resistance Value
ST: X-ray dose:______mR S value:_____ OK NG
* Record resistance value measured:
Image irregularities OK NG
Resistance between L and N: __________Ω
Shading check OK NG
Resistance between L and E: __________Ω
Resistance between N and E: __________Ω Image format check OK NG
5.2 Connecting the Interface Cable
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PC-1
PC-2
11. Powering OFF the CL/RU
12. Cleaning the CL/RU
Summary Test OK NG
Film output must be stored as the record of performance check.
Test equipment:_______, Model:_______, S/N:_______, Calibration Due:_______
Test equipment:_______, Model:_______, S/N_______, Calibration Due:_______
Test equipment:_______, Model:_______, S/N:_______, Calibration Due:_______
Test equipment:_______, Model:_______, S/N:_______, Calibration Due:_______
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PC-2
PC-3
BLANK PAGE
011-211-02E
02.28.2020
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PC-3
You might also like
- DelWorks DR Console Version 3.0 - Quick Reference GuideNo ratings yetDelWorks DR Console Version 3.0 - Quick Reference Guide15 pages
- PDF 11 Dynarad HF 110a Service Manualpdf - CompressNo ratings yetPDF 11 Dynarad HF 110a Service Manualpdf - Compress41 pages
- System Alignment: Service Periodic Maintenance Schematics Illustrated Parts Installation100% (1)System Alignment: Service Periodic Maintenance Schematics Illustrated Parts Installation26 pages
- Operation Manual D EVO LL Detector UnitNo ratings yetOperation Manual D EVO LL Detector Unit52 pages
- 09 DIRA Software - Administrator's Guide - InstallationNo ratings yet09 DIRA Software - Administrator's Guide - Installation16 pages
- Syngo - Plaza: Software Version VA20B and Higher Operator and Administrator Manual - Addendum100% (2)Syngo - Plaza: Software Version VA20B and Higher Operator and Administrator Manual - Addendum87 pages
- DICOM Conformance Statement MultiDiagnost Eleva FD R6.1100% (3)DICOM Conformance Statement MultiDiagnost Eleva FD R6.1115 pages
- Stereotaxy - Operator Manual - UM - 5262169-8-1EN - 3No ratings yetStereotaxy - Operator Manual - UM - 5262169-8-1EN - 3210 pages
- Siemens Siremobil 3 - Service Manual PDFNo ratings yetSiemens Siremobil 3 - Service Manual PDF257 pages
- Fujifilm CR-IR 357 Service Parts Service ManualNo ratings yetFujifilm CR-IR 357 Service Parts Service Manual64 pages
- Artwork and Signature File For: MAN-00799, "Manual, Selenia AEC Calibration"No ratings yetArtwork and Signature File For: MAN-00799, "Manual, Selenia AEC Calibration"12 pages
- NL1067 Introduction of SSD-3500SX With LCD MonitorNo ratings yetNL1067 Introduction of SSD-3500SX With LCD Monitor3 pages
- DD+DIS110.09E - Installation Instructions Digitizer - Software - C25 - 3102No ratings yetDD+DIS110.09E - Installation Instructions Digitizer - Software - C25 - 310223 pages
- (SIGNERS) SCS User Manual - 02. How To Use SCS& Gram Viewer (VET)No ratings yet(SIGNERS) SCS User Manual - 02. How To Use SCS& Gram Viewer (VET)50 pages
- Konica Minolta Drypro Model 793 Service Manual PDFNo ratings yetKonica Minolta Drypro Model 793 Service Manual PDF582 pages
- HF-110A and HF-110AM: Operator I Installation I Service ManualNo ratings yetHF-110A and HF-110AM: Operator I Installation I Service Manual41 pages
- Agfa Drystar 5300 - Software Paches PDFNo ratings yetAgfa Drystar 5300 - Software Paches PDF18 pages
- 2X-SS22-ROW04 - Licence Server V1.5 RequirementsNo ratings yet2X-SS22-ROW04 - Licence Server V1.5 Requirements6 pages
- sm782 Cs 9300 Family Cephalometric Modality Service Guide Ed02 enNo ratings yetsm782 Cs 9300 Family Cephalometric Modality Service Guide Ed02 en38 pages
- Let's Start With The PRIMA: A Solution That Only A Pioneer Can OfferNo ratings yetLet's Start With The PRIMA: A Solution That Only A Pioneer Can Offer2 pages
- Fujifilm-FCR Profect CS Clearview-Service Manual100% (1)Fujifilm-FCR Profect CS Clearview-Service Manual1,364 pages
- G11 B-Thal Chromatogram Interpretation Ver-4.2No ratings yetG11 B-Thal Chromatogram Interpretation Ver-4.290 pages
- Olympus Bronchoscopy Accessories Quotation To ESI Pulmonogy Dept On 30-04-2025No ratings yetOlympus Bronchoscopy Accessories Quotation To ESI Pulmonogy Dept On 30-04-20251 page
- IE Datasheet Ascope 4 Broncho Large - V04 - 10912No ratings yetIE Datasheet Ascope 4 Broncho Large - V04 - 109122 pages
- Combination of HDTV and NBI Is Now Available With An LED Light Source in One DesignNo ratings yetCombination of HDTV and NBI Is Now Available With An LED Light Source in One Design2 pages
- Surgical Devices Product Catalog: Energy SolutionsNo ratings yetSurgical Devices Product Catalog: Energy Solutions27 pages
- Advanced Bronchovideoscope for ProfessionalsNo ratings yetAdvanced Bronchovideoscope for Professionals2 pages
- BF-1TQ170: Therapeutic Bronchoscope With High Image Quality and A 2.8 MM Instrument ChannelNo ratings yetBF-1TQ170: Therapeutic Bronchoscope With High Image Quality and A 2.8 MM Instrument Channel2 pages
- 1043B, 1044A, 1043A, 1044 Mobile IV StandNo ratings yet1043B, 1044A, 1043A, 1044 Mobile IV Stand2 pages
- Upload - 00083938 - 1499831786562 BOND MAXNo ratings yetUpload - 00083938 - 1499831786562 BOND MAX17 pages
- Engineering Drawings Service Proposal - 11282022No ratings yetEngineering Drawings Service Proposal - 112820222 pages
- Salesforce Application Development - Request For ProposalNo ratings yetSalesforce Application Development - Request For Proposal14 pages
- Exoskeletons Enhancing Human CapabilitiesNo ratings yetExoskeletons Enhancing Human Capabilities8 pages
- Outdoor Directional Quad-Band Antenna: ODI-065R17M18JJJ-G100% (1)Outdoor Directional Quad-Band Antenna: ODI-065R17M18JJJ-G4 pages
- LAB Inter Vlan Routing Using Layer 3 SwitchNo ratings yetLAB Inter Vlan Routing Using Layer 3 Switch9 pages
- 'Identifying Basic Hand Tools and Test Equipment: General ClassificationNo ratings yet'Identifying Basic Hand Tools and Test Equipment: General Classification15 pages
- BS en 3452-3-Penetrant Testing Reference Blocks100% (3)BS en 3452-3-Penetrant Testing Reference Blocks15 pages
- Srs - Document - For - Hotel - Management - System Md. Rabiul Islam0% (1)Srs - Document - For - Hotel - Management - System Md. Rabiul Islam27 pages
